Sidekick_Plus_Owners_Handbook_1988 Sidekick Plus Owners Handbook 1988
Sidekick_Plus_Owners_Handbook_1988 Sidekick_Plus_Owners_Handbook_1988
User Manual: Sidekick_Plus_Owners_Handbook_1988
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 484
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
SIDEKICK®
Plus
The Professional Desktop Manager
Owner's Handbook
•
BORLAND
INTERNATIONAL
SIBEIICI@ PIUS
Borland's No-Nonsense License Statement!
This software is protected by both United States copyright law and international treaty provisions. Therefore,
you must treat this software just like a book, with the following single exception. Borland International
authorizes you to make archival copies of the software for the sole purpose of backing-up our software
and protecting your investment from loss.
By saying, "just like a book," Borland means, for example, that this software may be used by any number
of people and may be freely moved from one computer location to another, so long as there is no
possibility of it being used at one location while it's being used at another. Just like a book that can't
be read by two different people in two different places at the same time, neither can the software
be used by two different people in two different places at the same time. (Unless, of course, Borland's
copyright has been violated).
LIMITED WARRANTY
With respect to the physical diskette and physical documentation enclosed herein, Borland International,
Inc. ("Borland") warrants the same to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period
of 60 days from the date of purchase. In the event of notification within the warranty period of defects
in material or workmanship, Borland will replace the defective diskette or documentation. If you need
to return a product, call the Borland Customer Service Department to obtain a return authorization
number. The remedy for breach of this warranty shall be limited to replacement and shall not encompass
any other damages, including but not Ii mited to loss of profit, and special, incidental, consequential. or
other similar claims.
Borland International, Inc. specifically disclaims all other warranties, expressed or implied, including but
. not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with respect
to defects in the diskette and documentation, and the program license granted herein in particular, and
without limiting operation of the program license with respect to any particular application, use, or
purpose. In no event shall Borland be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage,
including but not limited to special, incidental, consequential or other damages.
GOVERNING LAW
This statement shall be construed, interpreted, and governed by the laws of the state of California.
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
987654321
SIDEKICK PLUS@
Owner's Handbook
This manual was produced in its entirety with
Sprint:e The Professional Word Processor,
available from Borland.
INTERNATIONAL
Borland International
4585 Scotts Valley Drive
Scotts Valley. CA 95066
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Borland International, Inc. or Borland/Analytica. Inc. Other brand and product
names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Copyright©1988 Borland International.
Copyright ©1988
All rights reseNed
Printed in the U.S.A.
1098765432
Table of Contents
Introduction
1
A Note to SideKick Users ........................................
How to Use this Manual ........................................
Typography .....................................................
The Distribution Disks and Copy Protection .........................
Minimum System Requirements ...................................
How to Contact Borland ..........................................
Let's Get Going! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
2
2
4
4
4
5
7
Part 1 Introduction to SideKick Plus
Chapter 1 Getting Started
11
Distribution Disk Files ...........................................
Files Needed to Run SideKick Plus ................................
Installing SideKick Plus on Your Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Loading SideKick Plus ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Using SideKick Plus with Other Resident Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
A Note on Directories and Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ..
11
14
14
15
16
16
Chapter 2 A Quick Ride with SideKick Plus
17
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
24
25
25
28
28
29
29
30
Activating SideKick Plus .........................................
The Help System .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The SideKick Plus Menu System ..................................
A Note on Keys .................................................
The Default SideKick Plus Function Keys . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ..
Activating a SideKick Plus Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ..
Exiting an Application ..................................... . . . . ..
A Quicker Way In and Out .......................................
Reactivating an Application ......................................
The Services Menu ..............................................
Window Control ...............................................
Color ........................................................
Changing the Shortcuts ..........................................
How to Remove SideKick Plus from Memory .......................
Review ........................................................
Chapter 3 Getting to Know the Applications
31
The Copy and Paste Functions .................................... 31
Copying from the Screen to the Clipboard ........................ 32
Pasting from the Clipboard to the Notepad .......................
Quick-Pasting to the Underlying Application .....................
The File Manager ...............................................
The File Manager Window .....................................
Activating the File Manager within an Application ................
The Directory Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Viewing a File ................................................
Copying Several Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Review ......................................................
The Notepad ...................................................
Activating the Notepad ........................................
Entering Text .................................................
Moving the Cursor ............................................
Deleting Mistakes .............................................
Insert And Overwrite Modes ...................................
Reformatting the Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Saving and Loading a Note .....................................
Printing the Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Review ......................................................
Outlook: The Outline Processor ...................................
Activating Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Entering Text .................................................
Moving the Cursor ............................................
Deleting Mistakes .............................................
Saving and Loading an Outline .................................
Expanding and Contracting the Outline ..........................
Moving Headlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Attached Notes ...............................................
Printing the Outline ...........................................
Review ......................................................
The Phonebook .................................................
Entering Data into a Form .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Finding Data in the Phonebook .................................
Phoning Someone with the Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Adding an Attached Note ......................................
Printing the Current Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Review ......................................................
The Time Planner ...............................................
Changing the Date ............................................
Opening the Appointment Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Entering Appointments ........................................
Setting an Alarm ..............................................
The Schedule Window ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Stopping the Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
ii
32
33
33
34
36
37
37
38
39
40
40
42
42
43
43
43
44
44
44
45
46
47
47
48
48
48
50
51
51
51
52
52
54
55
55
55
55
56
57
57
58
59
60
61
Review ......................................................
The Business Calculator ..........................................
Entering Numbers into the Calculator ............................
Simple Calculations ............................ ,...............
The Tape .....................................................
Using the Repeat and Constant Facilities .........................
The Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Review ......................................................
61
61
62
63
64
64
65
66
Chapter 4 A Tutorial
67
67
67
68
69
72
74
75
75
76
77
78
78
81
SideKick Plus in the Office. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Taking Messages with the Notepad ..............................
Rescheduling a Meeting with the Time Planner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Sending Electronic Mail with the Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Writing a Report with Outlook: The Outline Processor .............
Review ......................................................
SideKick Plus for Programming (Advanced) ........................
Finding an ASCII Character or Control Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Performing Calculations .......................................
Dumping Files and Changing File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Using the Phonebook as a Communications Terminal ..............
Writing a Program with Outlook: The Outline Processor. . . . . . . . . . ..
Review ......................................................
Chapter 5 Copying, Pasting, and the Clipboard
The Clipboard ..................................................
Copying to the Clipboard ........................................
Pasting from the Clipboard .......................................
Quick Paste ....................................................
The Setup Clipboard Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
83
83
84
86
86
86
Part 2 Reference Guide to the Applications
91
Chapter 6 The File Manager
Activating the File Manager .. '.................................... 91
The Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 93
The Function Keys .............................................. 94
Finding a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 95
Checking the Directories on Your Disk ............................. 96
Sorting the Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 97
Searching Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 97
Marking Files and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 98
File and Directory Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 99
Viewing ..................................................... 99
Printing ..................................................... 100
iii
Copying, Moving, Renaming, and Deleting ......................
Creating a Directory .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Changing the File Attributes ...................................
Formatting a Floppy Disk .......................................
Saving the Settings .............................................
Copying and Pasting ...........................................
101
102
102
103
104
104
Chapter 7 The Notepad
107
107
108
110
111
112
113
114
115
115
117
118
119
119
120
122
123
125
126
Activating the Notepad .........................................
The Selection Window ..........................................
The Notepad Window ..........................................
The Notepad Function Keys .....................................
Loading and Saving Notes .......................................
Simple Cursor Movement .......................................
Extended Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Using Markers to Move the Cursor ...............................
Insertion Commands ...........................................
Deletion Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Searching and Replacing Text .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Block Commands ..............................................
Marking a Block of Text .......................................
Manipulating Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Reformatting the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Options Commands ........................................
The Dot Commands ............................................
Copying and Pasting ...........................................
Chapter 8 Outlook: The Outline Processor
Activating Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Outline Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Outlook Window and Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Headline Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Outlook Function Keys .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Loading and Saving Outlines ....................................
Simple Cursor Movement .......................................
Extended Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Insertion Commands ...........................................
Deletion Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Searching and Replacing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Headline Commands .......................................
Commands that Work on Several Headlines .......................
Marking a Block of Headlines ..................................
Copying, Transferring, Deleting, and Sorting a Block ..............
Reading Text from Other Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
iv
127
127
128
129
131
131
132
133
134
135
138
138
140
141
141
142
144
Options for Converting a Text File into an Outline ................
Sending Outlines to Other Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Options Write Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ..
Printing an Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Changing the Headings and Footings ...........................
Producing a Table of Contents .................................
Producing a Tree or Organizational Chart .........................
Producing Numbered Headlines .................................
Global Numbering of Headlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Local Numbering of Headlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Changing the Default File Names
and Options ...................................................
Storing the Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Copying and Pasting ...........................................
Chapter 9 The Phonebook
Activating the Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Summary Window .........................................
The Summary Window's Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Entering Data using the Address Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Entering Data ................................................
Form Editor Commands ......................................
Data Entry Commands in the Summary Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Finding an Entry in the Phonebook . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . . ...
The Cursor Keys .............................................
The Index ...................................................
The Search Command ........................................
Printing from the Phonebook ....................................
Saving Phonebook Settings ......................................
The Glossary ..................................................
Entering Text into the Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Commands Within the Glossary. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . ..
The Glossary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Copying and Pasting ...........................................
Advanced: Phonebook Communications ..........................
Setting Up for Voice Calls .....................................
Dialing from the Summary Window ............................
Quick-Dial: Dialing from the Screen ............................
Phoning Another Computer .....................................
Setting Up for Data Calls ......................................
Simple Communications Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Complex Communications Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Communications Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Communications Window Function Keys
v
144
145
145
146
147
148
149
151
151
152
153
154
154
155
156
156
158
158
159
160
161
162
162
162
163
163
165
165
167
167
168
169
171
171
172
172
174
175
175
176
178
and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Editing and Recording the Dialogue ..........................
Receiving and Sending Files .................................
Changing Parameters and Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Wordwrap and Borders .....................................
Automating Communications with
Other Computers ..............................................
Learning the Script ...........................................
Entering and Executing the Script ..............................
Controlling the Script with Statements ..........................
A Simple Script ..............................................
Glossary Substitutions in Scripts ...............................
Time in Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
File Transfer by Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
An Example Script: MCIMAIL .................................
The Phonebook Log File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Background Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Background Communications without a Script .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Background Communications with a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Copy and Paste in the Communications Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
182
183
183
184
185
186
187
187
188
189
190
190
191
191
Chapter 10 Time Planner
The Calendar Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Using the Cursor Keys to Change the Date .......................
Attaching a Daily Agenda .....................................
Printing the Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Appointment Book .........................................
The Appointment Book Symbols ...............................
Moving around the Appointment Book .........................
Entering Appointments and Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Repeating Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Deleting Appointments .......................................
Transferring and Copying Appointments ........................
Common Appointments and Local-Area Networks ...............
Alarms .....................................................
Searching the Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Finding a Vacant Time Slot ..................................
Repeating and Clearing the Search Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Printing the Appointments ....................................
Changing Your View of the Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Schedule Window ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Using the Cursor Keys to Change the Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Opening the Appointment Book. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . ..
Attaching a Daily Agenda .....................................
193
193
195
196
196
198
200
201
201
204
205
206
206
207
210
211
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
vi
179
179
180
181
181
Printing the Schedule Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 217
Changing Your View of the Schedule Window ................... 217
Copying and Pasting ........................................... 218
Chapter 11 The Calculators
General Features and Operations .................................
The Electronic Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Some Basic Keys .............................................
Using the Calculator's Memory ................................
The Business Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Simple Calculations ..........................................
Using the Repeat and Constant Facilities ........................
Percentages .................................................
Using Variables Instead of the Memory .........................
Financial Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Compounding Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Future Value ..............................................
Number of Periods .........................................
Payment ..................................................
Present Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....
Rate ......................................................
Changing the Main Display Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Scientific Calculator .........................................
Some Basic Keys .............................................
Basic Calculations ...................................... . . . . . . ..
Using the Repeat and Constant Facilities ........................
Percentages .................................................
Using Variables ..............................................
Using the Mathematical Functions ..............................
Absolute Value ............................................
Antilogarithm .............................................
Common Logarithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Cosine ....................................................
Div .......................................................
Exponential eX .............................................
Fractional Part ................................... . . . . . . . . ..
Integer Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Inverse Cosine .............................................
Inverse Sine ...............................................
Inverse Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Modulus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Natural Logarithm .........................................
Round Value .....................................
Sine ......................................................
<
vii
•
•
•
•
•
•
••
219
219
220
222
223
226
226
227
228
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
238
238
238
239
240
240
241
241
241
242
242
243
243
243
244
244
245
245
246
246
246
247
Square ....................................................
Square Root ...............................................
Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Trigonometric Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Using the Statistical Functions .................................
Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Largest Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Minimum Value ...........................................
Population Standard Deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Sum of All the Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Sum of the Squares of the Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Variance ..................................................
Changing the Form of the Main Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Programmer Calculator .....................................
Some Basic Keys .............................................
Basic Calculations ............................................
Using the Repeat and Constant Facilities .........•..............
Changing the Base for the Calculation ...........................
The Programmer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
And ......................................................
Change Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Div .......................................................
Modulus ..................................................
Not .......................................................
Or ........................................................
Xor .......................................................
Using Variables ...............................................
Display and Setup-Saving Options .............................
The Formula Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Some Basic Keys .............................................
Simple Calculations ..........................................
Using Hexadecimal and Binary Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Formula Functions .......................................
Absolute Value ............................................
And ......................................................
Antilogarithm .............................................
Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Common Logarithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Compounding Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Cosine ....................................................
Div .......................................................
Exponential eX .............................................
Fractional Part .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Future Value ..............................................
viii
247
248
248
249
250
250
250
251
251
252
253
254
255
257
257
257
258
259
259
260
260
261
261
261
262
262
264
264
267
267
268
269
270
270
270
271
271
272
272
273
273
274
274
275
Integer Part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Inverse Cosine .............................................
Inverse Sine ...............................................
Inverse Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Modulus ..................................................
Natural Logarithm .........................................
NEG ......................................................
Not .......................................................
Number of Periods .........................................
Or ........................................................
Payment ..................................................
Permutations ..............................................
Rate ......................................................
Round Value ..............................................
Sine ......................................................
Square ....................................................
Square Root ...............................................
Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Trigonometric unit .........................................
Value .....................................................
Xor .......................................................
Using the Statistical Functions .................................
Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Largest Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Minimum Value ...........................................
Population Standard Deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Sum of All the Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Sum of the Squares of the Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Variance ..................................................
Using Variables ..............................................
Storing Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Changing the Form of the Display ...................... . . . . . . ..
Copying and Pasting ...........................................
275
276
276
277
277
278
278
278
279
279
280
280
281
281
282
282
283
283
284
284
285
285
285
286
286
287
287
288
289
289
289
290
291
Chapter 12 The ASCII Table
293
Activating the ASCII Table and
Finding a Character ............................................
Scrolling the ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Finding a Character by Letter .......................... . . . . . . ..
Finding a Character by Number . .. .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
The Paste Buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Paste Options ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Saving the Settings .............................................
Copying and Pasting ...........................................
293
294
294
295
295
296
297
297
ix
Part 3 Customizins SideKick Plus (Advanced)
Chapter 13 Changing the Default Setup from the Services
Menu
Changing the Date and Time Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Changing the Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Exit Conditions ................................................
Changing the Line-Editor Shortcuts. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . ..
Saving and Transferring
SideKick Plus Setups ...........................................
301
301
302
304
305
306
Chapter 14 Changing the Menus, Shortcuts, and Function Keys 309
The Basics of the Menu System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The (f]2l Menus ...............................................
The Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Function Keys ...........................................
Local versus Global Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Changing the Function Keys . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . ..
Changing the Shortcut Keys .....................................
Changing the Menu Headers and Text ............................
Moving Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Creating a New Menu Level .....................................
Saving the Menu System Permanently ............................
310
310
311
311
312
313
314
314
315
315
316
Chapter 15 Designing Your Own SideKick Plus
317
317
318
320
321
321
323
323
324
324
325
325
326
328
Using INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Design ....................................................
Fine Tuning Memory For Peak Performance .....................
Building Your New SideKick Plus ..............................
Changing the Screen Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Changing the Activation Keys ...................................
The Transfer Menu .............................................
Version Numbers ..............................................
Updating Your Customized SideKick Plus .........................
The Status Line Colors ..........................................
The Printer Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Printer Setup Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Module Manager (Advanced) ................................
Chapter 16 Changing SideKick Plus from DOS
SideKick Plus, Swapping, and Memory ...........................
Checking Memory Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Changing Memory Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Using SKBAT with Batch Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Loading a Non-Resident Version .................................
x
331
332
333
333
334
334
Unloading SideKick Plus from DOS ..............................
Shhh! Quiet SideKick Plus Activation .............................
Loading SideKick Plus over Programs that Grab the Keyboard .......
Switching Off the Function-Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Changing the Screen Mode ......................................
335
335
335
336
336
Appendix A Conversion Tables
Linear Measures ...............................................
Volume Measures ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Other Metric to Imperial Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Physical Constants .............................................
337
337
338
338
339
Appendix B The Cursor-Key Diamond
341
Appendix C A DOS Primer
What Is DOS? ..................................................
How to Load a Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Directories ....................................................
Subdirectories .................................................
Where Am I? The $P $G Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The AUTOEXEC.BAT File .......................................
Changing Directories ...........................................
343
343
344
345
346
347
347
349
Appendix D Using SideKick Plus on Networks
Some Basic Considerations ......................................
The File Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Sharing Notepad and Outlook Files ...............................
The Phonebook ................................................
The Time Planner ..............................................
351
351
352
352
353
353
Appendix E A Communications Primer
Uses for Computer Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Modems ......................................................
The Port ......................................................
Bits and Baud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Some Communications Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Sending Files via Your Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
355
355
356
356
357
358
359
Appendix F The Script Language Commands
The Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Typography ...................................................
ALARM ..................................................
ASSIGNMENT (:=) ................................•..•.•..•
BEEP ......................................................
CASE .....................................................
CAPTURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
361
361
363
364
364
365
365
366
xi
DELAy ...................................................
DISCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
END CAPTURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
IF ........................................................
LOG ......................................................
MATCH ...................................................
OK Boolean ................................................
Predefined Constants .......................................
PRINT ....................................................
PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
RECEIVE .................................................
REPEAT ..................................................
RESTART .................................................
SCREEN ..................................................
SELECT ...................................................
SUSPEND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
TIMEOUTFACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
TIMEOUTUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
TRANSMIT ...............................................
UNTIL ....................................................
WAIT .....................................................
WRITE ....................................................
Appendix G SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
Loading SideKick Plus and Activating Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Disk Errors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Printer Errors and Messages .....................................
The File Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Notepad ..................................................
Outlook: The Outline Processor ..................................
The Phonebook and Script. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
The Phonebook ............................................
The Script .................................................
The Time Planner ..............................................
The Calculators ................................................
The ASCII Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ..
Menu System Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Appendix H Help!
Activating SideKick Plus ........................................
Screens .......................................................
The File Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
TheNotepad ..................................................
Outlook: The Outline Processor ..................................
xii
367
367
368
369
369
370
370
371
372
372
373
374
374
375
376
377
377
378
378
379
379
379
381
381
384
385
386
391
393
396
396
401
407
408
411
411
413
413
416
416
417
418
ThePhonebook ................................................
The Calculators ................................................
The Time Planner ..............................................
The ASCII Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Copy and Paste ................................................
418
419
419
420
420
Glossary
421
Index
424
xiii
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
N
T
R
o
D
u
c
T
o
N
Borland originally designed SideKick-the first memory-resident desktop
organizer-to keep desks free of the unruly clutter of notepads, hand
calculators, and telephone directories.
SideKick Plus leaps far beyond that. While remaining as fast and easy to
use as the original SideKick, SideKick Plus expands into areas not
previously addressed by a single program:
• Up to 9 separate text editors (Notepads), with a capacity of up to 11,000
words (54,000 bytes) each.
• Up to 9 separate text outliners with built-in text editors .
• Telephone-number database with automatic dialer and built-in data
communications, with background and Script capabilities.
• Time Planner with calendars, appOintment books, schedule windows,
alarms, and attached agenda.
• Four different calculators, all with a tape printout option.
• Powerful cut-and-paste integration with other programs.
• Extended DOS file and directory manipulation.
• Advanced programming aids.
You can tailor SideKick Plus's features to suit your preferences. If you don't
need an application, simply delete it. If you don't like a menu, change it.
Since it's memory resident, SideKick Plus is instantly accessible even while
you are running other programs. To conserve memory, you also have the
option of not making your SideKick Plus memory resident. With full
support for the new memory-expansion boards, SideKick Plus breaks
through the old 640K barrier and leaves your precious main memory
largely free for other uses.
Introduction
A Note to SideKick Users
If you're a SideKick user, you might want to quickly read the enclosed
booklet, SideKick Plus for SideKick Users. It summarizes SideKick Plus's new
features and points out differences.
How to Use this Manual
SideKick Plus is simple to use and gives you detailed help information
whenever you press [D. However, to get the most out of SideKick Plus, we
suggest that you read at least chapters 1,2, and 3: They take you on a quick
tour of SideKick Plus and its applications.
While the first three chapters are introductory, chapters 5 through 16 provide comprehensive descriptions of all SideKick Plus commands, features,
and concepts. Examples of these features are shown and explained. Use
these chapters as references when you start exploring SideKick Plus on
your own.
In addition, a quick-reference guide is included in your distribution
package. It lists all the menu commands and what you press (function and/
or control keys) to implement them.
SideKick Plus is versatile enough for both novice and power users. When
we introduce advanced material that you don't need to know unless you
want to change the default setup or plan to program with SideKick Plus,
we note it as "Advanced." Feel free to skip over these features.
Here's a breakdown of the manual:
Let's Get Going is for experienced computer users who want to begin
using SideKick Plus immediately. It shows you how to load and activate
SideKick Plus.
Part I - Introduction to SideKick Plus
Chapter 1 describes all the files on your distribution disk. It then tells you
how to get SideKick Plus up and running.
Chapter 2 walks you through the basics of SideKick Plus: activating
SideKick Plus, using the menu system, activating applications, moving
windows, recoloring windows, and changing the function keys.
Chapter 3 introduces you to each of the applications and the copy (import)
and paste (export) functions.
Chapter 4 is an advanced tutorial that suggests ways to use SideKick Plus
in the office or for programming.
2
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Chapter 5 provides detailed information about the Clipboard and the Copy
and Paste functions.
Part II - Reference Guide to the Applications
Chapters 6 through 12 provide detailed information about the File
Manager, the Notepad, Outlook: The Outline Processor, the Phonebook, the
Time Planner, the Calculators, and the ASCII Table.
Part III - Customizing SideKick Plus
Chapter 13 tells you how to set and save SideKick Plus global defaults to
suit your preferences.
Chapter 14 provides details on how to change the menu system and
function keys.
Chapter 15 describes how to install and update a customized version of
SideKick Plus.
Chapter 16 explains SideKick Plus's use of memory and shows the different
ways you can set options and activate them from the DOS prompt.
Appendices
Appendix A contains some common conversion tables and mathematical
formulas.
Appendix B is a qUick guide to keys you can use to move the cursor
around in SideKick Plus.
Appendix C discusses basic DOS concepts, such as directories and the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
Appendix D discusses how to use SideKick Plus on a local-area network.
Appendix E explains basic communications concepts, such as modems,
serial ports, and file transmission.
Appendix F is a reference to the Phonebook's Script language.
Appendix G lists and explains SideKick Plus's error and other messages.
Appendix H answers the most frequently asked questions about SideKick
Plus.
Glossary defines some of the terms used in this manual.
Introduction
3
Typography
All typefaces used in this manual were produced by Borland's
Sprint: The Professional Word Processor.
This represents keys on the computer keyboard, such as
1+-11.
Monospace
Program code and anything you need to type in is in
typewriter-like type.
Italics
Italics emphasize certain concepts and introduce terms
that may be unfamiliar.
Boldface
The first letters of menu options are shown in boldface
type to show that you can type in the letter to call up the
menu. Boldface type within menu options is for your
convenience only.
This That The
Menu strings are shown this way, with the first word of
each menu command in boldface.
The Distribution Disks and Copy Protection
Your distribution disks contain the components that make up the main
SideKick Plus program and several other files. See page 11 in Chapter 1 for
a description of these files.
SideKick Plus is not copy protected. Borland's no-nonsense license
statement allows you to use your copy of SideKick Plus as if it were a book.
It is not licensed to a single person, nor is it tied to one particular computer.
The only restriction on using SideKick Plus is that it must not be used by
different people at the same time, just as one book can't be read by two people
simultaneously. Of course, giving copies of SideKick Plus to others violates
Borland's copyright.
Be sure to sign and return the license statement, so you can take advantage
of Borland's Technical Support services.
Minimum System Requirements
To use SideKick Plus, you must have the following:
• an IBM PC or compatible
4
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
• PC-DOS or MS-DOS operating system, version 2.0 or later
• 384K RAM internal memory
• a hard-disk drive
When you first install SideKick Plus, you must have at least 1.5 MBytes of
free memory on your disk. This is because SideKick Plus's INSTALL
program needs room to maneuver. It copies several large library files (files
containing smaller files) into your disk memory, and then merges these files
in a single .BIN file.
How to Contact Borland
The best way to contact Borland is to log on to Borland's Forum on
CompuServe. Type GO BORAPP from the main CompuServe menu and follow
the prompts. Leave your questions or comments there for the support staff
to process.
You can also detail your comments in a letter to
Technical Support Department
4585 Scotts Valley Drive
P. O. Box 660001
Scotts Valley, CA 95066-0001
United States
European users can direct their comments to
Technical Support Department
Borland International (U.K.) Ltd.
8 Pavilions
Ruscombe Business Park
Twyford, Berkshire RGIO 9NN
United Kingdom
As a last resort, you can telephone the Technical Support Department. You
must be a registered SideKick Plus owner to receive telephone support, so
be sure to send in your license agreement.
Whichever way you contact Technical Support, please include the
following information in your letter or have it handy before you call:
•
•
•
•
product name, serial number, and version number
computer make and model number
operating system and version number
other resident programs on your system
Introduction
5
6
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Let's Get Going!
Impatient to start using SideKick Plus? Already an experienced computer
user? The following steps will get you going in no time. And you can
always press [IJ any time you need help.
1. Insert the Install 1 SideKick Plus disk into your A drive.
2. Type A: I
Figure 1.1: starting SideKick Plus
SideKick Plus is now waiting in the wings to be summoned whenever you
need it.
Before you do anything else, type README at the DOS prompt. This· file
notifies you of any updates made to the program after this manual was
printed.
Chapter 7, Getting Started
15
Using SideKick Plus with Other Resident
Programs
SideKick Plus is a resident program by default. Once loaded into memory,
SideKick Plus stays there until you switch the computer off. This means it
is available to you even while you run other programs, such as word
processors and spreadsheets.
You may have other resident programs on your computer, such as
SuperKey, Turbo Lightning, or a print spooler. It is essential that you load
resident programs in the following order:
• Load any non-Borland resident programs first (print spoolers, RAM
disks, networks, and so on).
• If you have it, load SuperKey.
• If you have it, load Turbo Lightning.
• If you have it, load SideKick.
• Finally, load SideKick Plus.
Remember: You must load SideKick Plus last. This is so you can unload
SideKick Plus easily, if you need to, and change the amount of memory you
give it.
A Note on Directories and Subdirectories
If you use a tree-structured directory and an earlier DOS version than 3.0, it
is important that you change to the directory where you keep SideKick Plus
.EXE and .HLP files before you start SideKick Plus. This is because SideKick
Plus must know where to find these files when you save some SideKick
Plus options or use the on-line Help system. (For more on DOS directories,
see Appendix C, "A DOS Primer.")
Now, spend some time with Chapter 2, and you'll get the most out of your
SideKick Plus.
16
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
p
A
T
E
R
2
A Quick Ride with SideKick Plus
This chapter explains SideKick Plus's general structure and gives you
enough information on each application to get you started. You'll learn
about the Help system, the menus and function keys, opening and exiting
applications, window control, and shortcuts.
Activating SideKick Plus
To activate SideKick Plus, press
12ill~
That is, hold down I2ill while you press ~. Press these keys at any time
while your computer is running to call up SideKick Plus. Your hard disk
light flashes on, as SideKick Plus swaps (moves) applications in and out of
memory, and the main menu appears. This may take a few seconds.
If you find these keys inconvenient, you can use the alternative:
(lliilll Rlght~1
(Press both (QJ keys simultaneously).
If you don't like either method, use the installation program (see Chapter
15) to set up your own. We'll use
12ill~
throughout this manual.
When you activate SideKick Plus, the main menu appears on the screen:
Chapter 2, A Quick Ride with SideKick Plus
17
C:\SKP
>
F SIDEKICK PLUS =
I"Pi§"m5Qi
Notepad
Outlook
Phonebook
TiMe Planner
Calculator
ASCII Table
Seruices
Fi Help
F3
FS
F2
F4
FG Suitch
F8
U-I'bue
ShHt-Es:c-Exit All
Shortcut Al tF
ZOOM
F7
F9
FiB
Es;c-Exit
Figure 2.1: SideKick Plus's Main Screen
Two lines at the bottom of your screen describe what each function key
does. A third line displays messages that change according to the
application you're in. These include any shortcuts-keys you can press to
activate a command.
The Help System
Chapters 5 to 16 contain everything you need to know about SideKick Plus.
Appendix H, "Help!," answers the most common questions about it. But
there's an easier way to resolve minor questions: the SideKick Plus Help
system.
Whenever you need a little assistance, just press lID and you get a brief
explanation of the command or feature you are using. Each SideKick Plus
application (such as the Notepad, Calculator, or ASCII Table) has its own
set of Help screens.
Some Help screens have lookup words that relate to another Help screen.
Move to the highlighted lookup word with the cursor keys and press 1+-'1.
The second Help screen will open.
In some cases, when you press lID, you'll get that application's main screen.
This is because the option you're requesting Help on is an intermediary
command, a command that is a gateway to other commands. Press I +-'1 to
bring up the next menu level under that command and press lID at the
more specific command.
18
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
When using multi-page screens, use ~ and ~ to view the previous or
next screen. You must keep the SKPLUS.HLP file in the same drive and
directory it was in when you loaded SideKick Plus.
Press ~ to exit from the SideKick Plus Help system.
The SideKick Plus Menu System
When you press l£!illlm, the SideKick Plus main menu pops up on your
screen. This menu lists the applications available in your version of
SideKick Plus. You can add or delete applications with INSTALL (see
Chapter 15), but be aware of your system's memory limitations.
One innovative feature of SideKick Plus is that it has dynamic or interactive
menus. This means that the contents of a menu show only the commands
that are available. For example, look at the two Notepad menus in the
following figure.
Line 7 Col 1
One innouiltiue feilture of SideKick Plus is thilt it hilS d!jllil/llic
interilCtiue Menus:. This MeilDS thilt the contents of il Menu sholJ
only the co/ll/llilnds thilt ilre iluilililble.
0.----------,
File
Refor'lllilt
Seilrch
BIOCk
IJhere other products sholJ unilvilililble Menu CO/ll/llilndS
type. SideKick Plus reMOVes theM froM uielJ illtogeth
~
~
Print
"
I:lma_
Ins:ert
Delete
Go to
Milrker
Options
C:~KP~EC()N). TXT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line G Col G
One innouiltiue feilture of SideKick Plus is thilt it hilS d!jllil/llic 0 . . - - - - - - ,
interilCtiue Menus:. This Meilns: thilt the contents of il Menu sholJ
File
Refor'lllilt
only the CO/ll/llilnds thilt ilre iluilililble.
Block
Seilrch
':Ima_
Insert
Delete
Go to
Milrker
Options
UZ • Insert Indent Milrgin G5
Figure 2.2: A Dynamic Menu
The first window file doesn't contain any marked blocks. Therefore, the
Block menu has only two options: Mark and Print. The second window,
however, does show a marked block. Its Block menu thus displays all the
Chapter 2, A Quick Ride with SideKick Plus
19
commands you can perform on blocks: Mark, Copy, Transfer, Delete, Write
to File, Print, and Sort.
Where other products show unavailable menu commands in "dimmed"
type, SideKick Plus removes them from view altogether.
Each application has its own menu system, accessed through (W. Some
newer keyboards have two additional functions keys, [[I and CWo Throughout this manual, we use (W to mean any of the three menu keys. You press
ill9, [[I, or CW to bring up an application's main menu.
Note: When we describe commands off the main menu, we don't specify
that you need to press (W to access them. You'll see the string File Save, for
example, to mean "press (W in the Notepad, select File, and select Save in
the File menu."
There are four ways to activate a menu command:
• Use (!J, (II, IHomel, and ~ to move the menu bar to the menu command
you want, then press I+-II.
• Type the first letter of the command.
• Press the function key associated with the command. These are displayed
at the bottom of the screen, and you can redefine them. (See the next
section.)
• Press the one- or two-key shortcut associated with the command, also
displayed at the bottom of the screen. If you forget the second keystroke,
don't worry: SideKick Plus gives you a Shortcuts menu after a couple of
seconds.
The Quick Reference Guide lists all these command shortcuts. They are also
shown beside each command definition in this manual. (They are mostly
the same as those in SideKick and Turbo Pascal.) Like the function keys,
you can define them yourself.
Throughout this manual, we capitalize and boldface the first letter of each
command, such as File Copy. This is to help you remember that you can
type those initials to implement the command-in this case, ill and {g.
A Note on Keys
This manual uses the term cursor keys to mean the set of keys that affect the
cursor's position on the screen. These keys are IHomel, m3, IPgUpl, IPgDnl, tIl, llJ,
EJ, and 6.
What about compound-key combinations? You can enter menu commands
that use (£ill with initials-such as f£E!JlID~-in two ways: You can press (£ill,
20
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
keep it pressed down, and press Wand WJ; or, you can press i£ill and W,
release them, and press WJ. In both cases, SideKick Plus implements the
same command. However, for ~ combinations, such as ~~ ~~, you
must first press ~~, release ~,and then press ~.
Most keyboards have an (!J (asterisk) key on the numeric keypad that is
paired with the IPrtScl key. On some newer keyboards, these functions have
been separated: A IPrtscl key has been added to the row of function keys, and
the (!J key remains in the numeric keypad. When we refer to (!J, we mean
this key on the numeric keypad, not the one above the number eight.
In the Outlook and File Manager sections, the plus (8) and minus «3) keys
referred to are those on the numeric keypad. They are the only ones you
can use. You can use either set of operator keys in the Calculator.
SideKick Plus also uses the center key on the numeric keypad, ~. NumLock
should not be on for this to work.
The Default SideKick 'Plus Function Keys
As distributed, the default function keys are consistent throughout the
applications. If the function doesn't exist in a specific application, then
you'll see a blank on the bottom of the screen beside the function key. You
can, of course, change the defaults.
Following are the default function keys:
[IJ
calls up the relevant Help screen.
(E]J
saves the current information to disk. If this function key does
nothing, it just means the application saves your data automatically.
(E]J
loads a new file from disk.
lEI
prints the file you have open, to either a printer, file, or window.
~
toggles between the regular and "zoom" size of the application you
are in.
llliI
switches between two or more open windows or applications.
(D
marks the beginning of a block of information.
(EID
marks the end of a block of information.
~
opens a Notepad connected to the application.
lW
pops up the application's main menu.
(!]J
also pops up the application's main menu (only on some keyboards).
Chapter 2, A Quick Ride with SideKick Plus
21
(ill]
also pops up the application's main menu (only on some keyboards).
Activating a SideKick Plus Application
Now that you know how the menu system operates,let's activate the Time
Planner using the simplest method. Use (!J to move the main menu bar to
Time Planner and press I+-II. The hard disk light comes on as SideKick Plus
gets the application, then a calendar pops up on your screen:
C: \SKP
>
= Calendilr
1II!I'illli1:i:~
!'bOOilY
Sun !'bn Tue &Jed Thu Fri Silt
25
2b
Zl
28
Z9
30
1
2
3
4
5
f>
7
8
9
lB
11
12
13
14
15
1&
17
18
19
Z0
21
ZZ
Z3tij
25
2b
Zl
Z8
Z9
1
2
3
30
31
4
5
7:43PM =
Fl Help
F3
F5 Schedule
F7
F2
F4 Print
Ff> Sui tch
F8
P!JUp/Dn-!'bnth Ctr I-P!JUp/Dn--Yeilr
Center-TodilY +-1-Open Book
F9 Note
FiB Menu
Esc-Exit
Figure 2.3: The Initial Time Planner Screen
Suppose that, while using the Time Planner, you suddenly require a
calculator. You don't need to exit the Time Planner: Just hold ~ down for a
couple of seconds and the main menu appears. Use (!J or (!J to move to
Calculator, press I+-II, and a Calculator opens to the right of the Time
Planner. You can repeat this process as often as you like, stacking any
number of SideKick Plus applications on top of each other.
22
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C:\sKP
>
C: \SKP\CALCTAPE. TXT Line
Calendar
I'tmday
r-
IIBIt~IIIiI:i:1
Sun Mon Tue \.led Thu Fri Sat
Z5
Z&
Z7
Z8
Z9
2
3
4
5
&
7
8
9
1B
11
12
13
14
15
1&
17
18
19
ZB
21
ZZ
23B
Z5
Z&
Z7
Z8
Z9
1
2
3
4
5
3B
31
30
1 BOO
= Business;
F1 Help
F3 MellI Rec
F5 ZOOM
FZ MeM Add
F4 Print
F& Suitch
Space-Clear U PgUp/Dn-Scroll +-M/%II-Operators;
=
F7 Begin Blk
F8 End Blk
+-I-Result
7: 41pM
=
F9 Tape
F1B Menu
Es;c-Exit NuMLock
Figure 2.4: Stacking SideKick Plus Applications On-Screen
There's an even easier way to get at another SideKick Plus application:
Hold ~ down while you press the first letter of the application name. For
example, to activate the Notepad, hold down ~ and press~. Unless you
hold down l31Illong enough for the main menu to pop up, you will go
directly to the Notepad selection window, leaving the other windows
underneath it on the screen.
C: \SKP\CALCTAPE. TXT Linp
- Calendar
Monday
!
I'B_IIIBI:i:~
Sun Mon Tue \.led Thu Fri Sat
Z5
2&
Z7
Z8
Z9
30
1
2
3
4
5
&
7
8
14
15
9
1B
11
12
13
1&
17
18
19
ZB
24
Z5
Z&
27
30l1li
1
2
3
Z3
UNOTES
2
3
4
5
&
7
8
9
Select Notepad
NOTESZ
NOTES3
NOTES4
NOTESS
NOTES£.
NOTES?
NOTESB
NOTES9
4
I
12: 12pM
F5 ZoOM
F1 Help
F3 MellI Rec
F& Suitch
FZ MeM Add
F4 Print
Space-Clear U PgUp/Dn-ScroU +-..I%II-Operators;
F7 Begin Blk
F8 End Blk
+-I-Resu I t
F9 Tape
F1B Menu
Es;c-Exit NuMLock
Figure 2.5: Another Example of Stacked Windows
The Notepad selection window shows you the file names associated with
up to nine separate Notepads. You can move the cursor to anyone and
press I+-' I to open the Notepad.
For now, select the first Notepad. An empty window taking up about half
of the screen opens.
Chapter 2, A Quick Ride with SideKick Plus
23
C: ,SI{P\CALCTAPE. TXT Line
============
1*1
Insert Indent Margin E.5
Fl Help
F2
+-+U-Houe
Line 1 Coli
= = = = = = = = = = = 7:54PM
F5 ZOOM
F4
FE. SlIitch
Ctrl-+-+U-Resize
F3
F7
F8
F9
FiB
Esc-Exit
Figure 2.6: A Notepad on Top of a Calculator and Time Planner
For now, don't worry about using the Notepad you just opened.
Exiting an Application
At the moment, you have three SideKick Plus applications visible on the
screen: a Notepad, Calculator, and Time Planner. They are stacked in the
order you activated them: first the Time Planner, then the Calculator, and,
finally, the Notepad. Only the one opened last is active; the rest SideKick
Plus suspends on-screen until reactivation.
You can clearly see which application is active: It has a double-line window
frame. Suspended applications have single-line frames.
Press ~ to exit the active application and return to the one underneath it
on the stack.
~
is an important key. It always exits what you are currently doing and
returns you to what you were doing immediately before. Since you have
three SideKick Plus applications on the screen, you must press ~ three
times to exit all open applications. When you exit the first application you
opened, the Time Planner, you also exit SideKick Plus. You return to the
world outside, to exactly where you were when you activated SideKick
Plus.
A Quicker Way In and Out
There is an easier way to exit SideKick Plus that is particularly useful if you
24
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
• activate a number of SideKick Plus applications
• want to return to the world outside SideKick Plus for a moment
• want to return to SideKick Plus exactly at the point where you left off,
with all selected applications still available
Simply press
[@I~.
Let's bring up three SideKick Plus applications and try this out. Press
[@Il3:ill l3:illaJ
~~
l3:il f.EJ
I~ I
Now try the quick exit from SideKick Plus. Press
[@I~.
Presto, all three applications disappear from the screen. Press [@Il3:ill again,
and you are back in SideKick Plus where you left off.
Reactivating an Application
The three SideKick Plus applications were stacked on top of each other in
their activation sequence:
1. Time Planner
2. Calculator
3. Notepad
At this point, the Notepad is active. What if you want to add some numbers
shown in the Notepad? Press l3:ill~ to bring the Calculator to the top of the
stack. This leaves the Notepad underneath it, still visible on the screen. The
stack of applications has been reshuffled and now looks like this:
1. Time Planner
2. Notepad
3. Calculator
You can also use the function key
1m to switch between windows. Try it.
The Services Menu
The SideKick Plus main menu contains a collection of global utilities under
the heading Services. This means that the commands affect the SideKick
Plus program itself, not a specific application, or can be used from any
application.
The commands available under the Services menu are
Chapter 2, A Quick Ride with SideKick Plus
25
•
•
•
•
•
•
Edit Clipboard
Window Control
Copy from
Paste from Clipboard
Quick Paste
Setup
• Memory Sizes
• Unload SideKick Plus
The following figure shows the complete Services menu tree. Note: You've
probably noticed the fold-out menus in the beginning of this manual. Menu
trees for the other applications appear in the relevant chapters.
26
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Delete
Insert Mode
Auto Delete
Character
Line
Rest of Line
Figure 2. 7: The Services Menu Tree
Chapter 2, A Quick Ride with SideKick Plus
27
Window Control
In the previous example, you brought the Calculator up on top of the
Notepad. What if the Calculator covers precisely that part of the Notepad
with the numbers you want to manipulate? Fortunately, SideKick Plus lets
you move application windows on the screen.
1. Press [ill(£) to activate the Calculator.
2. Pop up the main menu by holding [ill down a few seconds.
3. Press (ID to choose Services. The menu that appears contains services
that you can use in any SideKick Plus application, such as changing the
time and date format.
4. Press Wfor Window Control: This pops up another menu with all the
functions you can do with SideKick Plus windows.
5. Press ~ to Move and Resize the Calculator.
To adjust the Calculator, use the following keys:
• (II, m, El, and B move the calculator anywhere on the screen.
• (£E!I(II, (£E!Im, (SEllS, and (SEllB resize the calculator.
• (§J or I ~ 1return you to the main menu.
Press
~
to make the Calculator window fill the screen temporarily.
Color
You can also recolor the windows through the Window Control menu. Let's
do it with a shortcut. Press [illW for the Window Control menu. Use L!J to
move the cursor to Colors and press I ~ I. Part of the window starts
blinking: This area is the part available for recoloring. Use the following
keys to recolor:
.Wgupl and IPgDnl to select other areas of the same window for recoloring
• Sand B to change the background color
• (II and L!J to change the foreground color
.(§J to return to the application
To store new window colors and sizes for all applications, use the Services
Setup Save command.
28
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Changing the Shortcuts
What happens if you don't like the default shortcut or function key? Simply
change it with the Menu Control menu. You can open this window from
anywhere by pressing t£Ell! +-' I.
A minute ago, you recolored the Calculator window using the shortcut
Let's change the Window Color shortcut to l£.ill12l.
1EfJ~.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press 1EfJ~.
Move the cursor to Colors.
Press l£.ill! +-' 1 to redefine the shortcut.
Move to Shortcut.
Press l£.ill12l.
Press ! +-' 1 to enter the shortcut.
Press lB until you return to the application or main menu.
From now until you unload SideKick Plus or reboot your computer,
pressing l£Iill12l will recolor the window. To make this change permanent,
select Services Setup Save.
How to Remove SideKick Plus from Memory
To conclude your qUick ride, let's see how you can remove SideKick Plus
from memory. You may need to do this to free up some memory space if
you ever need to load a large program or file.
When dealing with resident programs, always observe the following rules
when making changes:
• Start at the DOS prompt.
• Remove SideKick Plus first if you have any other resident programs
loaded.
Here's how to unload SideKick Plus:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Be sure you are at the DOS prompt.
Activate SideKick Plus (if it isn't currently active) by pressing
Pop up the main menu, move to Services, and press ! +-' I.
Move to Unload SideKick Plus and press ! +-' I.
Press UJ at the prompt.
Chapter 2, A Quick Ride with SideKick Plus
l£.ill1EfJ.
29
You cannot use {2illI Homel(8, as you can in SideKick, to unload SideKick
Plus.
Review
You've come to the end of your quick ride with SideKick Plus. You've
learned to
activate and exit SideKick Plus with l£liII~ or (lliilll Righti}l
press tllI when you need help
use and change the menu system
activate applications using the main menu or the l3li/-Ietter combination
distinguish an active application from suspended ones by the look of the
window frames
• use lG to exit the current activity and return you to what you were doing
before
• move and recolor windows
• change a shortcut
• remove SideKick Plus from memory
•
•
•
•
•
Now you're ready to get to know the applications in more detail.
30
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
3
Getting to Know the Applications
This chapter introduces each of the applications in tum: the File Manager,
Notepad, Outlook, Phonebook, Time Planner, and Business Calculator. It
then acquaints you with the Clipboard and the Copy and Paste functions.
All SideKick Plus applications share the Clipboard. It's a temporary
repository for anything that you copy or move from the screen or a SideKick Plus application. You can then paste the text from the Clipboard to
another file or SideKick Plus application.
Think of SideKick Plus as a wheel. The main menu, Services menu, and
other global functions sit at the hub, while each application is a spoke. You
can add and delete spokes, depending on what you want your wagon to
carry.
The Copy and Paste Functions
Among SideKick Plus's most useful features are the Copy and Paste
functions. Using SideKick Plus, you can transfer information between
different applications. Any SideKick Plus application can also use the Copy
and Paste functions to transfer copies of text between it and other
applications.
Copy and Paste apply to all SideKick Plus applications so, like every other
general feature, they're on the Services menu.
This tutorial uses the Notepad as the example application from which to
copy text. You're probably not familiar with basic Notepad functions yet.
Don't worry: Just follow the instructions for now. The Notepad is explained
on page 40.
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
31
Copying from the Screen to the Clipboard
SideKick Plus can copy text from whatever was on the screen before you
activated it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
First, type something on the screen.
Press t£EI~ to activate SideKick Plus.
Select Services from the main menu and press I+-II or press lID.
Move to the Copy from command and press I+-II or press (g.
Move to Screen to Clipboard and press 1+-11 or press lID.
The main menu vanishes, leaving you in your previous screen with a
cursor in the top corner and a SideKick Plus message line at the bottom.
7. Using the cursor keys, position the cursor where you want to start
copying text and press (ID.
S. Move the cursor to the end of the copy area and press I +-II.
SideKick Plus copies the block to an area of SideKick Plus called the Clipboard. If you've used a Macintosh computer, the concept of a Clipboard
won't be new to you.
Pasting from the Clipboard to the Notepad
SideKick Plus temporarily keeps the captured screen in a special part of its
memory, the Clipboard. The captured screen stands ready for use until you
copy something new over it. When something new is copied into the
Clipboard, it becomes the selected block. The old information remains in
the Clipboard until it's bumped out for space considerations.
Let's move the captured text from the Clipboard into the Notepad.
1. Use the main menu (lmIDJ) to activate the Notepad.
2. Move the cursor to where you want the text.
3. Press ~ for several seconds to pop up the main menu and select the
Services menu.
4. Move to the Paste from Clipboard command and press 1+-II.
You should see the text being written into the Notepad.
That's the scenic route. Now that you understand how the menus work,
you can use shortcuts. Shortcuts are key combinations that you press to
implement a command. They are, of course, quicker and are available
anywhere, anytime-even in the middle of your underlying application.
32
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Use
• (2ill(E3 to copy a marked block from the screen to the Clipboard
• (2ill(5J to paste whatever's in the Clipboard to the application you're in.
Quick-Pasting to the Underlying Application
There's another way to quickly send something to the application
underneath: Quick Paste. For example, let's export something to DOS. (Be
sure DOS is the underlying program.)
Press ~ until you're at the DOS prompt.
Press (2ill~ to activate SideKick Plus.
Use the main menu or ~W1 to activate the Notepad.
Enter a few blank lines by pressing 1....... 1, then type something
meaningful to DOS, say, DIR.
5. Press ~ and 1EID to mark the beginning and ending of the string DIR.
6. Press ~ and use the main menu to pop up the Services menu.
7. Move to the Quick Paste command and press 1....... 1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
DOS now spews out a directory listing, because the command DIR 1~ I got
transferred from the Notepad to DOS. It is important to note that Quick
Paste moves Clipboard text to the application underneath; you can paste text
to another SideKick Plus application just as easily as to DOS.
Like the (2ill(E3/(£BJ(5J import and export functions, Quick Paste has its
own shortcut: ~(G.
We have come to the end of our short tour through the SideKick Plus Copy
and Paste functions. Remember that you can perform these functions from
anywhere, anytime.
This tutorial showed you how to
• copy from the screen to the Clipboard with (2ill(E3
• paste from the Clipboard with (2ill(5J
• use Quick Paste to move text to the underlying application with ~(G
The File Manager
Say you're in the middle of working on a spreadsheet. Robin interrupts to
ask for a copy of the financial report you did last week. Ordinarily, you'd
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
33
have to save your spreadsheet, exit from it, search around on your disk for
the report file, copy it to a floppy disk for Robin, then open the spreadsheet
and find your place in it. Too laborious.
With the File Manager, you merely
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press f£EI~ to call up SideKick Plus from within your spreadsheet.
Press ill for the File Manager
Let it find the file.
Copy the file to a floppy for Robin.
Press f£EI~ again to return to the spreadsheet exactly where you left it.
The File Manager is your disk organizer, available anywhere and anytime.
In this section, you'll learn how to use it to look at the directory of your
disk, how to activate it within any SideKick Plus application, how to
change directories, how to view a text file, and how to copy several files at
once.
The File Manager relies on DOS to do its work. If you are new to DOS or to
tree-structured directories, please read the DOS primer in Appendix C
before going on.
The File Manager Window
Use the main menu or press ~ill to activate the File Manager. You'll see
one of two File Manager windows: a wide view showing only file and
directory names, and a full view with more details about each file or
directory listed. When you first use the File Manager, the full view comes
up. Otherwise, the default window is whichever view is open when you
press Save Setup. Press I Space I to toggle between the windows.
34
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
UoIUMe Label: No Label
DOS Version 3.28
c:\SKP,.....
1.
7
I'bytes:
Us:ed
70 Files:
1. 8 I'bytes: Free on Dis:k
98 Kbytes: Harked
5 Files:
=
=
DEtI)FILE. ADR
73321
~OI'PANV • ADR
37Z82
~EXAI'I'LE.IiLS
Z9B87
ZZ89&
15747
ZZZ
&5&
M:SERVE. ADR
~BIX.ADR
~TES.TXT
PAVRAISE.OTL
SALESREP. BAI<
Z&8
Nou
Nou
Nou
Nou
Nou
Jan
Jan
Jan
Z7,1987
Z7,1987
28,1987
9&,1987
9&,1987
1&,1988
21,1988
21,1988
5:41p
A
5:47p
A
3:B4p
A
5:30p
A
2:03p
A
4:49p
A
2:ZZp
A
3:30p
A
4:24pM =
F1 Help
F5 ZoOM
F3 Dir
F4 Print
F& Switch
FZ
Space-Toggle Display
+-I-Show Directory
C: \SKP
full view
F7 Begin Blk
F8 End Blk
+ -Mark
F9 Type
F10 Menu
Esc-Exit
wide view
>
UoIUMe Label: No Label
DOS Version 3.28
C:\SKP,.....
70 Files: = 1. 7 Mbytes; Us:ed
1. 8 I'bytes: Free on Disk
o Files;
0 Bytes; Marked
=
PHONE.Lo[;
DECMOIiFlll
CHRISTIN. APP
DEtI)FILE. ADR
NOTES. TXT
PASTEST. CMD
QUERIES. JEF
NEXTDISK.00Z
COI'PANY. ADR
PAVRAISE.OTL
DEC10.CMD
HELTON.OTL
MEM0113. JEF
EXAI'I'LE.IiLS
SALESREP. BAI<
F1 Help
F3 Dir
F5 ZoOM
FZ
F4 Print
F& Switch
+-I-Show Directory
Space-Toggle Display
DEC10.JEF
MEM0112.CMD
MEM0113.PK
CSERVE.ADR
SKOH3-5A. SCR
DEC9.JEF
OUTLINE.OTL
SKMAIN.BIN
BIX.ADR
SK0H3-5B. SCR
4:ZZpM =
F7 Begin Blk
F8 End Blk
+ -Mark
F9 Type
F10 Menu
Esc-Exit
Figure 3.1: The File Manager Windows
Look at the list of names below the horizontal dividing line in either
window. Directory names are listed first, followed by file names. The top
file name is highlighted. Note: The File Manager doesn't differentiate
between files and directories. Therefore, file commands work just as well
on directories and vice versa (when applicable, of course).
Be sure the word NumLock does not appear on the right margin of the
message line. If it does, press INum Lockl to unlock the numeric keypad and
toggle on the cursor keys. Then you can use the keys to move the cursor.
(This is not a problem on the newer keyboards that have 12 function keys.)
rn
Press ([I. The cursor moves down to the next file name. Now, press
to
move up again. You can also use IPgDnl to move down a page and ~ to
move up a page. Try it. If you want to get to the first file or directory name,
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
35
use (£!ill~. (Remember to hold (£!ill down while you press ~.) (£!ill~
moves you to the last file name. In the wide view, 'Homel moves the cursor to
the left margin; (GJ moves it to the right margin. In the full view, 'Homel
moves the cursor to the first file in the list and (GJ moves to the last file in
the list.
Press (£!ill,pgUpl. Unless you are in the main (or root) directory, you'll see two
periods (..) on top of the leftmost column of file names. This is the DOS
shorthand that represents the directory above the current directory. With
the bar cursor on the two periods, press 1+oJi to move up a directory level.
To return to the previous directory, move the cursor to that directory name
and press , +oJ I. Or, you can type in the first letter of the name of the file you
want to select. If there is more than one file beginning with the letter, the
cursor will move to the next one of these files each time you press the letter.
Now that you can move about in the File Manager window,let's activate
the File Manager from a SideKick Plus application.
Activating the File Manager within an Application
You can activate the File Manager whenever you get a file-name prompt in
a SideKick Plus application. Let's try it in the Phonebook.
Use the main menu or ~W to activate the Phonebook. After the
Phonebook window opens, press lEID, type *.* to get a list of all file names,
and press '+oJ I. The File Manager window opens.
c: \SKP-..I'CI. ADR
- Index
=r-cl
=t1:IBOTH
=r-cIBOTHA
=r-cIGET
=r-cIGETA
=r-cISEIt)
p?
Na/lle
Logon to 1'1:1 (Both Seruices)
Gets; and Sends 1'1: I Mail
Gets and Sends 1'1:1 Mail (Aduanced)
Gets 1'1:1 Mail
Gets 1'1:1 Mail (Aduanced Seruice)
Sends 1'1:1 Mail
o
o
o
o
o
475
475
475
475
475
Neu Phonebook
??l
9981
9981
9981
9981
9981
UolUMe Label: No Label
DOS Uersion 3.:za
C:,SKP","."
1. £> Mbytes Used
744 Kbytes Free on Disk
Sf> Files
B Bytes Marked
B Files
=
=
..
BUILD.SI/S
INSTALL. EXE
MEMDU4.1'I:1
PHONE.GLS
Fl Help
F2
+-+U-Moue
NEIJ
READ. ME
PHONE.FRM
I'I:I.GLS
PHONE.ADR
HELP
SKPLUS.EXE
SKCONU.COM
1'1:1. ADR
PERSONAL. APP
F3
FS ZoOM
F4
F£> Suitch
Ctrl-+-+U-Resize
BUILD. BAT
SK3.SIJP
NEXTDISK.BBl
TRAlI1A
HELTON.BAK
SK2.SIJP
SKBAT.COM
BALONEY. TXT
CHISPAS
DORFFI.ADR
8:03PM =
F7
F9
F1B
Esc-Exit
Fa
Figure 3.2: Opening the File Manager from the Phonebook
You can now use all of the File Manager services. If you press I +oJ I while the
bar cursor is on a file name, the Phonebook will attempt to read the file at
the cursor position.
36
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
The Directory Command
A frequent frustration is when you want to look at a file that's not in the
directory you're in. SideKick Plus demolishes that cliche of a situation by
letting you go straight to the file with the Directory command.
1. Press (§J until you leave the Phonebook and return to the underlying
program.
2. Reactivate SideKick Plus with l£EiJ~.
3. Return to the File Manager with ~m.
4. From the File Manager, press (f]. A small box opens entitled Directory
of Files.
5. Ordinarily, you'd type in the drive, directory, and file name, just as you
would with the DIR command in DOS. For now, type QJ and press I ~ I
to get to the root directory. The file window changes to show the new
directories and file names.
Viewing a File
Now that you've opened a window containing some file names and moved
around the disk, view a text file. Move the bar cursor to the file you want to
look at and press ill§] for the menu. Move the cursor down to the File
command and press I +-II. A menu opens with several useful commands.
Move down to View and press I +-II. Another menu opens: You want the At
Cursor command, so move the cursor to it and press I ~ I.
A window opens with the text file in it. You can use the usual File Manager
cursor keys to move about in the file. Press (§J or I +-II when you are done
with the file.
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
37
F TYPII'G
FILE C:'\SKP,INTRO.CMD
Borlilnd originillly designed SideKick-the first MeMOry-resident
desktop orgilnizer-to keep desks free of the unruly clutter of
notepilds, hilOO cillcuIiltors, ilOO telephone directories.
SideKick Plus leilps filr beyooo thilt. Uhile reMilining ilS filSt ilnd
eilSY to use ilS the originill SideKick, SideKick Plus expilnds into
ilreilS not previously ilddressed by il single progrilM:
Up to 9 sepilrilte text editors: (Notepilds), ..,ith il cilpilCity of up
to 11,000 I-IOrds (54,000 bytes) eilCh.
Up to 9 sepilrilte text outliners: ..,ith built-in text editors.
Telephone-nUMber diltilbilSe ..,ith ilutOMiltiC diiller ilOO built-in diltil
coMMuniciltions:, ..,ith bilCkgrouoo ilnd Script Cilpilbilities.
TiMe Plilnner ..,ith cilleooilrs, ilppointMent books, schedule ..,iooo..,s,
illilrMS, ilnd ilttilChed ilgeooil.
Four different cillcuIiltors:, illI ..,ith il tiipe printout option.
Po..,erful cut-iloo-pilSte integriltion ..,ith other progrilMS.
Extended DOS file ilnd directory Milnipuliltion.
Advilnced progrilMMing ilids .
. End IteMize.
1 16
=======================
Fl Help
F2
F3
F4
F5 ZOOM
F7
Ff> S..,itch
F8
8: 13pM
=
F9
F10
Esc-Exit
Figure 3.3: Viewing a File
Copying Several Files
Unlike DOS, the File Manager lets you perform file-manipulation commands on a selection of file names or directories. To do this, you must mark
the files using some special commands. For example, let's copy a block of
files to another directory.
First, mark the block of files. Use B (on the numeric keypad) to mark
individual files: The marked files will have a filled arrow symbol, >, before
the file name. To mark a block of files, move the cursor to the first file of the
block and press (EZJ to mark the start of the block; then use the cursor keys
to move down to the last file of the block and press (E!I to mark the end of
the block.
Now, use the File Copy command.
Press ill9 for the main menu.
Move to File and press I+-ll.
Move to Copy and press I+-ll.
A prompt requests the new drive, directory, or file name for the files;
type in a drive or directory name, such as C: \SKPLUS, and press I+-ll.
5. The File Manager then copies the files.
1.
2.
3.
4.
You can copy only a block of files to an existing directory.
38
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C:'SKP>
UoIUMe Label: No Label
DOS Uersion 3.20
C:\SKP\M.M
57 Files:
=
5 Files: =
11EM0113. PK
SKMAIN.BIN
~DI'l1OFILE. ADR
~F200.ADR
~EXAI-I'LE.GLS
I>CSERUE. ADR
~BIX.ADR
NOTES. TXT
Fl Help
FZ
F3
F4
1. e. /'bytes: Used
1.9 /'bytes: Free on Disk
lG8 Kbytes: Marked
£:.21
473490
73321
37282
20087
ZZ09e.
15747
ZZZ
Jan
Jan
i'tlv
i'tlv
i'tlv
Nov
Nov
Jan
13,1988
14,1988
Zl,1987
Zl,1987
28,1987
01), 1987
01), 1987
le.,1988
F5 ZOOM
Fe. Suitch
F7
Fa
10:44a
l1:39a
5:41p
5:47p
3:04p
S:30p
Z:03p
4:49p
A
8:17pM =
F9
F10
Figure 3.4: Marked Files in the File Manager
Review
We've come to the end of our exploration of the File Manager. Chapter 5
discusses this application in greater detail. For now, you have learned how
to
•
•
•
•
•
activate the File Manager inside a SideKick Plus application
find files in the File Manager window
look at different directories
view a file using the File View At Cursor command
copy files by Marking them with (!I, (EJ, and (fID, and then using the File
Copy command
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
39
The Notepad
The Notepad is a full-screen text editor that provides all the facilities of the
Turbo Pascal editor and most of WordStar's. If you are familiar with either
of these editors, you'll find it very easy to use the Notepad.
This section teaches you how to
•
•
•
•
•
•
enter text into the Notepad
move the cursor
delete mistakes
use insert and overwrite modes
reformat text
save and load note files
• print
Activating the Notepad
Open the Notepad from the main menu or use I3IfJWJ from within SideKick
Plus.
The Notepad Selection window appears the first time you press l3lilWJ. You'll
see that each Notepad is numbered automatically from 1 to 9. We'll bypass
the selection window by pressing I +-II. You are now in the main Notepad
window. (If you've used the Notepad already, the Notepad you last used
opens.)
40
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C: \sKP
>
g NOTES
2
3
4
5
E.
7
Select Notepad
NOTESZ
NOTES3
NOTES4
NOTESS
NOTES£.
~ C:~KP >
F1 Help
F2 Save File
U-Select
F3 New F
F4
Tab-Chang
=.g
2
3
4
5
E.
7
-==
~l~t~t-l
C: ~\NOTES. TXT
NOTIlS2
NOTIlS3
NOTIlS4
NOTESS
NOTES£.
NOTIlS7
Line 1 Col 1
C: ,SKP\NOTES. TXT
*11 • Ins;ert Indent Margin E.5
F1 Help
F3 New File
F4 Print
F2 Save File
Notepad
F5 ZOOM
FE. Switch
F7 Begin Blk
F8 End Blk
12: 14pM
F9
F1B Menu
Es;c-Extt
Figure 3.5: A Notepad File over the Notepad Selection Window
The window border shows you various details:
•
•
•
•
•
the name of the note file
the line and column location of the cursor
the Notepad file number
whether the current file has been saved (round symbol)
other messages that we explain fully in Chapter 6
You can activate the Notepad over other SideKick Plus applications, but
some also offer attached Notepads that you can open with fI2I. Let's try the
Time Planner.
1. Use the main menu or ~f] to open the Time Planner. The Calendar
window opens.
2. Press fI2I to open the attached Notepad. The window is a smaller version
of the Notepad window you opened earlier. Not surprisingly, it works
in just the same way. Here's where you can keep notes on your plans for
the day.
3. Press ~ twice to leave it and return to the Notepad application.
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
41
- C"'. . .~
Th.......,
J.. D""""""',,,,. T>"
8.1=' "" ..... ~
2 NOTESZ
3 NOTES3
!
4 NOTES4
Daily Agenda for Jan 21.1988 =
Line 1 Col 1
J.n 21,1988
I
Sun I'bn Tue lJed ThulFrilsatl
Z?
28
29
30
3
4
5
&
10
11
12
13
I 1
17
18
19
20 1_
24
25
2&
Z?
1
2
3
I
31
I~-
til • Ins:ert Indent Margin &5
Fl Help
F3
F2
F4 Print
TiMe Planner AppointMent Note
12:17p!11
F5 ZOOM
F& SlJitch
F7 Begin Blk
Fa End Blk
F9
F10 Menu
Es:c-Exit
Figure 3.6: A Notepad Attached to the Time Planner
Entering Text
Now type your text into the Notepad, just as you would on a typewriter.
Notice the small cursor moving across the screen as you type; it shows
where the next character goes. When the cursor reaches the right edge of
the window, the text automatically wraps to the beginning of the next line.
You can keep typing without pressing I+-II to move to the next line.
You do need to press I+-II to end a paragraph and enter blank lines.
When the cursor hits the bottom of the window, the text scrolls upwards,
hiding the top line. Don't worry, nothing is lost. The Notepad is like a
window that passes over otherwise hidden text: Only the section directly
inside the window is visible.
Moving the Cursor
To move the cursor and see the hidden part of the text, use the arrow
(cursor-movement) keys.
First of all, be sure that the word Numlock does not appear on the right
margin of the message line. If it does, press INurn lockl to toggle it off. (You
don't have to worry about this on the newer keyboards that have more
than ten function keys.)
Now, press [!I, [!J, El, or EJ to move the cursor in that direction. Note that
you can't move beyond the end of the text. For example, if you have only
one line of text, you can't use the [!I and [!J cursor keys.
42
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
If you have more than one window of text, you can jump to a new page
with~ and 'pgDnl.
Deleting Mistakes
Use ~ and ~ to remove errors. ~ deletes the character to the left
of the cursor, while ~ deletes the character above the cursor. For example,
if there's a mistake in the middle of a word, do one of the following steps:
• move the cursor to the beginning of the error and press ~ until you
erase the entire mistake. Type in the correction.
• move the cursor to the end of the error and press 'Backspacel until you get to
the correct part.
Insert And Overwrite Modes
You can enter characters into the Notepad in two ways: Insert or Overwrite.
Look at the bottom left of the window border to see which mode you are in.
The default is Insert. If the word Insert appears, characters inserted at the
cursor push the rest of the text to the right. Otherwise, new text overwrites
old text. Press fE:J to toggle between the modes.
Reformatting the Text
When you insert text into the middle of a paragraph, the text automatically
wraps to the next line unless you set Options Margin Release ON. If so, you
need to reformat the text using the Reformat command.
1. Type a paragraph of text, such as the paragraph above, into the
Notepad.
2. Add a few words in the middle of the paragraph. Notice that the line is
now past the right-hand margin.
3. Now, pop up the Notepad menu with lIi§, move the cursor down to
Reformat, and press '~I.
4. Another menu pops up: You can reformat by paragraph or from a
marker (discussed in Chapter 7). Choose Paragraph and press '~I.
The menus disappear and SideKick Plus reformats the paragraph to fit
within the right-hand margin. You'll probably use this command
frequently, so remember its shortcut, l£ill(E-hold down I2ill while you
press (E.
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
43
Saving and Loading a Note
If you turn off your computer at this point, the note you have entered and
edited will vanish forever, unless you first save it. Press ill! to save the note
to a disk file with the name shown in the top left of the window border.
When you save it, the round symbol (.) disappears from the window
border.
If you are using the Notepad in the Phonebook or Time Planner, it keeps
the note as part of the file and saves it automatically. In the Notepad and
Calculator, you must specifically press ill! to save the note file. If you prefer,
you can change the defaults so that SideKick Plus automatically saves the
file each time you leave the Notepad and make a change. To do so, press
Options File Auto Save to set it to ON.
Loading a new note from the disk is simple. Press ~, which requests the
file name of the note. Type the name and press 1+-11. The Notepad creates a
new note if the name you typed is not on the disk.
Printing the Note
Press (EJ to print the note. The standard SideKick Plus printer menu
prompts you for where you want the print to go: the screen, a file, or a
printer. Select the output choice you want by moving the cursor to it and
press 1+-11. In this case, move the cursor to Window for a screen display and
press 1+-11.
Review
We're at the end of our journey through the Notepad. You'll be using the
Notepad a lot in SideKick Plus, so take the time to become familiar with it
now.
At this point, you should know how to
•
•
•
•
•
activate a Notepad linked to a SideKick Plus application with ~
type text into the Notepad
use the cursor keys to move around the note
delete characters in the Notepad with 1Backspacel and ~
switch between Insert and Overwrite modes with ~
44
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
• reformat text with the Reformat command or
• save and load files using ~ and ~
• print a note with lEJ
l£IilllID
Outlook: The Outline Processor
An outline is simply a set of organized notes. We call the electronic tool that
helps you manipulate these notes Outlook.
In this section, you'll learn the fundamentals of outlining:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
how to enter and edit headlines
use the cursor keys to move around the outline
save and load an outline
expand and contract an outline
move headlines
attach notes
print an outline
Let's start with some Outlook fundamentals. Every outline in Outlook
consists of lines of text. As you probably remember from using outlines in
school, each line generally covers a main point or heading, followed by
more specific subheadings. We call these lines of text headlines.
Each headline indents to a certain position, called a level. For example,
Levell is more important than Level 2, which is more important than Level
3, and so on:
Levell Headline
Level 2 Headline
Level 3 Headline
Outlook's advantage over a word processor or the SideKick Plus Notepad
is that you can hide a selected level of headlines, such as Level 2 headlines,
in an instant. You can choose to see just the broad outline in Level 1 or
scrutinize only third-level details. You can simplify a complex topic by
filtering out the details of the deeper levels, and then reveal them only as
needed.
Say you plan to ask your manager for a raise. Here's an outline to help you
get your arguments straight:
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
45
C: ,,sKP,PAVRAISE. OTL
Line
1 Leuel 1
I POly-rOlis:e dis:cus:s:ion
AMount of Effort
I'M neuer lilte in the MOrning
I take s:hort lunch breaks:
I uork ouertiMe without extril pOly
I can judge when ol deildline needs: to be kept
I don't gripe about ouertiMe to MY couorkers
I o=as:ionOllly bring uork hOMe on !.!eekends:
Skills:
I hilue the right Mix of s:kills: for the Job
I keep up on new trends: in the indus:try
I learn quickly
Res:ults:
My projects: need little s:uperuis:ion
My MOnthly reports: Olre prOMpt and accurilte
My s:uperuis:or can focus: on other projects:
I orten a=DMPIis:h tas:ks: quicker than expected
I'M able to pitch in Olnd help others
The Crux
I des:erue better pOly Olnd MOre res:ponsibility
01 • Ins:ert ====================== 1Z:S£,PfII
F1 Help
F3 He!.! File
FS ZOOM
F7 Begin Blk
F9 Note
FZ Silue File
F4 Print
FE. S!.!itch
F8 End Blk
F1B Menu
Keypild+/- Open/Clos:e Ctrl-+/- Open/Clos:e All Ctrl-+-+U Moue Es:c-Exit
Figure 3.7: The Full Outline
C: ,SKP,PAVRAISE. OTL
I Pily-ra1s:e dis:cus:s:ion
~ AMount of Effort
~ Skills:
~ Res:ults:
~ The Crux
Line
1 Leuel
1
01 • Ins:ert ====================== 1Z:S7Pf11
F1 Help
F3 He!.! File
F5 ZOOM
F7 Begin Blk
F9 Note
FZ Silue File
F4 Print
FE. Switch
F8 End Blk
F1B Menu
Keypild+/- Openl'Clos:e Ctrl-+I- Open/Clos:e All Ctrl-+-+U Moue Es:c-Exit
Figure 3.8: The Main Headlines
Or, you can check your third-level reasons and buttress them with more
examples.
Activating Outlook
Now that you have an idea of how to use outlines, let's activate Outlook.
You can use either the main menu or t3lB~. The outline Selection window,
46
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
which allows you to select one of up to nine windows, appears. For now,
press I+-ll to open the main Outlook window.
The window border shows you
•
•
•
•
the name of the outline
where the cursor is in the file
the level of the current headline
various other messages (explained in Chapter 7)
Entering Text
Now, let's type these headlines into Outlook, just as you would on a
typewriter. Type the first headline into Outlook and note the small cursor
moving across the screen as you type: It shows where the next character
goes.
To end a headline and return to the same level on the next line, you would
press I+-ll. However, if you are following the previous outline, you'll want
to indent the next headline. To do this, hold down f3]J while you press I+-ll.
The cursor moves to the next line, but the new headline indents one level
deeper than the previous headline. An alternative to this is ~, which
indents the headline at the cursor position. Similarly, ~fSJ moves the
headline one level out (nearer to the left margin).
If you type a headline that stretches past the right edge of the window, the
headline scrolls to the left, hiding the first part. Don't worry, nothing is lost.
Now, finish typing in the pay-raise outline.
Moving the Cursor
. To see the hidden part of a scrolled line, use the cursor keys.
Be sure that the word NumLock does not appear on the right of the message
line. If it does, press INurn Lockl to toggle on the cursor keys. Again, this doesn't
affect you if you have one of the newer keyboards with more than ten
function keys.
Now, press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor. You can't move
beyond the end of the text. If you have only one headline, you won't be
able to use the cursor keys to move beyond that line.
If you have more than one window of text, you can jump to a new page
with IPgupl and IPgDnl.
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
47
Deleting Mistakes
Outlook deals with deletions in the same way as the Notepad. You delete
with IBackspacel and (8: IBackspacel deletes the character to the left of the cursor,
while ~ deletes the character above the cursor.
You can enter characters in Outlook in two ways. The bottom left of the
window border shows you whether you are in Insert or Overwrite mode. If
you are in Insert mode, characters insert at the cursor, pushing the rest of
the text aside. Otherwise, new text overwrites old text. Press ~ to toggle
between the modes.
Saving and Loading an Outline
If you tum off your computer at this point, the outline you have entered
and edited will vanish forever. To prevent this, save it first. Press (2 to save
the outline to the disk file with the name shown in the top left of the
window border.
It's just as simple to load a new outline from the disk. Try loading the previous outline: Press ~, which requests the outline name, type OUTLINE, and
press I ~ I. Outlook creates a new outline with that name, if the outline is
not on the disk.
Expanding and Contracting the Outline
The real power of Outlook is that you can display an outline in varying
levels of detail. You expand and contract the outline with the Band El keys
(the ones on the numeric keypad). B moves the headline level deeper one
level at a time; El moves an indented headline out a level.
When a filled arrow precedes a headline, it means there's a deeper level of
headlines underneath it.
First make sure your outline looks just like Figure 3.7. Move to the top of
the outline and press El once to get Figure 3.9:
48
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C: 'SKP\PAYRAISE. OTL
I Pa!;!-rilise dis:cus:s:ion
AMOunt of Effort
I'M never late in the MOrning
I take short lunch breaks:
~ I work overtiMe Id thout extra pa!;!
I occasionall!;! bring work hOMe on ... eekends
Skills
I have the right Mix of skills for the job
I keep up on ne ... trends in the industr!;!
I learn quickl!;!
Results:
~ I'I!:I projects need little superuision
~ I often accDMpI ish tasks quicker than expected
The Crux
I deserve better pa!;! and More responsibilit!;!
Line
1 Level
1
01 • Insert = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 12:58pM
F1 Help
F3 He ... File
F5 ZOOM
F7 Begin Blk
F9 Note
F2 Save File
F4 Print
Fe s ... i tch
F8 End Blk
FHI Menu
Ke!;!pad+/- Open/Close Ctrl-+/- Open/Close All Ctrl--U !'bve Esc-Exit
Figure 3.9: Outline with One Level Closed
C: \SKP\PAYRAISE. OTL
I Pa!;l""raisle discussion
~ AMount of Effort
.. Skills
~ Results
.. The Crux
01 • Insert
F1 Help
F3 He... File
F5 ZoOM
F2 Save File
F4 Print
FD S... itch
Ke!;IPad+/- Open/Close Ctrl-+/- Open/Close All
Line
F7 Begin Blk
F8 End Blk
Ctrl-U !'bve
1 Level
1
12:57PM
F9 Note
F1B Menu
Es:c-Exit
Figure 3.10: Outline with Two Levels Closed
Press it once more, and your outline is now totally collapsed; all you can
see is the outline title. Just before the headline is a> symbol. This tells you
there are headlines hidden below that headline.
N ow, press B. This displays the first level as in Figure 3.10. With the B key,
you can reveal hidden levels below one headline. For example, with your
outline looking like Figure 3.10, move the cursor to Results and press B.
The Results headline expands, but the others remain the same. Move to the
Crux headline and press B to open that headline.
If you hold (£ill down while you press B, all hidden headlines underneath
the headline at the cursor open. You don't have to move down a level at a
time. Pressing (£illG hides all headlines at levels deeper than the one the
cursor is on.
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
49
C: ,SKP,PAVRAISE. OTL
Pa~-raise discussion
~ AMount of Effort
~ Skills
I Results
~ My projects need Ii ttle supervision
~ I often ilCCOMpl ish tasks quicker than expected
~ The Crux
Line
4 Level
Z
01 • Insert =================== 1:00pM
F1 Help
F3 New File
FS ZOOM
F7 Begin Blk
F9 I'tlte
FZ Save File
F4 Print
FE> Switch
F8 End Blk
F1B Menu
Ke~pad+,1- Opp"Y'Close
Ctrl-+,1- Open,lClose All Ctrl-+-+U Move Esc-Exit
Figure 3.11: Outline with Results Headline Expanded
C: ,SKP,PAVRAISE. OIL
Pa~-raise discussion
~ AMount of Effort
~ Skills
I Results
My projects need little supervision
My Monthl~ reports are proMpt and accurate
My supervisor can focus on other projects
I often accoMpl ish tasks quicker than expected
I'M able to pitch in and help others
~ The Crux
Line
4 Level
Z
01 • Insert =================== 1:00pM
F1 Help
F3 New File
FS ZOOM
F7 Begin Blk
F9 Note
FZ Save File
F4 Print
FE> Suitch
F8 End Blk
F1B Menu
Ke~pad+,1- Openl'Close
Ctrl-+,1- Open,lClose All Ctrl-+-+U Move Esc-Exit
Figure 3.12: Outlines with Results Headlines Expanded Two Levels
Moving Headlines
Since you can move headlines so easily, Outlook is ideal for rearranging
ideas from brainstorming sessions into a logical sequence. Like any other
SideKick Plus command, you can move headlines by menu entry or
shortcut. In this case, you'll use the menu system.
Let's say you want to promote the headline at the cursor.
1. Press ~ to pop up the menu
2. Move the cursor to Headline and press 1....... 1. This pops up the Headline
menu.
3. Move to Promote and press 1....... 1.
You might have noticed that the Headline menu contains Open and Close.
These options are the same as the EJ and G shortcuts used to manipulate
the outline.
50
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
You don't have to use the menu system either when you promote a
headline; there are two shortcuts: ~~ and l£IillEJ. Similarly, to demote a
headline, you can use ~ or l£Iill8. Why two shortcuts? ~ and ~~ have
the advantage of keeping your hands in the main typing area.
Try using l£Iill1lJ and l£IillQJ to move headlines within the same level. Note
that these keys swap headlines while Headline Promote and Headline
Demote do not.
Attached Notes
Outlook lets you attach a note to each headline in your outline. You can use
this feature to store, for example, a partially completed letter in your to-do
list, a procedure in a computer language, or a section of a report.
To attach a note to a headline, press ~ or l!J (the asterisk key on the
numeric keypad). A smaller version of the regular Notepad window opens
up. You can now enter and edit information in this window-remember,
however, that you can only get to it from that outline. When you finish with
the Notepad, press ~ to return to the headline. A == symbol appears beside
the headline, indicating that you attached a note.
Some commands work differently in attached notes and outlines, so read
Chapter 6 before proceeding with any serious work in a note file.
Printing the Outline
You can set various print settings for your outline, but the default settings
work for most uses. To use the defaults, simply press lEJ. The standard
SideKick Plus printer menu prompts you for where you want the print to
go: to a window, file, or printer. In this case, move the cursor to Window
(for a screen representation) and press I +-II.
Review
Go on setting up and manipulating outlines until you feel comfortable with
Outlook. By then, you should have learned how to
•
•
•
•
enter and edit headlines
use the cursor keys to move around the outline
save and load outlines using ~ and ~
expand and contract an outline using Band G (numeric keypad)
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
51
• move headlines with f£Ell and the cursor keys
• attach notes with CE2I or (!J
• print an outline using ~
The Phonebook
The Phonebook is the SideKick Plus communications command post. It
keeps track of names, addresses, phone numbers, and all your communications needs.
This tutorial describes how you make an automated phone call; however,
you must have a Hayes-compatible modem for this to work. The default
communications port setting is set for internal modems (that is, it's set to
COM2). If you have an external modem, go to Communications Set and
select 1 or the appropriate communications port.
If you don't have a Hayes or Hayes-compatible modem, you must install
SideKick Plus for your modem (see Chapter 9).
The Phonebook offers many sophisticated features, including computer-tocomputer communications, a Glossary for encrypting numbers, preset
entry forms, and a communications Script language (explained in
Appendix F).
Entering Data into a Form
First, open the Phonebook from the main menu or with l!iJJt:EI. The Summary
window appears-the center of all your communications activities. Since
you don't have any names in your Phonebook yet, a form opens on top of
the window. (If someone has used the Phonebook before you, it will open
with the most recently used directory displayed. In this case, press (llI to
open a new Phonebook directory file.) Let's ignore the Summary window
for the moment and concentrate on the address form.
52
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C:,
- In
COMPANY
Neu FOrM
her-Phone:
Index:
COMPan!;j:
First NaMe:
Las:t NaMe:
Street:
Cit!;j:
State:
L--
Telex:
EMail:
Zip:
Fax:
C:\sK
Notes:
Ins:ert
Fi Help
FZ
Tab-Next Field
iZ:33pM
F7 Preu Entr!;j
F9
FS ZOOM
F3 Neu FOrM
F8
Next
Entr!;j
F10 Menu
FE.
Suitch
F4
Es:c-SuMMar!;j loIiOOou
Shift-Tab-Preuious: Field
Figure 3.13: The Default Address Form
The form is similar to a Rolodex card and just as easy to fill in. It has entry
blanks or fields into which you enter names, phone numbers, and all the
usual information. It also has a less familiar field: Index. You should fill in
the Index blank, since it's the entry SideKick Plus uses to sort entries. Let's
do it. When the form appears, the cursor is on the Index entry.
1. Type something you'll remember: A nickname or an abbreviation is
fine. Don't worry if you make a mistake; like everywhere else in
SideKick Plus, you can make corrections with IBackspacel and ~. Press I ~ 1
to enter your new Index entry.
2. The cursor moves to the next field, Phone; type in the number and press
I~l.
The Phonebook ignores spaces, hyphens, and parentheses in phone
numbers, so you can type in a number as usual: (408) 555-1234 is OK. Now,
complete the form.
Let's say you don't want to enter anything in a field. Press lEI to skip to the
next entry. Similarly, ~lE§ moves you back one entry.
Store the form by pressing ~ or Iml ~ 1(remember to hold down ~ while
you press I~l). ~ closes the form and saves its contents.lml~l does that
and opens a new form. When you finish entering all your data, press ~ to
return to the Summary window.
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
53
Finding Data in the Phonebook
The Summary window now displays an alphabetically sorted Index of your
entries in the first column, the names in the second column, and the phone
numbers in the third. The addresses remain on the address forms. Move the
cursor to the entry you want and press I Space I to open the entry form for
the highlighted name. Press ~ to close it and returri to the Summary
window.
C: ,SKP,PHONE. ADR
- Index
Nil/I1e
CI1)
Darffi, Christine
Phone nUMber - (415) 1Z3-45f>7
1:57PM
F1 Help
F2
~-Dial
F3 Nel-l Book
F5 ZOOM
F4 Print
FG SI-litch
Letter search for index
=
F7
F9 flbte
F8 Hangup
F11l Menu
Space-Go to ForM Esc-Ext t
Figure 3.14: The Summary Window
A bar cursor highlights whatever entry is in the center of the Summary
window. Before you move the bar cursor, check that the word NumLock
doesn't appear in the right margin of the message line. If it does, press
INurn Lockl to toggle on the cursor keys. (Don't worry about NumLock if you
have a 12-fundion key keyboard.)
Press [!J. The bar cursor moves down to the next entry. Press L!J to move
back up again. Use ~ to move down a page and IPgupl to move up a page.
If you want to zip to the first entry, press (£EIlpgUpl; l£illIlpgDnl speeds you to the
last one. Try entering several items and using these keys to move around
the Summary window.
By indexing your entries, you can find and move to a particular entry very
quickly. Just type the first letter of the index and the cursor jumps to the
first entry with that letter. Press the letter repeatedly to cycle through all the
index entries with that first letter.
54
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Phoning Someone with the Phonebook
Now that you have all the phone numbers and can find them, let's call
someone. Remember that you need a modem for this task.
Find the entry you wish to call and press 1...... 1. The Phonebook
automatically dials the number. A message displays the number being
dialed. If your modem has a speaker, you'll hear the tones being dialed.
Otherwise, you won't hear anything and you'll get a No carrier or Modem not
ready error message. Another message reminds you to press a key and pick
up the telephone receiver after the modem completes dialing.
Adding an Attached Note
Say you're talking with Martin and he invites you to a Monty Python
festival at his house. You futilely search your desk for a scrap of paper and
pen. Fortunately, the Phonebook comes to the rescue with an attached note.
Like Outlook's attached notes, this is a Notepad that attaches itself to the
entry you are in and stores its information in the Phonebook. Just press [2l
to open the attached note, type the note, and press (G to close it. A ==
appears next to the entry to remind you of the note.
Printing the Current Entry
Say you want to give Maria the address and date of the event. Press lEJ and
your wish is Phonebook's command. The standard SideKick Plus printer
menu asks if you want the entry to go to a window, file, or printer. In this
case, move the cursor to Window and press 1...... 1.
There are various print options you can toggle as well, but we'll save those
for Chapter 8.
Review
The Phonebook is a powerful and sophisticated communications
tool-much more than an electronic telephone directory. In this tutorial,
you learned how to
• enter data into the form
• find an entry with the cursor keys or index initial
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
55
• let the Phonebook dial automatically
• add an attached note
• print an entry
The Time Planner
The Time Planner is a calendar, scheduler, and organizer combined into
one. It comes complete with an almost unlimited number of alarms and the
capability to graphically display your schedule.
C: '-SKP
>
Calendar
I'bnday
r-
"mI!I'illil:i:~
Sun I'bn Tue Ued Thu Fri Sat
Z7 28 29
2S
2&
2
3
4
5
&
9
lB
11
12
13
1&
17
18
19
2B
30
1
7
8
l r- Cal endar
I'bnday
C: '-SKP\PERSONAL. APP
I'bnday
Oct 24.1988
;=
Oct 24.1988
Uorkday
~
Sun I'bn Tue Ued Thu Fri Sat
2361
25
2&
27
30 31
1
2
3
~
2S
Fl Help
F3 HeM
F2 HeM Add
F4 Prir
Space-Clear t l PgUp/Dn-
2&
2
3
9
lB
Z7 28 29
30
4
5
&
11
12
13
8:OOa
8:30a
9:BBa
9:30a
lB:OOa
19:30a
11:OOa
11:30a
12:OOp
12:3Bp
l:BBp
l:3Bp
2:OOp
2:30p
3:B0p
3:3Bp
4:eBp
1
7
8
14
15
1&
17 18 19 2B 21 22
r- c: \sKP\PERSONAL. APP
I'bnday
Oct 24.1988
i!iI'B
Tue 25
Ued
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
2&
Z7
28
29"
30M
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8a lBa 12p 2p
I
I
4p
I
I
&p
I
11 0M
itch
8p
F7
F8
2:BlpM =
F9
F1B
Esc:-Exit
Figure 3.15: The Time Planner's Calendar. Schedule, and Appointment Book Windows
In this section, you'llleam how to
•
•
•
•
•
move around the calendar with the cursor keys
open the appointment book
enter appointments
set an alarm
open the Schedule window.
To start, open the Time Planner from the main menu or by pressing ~lll.
56
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Changing the Date
A calendar opens showing the current month. A block cursor highlights the
current date on the calendar, and the top of the window displays that date.
You move the cursor with the cursor keys. If you have a ten-function-key
keyboard, be sure that the word Numlock doesn't appear on the right
margin of the message line. If it does, press INurn Lockl to toggle on the cursor
keys .
• Press El and EI to move from one day to another
• Press (!J and (!J to move by week.
You can't move the cursor beyond the dates displayed on the calendar. If
you want to move to the previous month, press IPgupl. Press IPgDnl to move
forward by month.
Move the cursor around until you are familiar with the keys. Finally, press
and the cursor leaps back to the current date and month. (Note: ~ is the
number 5 or center key on the numeric keypad.)
~
Opening the Appointment Book
The heart of the Time Planner is the Appointment Book. This is where you
type in your daily activities. With the Time Planner open, press I+-i I to
open the Appointment Book.
:- Calendar
Itmday
= C: ~\PERSONAL. APP
Monday
Oct Z4,1988
Oct Z4,1988
IIorkday
Sun Mon Tue Ued Thu Fri Sat
Z5
2&
Z7
Z8
Z9
30
1
Z
3
4
5
&
7
8
9
10
11
1Z
13
14
15
1&
17
18
19
20
Zl
ZZ
Z36]
Z5
Zb
Z7
Z8
Z9
30 31
1
Z
3
4
5
F1 Help
FZ
U-TiMe
8:00a
8:30a
S:B0a
9:30a
10:00a
10:30a
l1:00a
11:30a
1Z:00p
1Z:30p
l:00p
1:30p
Z:OOp
Z:30p
3:00p
3:30p
4:00p
F3 Nell Book
F7 Tag
F5 ZoOM
F4 Print
FE. Silitch
F8
PgUp/Dn-Day
Ctr I-PgUp/Dn-Month Center-Today
Z:ezPM =
F9 Note
F1B Menu
Esc-Cal endar
Figure 3.16: The Appointment Book
The window shows the day broken up into half-hour increments, with
space beside each half-hour mark to enter appointments or reminders. It
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
57
also displays a Holiday or Workday indicator. A bar cursor sits under this
indicator, on the Daily Agenda blank. This is where you can enter a
description of that day, or anything outstanding you want to remember
about it.
Go ahead and enter a Daily Agenda for today-use ~ and (Q3 to erase
mistakes. (~ deletes the character to the left of the cursor, while (Q3
deletes the character above the cursor.) You can move the cursor with EI
andB.
The Daily Agenda is not the place for a lengthy thesis: Use a note attached
to the summary by pressing~. This opens up a Notepad attached to that
day's page in the Appointment Book. It is useful for conference agenda and
to-do lists, since you can also see it in the Calendar and Schedule windows.
Press ~ to return to the Appointment Book.
Let's change the Workday label to Holiday. Press (]J to move to the
Workday indicator, and press I~I to toggle it between Holiday and
Workday. This indicator reflects official holidays in the United States and
weekends; however, you can assign any set of holidays you desire. (!J
moves you back to the title (description) line.
Entering Appointments
Let's say you have a dental appointment at 10 am today, which should last
about an hour. Let's enter it into the Appointment Book.
1. Press (!J until you reach 10:00a. This is the starting time of your
appointment.
2. Press G. This indicates a duration.
3. Type 11, the finishing time. (You don't need to type the zeroes, am, or
pm) A bracket-like bar to the left of the appointment appears, which
adjusts to the ending time you enter. This is the expected duration of the
appointment.
4. Type I Space 1 and the title (description), for example, Dentist.
Now you want to enter a date with your spouse at 7:20 pm. Since the
Appointment Book defaults only show half-hour increments, you need to
add 7:20 pm to the list. You can type in a new time anywhere in the
Appointment Book, and SideKick Plus automatically inserts it into the right
slot. First, move the cursor to 7:00 pm.
1. Press (W to pop up the menu.
2. Move the cursor to Insert and press I ~ I.
58
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
3. The bar cursor is on New Time, so press I +--i 1to select it.
4. 7:1Sp appears as a new highlighted marker, midway between the two
time slots. Move the cursor to change the numbers appropriately, so that
it reads 7:20p.
5. Press I +--i 1and enter the appointment, Dinner at India Gardens.
Note: When you insert a new time, the Time Planner first tries to insert a
time halfway between the selected time and the next one. Otherwise, it
inserts time in five- or ten-minute increments. You can then edit the time
inserted to the exact time you want.
Setting an Alarm
You're a forgetful soul, so you want SideKick Plus to remind you of the
dentist's appointment and a sales meeting. You can set some alarms to do
so.
1. Move to the dentist's appointment with the cursor keys.
2. Press ffiQJ to bring up the menu.
3. Move to Alarm and press I+--i I.
4. Another menu opens, prompting you for the type of alarm action and
how much warning time you need for the appointment. If you aren't
happy with the length of the default warning time, move to it, and type
your preference.
5. Set the alarm by choosing its action: Move to Action and press I+--i I, then
~ove to Buzzer and press I+--i I. A r appears to the left of the
appointment time.
The following figure shows this sequence of menus.
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
59
r- Calendar
/'bnday
r- C: \SKP'\PERSONAL. APP
/'bnday
Oct 24.1988
Oct 24.1988
Uorkday
Sun /'bn Tue lied Thu Fri Sat
2S
-
-
2&
Zl
28 29
39
2
3
4
5
G
?
8
9
19
11
12
13
14
15
1G..- AppointMent Book
Nell Book
Search
Insert
23
3El
L..--
M
'·'E'Fn
Repeat
9:39a
[ 19: Bea ,IMlllltlmmlA
19:39a
11:Bea
11:39a
12:BBp
12:3Bp
1:BBp
1:39p
2:BBp
1
122
r'-a'....
29
AlarM
""",i", [.i.]
=------03BP
I I
Edit
Print
Options
10
II
Action
.~Iml
~
Open Phonebook
Quick Paste
5:3Bp
F1 Help
F2
......U-Noue
F5 ~OM
FG SlIitch
F3
F4
F?
Fa
F9
F19
Esc-Exit
Figure 3.17: The Alarm Action Menu
To test what happens when you get an alarm, set one for five minutes from
now: Use the Insert New Time command to enter a new time, if necessary,
and press I +-II. Type in a title (such as TEST), and change the warning
period to 0 minutes on the Alarm menu off the ill2l menu. Press (2illfE to set
the alarm. Your computer will start chirping in five minutes.
The Schedule Window
While you are waiting for the alarm, let's look at the graphic view of your
appointments-the Schedule Window:
1. Press ~ to leave the appointment book and return to the calendar
2. Press (§J to open the Schedule window.
A window opens with your appointments shown as highlighted bars, with
lengths proportional to the duration of the appointment.
Use this window just like the Calendar window: Move the cursor to any
day, week, or month with the cursor keys. I +-II opens the appointment
book, while ~ opens the note attached to the day
In the time left before the alarm goes off, leave SideKick Plus with [E!lf3]]
and return to the underlying application. Don't worry, the alarm will still
go off.
60
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Stopping the Alarm
When the alarm sounds, a window opens showing the title and the time of
the appointment. You have three choices, just like on a traveling alarm
clock:
• Press ~. This closes the window and stops the alarm so that you can
continue with your work.
• Press I +-' I. This opens the Time Planner with the Appointment Book
displayed and the cursor at the appointment that caused the alarm.
• Press ~. This closes the window and stops the alarm but repeats the
alarm in a few minutes. You can change the interval between alarms with
the Options Alarm Snooze time command.
Review
In this tutorial, you've explored how to
•
•
•
•
•
move around the Calendar with the cursor keys
open and enter appointments in the Appointment Book
enter a new appointment time with the Insert Time command
set an alarm using the Alarm command
open the Schedule window
The Business Calculator
SideKick Plus has four kinds of calculators: Business, Scientific,
Programmer, and Formula. The way you enter numbers and operators
varies, according to the type of Calculator. The Functions, Variables, and
Options menus also change for each Calculator. Let's look into the Business
Calculator.
The Business Calculator is designed to manipulate long lists of numbers
using simple functions and to solve complex financial problems. We
modeled it on a widely used Canon calculator and added a few unique
SideKick Plus features.
In this tutorial, you'll
• use the calculator for simple calculations
• run the electronic tape
• use repeating numbers
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
61
• play with the memory functions
First, activate the Business Calculator from the main menu or press ~f9. A
calculator pops up on the screen. The upper part of the window is the tape
display and the bottom (highlighted) part is the main display. The numbers
you enter show up in the main display until you press an operator. Then
they move up to the tape display.
C:\SKP
>
C: \SKP\CALCTAPE. TXT Line
Z
3
4
5
+
+
+
+
E> +
TAPE DISPLAV
ITEM COlM
IL-'005
_____
20----"
Busines;s; =
Z: llJ'111
MAIN DISPLAV
!""
Fi Help
F3 MellI Rec
FS ZOOM
FZ MeM Add
F4 Print
FE> Switch
Space-Clear U PglJp/Dn-Scroll +-M/"/.II-Operators;
F7 Begin Blk
F8 End Blk
~-Res;ult
F9 Tape
Fill Menu
Es;c-Exit NuMLock
Figure 3.18: The Business Calculator
Entering Numbers into the Calculator
Notice the NumLock indicator on the bottom right of the screen. It means
that you can use the Numeric keypad to enter numbers to use with., +,-,
and *. Of course, you can still use the numbers and keys in the main typing
area, if you prefer.
Note: When you enter single hexadecimal numbers, remember to put a 0
before the hexadecimal letter. To enter A, for example, type in 0 A.
Let's try some simple addition. Enter the following into the Calculator (the
numbers will show up in the main display):
~EJ~B
The answer (4) is in the main display. A copy of the calculation remains in
the tape display.
If you prefer, you can use I+-lJ instead of B to end a calculation. However,
to add and subtract, you don't need to press either key. For example, when
you type in
~B@B@BiIDBllilB
62
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
the answer (20) automatically comes up in the main display when you type
in the last plus sign. The number to the left of the display (5, in this case) is
the item count. It is reset every time you press I~ I or El and decreased
when you press G. Try pressing El with the example above. The expression
= 20 moves up to the tape display. Although the number 20 remains in the
main display, it is cleared.
You can use ~ to delete the current character. You can also use ~
to clear either an entry with any pending calculations or a completed
calculation-equivalent to AC or C on a pocket calculator.
Simple Calculations
Now that you know how addition works, let's combine it with subtraction:
I
Space
I
EJ BJBJ G (D121 EJ
@@
The total 30 should be in the main display. You can also use
negative numbers, such as
I
Space
G to enter
I
I2JGCIDEJ
which results in 1.
Unlike addition and subtraction, multiplication and division require that
you press I ~ I or 8. Following are some examples: The first column of
numbers shows how the expression might be written down on paper; the
second shows how you enter the expression into the Calculator display.
11
*
34
-4 / 2
99 / 3
= 374
= -2
* 2 = 66
Let's combine all four functions.
80 + 20 - 25 / 5
(55 - 2.5)
*
* 6 = 90
2.32
------------------ + 2
=
86
1.45
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
63
The Tape
As you type in calculations, SideKick Plus records all the numbers and
results in the tape display or electronic tape. It's simply a Notepad that
records all the calculations, cutting off the oldest numbers when the space
is filled. You can scroll the tape using the cursor keys. If you have an older
keyboard, however, NumLock is on. Unless you turn it off, you must hold
E8 down while you press the cursor key. For example, if NumLock is on,
press (QJ(!J to scroll the tape up by one line.
Because the tape display is a Notepad, you can alter and recalculate the
tape. If you make a mistake in a lengthy calculation and don't realize it
until you finish, for instance, you can go in and fix the mistake. Say you
wish to add 33 + 44 + 55 + 66 + 77 + 88 + 99 but actually type
~~
B @@ B ~~ B ~~ B ~~ B@@ B ~~ B
Let's go into the tape and alter the 67 to 66.
1. Press ~ Tape-see how the cursor moves into the tape display?
2.
3.
4.
5.
Toggle INurn Lock! off. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor just before 33.
Press (W to mark the start of the calculation.
Move to 67 and change 67 to 66.
Finally, move past the last plus sign and press fIID to mark the end of the
calculation. On most displays, SideKick Plus highlights the marked
block. Toggle INurn Lock! on.
To recalculate the block, press @ and then Calculate Block. The
result-462-appears in the main display. Press fEJ to leave the tape and
return to the Calculator.
Using the Repeat and Constant Facilities
When you have many identical entries, you don't have to type in the
number repeatedly. You can just press the operator key. For example, with
the first column showing the handwritten expression and the second the
calculator display,
33 + 5 + 5 + 5
44 - 2 - 2 - 2
= 48
= 38
You can use this feature to erase an entry, for example:
11 + 22 + 33 + 44
56 (Mistake!)
64
+
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
55 (Correction) = 165
This repeat feature also works on intermediate entries:
5 + 23 = 28 + 28 + 28 = 84
When you press 1...... 1 or 8, the result becomes a constant, so multiplication
and division by that number is easy. For example,
18.01
18.01
18.01
* 300 = 5403
* 20 = 360.2
* 15.01 = 270.3301
12345 / 200 = 61.725
8721 / 200 = 43.605
456 / 200 = 2.28
-> 1 Space I (jJ(IDQ~(jJ
-> ~~ 1......
-> (jJ@Q~(jJ 1...... 1
I!J
@~~ 1...... 1
1
-> (jJ~@aJ@ (]J
-> (ID1ZJ~(jJ 1......
-> aJ@@ 1...... 1
~~~ 1...... 1
1
The Memory
The Calculator has a memory that you can use for temporary storage of
numbers, just like on a pocket calculator. SideKick Plus also allows you to
minimize keystrokes by performing basic functions within the memory.
Let's store 200 into the memory.
~~~WQJ Memory Add
To remind you that something is in memory, Mem appears in the main
display window border. Now, let's check that 200 is stored by clearing the
display and recalling it from memory:
I
Space
I
WQJ Memory Recall
Now, do a memory calculation:
WQJ Memory Clear
I
Space
I
~~~WQJ Memory Add
~aJ~WQJ Memory Add
~@~WQJ Memory Add
WQJ Memory Recall
You'll see the total 710 in the main display and <710> MR in the tape
display.
This is as much as we'll cover on the Business Calculator in this tutorial.
Chapter 10 has more information about this and the other types of
calculators: Scientific, Programmer, and Formula.
Chapter 3, Getting to Know the Applications
65
Press
~
to exit SideKick Plus for now.
Review
In this tutorial, you learned how to
•
•
•
•
•
enter numbers into the Business Calculator
perform +, -, I, and * calculations
use the electronic tape
use Repeat and Constant calculations
calculate with the Memory
You now have a better grasp of the basic tools SideKick Plus offers and a
working knowledge of the program. In the next chapter, you'll practice a
few more advanced uses of the applications. You also have the option of
learning to use SideKick Plus for programming.
It shouldn't take you much time to go through the exercises in Chapter 4.
Then you can move on to the reference guide and study each application in
depth.
66
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
4
A Tutorial
Perhaps you're a little overwhelmed with the many features SideKick Plus
offers and aren't sure of what you can do with them. This chapter
demonstrates some typical uses. It has two parts: One part suggests ways
you can use SideKick Plus in the office; the second shows you how to use
SideKick Plus as a programming aid. These (advanced) tutorials build on
the concepts you learned in Chapter 3.
SideKick Plus in the Office
This section shows you how to use SideKick Plus to manage your professional concerns: take messages, postpone meetings, post electronic mail,
and write reports. We assume you have SideKick Plus loaded and
activated.
Taking Messages with the Notepad
With up to nine Notepads at your fingertips, you can be really organized
when Robin phones or Lars gives you the sales figures:
1. Open the Notepad with ~lEJ.
2. Use (!J or L!J to move to the Notepad you want to open.
3. Press I+--II.
Alternately, you can use ~(] through ~12l to open aNotepad by number
from almost anywhere within SideKick Plus. Try it.
Chapter 4, A Tutorial
67
Remember, you can press f!lJ periodically to save your file and any changes
to it.
If you are taking phone messages, it's useful to know the time and date you
wrote them. A Phonebook attached note can do this automatically for you.
At the very beginning of the file (Line 1, Column 1), type in
. LOG
Now, every time you open the note, the Notepad places the current time
and date at the bottom of the note and inserts a line below it. Your message
note file then looks like the one in the following figure.
c: ,SKP,NOTES. TXT
• LOG
============
Line 4 Col 1
Z: 1GpM Jan Z1,1988
Itt • Insert Indent Margin G5
F1 Help
F3 He", File
FZ Saue File
F4 Print
Notepad
==========
FS ZOOM
FG S",itch
F7 Begin Blk
Fa End Blk
Z: 1GpM
F9
F1B Menu
Esc-Exit
Figure 4.1: Logging Messages in the Notepad
Rescheduling a Meeting with the Time Planner
Martin phones to tell you he can't make the 3:30 pm meeting today. He'd
like to reschedule the meeting for another time.
SideKick Plus makes rescheduling easy with the Time Planner's Search
Vacant Time command. Let's assume you've already entered the meeting
into the Time Planner at 3:30 pm with a planned finish at 5:00 pm. The rest
of your week is fairly crowded.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Activate the Time Planner with llliUJ.
Open the Appointment Book with I+-ll.
Move the cursor to the 3:30 pm meeting time.
Press fEQJ(IDl21 for Search Vacant Time.
Change the Appointment Duration option to 90 minutes, since this is
how long you planned to meet (3:30 pm through 5:00 pm).
68
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
6. Press
lIJ to move the cursor to Begin Search and press ' ..... 1.
If the time or date isn't convenient, you can find another time with the
following keys:
-(£ill[!J
-(£illlIJ
-(£illS
-(£illS
Moves the cursor to a later free time on the same day.
Moves the cursor to an earlier free time on the same day.
Moves the cursor to a vacant time on a previous or current
day.
Moves the cursor to a vacant time on the current or future day.
You can now reschedule the meeting to a mutually convenient time. To do
so, you use the Edit Tag and Edit Move commands. Let's say you found a
convenient time for the meeting at 9:00 am Thursday.
1. If you need to, press ~ill to open the Time Planner, and press , ~ I for
the Appointment Book.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the appointment.
3. Press (W to tag the appointment.
4. Move the cursor to Thursday 9:00 am.
5. Press lIi9m~ for the Edit Move command.
Sending Electronic Mail with the Phonebook
Having rescheduled the meeting with the Time Planner, you now need to
tell the others of the new time. Fortunately, everyone invited to the meeting
has a mailbox on MCI. You can use the Notepad to create the message and
the Phonebook to send it.
Let's first create the message with the Notepad:
1. Activate the Notepad with ~0J. If necessary, use File List to display the
Notepad Selection window.
2. Move to the note you want to use for the message (say, Notepad
number 4).
3. Press ~ to move to the file name area.
4. Type SENDMAIL.MCI and press '~I.
5. Type the message in exactly the format shown-we know what prompts
Mel will issue, so wecan anticipate our response. (You may have more
than two recipients or copies):
Chapter 4, A Tutorial
69
Name of Recipient
Name of Recipient
~
Name of CC person
Name of CC person
(EI
Subject (EI
Place the message
~
~
(Optional)
(EI (Optional)
(EI (Optional)
here.
For example, here's what the actual text could look like:
Bert Wang
Mogens Glad
Kurt Hansen
Robert Sassoon
Sales Meeting
Dear Everyone,
I've changed the sales meeting to 9:00 am, April 14th, 1988. I hope that is OK.
Martin
6. When you finish typing in your message, press ~ to save it to disk.
Now, let's use the Phonebook to send it. Since this is the first time you've
used SideKick Plus to send electronic mail, you need to set the Phonebook
to use the local MCl phone number, your name, and your password.
To start, let's activate the Phonebook and load the electronic mail
Phonebook.
1. Activate the Phonebook with ~0.
2. Press ill§ New Phonebook or (E]J to load a new Phonebook.
3. Type Mer .ADR and press I +-II. This loads the MCI.ADR Phonebook, which
contains some sample logon Scripts for MCI electronic mail services.
4. Next, you need to change the MCl phone number. Move to the Index
MClSEND and press I Space I to open the form.
5. Change the phone number to your local MCl number.
6. Press ~ to return to the Summary window.
Now, you need to place your MCl name and password into the Glossary to
keep them a secret. We explain the Glossary in detail in Chapter 9. For now,
just follow these steps:
1. Press ill§ Glossary Edit. The Glossary window opens, which looks just
like the Summary window but in which you can edit Glossary entries.
70
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C: ,SKP,I'CI. ADR
- Index
Nil/lte
Logon to I'CI (Both Ser'uices)
=tel
o 475
=teIBOTH Gets and Sends I'CI Mail
o 475
=teIBOTHA Gets and Sends I'CI Mail (Aduanced)
o 475
=teIGET
Gets I'CI Mail
o 475
=teIGETA Gets I'CI Mail (Aduanced Ser'uice)
o 475
=teISEtt> Sendsl'ClMail
o 475
C: 'SKP-.PHONE. GIS
-SYMbol
CoMMent
MCinaMe
Js;Mith
MCipslJ
falalala
Tab-Next field
ShHt-Tab-Pr'euious Field
Phone nUMber' - 0981
0981
0981
0981
0981
0981
Expansion
2:21pM =
Es:c-SuMMar'Y UindolJ
Figure 4.2: The Glossary Window
2. Type in your password to the Glossary (write it down somewhere until
you're sure you won't forget it). Make the password memorable, since
Borland cannot recover the Glossary if you forget the password.
3. Type MCINAME in the Symbol column.
4. Press (§§l twice to enter your MCl name within quotes, for example
"JSMITH", in the Expansion column.
5. Press (W Insert Line and type MCIPSW in the Symbol column.
6. Press (§§l twice to enter your MCl password within quotes in the
Expansion column, for example "FALALALA".
7. Press (W Change Password.
8. Press ~ to leave the Glossary and return to the Summary window.
You can now send your electronic mail, provided you have an internal
Hayes or Hayes-compatible modem installed. If your modem is external or
non-Hayes-compatible, you'll have to change some Phonebook settings (see
Chapter 8) or rebuild your SideKick Plus (Chapter 16).
You learned how to dial a number in the Phonebook tutorial in the previous
chapter. Simply repeat the process at this point to send out your mail. Press
I +-lIon MClSEND or MClSENDA to dial the number and send the message
SENDMAlL.MCI. (Remember to specify the drive and directory with the
file name if you need to; for example, C: \SKPLUS\SENDMAIL .MCr.)
At this point, the Phonebook will implement the Script contained in
MClSEND, automatically logging you on and responding to MCl's
prompts. After running through the Script, it returns you to the Phonebook
Summary window.
Chapter 4, A Tutorial
71
Writing a Report with Outlook: The Outline
Processor
Now that you've informed everyone of the new meeting time, you can
write the sales report for the meeting. Outlook is ideal for this, so let's use it
together with some other SideKick Plus applications.
First you need the names and addresses of the participants at the top of the
report. You probably already have them in your Phonebook, so let's use
Quick Paste to copy them into an attached note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press {ill@ to activate Outlook.
Press ~ to change the file name of the first outline.
Type SALESREP and press I ~ I.
Press (!J or lI2I to attach a Notepad to this outline. A Notepad window
opens.
Open the Phonebook with f3IDLEJ. Press lEID to open a new Phonebook file
and type in the name of your Phonebook file.
Use the arrow keys or type the Index first letter to place the cursor at the
first name you want to include.
Press [EJ to open the form with the name, address, and phone
number.
Press {ill~ to paste the form into the attached note in the outline.
Press ~ to return to the outline.
Repeat from step 4 onward until you've included all the people you want
to notify about the meeting. After doing so, you'll have a handy list that
you can refer to later.
Now let's move on to the next part of the report. Say you want to include a
personnel chart of a new sales region in your outline. Let's use another
Outlook window to create the tree or organizational chart and append the
report's attached note.
1. Press {ill@ (or (Ej§ File List) to open the Outline Selection Window and
choose another outline.
2. Move to the second Outlook window, press ~, type the file name CHART,
and press I ~ I.
3. Type the following outline, using the ~ key to indent the second level
of headlines:
Martin Nielsen (Sales Manager)
Hamesh Bhabuta (SkyCam)
72
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Amanda McDonald (Reporter)
Alton Kochberg (Court Jester)
4. Press mgllil@ (Block Output Chart).
5. At the printer prompt, press (!J for File.
6. At the file-name prompt, type CHART. TXT and press I ~ I. The chart is now
printing to the disk.
Now, let's move the chart into a note attached to the SALESREP outline:
1. Open the first outline window with (3]J(].
2. Open an attached note for the chart and leave it open.
3. Press mgill(!J (Insert File). This reads a text file from disk and places the
text below the current cursor position.
4. Type CHART. TXT and press I ~ 1 to read in the file.
5. Press [GJ(] until the top of the chart is on line 1 of the attached note.
6. Press ~ to return to the outline.
Don't concern yourself about the characters that form the border of the
chart boxes in the attached note. These will become horizontal and vertical
lines in the finished file. To preview these boxes, press [GJ@@J or mg@@].
Now go ahead and type in a report:
Summary of last meeting
Open and tabled items
Introduce new sales region
Staff assignments
Office logistics
Information flow to/from headquarters
Projected expenses and income
Impact of new region on existing regions
Other matters
Rewrite the headlines and add attached notes, if you like. You can move the
headlines around, taking the attached notes with them, until the layout of
the report satisfies you.
For a really professional-looking report, let's add a table of contents and
change the page heading. To make a table of contents, follow these steps:
1. Press mg@lEJl9 (Options Print Contents Depth).
2. Type 2 for a depth level of two and press I ~ I. The table of contents will
include all headlines up to the second level.
Chapter 4, A Tutorial
73
Bere's how to change the heading and print the report:
1. You're still in the Print Options menu, so press ill (Options Print Top
Text).
2. Type the heading you want to appear on the top of the page (say, Sales
Report/First Quarter) and press 1...... 1.
3. Press lEJ to print the report, including the table of contents and new
headings.
Sales Report/First Quarter
SUMMar!! or last Meeting
Martin
Nielsen
(Sales
Manager)
I
HiI/I1esh
Bhabuta
(SkyCaM)
Pause
I
AManda
McDonald
(Reporter)
Alton
Kochberg
(Court
Jester)
Esc-Abort
Space-Conti nue
Figure 4.3: The Printed Chart
Review
You're done with the first half of this tutorial. You learned how to
• activate Notepads using 1EIl[l through 1EIl12l
• track messages with the Notepad .LOG command
.reschedule appointments with the Time Planner Find Vacant Time
command
.use the Notepad Selection Window to change the file name of a note
(SENDMAIL.MCI)
• change the Glossary in the Phonebook
• send a message using the Phonebook
• Quick Paste from the Phonebook into an Outlook attached note with
I!ID~
• create an organizational chart using the Outlook Block Output chart
command
74
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
• read the chart into an Outlook attached note with the Insert File
command
• make a table of contents when printing with the Outlook Options
Number Contents command
• change the heading at the top of the printed page with the Outlook
Options Print Top text command
SideKick Plus for Programming (Advanced)
SideKick Plus is the ideal tool to use while programming. In up to nine
Outlook and nine Notepad windows, you can create a broad outline of
your program and edit it. You can use the ASCII table and Programmer
Calculator, and take advantage of SideKick Plus's numerous other features.
This section shows how you can use SideKick Plus to be a more productive
programmer. You'll
•
•
•
•
•
find an ASCII character with the ASCII Table
use the Programmer Calculator for calculations
view and change file attributes with the File Manager
use the Phonebook as a communications terminal
write a program using Outlook: The Outline Processor.
You should have SideKick Plus loaded and activated.
Finding an ASCII Character or Control. Code
The ASCII Table displays the decimal and hexadecimal representations of
each character, up to 255. SideKick Plus makes rummaging around for your
ASCII table a thing of the past. You just press ~0 to activate the ASCII
Table and find the character you need.
This opens two three-column lists of the ASCII characters. Use the cursor
keys or type the desired character and the screen will scroll until the
character you want is at the cursor.
Pressing I +-J I places the character at the cursor position into the Paste
buffer. You can then use the SideKick Plus Copy and Paste facilities on the
Paste buffer to move the character to your program. Let's use Quick Paste
to paste a string of equal signs (=) to your favorite editor. First, open a file
with your editor.
1. Press
G to find = in the ASCII Table.
Chapter 4, A Tutorial
75
2. Press I+--J I until you have built up the string to six equal signs (======).
3. Press (3IDlE to Quick Paste the string ====== to the editor
Performing Calculations
SideKick Plus provides a calculator designed for programmers. It performs
calculations in binary, decimal, and hexadecimal using the normal
mathematical and boolean functions.
1. Press (£liD(3ID to activate SideKick Plus.
2. Press (3IDl9 to activate the Calculator
3. Press till and use the Type Programmer command to move to the
Programmer Calculator. Next time you activate the calculator or
SideKick Plus, this will be the default type of calculator.
4. Use the Options Number Base command to set the number base and
convert the number in the display to that base.
The Options Number Base command is handy for mixed-base calculations.
If you convert bases frequently, you might want to learn the shortcuts:
• (£liD(ID for Options Number Base Binary
• (£liD[0 for Options Number Base Decimal
• (£liDiEl for Options Number Base Hexadecimal
For example, to calculate the answer to 23 + 56H + 10101B (=82H) in
hexadecimal, press
(£ElJ[0
~(ID
B
(£ElJiEl
ml~
B
(£ElJ(ID
I]~I]~I]
G
(£ElJiEl
All the boolean functions are on the Functions menu and have shortcuts. To
get the answer to (10010B AND 10000B) OR 10011B, for instance, press
76
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
ill
lW19@
(for the Options Base Binary command)
(]j§Jj§J(]j§J
lWill0
(for Functions And)
(]j§Jj§Jj§Jj§J
lWillW19
(for Functions Or)
(]j§Jj§J(](]
rn
8
Dumping Files and Changing File Attributes
The File Manager lets you dump files in hexadecimal or ASCII and change
DOS file attributes.
The File Manager performs all its operations on files or directories via the
File command. This command works on a marked block of files or, when
there is no block marked, the file at the cursor.
Here's how to view a file in hexadecimal:
•
•
•
•
Press ~ill to activate the File Manager.
Move to the file name you wish to view.
Press lWlIJf2JfE] for the File View Hexadecimal command.
Press (§J to finish.
If you mark a block of files with the Mark command, you can view the files
with the File View Hexadecimal command. The File Manager shows you
the first file, then you press I~ I to move to the next file. When you've
looked at all the files, press (§J to exit.
Similarly, you can change the marked block's file attributes. Let's do it for
all the files in the current directory.
• Press lW~0 for the Mark All command.
• Press lWill0l:ID for File Attributes Set command. This allows you to turn
on the file attributes of the block of files: Read Only, Hidden, System,
and Archive.
• Press 0 to tum on the Archive attribute for all the files in the block and
watch the File Manager change the attributes.
You can now use the BACKUP program (supplied with DOS) to save all the
marked files to floppy disks, independent of any changes to the files. This is
very useful for transferring entire directories from one computer to another.
Chapter 4, A Tutorial
77
Using the Phonebook as a Communications Terminal
The Phonebook turns your computer into a sophisticated terminal, in
addition to its other features. This means you can connect it to another
computer, to a debugger that sends output to a serial port, or to a modem.
You can convert a Phonebook entry into a communications terminal. Here's
how:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press (3]JW to activate the Phonebook.
Press ~l +-11 to create a new entry
Fill in the form without a phone number.
Press (G to finish.
Press I ~ on the entry to turn the Phonebook into a communications
terminal if you're hooked up to another computer or a modem. You can use
the Parameters command to change the communications settings while online. Press (EID to Disconnect the communications terminal and (G to return
to the Summary window. For more information, see Chapter 8.
1
Writing a Program with Outlook: The Outline
Processor
Outlook: The Outline Processor brings a new dimension to programming.
You can write the pseudocode, reorganize and edit it until it is finally
correct, and then write the program itself.
Let's take the pseudocode for a simple program:
program AddTwoNumbers
ReadTwoNumbers(FirstNumber,SecondNumber)
AddThem(Result)
PrintResult(Result)
end
Now,let's enter it into Outlook:
1.
2.
3.
4.
78
Press (3]J(QJ to activate Outlook.
Press ~ to change the file name of the first outline.
Type ADDTWO and press I ~ I.
Enter the preceding pseudocode.
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Use the EJ and G keys to display a more detailed or less detailed view of
the pseudocode.
To make the pseudocode into a program, you can add variable
declarations, change the procedure names into the correct syntax, and
include the code for the program into an attached note. For example, a
listing of the Turbo Pascal translation of the pseudocode follows: You can
load in the outline, called TESTPAS on the Examples distribution disk, or
type it in yourself. If you type it in, be sure to read the comments in the
right margin, although you don't need to enter them.
program AddTwoNumbers;
Levell
Levell
(* Levell
(* Level 2
(* Attach a note to Integers
(* In the Attached note
(* In the Attached note
(* In the Attached note
(* Level 1
(*
(*
var
(*
Integers *)
FirstNum
SecondNum
Result
Integer;
Integer;
Integer;
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
(* Lower Level Procedures *)
(* Levell *)
procedure ReadTwoNumbers(var FirstNum,
(* On One Line *)
(* Level 2 *)
SecondNum : integer) ;
(* Attach a note to the procedure *)
begin
(* In the Attached note *)
Write('Enter first number: ');
(* In the Attached note *)
ReadLn(FirstNum);
(* In the Attached note *)
(* In the Attached note *)
Write('Enter second number: ');
ReadLn(SecondNum);
(* In the Attached note *)
Writeln;
end;
(* In the Attached note *)
procedure AddThem(var Result,
(* On one line
FirstNum, SecondNum :integer);
(* Level 2
(* Attach a note to the procedure
begin
(* In the Attached note
Result := FirstNum + SecondNum;
(* In the Attached note
end;
(* In the Attached note
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
(* Level 2
the procedure
Attached note
Attached note
Attached note
*)
(* Levell
(* Attach a note to begin
(* In the note
(* In the note
(* In the note
(* Level 1
*)
procedure PrintResult(var Result: integer);
begin
WriteLn('The result is ' ,Result);
end;
begin
ReadTwoNumbers(FirstNum,SecondNum);
AddThem(Result,FirstNum,SecondNum);
PrintResult(Result);
end.
Chapter 4, A Tutorial
(* Attach a note to
(* In the
(* In the
(* In the
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
*)
79
program AddTwoNumbers;
== var
== (* Integers *)
(*
==
==
==
Lower Level Procedures *)
procedure ReadTwoNumbers(var FirstNum,SecondNum:integer);
procedure AddThem(var Result,FirstNum,SecondNum:integer);
procedure PrintResult(var Result: integer);
== begin (* Main Program *)
end.
(*
Main Program
*)
Figure 4.4: Turbo Pascal Program as an Outline
Since the program is an outline, you can selectively check different headline
levels. In addition, Outlook accepts over 2,000 headlines, so you won't run
out of space quickly.
Once your program is in an outline, you can save it in Outlook format with
however, most compilers prefer text files. Use the Block Write to File
command to convert the outline into a text file. This command takes a
marked block and converts it into the correct ASCII characters for a text
file.
~;
In the case of a Borland compiler, it is most efficient to read it into Borland's
Turbo editor (if possible) and compile it. If your compiler has no editor, you
can compile the text file with the errors going to disk, and read the errors
into a SideKick Plus Notepad. Following is an example using the batch
version of Turbo C:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
80
Press lWmJ~ for the Block Write to File command.
Type the file name TEST. PAS and press I +-ll.
Reply l] to the prompt No block defined. Save all the outline (YIN)?
Close SideKick Plus with l£illl!IfJ and return to DOS.
Type TCC TEST.PAS > ERROR.MSG to compile the Turbo Pascal program
with Turbo C and send the error messages to the file ERROR.MSG.
Reactivate SideKick Plus with l£illl!IfJ. You are back in your outline.
Press l!IfJWJ to activate the Notepad.
Press iEliI to change the first file name to ERROR.MSG and press I +-ll.
This opens a Notepad with the error messages in it.
Use l!IfJWJ or l!IfJ@ to switch between the two windows, moving and
resizing them if necessary.
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Outlook's sophisticated outline processing lets you produce a crossreference listing (table of contents) or a tree chart. (See "Writing a Report
with Outlook" earlier in this chapter.) Most of the time, however, you'll just
want a listing of the program. Outlook's default settings are for reports and
not programs, so let's change the settings.
1. Press lIi§f§~ for the Options Write menu. This menu contains options
that control printing and writing the outline to disk.
2. Press ill for Indent and another menu opens. This controls the
indentation of the outline.
3. Change Size to 0 and press I +-II. Outlook no longer indents when
printing or writing a text file-you get the program just as you typed it.
4. Press ~ twice to return to the Options menu.
5. Press lIi§f§(ID for the Options Save command. This saves the settings to
the active SKPLUS.EXE file.
With these settings, you can use Outlook to produce legible listings.
Review
To use SideKick Plus in programming, you learned how to
• find a character with the ASCII table
• export a string of ASCII characters using the Quick Paste key ~~
• use the Programmer Calculator for calculations with binary, decimal, and
hexadecimal, using the Options Base command
• use the Programmer Calculator's boolean functions on the Functions
Programmer menu
• dump files in hexadecimal with the File Manager's File View Hexadecimal command
• change File attributes with the File Manager's File Attributes command
• use the Phonebook as a communications terminal
• write a program with Outlook
• use the Block Write to File command to translate the outline to text
• use a Notepad to collect the compiler error messages
• print well-formatted program listings with the Options Write menu
You should be fairly comfortable with the applications by now. Let's move
on to an explanation of the Clipboard and how you copy and paste text
with SideKick Plus.
Chapter 4, A Tutorial
81
82
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
5
Copying, Pasting, and the Clipboard
This chapter provides complete information about the Clipboard and the
Copy and Paste facilities in SideKick Plus. Specifically, it discusses
•
•
•
•
•
•
the Clipboard
copying from the screen to the Clipboard
copying from a SideKick Plus application to the Clipboard
pasting from the Clipboard
quick pasting
the Setup Clipboard menu
The Clipboard
The Clipboard is the storeroom for all the text transferred with the Copy
and Paste operations. It is a Notepad with impermanent contents and all
the usual commands (see Chapter 7). This means you can edit the text in
the Clipboard.
Each Copy or Quick Paste operation puts the text into the top of the
Clipboard as a marked block. When the Clipboard gets full, it deletes just
enough of the text at the end of the Clipboard to squeeze the new block in
at the top.
You set the size of the Clipboard with the Services Setup Clipboard menu.
However, if you Copy a bigger block than the size stipulated, the Clipboard
expands to fit the size of the block. When you delete this larger than normal
block, the Clipboard shrinks down to its usual size.
Chapter 5, Copying, Pasting, and the Clipboard
83
Use the Services Edit Clipboard command or press
board.
~([I
to edit the Clip-
Here are the key combinations or shortcuts you use to Copy and Paste:
t£EI~
Copies a marked block from the screen (underlying program) to
the Clipboard
1mB
Copies a marked block from a SideKick Plus application to the
Clipboard
Im~
Pastes a marked block in a SideKick Plus application to the
underlying program. Also known as Quick Paste.
t£EljEJ
Pastes the marked block in the Clipboard to the underlying
program or SideKick Plus application
As you can see, you use
CSEII~
and
l£ElJjEJ outside SideKick Plus.
The following sections describe each process in detail.
Copying to the Clipboard
When you load SideKick Plus, the Copy from Screen to the Clipboard
command automatically becomes available for your use in any program
(shortcut CSEII~). You don't need to call up SideKick Plus to use this
function.
You just do the following:
1. From whatever program you're in, press l£ElJ1E3. A new message line
appears at the bottom of the screen, showing what keys you press to
begin and end marking a block, move the cursor, and exit.
2. Use the cursor keys to move to the start of the block.
3. Press lID or [EDfIDlID to start the block.
4. Use the cursor keys to move to the end of the block.
5. Press I+-II or l£ElJ([I([I to copy the block to the Clipboard.
The screen block is now in the Clipboard as a marked block. From within
SideKick Plus, use fmB or the Services Copy from Screen to Clipboard
command.
84
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
If you'd like to move the cursor more quickly around the marked block,
there are several handy commands to do so. Following are the horizontal
cursor-movement commands:
Go to Previous Character
Moves the cursor one character to the left.
Go to Next Character
l£ill~ or
B
Moves the cursor one character to the right.
Go Left 10 Characters
Moves the cursor ten characters to the left.
Go Right 10 Characters
Moves the cursor ten characters to the right.
l£illWor
l£illB
Go to Start of Line
Moves the cursor to the first character on the line.
Go to End of Line
Moves the cursor to the last character of the line.
Following are the vertical cursor-movement commands:
Go to Previous Line
l£ill~ or [!J
Moves the cursor up one line.
Go to Next Line
l£ill~ or (!J
Moves the cursor to the line below.
Go Up 4 Lines
Moves the cursor four lines above the current line.
Go Down 4 Lines
Moves the cursor four lines below the current line.
Go to Top of Screen
Moves the cursor to the first line of the screen.
Go to Bottom of Screen
Moves the cursor to the bottom line of the screen.
Go to Top Left of Screen
Moves the cursor to the first character position on the screen.
Go to Bottom Right of Screen
Moves the cursor to the last character position on the screen.
Chapter 5, Copying, Pasting, and the Clipboard
85
Pasting from the Clipboard
When you load SideKick Plus, the Paste from Clipboard command
automatically becomes available even when SideKick Plus isn't open. That
is, you don't need to activate SideKick Plus to use this function. Its shortcut
is f£illlEJ.
When SideKick Plus is active, use
Clipboard command.
f£illlEJ or the Services Paste from
Quick Paste
Quick Paste {(3]J~) is equivalent to this series of commands:
• press Services Copy from Application to Clipboard
• deactivate the application
• press Services Paste from Clipboard
When you're in SideKick Plus, the Quick Paste command is handy for exporting information from one application to another or to the DOS prompt.
It shows up as a menu option (Services Quick Paste) when you have a
marked block in an application.
Like the Services Copy from Application to Clipboard command, the
information pasted is whatever is marked in the application. The Clipboard
keeps a copy of the information and makes it the currently marked block.
The Setup Clipboard Menu
Use the Services Setup Clipboard menu (shortcut iml:ID(fj) to vary the speed,
size, end of line character, and method of pasting. Following is a
description of each item on the menu:
Services Setup Clipboard Delay between Characters
Sets the delay between each character sent to the application beneath. You
won't need this for any SideKick Plus application, but you may need it for
other programs, such as Sprint or WordStar.
Services Setup Clipboard End of Line Character
Sets the characters added to the end of each line pasted from the Clipboard
or with Quick Paste.
86
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Services Setup Paste Method
When set to BLOCK, SideKick Plus pastes the whole of the marked block in
the Clipboard to the application underneath. When set to LINE, each time
you use the Services Paste from Clipboard or Services Quick Paste command, SideKick Plus pastes a single line from the Clipboard marked block.
Services Setup Clipboard Size
The default size of the Clipboard in Kbytes.
Chapter 5, Copying, Pasting, and the Clipboard
87
88
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
p
A
R
T
2
Reference Guide to the Applications
89
90
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
6
The File Manager
With the File Manager, you can
• copy, delete, move, rename, print, view, and change attributes in files
• move directories
• format disks
And you can select these commands even while you're in a SideKick Plus
application or another program.
This chapter provides complete information about all the features and
commands in the File Manager. If you haven't used it before, we suggest
you read the File Manager tutorial in Chapter 3. Furthermore, if you are
new to tree-structured directories and DOS, read" A DOS Primer"
(Appendix C).
Activating the File Manager
You can activate the File Manager on its own or from within any SideKick
Plus application.
First bring up SideKick Plus with l£EDl!]], then do one of these alternatives:
• Call up the main menu and, if necessary, move the cursor to File Manager and press I appears in the size column, it means the
name is a directory name.
The mark> indicates a marked file.
The possible attributes are
R read-only file
H hidden file
S system file
A archive; file has been amended since the last backup procedure
For the wide view:
SK.EXE
The file or directory name
>
A marked file
The Function Keys
The last three lines of the screen contain the function keys and the message
line. Following are the function keys specific to the Summary window.
94
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
~ Dir
Opens a window in which you specify which directory or files you want
displayed in the window, for example, c: \SKPLUS\ *. *. The same as the
Directory command. See page 96.
IBJ Print
Prints the marked files or the file at the cursor. The same as File Print
command. See page 101.
lW Begin Blk
Marks the beginning of a block. See page 99.
(EID End Blk
Marks the end of a block.
(f2J Type
Displays the contents of the marked files or the file at the cursor. The same
as the File View At Cursor command. See page 100.
Finding a File
To find a file name in the File Manager, you use the cursor and alphabetic
keys.
To find a file by its first letter, type the first letter of the file name or
directory. The cursor jumps to the first file name with that letter. If you
repeatedly press the letter, the File Manager will move the cursor through
all the files with that first letter.
To move the cursor around, you use the same keys as in every other
SideKick Plus application. You can change them with the Options Go to
menu.
Options Go to First Column
lEliD~lID or
Wide view: Moves the cursor horizontally to the first file in the row.
Full view: Moves the cursor to the first file in the window.
IHomel
Options Go to Last Column
lEliD~@ or ~
Wide view: Moves the cursor horizontally to the last file in the row.
Full view: Moves the cursor to the last file in the window.
Options Go to Next Column
lEliD@ or EJ
Wide view only: Moves the cursor by one file name nearer to the last file
name in the window.
Options Go to Previous Column
lEliDlID or 6
Wide view only: Moves the cursor by one file name nearer to the first file
name in the window.
Chapter 6, The File Manager
95
Options Go to First File
Moves the cursor to the first file.
Options Go to Last File
Moves the cursor to the last file.
Options Go to Previous File
19i1l[l or
Moves the cursor to the file name above the current cursor position.
III
Options Go to Next File
19i1lLID or (!J
Moves the cursor to the file name below the current cursor position.
Options Go to Previous Page
19i1llID or ~
Moves the cursor one window-with an overlap of one line-nearer to the
start of the files found by the File Manager.
Options Go to Next Page
19i1lgJ or IPgDnl
Moves the cursor one window-with an overlap of one line-closer to the
end of the files found by the File Manager.
Options Go to Start of Window
Moves the cursor to the first file in the window.
Options Go to End of Window
Moves the cursor to the last file in the window.
Checking the Directories on Your Disk
The File Manager gives you two ways of navigating through the directories
on your hard disk: by using the cursor keys and I +-II, or with the Directory
command.
The simpler way is with the cursor keys. Just select a directory and press
I +-II. The display now reflects the files in that directory.
The Directory command-also shown as ~ DIR--Iets you specify a
directory name and displays the files in that directory.
l£1ill0ilil or ~
Prompts you for a file name and then displays the files in the window. It is
like the DIR command in DOS and accepts the same characters in the file
name. Unlike the DIR command, however, it also changes directories if you
set the Options Automatic change command to YES.
Directory
Options Automatic Change of Directory
l£1ill(£l~
When YES, any change of directory in the File Manager will change the
drive and directory at the DOS level. When NO, any change of directory
only changes the directory in the File Manager window. The DOS prompt
96
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
doesn't change if you use the PROMPT $P $G prompt (see the DOS primer if
you don't understand this), until you press ' ...... 1.
Sorting the Files
When DOS gives the file names to the File Manager, they are unsorted. You
can sort them in several ways using the Options Order by command. The
File window re-sorts when you leave the menus.
Options Order by
~lID(]J
Sets the order of the file names in the file window. You can choose from
• MS-DOS
• Name
• Extension
• Date
• Size
• Type
No sorting done. The quickest option.
Sorts file names alphabetically, ascending or descending.
Sorts file name extensions alphabetically, ascending or
descending.
Puts the file with the earliest date at the top, ascending or
descending.
Puts the file with the smallest size at the top, ascending or
descending.
Sets the order of the sort according to the options in the
following table.
Table 6.1: The Sort Order
Order by
Ascending
Descending
MS-DOS
Name
Extension
Date
Size
No effect (default)
A at the top
A extension at the top
Earliest at the top
Smallest at the top
No effect (default)
Z at the top
Z extension at the top
Latest at top
Biggest at top
Searching Files
One problem with tree-structured directories is remembering where you
put a file. The Search command solves that problem since the File Manager
can quickly locate a requested file.
The Search command pops up a menu with four commands, which you use
to specify where to search and for what. If you alter one of these commands
and press ' ...... 1, what happens depends on how the other three are set. Say
you change the Search String command. The File Manager looks in and
Chapter 6, The File Manager
97
below the current directory if the Search Files setting is the current directory and Search Directories Below setting is YES.
Let's examine the commands more closely.
Search File
[£ill@[]
Searches for a file name in all directories below the one you are in. If the file
name does not contain a directory, the File Manager uses the current
directory. It is similar to the LOCATE.COM or WHEREIS.COM programs
some manufacturers supply with DOS. For example, if you want to search
for the file RUSSELL.TXT throughout your hard disk, you would
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press lW Search.
Be sure String is blank and Directories Below is set to YES.
Type \RUSSELL. TXT at the Files option.
Press 1~1.
Search String
EE1@0
Searches for a string of characters in all directories at and below the current
directory. It is a literal match and only understands text files. To search for
the string Spoiled rotten in all your *.TXT files,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set Directories Below to YES.
Set Files to \ *.TXT.
Press [!J.
Set String to Spoiled rotten.
Press I ~ I.
Search Directories Below
When toggled to YES, searches all subdirectories including and below the
one specified in the Files command. (If you have a lot of files, this can take
some time.) When toggled to NO, searches only the directory specified in
the Files command.
Search Case Sensitive
When toggled to YES, differentiates between uppercase and lowercase
strings. When left in the default, NO, lowercase characters are the same as
uppercase. Searching is much quicker when case sensitivity is toggled on.
Marking Files and Directories
Most of the File Manager commands work on one or more files. To tell the
File Manager you want to work on a group of files, you must mark them
98
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
with one of the commands on the Mark Entries menu. The symbol ~
appears beside the files that are marked. Note: The plus key indicated here
is the one on the numeric keypad.
Let's describe the Mark Entries menu.
Mark Entries Toggle
~lEJill or EI
Toggles the marking of the current file name: An unmarked file name
becomes marked, while a marked file name becomes unmarked. If you
unmark a file name in the middle of a continuous block, the block splits
into two.
Mark Entries All
Marks all the files in the window.
Mark Entries Begin Block
Marks the beginning of a continuous block of file names.
Mark Entries End Block
Marks the end of a continuous block of file names.
Mark Entries Unmark All
~lEJWJ
Removes all the marks you have made. You must use the other Mark
commands to replace the marks after this command.
File and Directory Operations
At the heart of the File Manager are the actions you perform on files and
directories. The File menu lists all of these operations, which operate on the
file or directory names selected with the Mark Entries menu. This section
describes the operations available through the File menu. (SideKick Plus
treats a directory as simply a grouping of files, so the File menu covers
directories as well as files.)
Viewing
There are two ways to view a file on the screen: text and hexadecimal.
Don't worry if hexadecimal is gibberish to you. It's a feature that programmersuse.
File View
~lEJ(ID
Opens a menu with the following choices: Block, At Cursor, and Hexadecimal.
Chapter 6, The File Manager
99
File View Block
Displays the text of the marked files or the file at the cursor. A window
opens in which you can use the cursor keys to scroll the file in the window.
Press I+-J I to stop viewing the current file and move to the next file, if there
is one. ~ ends the view operation and returns you to the File Manager
window.
File View At Cursor
Displays the text of the file at the cursor.
File View Hexadecimal
Displays the marked files or file at the cursor as hexadecimal numbers and
ASCn text. A window opens in which you can use the cursor keys to scroll
the file. See Figure 6.3. Press I+-J I to stop viewing the current file and move
on to the next file, if there is one. Press ~ to end View and return to the
File Manager window. You can also print hexadecimal files; see the
following section.
F OlH'II'C FILE C: \SKP\PAYRAISE. OTL
OOBBOO0B lA 93 lA FF 00 FF FF FF
00000B1B 73 E5 &4 &9 73 &3 75 73
OOOOBB2B Bl 00 41 00 of 75 oE F4
OOBBBB3B FF B8 FE FF Bl 00 49 27
00000B4B 74 E5 09 EE 74 &8 E5 00
00000B5B FE FF Bl 00 C9 74 01 oB
OOBBOOOB oE 03 E8 &2 72 oS 01 oB
0000007B 77 of 72 EB of 7& oS 72
OOBBBBSB of 75 F4 05 78 74 72 El
OOBBBB9B 00 C9 03 01 EE oA 75 &4
OOBBBBAB 05 01 &4 &C &9 oE E5 oE
OOBBBBBB oB oS 7B 74 FF B8 FE FF
OOBBBBCB 07 72 09 7B E5 01 &2 of
OOBBOODB £'0 E5 74 EF 00 F9 03 £,F
OOBOO0EB 00 FE FF 00 00 C9 £,F £'3
OOBBBBFB &C F9 &2 72 £'9 bE E7 77
OOBOO10B EE 77 &5 £,5 bB £,5 bE £,4
0000011B £,B &9 &C &C 73 FF B8 FE
00000120 74 &8 E5 72 09 £07 &8 F4
0000013B &C &C F3 && £OF F2 74 £'8
FF 5B
73 09
of Eo
EO oE
of 72
E5 73
73 FF
74 09
7B 01
07 E5
oS oS
Bl BB
75 F4
77 £,F
£03 £01
£OF 72
73 FF
FF FF
0009
E5 bA
01
of
45
&5
oE
79 20 72 01 09
oE
&&
7&
09
&8 of
00 FE
00 E5
79 FF
FF
&&
05
oE
72
FF
77
00
77 &8 &5
04 F3 74
C9 &4 of
of 7& 05
72 £,B 05
73 &9 £OF
EB &8 £OF
00 FE FF
FF C9 &8
F8 of Eb
£OF &2 FF
00 FF FF
of 72 74
F2 &C 01
07 FF B8
F4 &C 75
00 00 C9
&9 74 &8
FE FF Be
EE El &4
EF &2 E5
oE 27 F4
72 74 09
72 73 FF
£,E £01 &C
£'0 E5 £,F
FF FF 53
£,1 7& E5
73 oB &9
B8 FE FF
••.•••••• Pa!>rai
s. discussion ...•
.• AMoun. o. Effort
••.•.• I' • neue.la
t. i. tho Morning .•
••••• tak.s:hor.lu
nc. breaks •.••.••
IJOr. ouerUM. uith
ou. extr. pa!l .••••
.. ca. Judg. uhe .. d
eadlin. need. t. b.
kept ••••••• don' •
grip. abou. ouerU
M. t. M. cOlJOrkers.
•••••• occasional
I.brin.lJOr.hoM.o
.ueekends •••.•• S
ki lIs ••••..• hau.
th.righ.MLo.ski
11. fo. th. Job ...•
~=========================================4:3B~=
Fl Help
F2
F3
F4
F5 ZOOM
F7
Fo Suitch
F8
-Uieu Next File
.w
F9
F10
Esc-Exit
Figure 6.3: Viewing a File in Hexadecimal
Printing
Using the File Manager, you can print a list of file names or the contents of
those files. You can change the printer margins with the Services Setup
Printer menu.
File Print
[ED(EJW or lEJ
Prints the marked files or the file at the cursor. After you select Print, a
window prompts you as to whether you want to print the Contents, File
Names, or in Hexadecimal.
100
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
File Print Contents
Prints the contents of the marked files or file at the cursor. The standard
SideKick Plus printer menu displays, asking if you want to print to a
printer, file, or window.
File Print File Names
Prints the names of the marked files or file at the cursor. The standard
SideKick Plus printer menu displays.
File Print Hexadecimal
Prints in the same format as View Hexadecimal.
Copying, Moving, Renaming, and Deleting
File Copy
(gilllEJ(g
Copies the marked files/directories or the file/directory at the cursor to
another file/directory. This command does not alter the files or directories.
It only duplicates them. It is a more powerful version of the DOS COPY
command.
File Move
(gilllEJ~
Moves the marked files/directories or the file/directory at the cursor to
another file/directory. This command does not alter the files or directories.
It only moves them. When you move a directory, there must be enough
spare disk space for at leastk the largest of the files.
File Rename
(gilllEJ@
Renames the marked files/directories or the file/directory at the cursor to
the current file/ directory you are in. If you have marked the files, you must
give a name that allows the File Manager to rename all the files, for
example, using the special * and ? characters. If you don't, the File Manager
renames only the first marked file. This command is equivalent to the
RENAME command in DOS. Like RENAME, it does not change the file,
only its name.
File Delete At Cursor
(gillrn
Deletes the file or directory at the cursor. You can delete a directory even if it
contains files. Deletion cannot be reversed. This is a more powerful version
of the DOS DEL or ERASE command.
File Delete Block
(gilllEJrn
Deletes the marked files/directories or the file/directory at the cursor. You
can delete a directory even if it contains files. Deletion is permanent. This is a
more powerful version of the DOS DEL or ERASE command.
Chapter 6, The File Manager
101
{£EI~~
Options Warnings
When set to YES, the File Manager warns you of any deletion of files and
directories or the creation of a directory using the File Copy, File Move, or
File Delete commands.
Creating a Directory
Create Directory
Creates a new directory that is, by default, below the current directory. The
name can have a path and extension. This is a more powerful version of the
DOS MKDIR command. For example, C:\BORLAND\SKPLUS\SKPLUS.DAT creates
a BORLAND directory off the root directory, with the SKPLUS directory
below BORLAND, and the SKPLUS.DAT directory below SKPLUS.
,,
,
ROOT
the root directory
a directory off the root directory
BORLAND
SKPLUS
a directory off the Borland directory
a file within the SKPLUS directory
SKPLUS.DAT
See Appendix C, A DOS Primer," for a more extensive discussion of
directories.
II
Changing the File Attributes
Under DOS, a file has four flags that give the operating system certain
information about the file. You can manipulate these flags with the File
Manager to allow selective backups using the DOS BACKUP command, or
to protect a specific file from being written to. SideKick Plus shows the
status of these flags in the last columns of the full view File Manager
window.
File Attribute Set
Switches on one of the DOS special flags attached to the file.
File Attribute Clear
Switches off one of the DOS special flags attached to the file.
102
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Here are the special DOS flags.
Read Only
When this flag is ON, you cannot write to or delete the file, though you can
read it. This is ideal for a Common Appointment Book (see Chapter 10), for
example, since nobody can then delete or change appointments.
System
Indicates that the file is part of DOS.
Hidden
Indicates that DOS will ignore the file when it searches the disk for a file
name.
Archive
Indicates that something has changed in the file since your last backup.
When this flag is on, the DOS BACKUP program copies it to a floppy disk.
DOS may occasionally set this flag even when there have been no changes.
Check your DOS manual for more information.
Formatting a Floppy Disk
Have you ever been in the position where you must copy a file but you
have no formatted disks? The File Manager takes care of you with the
Prepare Disk commands.
Prepare Disk
Formats a floppy disk in a variety of ways that you determine with the
commands on the menu. It is equivalent to the FORMAT command in DOS.
Prepare Disk Drive
Where the formatting takes place. On most machines, Drive A: will be the
only choice.
Prepare Disk Label Name
The name given to the disk. When you look at the disk later with the File
Manager, this name appears in the top line of the window.
Prepare Disk Disk Type
In the world of PCs there are four types of disk in common use, and this
command lets you choose among them:
.360 Kbytes, 5-1/4 inch. Mostly used by PCs and compatibles .
• 1.2 Mbytes, 5-1/4 inch. Mostly used by ATs and compatibles.
• 720 Kbytes, 3-1/2 inch. Mostly used by portable PCs and the IBM Personal System/2.
Chapter 6, The File Manager
103
.1.44 Mbytes, 3-1/2 inch. Mostly used by the IBM Personal System/2.
Prepare Disk Start Formatting
Starts formatting the floppy disk you choose. It tells you of its progress and
whether there are any unusable parts of the disk.
Saving the Settings
You can store all the settings of the File Manager using one command.
Options Save Setup
(£ill(§J(ID
This saves the following File Manager settings: all the Options commands;
the current window size, color, and position.
Copying and Pasting
The File Manager exports the marked file names or the file name at the
cursor when you use either the Services Copy from Application or Services
Quick Paste command. You can use this facility in many ways, such as to
send a list of file names to the Notepad as part of a document or to send the
file name to a prompt in the underlying application. In the following
example, you set up commands to select and execute programs at the DOS
prompt:
1. Open the Services menu by holding lm down and selecting it from the
main menu.
2. Toggle Services Setup Clipboard Paste Method to LINE so that the
Clipboard pastes a line at a time.
3. Activate the File Manager with lm(B.
4. Mark a sequence of .BAT, .COM, and .EXE files that you use in a certain
order, such as 123.EXE and PGRAPH.EXE, or TCC.EXE and
TLINK.EXE.
5. Copy the file names to the Clipboard with Services Copy from
Application to Clipboard.
6. Deactivate SideKick Plus with @I~ and return to DOS.
7. Press @lIE!! to paste the first file name from the Clipboard to DOS.
8. Perform some operations inside the program. Exit to DOS.
9. Press (£illlli!] to paste the second file name from the Clipboard to DOS.
When you use Services Paste from Clipboard or Services Quick Paste to the
File Manager, it's like typing the marked lines very rapidly on the key104
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
board. This is very useful for batch operations in the File Manager. For
example, let's copy two floppy disks from Drive A: to C:.
Type the text in the Clipboard:
1. ~Wl£ill1EJ ~
0 Q I +-II
2. ~Wl£ill1EJ 0 I +-II
3. ~Wl£ill1EJ (g (g Q I +-II
4. l£illWl£ill1EJ ~ 0 Q I +-II
5. ~Wl£ill1EJ 0 I +-II
6. ~Wl£ill1EJ (g (g Q I +-II
(Moves you to the A: directory)
(Marks the files and directories on A:)
(Copies the first disk to C:)
(Copies the second disk to C:)
Now, mark the text in the Clipboard:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Go to the top of the text you just typed.
Press ~.
Go to the end of the text you just typed.
Press (EID.
Activate the File Manager with ImID.
Now, toggle Services Setup Clipboard Paste Method to BLOCK, so that
the Clipboard pastes the whole of the block at one time.
7. Finally, press ~lE!J to start the copy.
The commands you typed into the Clipboard have now been performed.
Chapter 6, The File Manager
105
106
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
7
The Notepad
The Notepad application provides up to nine full-screen text editors, so
that you can have nine different sets of notes. Each can hold a 54,000character file. The Notepad editor has all the facilities of the Turbo Pascal
editor and most of WordStar's. If you are familiar with either editor, you'll
find it easy to use the Notepad. In addition, you can print underlined,
boldfaced, or italicized text from the Notepad simply by enclosing the text
within control characters.
While you use the Notepad to enter text, SideKick Plus saves the Notepad
file-just like any other file-to the directory you're in. If you were to do a
DIR command from the directory prompt, you'd see the note file, with the
default. TXT extension, in the list of files.
This chapter describes all the features and commands the Notepad offers. If
you have not used it before, work through the Notepad tutorial in Chapter
3 before going on.
Activating the Notepad
Press l£Iill~ to activate SideKick Plus. From within SideKick Plus, you can
activate the Notepad in anyone of these four ways:
• Hold down ~ until the main menu appears, move the cursor to
Notepad, and press I +-II.
• Press ~W1. This opens the Notepad selection window from within
SideKick Plus if you haven't used the Notepad before. Otherwise, it
opens the last Notepad used.
Chapter 7, The Notepad
107
• Press ~ and any number key other than O. This activates the Notepad
specified by the number key, bypassing the Notepad selection window
and loading the default file name. For example, ~@ gets you to the third
Notepad with the default file name already loaded. (Note: This is the
default. You can change it using INSTALL, so that pressing the number
brings up an outline instead of a Notepad.)
• Press ~ within a SideKick Plus application that uses the Notepad for
attached notes, such as the Time Planner, Phonebook, or Calculator.
The Selection Window
The first time you activate the Notepad with the main menu or ~IB, the
Notepad Selection window opens. It's simply a list of the default file
names, along with the Notepad number, and its size depends on the
number of N otepads you install when you build your SideKick Plus (see
Chapter 15). In the Notepad Selection window, you choose a window
number and type in the file name you want to edit in that window. If you
want to use the default file name, press I +-II to open the selected window.
To rename the Notepad, press (§J and type in the file name you prefer. (§J
also returns the cursor to the Notepad number. Use the Options File Names
command to change the default file names.
C:,SKP
>
rr====
Select Notepad
======;)
" 1 NOTES
2 NOTESZ
3 NOTES3
4 NOTES4
5 NOTESS
D NOTESIJ
7 NOTES?
8 NOTESB
9 NOTES9
"==========
Fl Help
F2
+-+t .I.-Houe
F3
F4
FS ZOOM
FIJ S... itch
4:34PM
F7
F8
F9
F1B
Esc-Exit
Figure 7.1: The Notepad Selection Window
Use the [!J and III keys to move the cursor to the window you want. Press
I +-ll to open that Notepad.
In the Selection window, lEE! or (f]J toggles the complete path name·and the
default file name of the window the cursor is in.
108
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
When you open a Notepad, a == symbol appears by the Notepad number.
When you edit a Notepad, a • appears by the Notepad number.
You may have previously saved a note file that's no longer in the SideKick
Plus Selection window but is still in your directory. You can load it back
into the Notepad: Press ~ in the Selection window and type its file name.
SideKick Plus treats two Notepads with the same file name as two separate
files. If you change one, the other won't change automatically. This is
important to remember, because if you edit one file and save it, then save the
unaltered one, you may overwrite the changes. You can toggle between the two
versions of the same file for a while, but SideKick Plus will save only one
version to disk-and it may not be the one you want saved. Use File Write
to save one version of the file to a different name.
Note: This is different from the way Outlook treats two outlines with the
same name. The two outlines become two windows on the same file, so
when you type a change in one, you'll see it instantaneously reflected in the
second.
Following are the commands available in the Notepad Selection window.
~~~
~
Opens a New File Name box and moves the cursor to it, so you can type in
a file name. That is, you can open an existing file or create a brand-new file.
When you select this command, the file name changes from the name of the
current Notepad to the default or previous file name. The default extension
is .TXT.
If you are unsure of a name, the File Manager can help you: Just type the
drive, directory, or file name with wildcards and press I +-II. If you select an
existing file, the Notepad loads it; otherwise, the Notepad creates a new
file.
This command is similar to (E§.
Save Notepad
I£EJ([J(QJ or (E]
Saves the note to the file name at the cursor. If the file name exists, SideKick
Plus saves the original version with a .BAK extension and saves the new
note (with your changes) to the file name. The .BAK file keeps a backup of
the version before the current one in case you change your mind or
something goes wrong. This option can be turned off.
All Save
[E]([J0
Starting with the first Notepad in the Notepad Selection window, saves all
notes that have been changed.
Chapter 7, The Notepad
109
Warning: Two notes with the same name get saved individually, so the
second one will overwrite the first one. Be sure to rename one with File
Write to before saving, if you want to keep both versions.
Options File Names
[E]12l1E
A window opens with the default path, file name, and extension for each
Notepad. To change these, use Options File Defaults.
Options Save Setup
l£EIl2ll:ID
Saves the following settings: default file names, Selection window color,
and Selection window position.
The Notepad Window
Once you have chosen a file name or left it as the default file name
NOTES. TXT, a Notepad window opens.
C:\SKP
>
C: \SKP\NOTES. TXT
============
Itl • Insert Indent Margin e,5
Fl Help
F3 He.., File
F2 Saue File
F4 Print
Notepad
Line 1 Col 1
===========
F5 ZOOM
Fe, S..,itch
F7 Begin Blk
Fa End Blk
4:41PM
F9
F1B Menu
Esc-Exit
Figure 7.2: The Notepad Window
The window border gives you the following information:
C:\SKPLUS\NOTESl.TXT
The drive, directory, name, and extension of the file being edited.
Line
The number of the line containing the cursor, counted from the top of the
file.
Col
Shows the number of the column containing the cursor, counted from the
first character position at the left margin.
110
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
#1
The number of the Notepad, up to #9.
•
Indicates that you have altered something in the note since you last opened
it.
Insert
Indicates what happens when you add text to the note. In Insert mode,
SideKick Plus adds new text to existing text by pushing existing characters
to the right as new text is entered; otherwise, if the word isn't the border,
you're in Overwrite mode-new text overwrites existing text. Use lE!I to
toggle between the two modes.
Indent
Indicates that auto-indentation is active. Toggle it on and off with the
Options Auto-indent command (see page 123).
Tab
Indicates that pressing ~ will move the cursor to the next tab position and
insert a tab character into the file. Toggle it on and off with the Options
Hard Tabs command (see page 123).
Graph
Indicates that the Notepad will display the PC's semi-graphics extended
ASCII character set (ASCII values 128 to 255). Use the Options Graphics
command to toggle it on and off.
Margin 65
Indicates that the current right-hand margin is at column 65, set with the
Options Right Margin command.
The Notepad Function Keys
The last three lines of the screen contain the function-key status line and the
message line. Following are the function keys specific to the Notepad:
i2 Save File
Saves the note to the file name at the top left of the window border. This is
the same as the File Save command in the File menu.
[ID New File
Prompts you for the file name of the note you want to open. SideKick Plus
adds the default extension .TXT to Notepad files. If you don't want an
extension, type a period after your file name.
Chapter 7, The Notepad
111
If you are unsure of the name, use the File Manager: Type a drive,
directory, or file name with wildcards. If you select an existing file, the
Notepad loads the file; if not, it creates a new file. To change the default file
name, use the Options File Defaults command under the Options menu.
lEJ Print
This prints the marked block or the whole note. It is equivalent to the Block
Print command under the Block menu. (See page 116 to learn how to set
typeface attributes and printer codes.)
(lli Switch
Switches to any previous open Notepad; otherwise, it goes to any
underlying open SideKick Plus application.
IIZJ Begin Blk
Marks the beginning of a block; the same as Block Mark Begin in the Block
menu.
~
End Blk
Marks the end of a block; the same as Block Mark End in the Block menu.
Loading and Saving Notes
The function keys make it easy to load and save notes. The commands are
also on the File menu, however, so that you can redefine them.
Note: SideKick Plus keeps each Notepad separate from the others: If you
edit one, the others don't change. You can have nine Notepads open, each
holding a 54,000-character file. It's a bad idea to give different note files
identical names; when SideKick Plus attemps to save multiple files with the
same name to disk, it will end up saving only one version of the files.
There are five commands in the File menu: New, Save, All Save, Write to,
and List. The first three commands are the same as the New Notepad, Save
Notepad, and All Save options in the Selection window (see page 109).
Here are the other two commands:
File Write To
Prompts you for a file name and saves the note in the current window to
the specified file name.
File List
Opens the Notepad Selection window.
112
13lfJ(E
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Simple Cursor Movement
This section describes the cursor-movement keys that bring about simple
. movements. You are unlikely to use the menus for these, but they exist if
you wish to change the shortcuts.
Go to Previous Character
6 or
Moves the cursor one character to the left, until the start of the line.
l£E!J{1I
Go to Next Character
B or l£E!J~
Moves the cursor one character to the right, until the end of the line
(column 248).
Go to Previous Word
l£E!J6 or l£E!J0
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to the left. A word is
anything beginning or ending with one of the following characters: space <
> , ; ( ) [ ] 1\ , + _ / $.
Go to Next Word
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to the right.
Go to Previous Line
Moves the cursor up one line.
lJJ or l£E!Jill
Go to Next Line
Moves the cursor down one line.
mor l£E!J0
Go to Scroll Up
l£E!JlJJ or l£E!J~
Moves the note up by one line. The cursor remains at the same position on
the line until it reaches the second to the last line of the window.
Go to Scroll Down
l£E!J(]J or l£E!JaJ
Moves the note down by one line. The cursor remains at the same position
on the line until it reaches the line that is second from the top of the
window.
Go to Previous Screen
IPguplor l£E!Jf])
Moves the cursor one whole window, with an overlap of one line, nearer to
the beginning of the note.
Go to Next Screen
IpgDnl or l£E!J(g
Moves the cursor one whole window, with an overlap of one line, nearer to
the end of the note.
Chapter 7, The Notepad
113
Extended Cursor Movement
This section describes the cursor-movement keys that cause extended
cursor movements. Again, you probably won't use the menus for these, but
they are available if you wish to change the shortcuts. Please see Appendix
B if you want to know why these shortcuts were chosen.
Go to Start of Line
Moves the cursor to the first character of the line.
Go to End of Line
Moves the cursor to the position after the end of the line.
1£till~(ID
Go to End of Window
Moves the cursor to the bottom of the window.
IHomel
I£till~lm or
l£EI~([I
Go to Start of Window
Moves the cursor to the top of the window.
or
or
lE
l£EIlHomel
l£EI~0 or
l£EIlE
Go to Start of File
Moves the cursor to the first character in the note.
l£EI~l!I or I£till~
Go to End of File
Moves the cursor to the last character in the note.
l£EI~Kl or I£till~
The following commands allow you to jump to special points in the note.
Go to Start of Block
I£till~WJ
Moves the cursor to the character at the start of a marked block (see "Block
Commands" later in this chapter). The command works even on a hidden
block or when there is no marker at the start of the block.
Go to End of Block
l£EI~fEJ
Moves the cursor to the character at the end of a marked block (see "Block
Commands" later in this chapter). The command works even on a hidden
block or when there is no marker at the start of the block.
Go to Previous Position
l£EI~0
Moves the cursor to the position before the last command. This is
particularly useful when, after a Search operation, you want to return the
cursor to the position before the Search.
Go to Line
I£till~~
Moves the cursor to the start of the line indicated by the number entered.
114
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Using Markers to Move the Cursor
It is tedious to use the cursor keys repeatedly to move within a note, for
instance, between lines 55, 167, and 355. Instead, you can use marker
commands. You set a marker with the Marker Set command and jump to it
with the Marker Go to command. Following are fuller descriptions of those
commands:
Marker Set 1
Sets marker number 1.
Marker Set 2
Sets marker number 2.
Marker Set 3
Sets marker number 3.
Marker Go to 1
Jumps to marker number l.
Marker Go to 2
Jumps to marker number l.
Marker Go to 3
Jumps to marker number 3.
Insertion Commands
This section describes commands that place text into the note. You'll
probably use shortcuts, but this menu serves as a reminder in case you
forget the shortcuts.
Note that the Notepad provides a way of undoing changes to text: Delete
Undo line, described in the next section, "Deletion Commands."
The keys [[illl] or lEE move the cursor eight spaces to the right when
Options Hard Tabs is ON. They move the cursor to the next column, based
on the spacing in the line above, when Options Auto Indent is ON.
Insert Hard Space
Inserts a space that isn't deleted by wordwrap or reformat operations. This
is useful for batch files containing the $P $G prompt command.
Insert Control Character
[[ill0
Allows you to insert a character below ASCII 32 (a control character) into
the note. Type in the prefix [[ill0 and then hold down [[ill while you type in
Chapter 7, The Notepad
115
the character to be inserted. The appearance of these characters depends on
the setting of the Options Graphics command.
What these control characters print is determined by the Install program.
They are initially set for IBM or Epson printers. If you have another printer,
1. Unload SideKick Plus.
2. Type INSTALL at the DOS prompt.
3. Select Printer Settings Attributes when prompted, and change them
according to your printer's specifications.
The Printer Settings Attributes menu currently has these defaults:
Set/Clear Normal
~1!I0
Set/ Clear Bold
~l!IlE
Set/ Clear Italics
~1!I(g
Set/Clear Underscore ~I!I~
Set/ Clear Frame
~(ElW
You can use control characters to vary your printing style or produce Display macros for SuperKey. Your printer manual should have the complete
codes for your printer. Following are some control characters:
IBM or Epson Printers
I£E[I(EI
I£E[II!I
I£E[II!I
I£E[II!I
lfE)J1!I
lfE)J1!I
I£E[II!I
lfE)J1!I
~f9
~lBJ
~W
~m
~~ill
~~~
~aJ
~~
turns on condensed printing
turns off condensed printing
turns on emphasized printing
turns off emphasized printing
turns on double width
turns off double width
turns on italics (Epson only)
turns off italics (Epson only)
SuperKey
I£E[I(EI
lfE)J1!I
~lE
~~
boldface attribute on/ off
frame attribute on/off
Use the Services Setup Printer Use Settings command to change the printer
style for the whole document.
Insert Time & Date at Cursor
KEll21(!J
Inserts the computer's internal time &. date into the note at the cursor
position. To change the time and date format, use the Services Setup Date
and Time command on the main menu. (If the Time is incorrect, follow the
instructions in your DOS manual to change it.)
116
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Insert Time & Date at End of File
l£EJl9Jfill
Inserts a new line at the end of the note with the computer's internal time
and date. To change the time and date format use the Services Setup Date
and Time command on the main menu. You can do the same thing
automatically with the LOG dot command (see "Oot Commands" later in
this chapter).
Insert Line
l£EJlB
Inserts a line break at the cursor position without moving the cursor. This is
subtly different from I ~ I, which inserts a line break and moves the cursor
to the start of the next line.
Insert File
l£EJlEJlID
Reads a file from disk into the note and places it below the cursor as a
marked and displayed block (see "Block Commands").
Deletion Commands
This section describes the deletion commands. You probably won't use the
menus for these, but they are there if you wish to change the shortcuts. Use
the Block Delete command (see "Block Commands") to delete a large piece
of text.
Delete Previous character
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
Delete Character
Deletes the character under the cursor.
Delete Word
l£EJf]
Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word. A word is anything
beginning or ending with one of the following characters: space < > , ; ( ) [ ]
/\ 1+_ / $ *.
Delete Rest of Line
Deletes all text from the cursor to the end of the line.
Delete Line
l£EJ(fJ
Deletes the line at the cursor. Be careful: You cannot restore the line with
the Undo Line command in the Delete menu.
Delete Undo Line
l£EJl9Jill
This returns the line to its previous form. It becomes permanent as·soon as
you leave the line.
Chapter 7, The Notepad
117
Searching and Replacing Text
You can replace one word with another throughout a file easily using the
Search menu. It lets you search for, and replace, specified text in a variety of
ways.
Search Find
f£illl9J[I
This locates specified text in the note using the options set in the Search
Options command. If you include a ? (or f£Iill0~) in the text, any character
will match, just like the ? wildcard in file names. If you include a -, it will
search at the start or end of a line.
f£illm
~~~~
This locates specified text in the note and 'replaces it using the options set
by the Search Options command.
You type in the text to search for at the Search for prompt. If you include a ?
(or f£Iill(0), any character will match, just like the? wildcard in file names.
You type in the replacement text at the Replace with prompt. To delete the
Find text (also known as the search string), don't type anything in at this
prompt, then press I+-ll.
On locating the Find text, a prompt asks you whether you want to replace
the string of highlighted characters. Replying Y (for Yes) replaces the string,
N (for No) doesn't replace it and moves on to the next occurrence of that
string, and ~ (or f£Iill(gJ) aborts the command. Use the Search Options Ask
Before Replace command to turn off this message.
You can use the wildcard to search and replace at the beginning or end of
lines. At the Search prompt, enter "'. At the Replace prompt, enter "'START OF
TEXT.
Search Options
f£Iilll9J(gJ
The Notepad uses several ways to find and replace text. Although you
mostly won't care which particular method it uses, you can set your
preferences on the Search Options menu. To save these options, use the
Options Save Setup command.
You can use any or all of the following options:
Search Options Ignore Case
When set to YES, ignores the difference between uppercase and lowercase.
For example, specifying Helen finds Helen, HELEN, and helen.
Search Options Global Search
When set to YES, replaces the text over the entire document regardless of
where the cursor is. When set to NO, it replaces only the first occurrence of
118
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
the text. The Search Find command ignores the Search Options Global
Search command setting.
Search Options Backwards Search
When set to YES, searches above the cursor position toward the beginning
of the file. When set to NO, searches after the cursor position toward the
end of the file. The Search Find command ignores the Search Options
Global Search command setting.
Search Options Ask Before Replace
When set to YES, confirms that you really want to replace the text before
doing so; when set to NO, does the replacement automatically. Ignored by
Search Replace.
Search Options Whole Words Only
When set to YES, skips matching patterns embedded inside other words.
For example, specifying pin won't find pineapple or pint.
Search Options Sound Alike Words
When set to YES, searches for words that sound like the required word.
Search Options Marked Block Only
When set to YES, only searches the headlines within the marked block.
Search Options Number of Times
Enter the number of occurrences of the string you want the search
operation to work on, counted from the current cursor position.
Search Again
Repeats the latest Search Find or Search Replace command without any
prompts.
Block Commands
If you feel a bit dazzled by the Notepad's multitude of features at this
point, you may ignore the commands in this section. Later on, when you
need to copy, move, or sort a block of text, you can return to this section.
Marking a Block of Text
A block is simply a chunk of text, from a single character to several pages in
length, marked at both ends.
Following are the block-marking commands.
Chapter 7, The Notepad
119
Block Mark Start
19i1llEJlID or ~
Marks the beginning of a block. The marker itself is invisible, and the block
becomes visible only after the Block Mark End command. You can jump to
this mark with the Go to Start of Block command.
Block Mark End
(SEDlEJiEJ or (EID
Marks the end of a block. The marker itself is invisible, and the block
becomes visible only after the Block Mark Begin command. You can jump
to this mark with the Go to End of Block command.
Block Mark Line
. Marks a line as a block.
Block Mark Word
@lEJUJ
Marks a single word as a block. When the cursor is within a word, the
command marks the word; otherwise, it marks the word to the left of the
cursor position. A word is defined as anything that begins or ends with one
of the following characters: space < > , ; ( ) [ ] 1\ + - / $.
I
Block Mark Hide/Display
lSEIIlEJilll
Switches the visual marking of the block off and on. You must display a
block for the Block commands such as Move and Delete to be available. Go
to Start of Block and Go to End of Block work independently of the toggle.
Manipulating Blocks
Now that you know how to mark the block, let's see what you can do with
them:
Block Copy
l2ill~{9
Copies a previously marked block of text to the current cursor position. No
changes occur to the original block, and the new copy contains the block
markers. You must mark and display a block for the command to be
available. Nothing happens if the cursor is within the marked block.
Block Transfer
l2illtEJlli
Moves a previously marked block from its original position to the cursor
position. The block disappears from its original position, and the block
markers remain around the block at its new position. You must mark and
display a block for the command to be available.
Block Delete
l2illtEJUJ
Deletes a previously marked block. You must mark and display a block for
the command to be available.
Warning: You cannot use the Delete Undo Line command to restore the
deleted block.
120
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Block Write to File
lfBJlEJ~
Writes a previously marked block to a file, with the marks in place. If the
file name exists, the Notepad asks whether you want to overwrite the file.
You can overwrite the old file by replying Y (for Yes); typing N (for No)
returns you to the file-name prompt. Do not use the extension .BAK, since
the Notepad uses that term for its backup files. You must mark and display
a block for the command to be available.
Block Print
[EllEJW or (EJ
Prints the marked block. If you haven't marked a block, this command
.prints the entire note. The printer menu displays after you enter this
command, where you select the output device: window, printer, or file. See
page 125 for some special dot print commands and page 116 for special
typeface characters.
Block Sort
lfBJlEJlID
Alphabetically sorts a marked block. You must mark and display a block
for this command to be available. It pops up a menu that starts the sort and
sets the options. The following describes the menu.
Block Sort First Column
The column you want sorting to begin in.
Block Sort Last Column
The last column you want included in the sort. Suppose you have the
following list marked as a block with the periods representing blank
spaces:
Plate .......... Part No. F12-67
Cap ............ Part No. F66-84
Hub ............ Part No. F61-90
If you set Block Sort First Column as 1 and Block Sort Last Column as 5,
you get an alphabetically sorted parts list:
Cap ............ Part No. F66-84
Hub ............ Part No. F61-90
Plate .......... Part No. F12-67
On the other hand, if you specify Block Sort First Column as 26 and Block
Sort Last Column as 31, you get a numerically sorted part number list:
Plate .......... Part No. F12-67
Hub ............ Part No. F61-90
Cap ............ Part No. F66-84
Chapter 7, The Notepad
121
Block Sort Type
Indicates whether the block of text should be sorted in ascending or
descending order:
A ~ Z puts characters beginning with A at the top of the marked block.
Z ~ A puts characters beginning with Z at the top of the marked block.
Block Sort Start Sort
Begins the sort.
Reformatting the Text
If you've set Options Margin Release to ON, the text you enter won't
automatically wrap when you come to the right margin of the window. Or,
if you insert text with the same setting, the line could extend beyond the
window.
To get the paragraph back within the margins, you must reformat it using
one of the Reformat commands. You can also use it for various special text
formats when Options Auto Indent is ON.
Reformat Paragraph
t9illlE
Reformats the text to fit the margins from the cursor until a blank line.
Reformat Block
Reformats the text in the marked block to fit within the margins.
Reformat Marker
t9illQ
While Auto Indent is ON, you can use Reformat Marker to force a
paragraph to indent at a certain position. For example, to create a hanging
indent on the left margin, you would type
1. ~ Reformat Marker
This is a typical example of a hanging indent.
2. ~ Reformat Marker
This is another example of a hanging indent.
You can also use Reformat Marker to create an indent for an existing
paragraph:
• Move the cursor to the indent position.
• Press Reformat Marker.
• Use the Reformat Paragraph command. This reformats from the line after
the cursor to the end of the paragraph, using the cursor position to
signify the new indentation.
122
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
To do these tricks, SideKick Plus enters a null character (ASCII 0) at the
cursor position.
The Options Commands
The Option commands let you change the default file names, your view of
the text, and how you enter text into the Notepad.
Let's cover the margins first.
Options Right Margin
(£Iill~1]J
Sets the maximum length of the line. (You can set other margins with the
Services Setup Printer menu.) If you enter a line exceeding this length, the
Notepad breaks the line and moves text to the next line. To remind you of
the current margin setting, the right margin column setting appears in the
window border.
Options Margin Release
(£Iill~0
Turns off the right margin set by the Options Right Margin command and
removes the margin indicator in the window border.
Now for the commands that change the way text is entered:
Options Insert Mode
(9ill~ or fEJ
Changes between insert and overwrite modes when entering text. When set
to ON, new text is added while existing text is pushed to the right. When
OFF, new text replaces existing text. A status indicator shows the current
mode in the bottom left of the window border.
Options Auto Indent
[!ill~(]
Automatically indents successive lines. When set to ON, the indentation of
the current line repeats on each following line: Pressing 1...... 1 does not
return the cursor to column 1 but to the indent column of the previous line.
When you want to change the indentation, use I Space I to move to the
desired position and the Reformat commands. An indicator in the window
border reminds you that Auto Indent is on.
Options Hard Tabs
[!ill~(]
When set to ON, ~ moves eight characters to the right from the cursor
position and inserts a tab (ASCII 09) character. Otherwise, the tab is set by
the beginning of the word on the previous line. An indicator in the window
border reminds you that this option is on.
Options Graphics
[!ill~~
When set to ON, the upper and lower sets of ASCII characters display
except those used in the Notepad (tab and carriage return). When set to
OFF, only the first 128 ASCII characters display. Limiting the number of
Chapter 7, The Notepad
123 .
characters allows you to display text files produced by editors, such as
WordStar, that use the eighth bit of the character codes. The word Graph in
the window border tells you this option is on. Note: Printing a file with this
option ON or OFF won't affect print results. The printer must be capable of
printing graphics.
Here's how to change the file names shown by default in the Notepad
Selection window.
Options File Defaults
~19ill
A window opens with the default path, file name, and extension for each
Notepad.
Optional
path
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
G:
?:
Notepad File NaMes
Default
file nilMe
Optional
extension
NOTES
NOTES2
NOTES3
NOTES4
NOTES5
NOTES£.
NOTES?
NOTESS
NOTES9
8:
9:
IH • Insert Indent Margin G5
F1 Help
F3
F4
F2
.....t!-Moue
TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT
4:4GpM =
F5 ZOOM
FG Switch
F?
F8
F9
F1B
Esc-Exit
I
Figure 7.3: The Notepad Options File Name Window
Use (!J and (!J to move to the Notepad whose default file name you wish to
change. Move to the path, file name, and extension using ~ and ~~ .
. Type the correct entry and press I+-II. (§ closes the window and accepts
your current entry. Use the Options Save Setup command to store your
new settings permanently. Note: The Notepad Selection window doesn't
get updated.
Options File Auto Save
When set to ON, saves the file each time you leave the Notepad window or
alter the note, such as when you deactivate SideKick Plus or switch to
another Notepad. When set to OFF, you must press ~ to save the file.
Options File BAK Files
Toggles the backup file option OFF and ON.
Options Save Setup
Saves the following settings:
• Options menu.
124
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
• Sort settings.
• Search Options.
• The current Notepad window size, color, and position.
The Dot Commands
If you type a period (.) in the first column of a note, you can use a number
of special commands. These dot commands allow you to set headings,
footings, page breaks, and time/ date stamping.
Following are descriptions of the dot commands .
.CPn
Compares the number of lines left on the page to the number n; if there are
less lines than n, causes a page break. This is useful if you don't want a
paragraph split up between two pages .
.FO text
Prints text as a footing to the page. You can add special commands,
preceded by?:
?#
?D
?T
Page Number.
Date at printing.
Time of printing.
For example, .FO ?D ?T produces 23 Oct 2010 5: 36pm.
.HE text
Prints text as a heading to the page. You can add special commands,
preceded by?:
?#
?D
?T
Page Number.
Date at printing.
Time of printing.
For example, .HE ?D ?T produces 23 Oct 2010 5: 36pm.
.LOG
Place this in line 1, column 1 (it must be entered in uppercase). After you
enter the .LOG command, the Notepad moves to the bottom of the file,
prints the time and date, and moves the cursor to the beginning of the next
line. Each time you reactivate SideKick Plus and move the cursor, it writes
the new time. This command also works in Phonebook attached notes .
.PA
Causes a page break. This is handy when you want to leave blank space on
the page, such as for a diagram.
Chapter 7, The Notepad
125
Copying and Pasting
The Notepad exports the marked block or, if you haven't marked a block,
the line at the cursor with either the Services Copy from Application or
Services Quick Paste command. For example, let's export a block of text to
the application underneath:
1. Activate SideKick Plus, if necessary, with [Ellm
2. Activate the Notepad with Imm and select a file from the Notepad
Selection window, if necessary.
3. Use fIZJ to mark the beginning of a block.
4. Use (EID to mark the end of the block.
5. Use the Services Quick Paste command to send the text to the
application underneath.
When you use Services Paste from Clipboard or Services Quick Paste to the
Notepad, it's like typing the marked block very quickly on the keyboard.
You can use these commands to copy from the screen (see the Copy and
Paste tutorial in Chapter 3) or to copy between Notepads. For example,
here's how to use Copy and Paste between two Notepads:
Activate Notepad 1 with ~l1J.
Use (W to mark the beginning of the block.
Use (EID to mark the end of the block.
Use the Services Copy from Application to Clipboard command to copy
the text to the Clipboard. It does not matter if the block is bigger than
the default size of the Clipboard.
5. Activate Notepad 2 with 1mE'.
6. Press [EllEJ to copy the block of text in the Clipboard to Notepad
number 2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The text you copied is now in Notepad number 2.
126
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
p
A
T
E
R
8
Outlook: The Outline Processor
Outlook is an electronic tool that helps you manipulate and organize sets of
structured notes. You can use it to build speech outlines, organize agendas
for meetings, and construct long reports, for example.
This chapter provides complete information about all the features and
commands in Outlook. If you have not used it before, begin by reading the
tutorial/lOutlook: The Outline Processor" in Chapter 3.
Activating Outlook
First activate SideKick Plus with (£E]~. Then, using the default settings,
you can activate Outlook in one of two ways:
• Pop up the main menu with
~,
move the cursor to Outlook, and press
I~I .
•
Press~(§J
If you are within Outlook, you can press ~ and any number key (except 0)
to open an outline. This activates the outline specified by the number key,
bypassing the Outline Selection window and loading the default file name.
For example, ~lID moves you to the third outline with the default file name
already loaded. Advanced: An outliner comes up if you have built a
customized version of the SideKick Plus that specifies that IEfJDJ through
~12I bring up Outlook rather than the Notepad.
You can change the default file names with the Options menu. This is
discussed on page 153.
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
127
You can designate your headlines as Open or Close. When your headlines
are Open, all headlines deeper than the current one are displayed. When
you specify Close, those headlines are hidden from view. (The Band G
keys to expand and contract the outline. These commands are fully
explained on page 140.)
The Outline Selection Window
The Outline Selection window opens if you use the main menu or ~~ to
activate Outlook. Its size depends on the number of windows you install
when you build SideKick Plus (see Chapter 15). The Outline Selection
window is where you choose which outline to edit and the window to use.
If you press (E]] or ~ with the cursor on, say, window I, you can type in
whatever name you want to call the file in window 1.
Use the Options File Names command to change the default file names in
the Selection window.
rr====
Select Outline
1 OUTLINE.OTL
OUTLINEZ.OTL
:3 OUTLINE3.0TL
4 OUTLINE4.0TL
5 OUTLINES.OTL
G OUTLINED.OTL
7 OUTLINE? OTL
S OUTLINES.OTL
9 OUTLINE9. OTL
=====iJ
;: !iii
1'=========
Fl Help
F2 Save File
Outlook
F:3 He.., File
F4
U-Tab-Select
4:49PM =
FS ZOOM
F7
FG S..,itch
Fa
+-J -Open Outl ine
F9
F1B Menu
Esc-Exit
Figure 8.1: The Outlook Selection Window
rn
The CD and
cursor keys move the cursor to the outline you want. When
the cursor is on the outline you want, press I +-ll to open the outline.
When you make a change to the outline, a round symbol (.) appears by
the outline number.
If you give two windows the same file name, Outlook links them. If you
change one, the other changes (even if you can't see it). This is different
from how the Notepad treats two files of the same name: Notepad files
with the same name are treated as two different files. Outlook can work
128
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
with a pool of headlines spread across 9 windows, with a maximum total of
2,200 headlines or 400,000 characters (whichever happens first).
Following are the commands in the Outline Selection window:
~~~
~
Opens a window and allows you to type the file name of a new outline.
Press [§§l to display the default or previous file name. If you are unsure of
the name, the File Manager can help you. Just type a drive, directory, or file
name with wildcards and press I +-i I. If you select an existing file, Outlook
loads it. Otherwise, it creates a new outline.
Save Outline
I£EItID(QJ or fUJ
Saves the outline to the file name at the cursor. See File Save under
IILoading and Saving Outlines."
All Save
I£EItID0
Saves all the changed outlines to the file names in the Outline Selection
window.
Options File Names
l£EI19ill
Opens a window that lists all Outlook file names. You can specify an
optional path, a default file name, and an optional extension.
1£EI19@
Options Save Setup
Saves the file-name setup you have specified.
The Outlook Window and Function Keys
Once you have chosen a file name, the main Outlook window opens.
c: 'SKP,OUTLINE. OTL
Line
1 Level
1
I
01 • Insert
Fl Help
F3 Heu File
FS ZOOM
F2 Saue File
F4 Print
Fe. SlJitch
Keypad+l'- Openl'Close Ctrl-+I'- Openl'Close All
F? Begin Blk
F8 End Blk
Ctrl-+-+U Moue
4:50pM
F9 Note
FiB Menu
Esc-Exit
Figure 8.2: The Main Outlook Window
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
129
The window border gives you the following information:
C:\SKPLUS\OUTLINE.OTL
The directory, drive, name, and type of file being edited.
Line
The number of the line containing the cursor, counted from the beginning
of the outline and not including any hidden headlines.
Level
The depth of the headline containing the cursor. The headline closest to the
left margin is level 1; subsequent numbers indicate deeper levels.
01
This is the Outlook window number.
*
Indicates that you have altered something in the outline and haven't saved
the change yet.
Insert
Indicates what happens when you add text to the headline. In Insert mode,
new text is added to existing text; otherwise, new text replaces existing text.
Use fEJ to toggle between the two modes.
Browse
Indicates that the cursor-movement keys are in Browse mode. When you
set Browse mode to ON using the Headline menu, only the top level of
headlines shows. As you move the cursor down, however, any hidden
headlines display then disappear when you get to the next headline at the
top level.
C: \SKP,TRUFFLE. OTL
Truffle en croute
I>=Fricasee of lobs:ter
Citrus: fruit terrine
Line
2 Leuel
1
01 • Ins:ert BrolJs:e = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 3:15pM
F1 Help
F3 New File
F5 ZOOM
F7 Begin Blk
F9 Note
F2 Saue File
F4 Print
FE. Switch
Fa End Blk
F1e Menu
Keypad+/- Open/Clos:e Ctrl-+/- Open/Clos:e All Ctrl-'-'U Moue Esc-Exit
130
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C: ,SKP, TRUFFLE. OTL
Truffle en croute
=Fl"icasee of lobster
I chanterelle 01" other MushroOMS
shallots
~ ..hite .. ine
lobsters;
chiues
Ci trus fruit terrine
C: ,SKP,TRUFFLE. OTL
Truffle en croute
=Fl"icassee of lobster
~ chanterelle 01" other MushroOMS
shallots
white wine
I sauuignon blanc
fUMe blanc
Muscato d' 01"0
lobsters;
chiues:
~ Citrus fruit terrine
c: ,SKP,TRUFFLE. OTL
Truffle en croute
~=Fricasee of lobster
I Ci trus fruit terl"ine
Line
3 Leuel
Z
Line
e.
Leuel
3
~
01 • Inserl
F1 Help
FZ Saue Fill
Keypad+l'- 0,
I
Line
3 Leuel
1
01 • InSE
F1 Help
FZ Saue Fi
Keypad+l'-
!
Figure 8.3: Browsing through an Outline
Use the Headline Browse command to toggle Browse mode on and off.
Headline Symbols
A headline can have two symbols: One (=) reminds you that you've
attached a note to that headline; the other (» indicates deeper levels of
headlines are underneath that headline. The headline commands are
explained later in this chapter. For now, here are the headline symbols:
>
Indicates that the headline has others concealed below it, at deeper levels.
Indicates that the headline has an attached note. See "Insertion Commands" to insert an attached note.
The Outlook Function Keys
The last three lines of the screen contain the function keys and the message
line. The following describes the function keys specific to Outlook.
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
131
(f1J Save File
Saves the outline to the file name in the top left of the window border. This
is the same as the File Save command.
(EID New File
Prompts you for the file name of an outline to open. If you are unsure of the
name, the File Manager can help you. Just type a drive, directory, or file
name with wildcards. If you select an existing file, Outlook loads the
outline. Otherwise, it creates a new outline. To change the default file name,
use the Options File Defaults command.
tEl Print
Prints the marked block or the whole outline, as determined by the Options
Print, Options Number, and Options Write commands. It is equivalent to
the Block Print command.
~ Switch
Switches to the previous open Outlook window. Otherwise, it goes to the
previous application.
~
Begin Blk
Marks the beginning of a block. See "Marking a Block of Headlines" on
page 141.
fE.ID End Blk
Marks the end of a block.
~Note
Attaches a Notepad to the headline at the cursor. This is equivalent to the
Insert Attached note command (see "Insertion Commands").
Loading and Saving Outlines
To load and save outlines, you'll probably use the shortcuts or function
keys. However, the commands are on the File menu so that you can
redefine them.
Outlook links two windows with the same file name. If you change one, the
other always changes-even if you can't see it. Outlook can manipulate a
pool of headlines spread across nine windows, with a maximum of 2,000
headlines or 400,000 characters.
~~
~
This prompts you for the file name of the new outline to open. If you are
unsure of the name, the File Manager can help you. Just type a drive,
directory, or file name with wildcards. If you select an existing file, Outlook
loads the outline. Otherwise, it creates a new outline. If you had an outline
132
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
open and altered it, SideKick Plus asks whether you want to save it before
it loads the new one. To change the default file name, use the Options File
Defaults command.
File Save
[El(EJ@] or ~
Saves the outline to the file name in the top left of the window border. If the
file already exists, SideKick Plus renames the existing file with a .BAK
extension and saves the outline to the file name.
File All Save
[El(EJ0
Saves all the changed outlines to the file names in the top left-hand corner
of the window borders.
File Write To
Prompts you for a file name and saves the outline in the current window to
that file name.
File List
Opens the File Selection window.
Simple Cursor Movement
This section describes the cursor-movement keys that perform simple
movements. You probably won't use the menus for these, but they are there
if you wish to change the shortcuts. Please see Appendix B for an
explanation of these shortcuts.
Go to Previous Character
[Elf]] or EJ
Moves the cursor one character to the left. When the cursor reaches the
start of the outline, it stops and doesn't go any further.
Go to Next Character
[El@] or B
Moves the cursor one character to the right edge of the headline. If the
cursor reaches the right edge of the screen, the window scrolls to the left
until it reaches the 254th column.
Go to Previous Word
[El0
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to the left. A word begins or
ends with one of the following characters: space < > , ; ( ) [ ] A + - / $.
When the cursor reaches the start of the headline, it stops and doesn't go
any further.
I
Go to Next Word
[ElW
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to the right. When the
cursor reaches the end of the headline, it stops and doesn't go any further.
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
133
Go to Previous Headline
Moves the cursor up by one headline.
l£IillWor (]J
Go to Next Headline
Moves the cursor to the headline below.
I£ED~ or
rn
Go to Scroll Up
l£Iill~
Moves the outline up by one headline. The cursor remains on the same
headline until it reaches the second to the last line of the window.
Go to Scroll Down
l£IillaJ
Moves the outline down by one headline. The cursor remains on the same
headline until it reaches the second from top line of the window.
Go to Previous Screen
I£ED([I or ~
Moves the cursor one whole window, with an overlap of one line, nearer to
the top of the outline.
Go to Next Screen
1£ED(g or fpgDnl
Moves the cursor one whole window, with an overlap of one line, nearer to
the end of the outline.
Extended Cursor Movement
This section describes the cursor-movement keys that perform more
extensive movements. You are unlikely to use the menus for these, but they
are there if you wish to change the shortcuts. Please see Appendix B for
more on these shortcuts.
Go to Start of Line
Moves the cursor to the first character of the headline.
Go to End of Line
I£EDf2IlQ] or
Moves the cursor to the position after the end of the headline.
I£EDf2IW or
Go to Start of Window
Moves the cursor to the top of the window.
Go to End of Window
.Moves the cursor to the penultimate line of the window.
Go to Start of File
Moves the cursor to the first headline in the outline.
I£EDf2I~
lEJ
[Ell Homel
or
I£EDlEJ
I£EDf2I([I or I£EDI Pgupl
Go to End of File
Moves the cursor to the last headline in the outline.
134
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
The following commands allow you to jump to special points in the outline.
(See also "Commands that Work on Several Headlines" on page 141.
Go to Start of Block
Moves the cursor to the headline at the start of a marked block.
l£El~~
Go to End of Block
Moves the cursor to the headline at the end of a marked block.
Go to Previous Position
f£ill~W
Moves to the previous position of the cursor and, if necessary, opens up the
headline. This is particularly useful after loading a new outline or a Search
operation.
Go to Identical Level Above
Moves the cursor to the same level of headline above the current cursor
position.
Go to Identical Level Below
Moves the cursor to the same level of headline below the current cursor
position.
Go to Previous Attached Note
f£ill~ffil
Moves you to the previous attached note in the outline. For Outlook to find
the attached note, the headline must be open. You can also do this inside
the attached note with the Previous Note command.
Go to Next Attached Note
f£ill(9~
Moves you to the next attached note in the outline, whether you are in the
attached note or the outline. For Outlook to find the attached note, the
headline must be open. You can also do this inside the attached note with
the same command.
Insertion Commands
This section describes commands that put text into the outline. You'll
probably use shortcuts for most, but this menu serves as an alternative.
Note that Outlook provides a way of undoing changes to the text of a
headline: Use the Delete Undo Headline command described under
"Deletion Commands."
Options Insert Mode
f£ill(YJ or ~
Toggles between insert and overwrite modes when entering text. When set
to ON, new text is added to existing text. When set to OFF, new text
replaces existing text. A status indicator shows the current mode in the
bottom left of the window border.
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
135
Insert Tab
[EJDJ
Moves the cursor to the next tab stop in the headline. Outlook fixes the tab
stops at eight-character intervals. Don't use this command frequently, as it
destroys the hierarchy of the outline; however, it's handy for outline titles.
Insert Control Character
[EJ1!l
Allows you to insert characters below ASCII 32 (a control character) into
the note. First type the prefix [EJI!l, then [EJl1J, (El, (], ~, or any control
character above [EJ(EJ. These characters appear as semi-graphic characters
on the screen.
This is a handy feature because you can use control characters to vary your
printing style. Check your printer manual for correct control or Escape
sequences. Following are some useful control characters:
Entering a Page Break
l£!ill0 [EJ(]
IBM or Epson Printers
[EJ@
Turns on condensed printing
[EJ([I
Turns off condensed printing
l§@ Turns on emphasized printing
l§ID Turns off emphasized printing
l§~(] Turns on double width
lBllilIDJ Turns off double width
l§liI
Turns on italics (Epson only)
l§~
Turns off italics (Epson only)
l£!ill0
l£!ill0
l£!ill0
l£!ill0
l£!ill0
l£!ill0
l£!ill0
l£!ill0
Use the Services Setup Printer Use Settings command on the main menu to
change the printer style for the whole document.
Insert Headline Current Level
19i1l~ or I +-II
Inserts a new headline directly below the cursor at the same level. It
positions the cursor at the start of the new headline.
Insert Headline Deeper Level
~I +-II
Inserts, below the cursor, a new headline a level deeper than the current
headline and moves the cursor to it.
Insert Attached Note
lE2I or EJ
Attaches a Notepad to the headline or, if one exists, opens the current
attached note for editing. Outlook keeps the Notepad text in the outline, so
. you can't use the File Save command in the Notepad to save the attached
note. You can mark a block in the attached note and write the block to a file.
The two Outlook-specific commands on the Notepad menu are the same as
Outlook's Go to Previous Attached Note and Go to Next Attached Note
commands described on page 135.
136
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
When you press ~, SideKick Plus closes the attached note and returns you
to Outlook, where a == symbol reminds you that the note exists. If you press
~ while the note is empty, SideKick Plus ignores the attached note.
Insert Time & Date at Cursor
@Il2Jffi
Inserts the computer's internal time and date into the headline at the cursor
position. To change the time and date format, use the Services Setup Date
and Time command on the main menu.
Insert Time & Date at End of File
@Il2J(ill
Inserts a new headline at the end of the outline with the computer's
internal time and date. To change the time and date format, use the
Services Setup Date and Time command on the main menu.
Insert Drawing Single Line
i£ElIf9G
Allows you to draw horizontal and vertical single lines as part of the
headline. Use the [!J, (II, 6, or EI keys to move the cursor around the
outline. fB returns you to normal text.
To print an exact hard copy, your printer must be capable of producing the
IBM semi-graphic characters. (To draw organization charts or tree
diagrams, use the Block Output Chart command.)
Insert Drawing Double Line
@Il2JB
Allows you to draw horizontal and vertical double lines as part of the
headline. To draw organization charts or tree diagrams, use the Block
Output Chart command.
Use the [!J, [!J,
~
6, or EI keys to move the cursor around the outline.
returns you to normal text.
Your printer must be capable of producing the IBM semi-graphic characters
to get an exact copy on paper.
Insert Drawing Erase Line
Erases lines drawn with the Insert Drawing commands.
Use the [!J, (!J,
@Il2JQJ
6, or EI keys to move the cursor around the outline.
fB returns you to normal text.
Insert File
i£ElIlIDl!I
Reads a file from disk into the C"ltline and places it below the cursor as a
marked and displayed block. (See the section "Reading Text from Other
Programs.")
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
137
Deletion Commands
This section describes Outlook's deletion commands. You are unlikely to
use the menus for these, but they are there if you wish to change the
shortcuts. Use the Block Delete command to delete a large piece of text.
Delete Previous Character
l£ED~ or IBackspacel
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. When pressed at the start of a
headline, it joins the current to the previous headline, unless the previous
one is at a different level or has hidden headlines.
Delete Character
19i1l@ or ~
Deletes the character above the cursor. When pressed at the end of a
headline, it joins the current to the next headline, provided the next is at the
same level and doesn't have hidden headlines. If it isn't, nothing happens.
Delete Word
l£ED(]
Deletes everything from the cursor to the end of the word. When pressed at
the end of a headline, it joins the current to the next headline, provided the
next is at the same level and doesn't have hidden headlines. A word is
anything beginning or ending with one of the following characters: space <
> , ; ( ) [ ] A + _ / $ *.
I
Delete Rest of Headline
Deletes all text from the cursor to the end of the headline.
Delete Headline
l£ED1YI
Deletes the current headline and any hidden headlines, if they exist. Be
careful: You cannot restore the headline with the Delete Undo Headline
command.
Delete Undo Headline
l£ED19ill
This returns the headline to its previous form. The changes become
permanent as soon as you leave the headline or use a Headline command.
Searching and Replacing Text
Have you ever wanted to replace one word with another throughout an
outline? With Outlook's Search menu, you can do this easily. It allows you
to search for, and optionally replace, specific text in a variety of ways.
Search Find
l£ED19lIJ
This finds specified text in the outline, according to the options set by the
Search Options command. If you include the wildcard? (or l£ED0~) in the
text, any character can replace the wildcard, just like the? wildcard in file
names.
138
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Search Replace
(£EI{2l0
This finds specified text in the outline and replaces it, according to the
options set by the Search Options command.
You enter the text to search for at the Search for prompt. If you include the
wildcard? (or (£EI00), any character can replace the wildcard, just like the
? wildcard in file names.
You enter the text to substitute (or delete) at the Replace with prompt. To
delete (in the outline) the Find text you've specified, don't type anything in
at the Replace prompt and press I~ I.
On discovering the Find text, a prompt asks whether you want to replace it.
You can reply Y (for Yes) to replace it, N (for No) not to replace it, and ~
(or (£EI(!JJ) to abort the command. Use the Search Options Ask Before
Replace command to turn off this prompt.
You can use any or all of the following options:
Search Options
(£EI{2lfgJ
Outlook finds and replaces text in various ways. Mostly, you won't care
which method is used; however, you can set your preference with the
Search Options menu. To save the preferred options, use the Options Save
Setup command.
Search Options Ignore Case
When set to YES, ignores the difference between uppercase and lowercase.
For example, specifying Helen finds Helen, HELEN, and helen.
Search Options Global Search
When set to YES, replaces the text over the whole of the document
regardless of where the cursor is. When set to NO, it replaces only the first
occurrence of the text after the cursor. The Search Find command ignores
the Search Options Global Search command setting.
Search Options Ask Before Replace
When set to YES, asks you each time whether you want to replace text
before doing so. When set to NO, it does the replacement automatically.
Search Options Whole Words Only
When set to YES, skips matching patterns embedded inside other words;
for example, specifying pin will not find pineapple or supine.
Search Options Sound-Alike Words
When set to YES, searches for words that sound like the required word; in
technical terms, a Soundex search.
Search Options Open Headlines
When set to YES, searches only the headlines revealed with the Headline
Open command; otherwise, NO ignores these headlines.
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
139
Search Options Marked Headlines
When set to YES, searches only the headlines within the marked block.
Search Options Number of Times
Enter the number of occurrences of the string you want the search
operation to work on, counted from the current cursor position.
~~~~
~ill
Repeats the latest Search Find or Search Replace command without any
prompts.
The Headline Commands
As you've learned, an outline is not a random collection of text but a
structured hierarchy of headlines. You control the way the structure
displays with the Headline menu. It has these following commands:
Headline Open One Level
EJ
Opens a level of headlines below the current headline, if possible. Each
time you give this command, another level opens:
~
Current Headline
First level to Open
Second level to Open
~ First level to Open
Second level to Open
Second level to Open
Next headline on the same level as Current--not affected.
~
Headline Close One Level
G
Closes headlines on levels below the current headline. Each time you give
this command, one level closes. So you can compress the display to higher
and higher levels:
~
Current Headline
First level to Close
Second level to Close (nothing deeper to Close)
Second level to Close (nothing deeper to Close)
~ First level to Close
Second level to Close (nothing deeper to Close)
Second level to Close (nothing deeper to Close)
Next headline on the same level as Current--not affected.
~
Headline Open All Levels
(£B)EJ
Shows all the headlines that are at a level deeper than the one the cursor is
on.
140
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Headline Close All Levels
[ElG
Hides all the headlines that are at a level deeper than the one the cursor is
on.
Headline Promote
[ElJEl or (QJ~
Moves the headline at the cursor to a higher level, promoting it to the left.
Headline Demote
[ElEJ or ~
Moves the headline at the cursor to a deeper level, demoting it to the right.
Headline Move Up
[Elm
Exchanges the headline at the cursor with the one directly above it. This
command only works within the same level of headlines.
Headline Move Down
[EI[[l
Exchanges the headline at the cursor with the one directly below it. This
command only works within the same level of headlines.
Headline Browse Mode
[EllID
This is a toggle that affects the cursor-movement keys. When set to ON,
these keys open and close levels of headlines as you move through the
outline. To remind you it is on, Browse appears in the bottom left of the
window border.
Headline Indentation
Sets the number of spaces each level of headline shifts to the right. This
only affects the screen appearance of the outline, not its printed or written
form.
Commands that Work on Several Headlines
At this point, you know enough about Outlook to use it. But you've only
tasted the icing on the cake. Here's how you can copy, move, and sort
headlines.
Marking a Block of Headlines
A block of headlines is any part of the outline that you mark with some
special commands. They allow you to mark a single headline or a
continuous section of headlines. You can combine these commands to filter
out only the headlines you want.
Unlike most editors (including the Notepad) and word processors, you
mark the nearest headline, not character. The cursor can be anywhere on a
headline when you press Block Mark Begin, and the block will be marked
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
141
from the leftmost character of the headline. It also matters whether the
headline is open or closed. With an open headline, the commands act only
on that headline. With a closed headline, the commands also affect hidden
headlines.
Here are the block-marking commands:
Block Mark Line
C9illtEJill
Toggles the marking of the current line. An unmarked headline becomes
marked, while a marked headline becomes unmarked. If you unmark a
headline in the middle of a continuous block, the middle headline becomes
unmarked, splitting the block into two.
Block Mark Start
Marks the beginning of a continuous block of headlines.
~
or C9illtEJ~
Block Mark End
Marks the end of a continuous block of headlines.
Block Mark Hide/Display
C9illtEJlBJ
Switches the visual marking of the block off and on. Go to Start of Block
and Go to End of Block work independently of the toggle.
Copying, Transferring, Deleting, and Sorting a Block
Now that you know how to mark a block, let's see what you can do with it:
Block Copy
C9illtEJl9
Copies a previously marked block of headlines to the line after the cursor,
without altering the block. When you copy a closed headline, you also copy
all the headlines hidden underneath it. If the current outline contains no
marked and displayed block, Outlook searches all other open outlines for
marked and displayed blocks. If it finds any, it prompts you for the outline
to copy from.
If you press I+-II, SideKick Plus copies the block from the lowest outline. If
you type a number from 1 to 9, SideKick Plus copies the block from that
outline. Once the copy is complete, the newly created block of headlines
becomes the marked block.
Block Transfer
C9illtEJlli
Moves a previously marked block of headlines and attached notes to the
headline following the cursor. When you move a closed headline, you also
move everything hidden underneath it. Once it has moved, the block
disappears from its original position and reappears still marked.
142
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Use the Headline Move Up and Headline Move Down commands if you
wish to move headlines within the same level.
Block Delete
i£EljEJUI
Deletes a previously marked block of headlines. When you delete a closed
headline, you also delete everything hidden underneath it.
Be careful: Once deleted, you cannot use the Delete Undo Headline
command to restore the block.
. Block Sort
l£illlIDlID
Arranges in specified order the highest level of headlines within a
contiguous block, all at the same level.
This command displays a menu that starts the sort and sets the options.
Following are the four options on the menu.
Block Sort First Column
The place in the headline where sorting should begin.
Block Sort Last Column
The last character of the headline to be included in the sort. Suppose you
have the following list marked as a block with the periods representing
blank spaces:
Plate ..................... Part No. F12-67
Cap ....................... Part No. F66-84
Hub ....................... Part No. F61-90
If you answer Block Sort First Column with 1 and Block Sort Last Column
with 5, you get an alphabetically sorted parts list:
Cap ....................... Part No. F66-84
Hub ................ ; ...... Part No. F61-90
Plate .•..................• Part No. F12-67
On the other hand, if you specify Block Sort First Column as 26 and Block
Sort Last Column as 31, you get a numerically sorted part number list:
Plate ..................... Part No. F12-67
Hub ....................... Part No. F61-90
Cap ....................... Part No. F66-84
Block Sort Type
Determines how to sort the block of headlines:
• A ~ Z puts headlines beginning with A at the top of the marked block.
• Z ~ A puts headlines beginning with Z at the top of the marked block.
• RANDOM arranges headlines in a random order within the block.
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
143
Block Sort Start
Starts the sort.
Reading Text from Other Programs
You may want to read text from another program, such as a word
processor, and convert it into an outline. You can easily do this with the
Insert File command (shortcut ~lIDlID), which uses options set by the
Options Read command.
The input file can be a text file or an outline file in Outlook, Ready,
Thinktank structured, or PC Outline structured formats.
Options for Converting a Text File into an Outline
The Options Read command translates the indentations of a text file into an
outline structure. This command affects only text files, not Outlook, Ready,
Thinktank structured, or PC Outline structured files.
Options Read
~~lID
Determines the conversion of the text file into an outline when using the
insert File command. The variations are mostly on the theme of indentation
in the file, though SideKick·Plus's default settings are fairly tolerant of most
text files. Don't worry about changing any of the settings. They will not
damage the foreign file. Use the Options Save Setup command to store the
, menu settings.
There are three options on this menu:
Options Read Minimum Indentation
Sets the smallest number of spaces from the left margin, before the current
line of text creates a deeper level of headline.
Options Read Tab Size
Sets the number of spaces a tab character (ASCII value 7) converts into.
Options Read Graphics
When set to OFF, Outlook converts the text into the first 128 ASCII characters. By doing so, it enables you to read text from, say, WordStar.
144
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Sending Outlines to Other Programs
Outlook can convert its outline into almost any text file, so you can include
it in a report or some other document. To do this, alter the settings of the
Options Write and Options Number commands, and then use the Block
Write to File command to create the text file. In this section, you'll learn the
commands connected with writing to a text file: Block Write to File and
Options Write.
Block Write to File
~([I~
Use this command to write part or all of an outline to a text file. You decide
the appearance of the text file with the Options Write and Options Number
commands. You must mark and display a block for this command to be
available.
Do not use the extensions OTL or BAK, since Outlook uses them by default.
If the file name you enter exists, SideKick Plus asks you whether it should
overwrite the file. You can reply Y (for Yes) and overwrite the old file or N
(for No) to return to the file-name prompt.
The Options Write Command
Options Write
~~~
Determines the appearance of the outline when using the Block Write,
Block Output Chart, or Block Print commands. Use the Options Save Setup
command to save the settings of this menu.
Options Write Line Spacing
Sets the number of blank lines between each headline. On most printers,
SINGLE is one-sixth of an inch, DOUBLE is one-third of an inch, and
TRIPLE is two-thirds of an inch between each line. Do a test run on your
printer to verify these defaults.
Options Write Indent
This menu changes the indentation of the outline. Following are the
descriptions of the three menu entries.
Options Write Indent Size
Sets the number of spaces, from the left hand margin, for each level of
headline or attached note. This command differs from the Headline Indent
command, which only alters the screen appearance of the outline. It helps if
both these commands have the same value.
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
145
Options Write Indent Character
Changes the type of character used to produce the indentation of the
outline. Use the command when you are transferring an outline to a foreign
program. Say you want to transfer the outline to a word processor but keep
the indentation intact despite reformatting. In this case, set the command to
TAB because word processors use tab characters to align tables so reformatting ignores them.
Usually, if you set the command to TAB, you will also want to set the
Options Write Indent Size command to 1.
Options Write Indent Attached Notes
When set to ON, Outlook offsets the attached note to the right of the
headline above by the number of spaces of the Options Write Indent Size
command. Options Write Attached note must be ON for this command to
have any meaning.
Options Write Hidden Text
When set to ON, writes, makes a chart of, or prints every headline within
the block. When set to OFF, writes, makes a chart of, or prints only the
open headlines.
Options Write Attached Notes
When set to ON, prints or writes all the attached notes, as well as each
headline. When set to OFF, only prints or writes the headlines.
Options Write Structured Output
When set to ON, writes a text file that keeps the structure of the outline
intact. You can later read the file back into Outlook with the Insert File
command, which will recreate the outline. This is useful for moving or
copying outlines with attached notes and sending an outline over electronic
mail.
Printing an Outline
You can print an outline in a variety of ways, set by the Options Write,
Options Print, and Options Number commands. In this section, we
describe how to print an outline, change the headings and footings, and
create a table of contents.
You can precede a headline with two periods (.. ) if you do not want it to
print; for example,
.. This will not print with the Block Print command.
146
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Block Print
l£EI)fIDW or lEI
Prints the marked and displayed block of headlines using the Options
Write, Options Print, and Options Number commands. If you don't mark
and display a block of headlines, it prints the whole outline. The standard
SideKick Plus printer menu displays after you press this command.
Changing the Headings and Footings
To change the headings and footings, use the Options Print command.
l£EI)~W
Options Print
Contains the commands exclusive to printing an outline. Use the Options
Save Setup command to store the menu settings. The Services Setup
Printer menu changes the paper length and margin settings.
Options Print Header
When set to ON, prints the Options Print Top text at the top of every page.
Options Print Top Text
Enters the text that goes at the top of each page (sometimes called a running
head).
You must precede all the special commands with a question mark (?):
?#
?D
?T
?F
?Number
Page Number.
Date of printing.
Time of printing.
Name of the file.
The line of the outline used for the top text. Number is
between 1 and 9, from the top of the outline.
Here are some examples:
?D ?T
results in 23 Oct 2010 5: 36pm
?l ?F
results in Text of first headline: C:\SKPLUS\OUTLOOK.OTL
Page ?#?l?T
results in Page 1 Text of first headline 5: 36pm
Options Print Footer
When set to ON, prints the Options Print Bottom Text at the bottom of
every page.
Options Print Bottom Text
Enters the text that goes at the bottom of each page. You can only type one
line of text at the prompt.
You must precede all the special commands with a question mark (?):
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
147
?#
?D
?T
?F
?Number
Page Number.
Date at printing.
Time of printing.
Name of the file.
The line of the outline used for the bottom text. Number is
between 1 and 9, from the top of the outline.
Here are some examples:
?D ?T results in 23 Oct 2010 5 :36pm
?1 ?F results in Text of first headline:
C:\SKPLUS\OUTLOOK.OTL
Page ?#?1?T results in Page 1 Text of first headline 5: 36pm
Producing a Table of Contents
If you want to produce a table of contents, you must toggle the Option
Print Contents command with a number.
Options Print Contents Depth
When set to a non-zero number, each headline has an entry in a table of
contents appended to the outline. The number determines at which level to
end the table of contents. For example, if you set the number to 2, headline
levels 1 and 2 are included in the table. Set the number to 0 if you don't
want a table of contents.
You cannot change the format of the table of contents, only which level it
ends at.
148
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C: 'SKP,SALESREP. OTL
Introduce new sales region
Staff as;sigll/llents
Office logistics;
InforMation flow to/froM headquarters
Projected expenses and incoMe
IMpact of new region on existing regions
Other Matters
Line
21 Leuel
1
Introduce new sales region. . . . . . . . .
Staff as;sigRhlents . . . . . . . . . . . .
Office logistics;. . . . . . . . . . . . .
InfOrMation flow to/frOM headquarters .
Projected expenses and incoMe. . . . .
IMpact of new region on existing regions.
Other Matters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01 • Insert = = =
F1 Help
F3 New I
FZ Saue File
F4 Print
Ke!lpad+/- Open/Close Ct
Pause
Space-Conti nue
.1
.1
.1
.1
.1
.1
.2
Esc-Abort
Figure 8.4: An Outline and its Table of Contents
Producing a Tree or Organizational Chart
SideKick Plus can convert your outline into a tree or organizational chart.
You don't have to do anything special to your outline: Simply use the Block
Output Chart command to print it and the Options Chart menu to
determine its format.
Your printer must be capable of producing the IBM semi-graphic characters
for an exact copy to print out.
Don't worry if the chart won't fit on a single sheet of paper. SideKick Plus
will automatically break it up into several pages, which you can glue
together.
Block Output Chart
(9illlEJ(QI
Prints a tree chart of the marked and displayed block, using the settings of
the Options Chart, Options Write Hidden Text, and Services Setup Printer
menus. If you haven't marked or displayed a block of headlines, Outlook
prints the whole outline as a chart. The standard SideKick Plus printer
menu displays after you select this command. (If you need to, use the
Services Setup Printer menu to set the paper length and margins.)
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
149
C: ,SKP,SALESREP. OTL
=SUhUltill'y of las:t Meeting
Open and tabled iteMS
Introduce nelJ sales region
Staff as:signMents
Office logistics
InforMation flolJ to/froM headquarters
Projected expenses and incoMe
IMpact of nelJ region on existing regions
Other Matters
Line
1 Leuel
1
01
Insert ===================== 1:29PM
F1 Help
F3 HeIJ File
FS ZOOM
F7 Begin Blk
F9 Note
F2 Saue File
F4 Print
FE. Switch
F8 End Blk
F1B Menu
Keypad+/- Open/Close Ctrl-+/- Open/Close All Ctrl-+-+U Moue Esc-Exit
Open and
tabled iteMS
Staff
as:signMents
Office
logistics
IMpact of
nelJ region
on existing
regions
y
Figure 8.5: An Outline and Its Tree Chart
The Output Chart command has several options:
Options Chart
l£E](Ql(9
Changes the format of the tree chart. Use the Options Save Setup command
to store the settings of this command. It has the following options:
150
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C: \SKP\OUTLINE. OTL
:spaghetti
Meatballs
pasta
sauce
Line
~!~:::eJ
r
~
r-ed
white
r-ose
desser-t
cakes
aMar-etto
chocolate
coffee
Fi Help
F2 Save File
No Shor-tcut
1
Sear'Ch
Block
Inser-t
Delete
Go to
wine
II tiM'
1 Level
Iil'iI!!!TnW
OPtions-
Read
IJrite
. - - - Print OPtions] r.:N~UMbm]e.r-• •_
HeaderON
Top Text
Char-t
ON
File
Footer':!i".m
Inser-t Mode
Contents Depth
3
Save Setup
'pm
,
BottOM Text
F3 New File
F4 Print
:mmtIij!-
ON
,,--------'
FS ZOOM
F7 Begin Blk
Fe Sui tch
F8 End Blk
U-Move
Shift-Ese-Exit All
F9 Note
Fi0 Menu
Esc-Exit
Figure 8.6: The Print Options
Options Chart Box Width
Sets· the number of characters between the left and right edges of the box in
the tree chart.
Options Chart Minimum Box Depth
Sets the minimum number of lines between the top and bottom edges of
the box in a tree chart. The box will expand to fit the size of the headline
but will never shrink below the number of lines set by this command.
Producing Numbered Headlines
When you print or write a text file, you can number the headlines with the
Options Number command.
Options Number
l£EJ@illl
Alters the format of headline numbering and the table of contents. You only
see these numbers when you print or write a text file of the outline.
The menu has two parts: a global numbering format and a local numbering
format. The next pages describe each option. Together they can produce
almost any numbering scheme imaginable.
Use the Options Save Setup command to store the menu settings.
Global Numbering of Headlines
The global numbering format choices are all in the Options Number menu.
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
151
Options Number Global Type
Determines the style of numbering over the entire outline: OFF, PARAGRAPH, or LEGAL. When set to OFF, the headlines aren't numbered. The
other two choices number the headlines:
PARAGRAPH
I.) First Level
a.) Second Level
b.) Second Level
II.) First Level
LEGAL
1. First Level
1.1 Second Level
1.2 Second Level
2. First Level
Options Number Minimum Width
Sets the number of spaces available for the number to fit into. If the number
is bigger than this setting, you will get an outline with a ragged right
margin.
Options Number Start level
Sets the level numbering should start at.
Options Number End level
Sets the level numbering should end at.
Local Numbering of Headlines
Each headline level can have a different type of numbering, set with the
Options Number Local menu. Following is a description of each Options
Number Local command.
Options Number Local Level
Sets the numbering for each separate headline level down to level 15. You
can specify the style of numbering you want for each level.
Options Number Local Type
Sets the numbering style for each headline level or turns numbering OFF.
Following are the different forms of numbering:
Number
Lowercase
Uppercase
Roman
1
a
A
I
10
100
J
X
v
V
C
There are only have 26 possible alphabetic characters, so numbering reverts
to a or A every 26 headlines.
152
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Options Number Local Punctuation
Sets the character between the number and the headline. This usually will
be either a right parenthesis or a period, but any character will do. Setting
the Options Number Global type to LEGAL causes this setting to be
ignored.
Changing the Default File Names
and Options
Let's describe how you can change the file names shown by default in the
Outline Selection window. Press (gill(QJ[l to open the Options File menu.
Options File Defaults
Opens a window with the default path, file name, and extension for each
Outlook window.
r c: ,.sKP,OUTLINE. OTL
Line
1 Leuel
Outlook File NaMes:
Default
filenaMe
Optional
path
01:M,,-
OUTLINE.OTL
OUTLINE2.0TL
OUTLINE3.0TL
OUTL INE4 . OTL
OUTLINES.OTL
OUTLINE£>.OTL
OUTLINE?OTL
OUTLINES.OTL
OUTLINE9.0TL
02:
03:
04:
05:
of,:
07:
08:
09:
l I~.t
0' .
Fi Help
F3
F2
F4
tl-I'bue
FS ZOOM
FE. S ... itch
..... -Accept Change
1
1
Optional
extension
F7
F8
OTL
OTL
OTL
OTL
OTL
OTL
OTL
OTL
OTL
E.:25pM =
F9
FiB
Esc-Outline
I
Figure 8.7: The Options File Default Window
Use L!J and (!J to move to the outline whose default file name you wish to
change. Move to the path, file name, and extension using (Eg and ~(Eg.
Type the correct entry and press I+-II. Pressing (G closes the window but
first accepts your current entry. Use the Options Save Setup command to
store your new settings.
Options File Auto Save
When set to ON, automatically saves the outline when you leave the
Outlook window.
Options File BAK File
Toggles the backup file option OFF and ON.
Chapter 8, Outlook: The Outline Processor
153
Storing the Options
Following is the command that stores all the Outlook settings.
Options Save Setup
[0J(9J1]
Saves the settings of the Options, Sort, and Search Options menus as well
as the current Outlook window size, color, and position.
Copying and Pasting
Outlook exports the marked block of headlines or the headline at the cursor
when you use Services Copy from Application or Services Quick Paste
command. In an attached note, these commands perform the same function
as in the Notepad; however, an attached note is not exported with the
headline. For example, let's export a block of text to the application
underneath:
1. Activate Outlook with l3]J(9J and, if required, select a file from the
Outlook Selection window.
2. Use {UJ to mark the beginning of the block.
3. Use flID to mark the end of the block.
4. Use the Services Quick Paste command (l3]J(§J) to send the text to the
application underneath.
When you use Services Paste from Clipboard «(2illlEJ) or Services Quick
Paste (l3]J(§J) to Outlook, it's like typing the marked headlines very quickly
on the keyboard. If you get a beep, increase the Character Delay setting on
the Services menu. It means SideKick Plus is pasting characters faster than
the receiving program can handle, so you need to slow transmission down.
When copying headlines between outlines, use Block Copy, which is
quicker. Here's an example of copying some text from the screen into
Outlook:
• Use the Services Copy from Screen to Clipboard command «(2ill(Q3) to
copy the screen to the Clipboard.
• Activate Outlook with l3]J(9J and, if required, select a file from the
Outlook Selection window.
• Use the Paste from Clipboard command (t£ED(EI) to copy the screen text
to Outlook.
154
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
9
The Phonebook
The Phonebook application is an extremely powerful part of SideKick Plus.
Its entry forms are the templates through which you keep track of names,
addresses, phone numbers, and other information. In the Glossary, you
keep confidential telecommunication codes and abbreviations of lengthy
access codes. SideKick Plus provides a complete communications program
as well, which you can use for your communications needs. You also get a
Script language for advanced communications.
This chapter provides complete information on all the features and
commands in the Phonebook. If you have not used it before, work through
the tutorial in Chapter 3 first. If you aren't familiar with computer
communications, you may want to read Appendix E, A Communications
Primer./I
1/
The Phonebook is a sophisticated application. It has a Summary window, a
Glossary window, and a Communications window. The first part of this
chapter discusses the Summary and Glossary windows and how to enter
your directory files. After you're well-grounded in this, we discuss the
Phonebook's advanced features: the Communications window, Script
language, and background processing.
To make an automated phone call and use computer communications, you
need a modem. SideKick Plus supports all of the popular modems and uses
the Hayes or Hayes-compatible internal modem by default. If your modem
is not a Hayes, a compatible, or internal, you need to install SideKick Plus
for your modem (see Chapter 15).
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
155
Activating the Phonebook
After activating SideKick Plus with @[!], you can activate the Phonebook
in two ways:
• From the main menu, move the cursor to Phonebook and press I +-J I.
• Press [!](B.
In addition, you can press ill§) from inside the Phonebook and open the
Options menu. Select Display Dial, then toggle the Use Number from command from BOOK to DISPLAY. Now, press ~ to leave the Phonebook. You
can simply press @@ (the center key on the numeric keypad) and the
Phonebook pops up. Use Number from DISPLAY means SideKick Plus will
dial the number on your screen display when you type in a Call prefix (for
example, CALL 408-438-8400). We call this Quick-Dial, and it's explained on
page 172.
The Summary Window
When you activate the Phonebook, the Summary window appears. It is the
center of all Phonebook activities. You can have any number of Phonebook
files, and each will display in the Summary window. Phonebook files have
the extension .ADR.
c: ,SKP,I'CI. ADR
- Index
NilI>1e
=ti:l
Logon to I'CI , ; ( ) [ ] A + - / $.
I
Go to Next Word
Moves the cursor one word to the right within the entry.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
(£!illill or [ElB
159
Go to Start of Entry
f£E!)(9f£E!)(ID or
IHomel
Moves the cursor to the first character within the entry.
f£E!)(9WJ or ~
Go to End of Entry
Moves the cursor to the last character within the entry.
f£E!)(8J or ~
Delete Previous Character
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor, if one exists.
f£E!)@J or ~
Delete Current Character
Deletes the character under the cursor, if one exists.
Delete Rest of Line
Deletes all text from the cursor to the end of the entry.
Delete Line
(gill(rJ
Deletes all the text in the entry.
~
Insert Afode
Changes between insert and overwrite modes when entering text. In Insert
mode, new text joins existing text; in Overwrite mode, new text replaces
existing text. A status indicator shows the current mode in the bottom left
of the window border.
Form Editor Commands
Previous Entry
(EZJ
Moves to the previous entry in the Phonebook and opens the address form.
This is the same as pressing (III Space \ in the Summary window.
~
Next Entry
Moves to the next entry in the Phonebook dnd opens the form. This is the
same as pressing llJl Space I in the Summary window.
EIDI +-1\
Enters the form into the Phonebook and opens a blank form. This is the
same as Insert Entry in the Summary window.
Insert Entry
~([l(rJ
Clear Form
Clears all data in the form.
~([lill
Restore Original
Restores the data to the version in the Summary window.
Use New Form
(EID
Allows you to use a different form. Use the cursor keys to position the
cursor and press I +-II to choose the form. You can use any number of forms
in the Phonebook file, though you cannot define a form yourself.
160
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
When you first open the Phonebook, it looks for a file containing forms.
Use the Options File Names Forms command to change that file. You can
use a separate type of form for each entry.
Data Entry Commands in the Summary Window
Following are the commands related to data entry:
Edit Entry
,
Space
I
Displays the form for the entry at the cursor position.
Attached Note
~
Opens up a Notepad connected to the current entry. SideKick Plus stores
the note in the Phonebook file, so it is best for short notes directly related to
the entry.
Insert Entry
1m' .......
1
Opens a blank form for entering data into the Phonebook. When you're
done entering data, press (G; the Phonebook then sorts the file using the
Index entry in the form.
Delete Entry
19i1llIDUJ
Deletes the entry at the current cursor position.
New Phonebook
[ID
Loads a new Phonebook file. The File Manager activates if you type a
directory or file name with a wildcard. To change the default file, use the
Options File Names Phonebook command. See page 158.
Options Phone Number
Changes the acceptable characters in the phone number blank. Following
are the Options Phone Number command entries.
Options Phone Number Dial Characters
Selects the characters that the Phonebook passes to the modem.
Options Phone Number Non-dial Characters
Selects the characters that the Phonebook accepts but does not pass to the
modem.
Options Phone Number Tone Character
Selects the character that performs Touchtone-dialing within the phone
number.
Options Phone Number Pulse Character
Selects the character that performs pulse-dialing within the phone number.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
161
Options Phone Number Short Delay Character
Selects the character that sets a short delay between parts of the phone
number.
Options Phone Number Key Delay Characters
Selects the character that signals you to press a key before it continues
dialing.
Finding an Entry in the Phonebook
To find data in the Phonebook, you can use the cursor and alphabetic keys,
the Index, or the Search command.
The Cursor Keys
To move the cursor around the Summary window, use the same keys as in
other SideKick Plus applications. Use the Options Go to menu to change
them.
Options Go to Previous Entry
(£EJl]J or
Moves the cursor to the entry above the current cursor position.
L!J
Options Go to Next Entry
(£EJl] or [!J
Moves the cursor to the entry below the current cursor position.
Options Go to Previous Page
(£EJf]J or ~
Moves the cursor one whole window, with an overlap of one line, nearer to
the start of the Phonebook.
Options Go to Next Page
(£EJ(g or IPgDnl
Moves the cursor one whole window, with an overlap of one line, nearer to
the end of the Phonebook.
Options Go to Start of Phonebook
Moves the cursor to the first entry in the Phonebook.
Options Go to End of Phonebook
Moves the cursor to the last entry in the Phonebook.
The Index
To find an entry by its Index, type the first letter of the Index. The cursor
jumps to the first entry with that letter. If you repeatedly press the letter, the
162
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Phonebook cycles through all the indexes with that first letter-it's much
faster than using cursor keys. The initial search is also faster.
The Search Command
The Search command opens a menu through which you can choose the
area of the Phonebook to search. After you have chosen that, you must
specify the string of characters you wish to find. The cursor then moves to
the first match, which can be at or below the cursor, and turns the Search
indicator on. Use Search Next and Search Previous to find the next and
previous match. To stop the search and clear the indicator, use Search
Clear.
Search Index
Searches the indexes for the string of characters.
Search Form
Searches the forms for the string of characters.
Search Attached Note
Searches the attached notes for the string of characters.
Search Everywhere
Searches the form and attached note for the string of characters.
Search Previous
l£EIIllJ
Searches for the string of characters above the cursor. If it finds the string, it
moves the cursor to that Summary line; otherwise, it issues an error
message.
Search Next
l£EII[I or l£EII[!J
Searches for the string of characters above the cursor. If it finds the string, it
moves the cursor to that Summary line; otherwise, it issues an error
message.
Search Clear
Turns searching for the string of characters off and removes the Search
status indicator.
Printing from the Phonebook
The Phonebook can print anything from an envelope address to a complete
dossier. Its printing facilities use a combination of the Print Options
command in the Phonebook and Services Setup Printer in the main menu.
Following are the printing commands.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
163
Print
(£illllEJ0
Pops up a menu that allows you to print the contents of the Phonebook.
Following are the Print menu commands:
Print Current
tEJ
Prints only the entry at the cursor. The standard SideKick Plus printer
menu displays, asking you where the printing should go.
Print All
Prints everything in the Phonebook. The standard SideKick Plus printer
menu displays, asking you where the printing should go.
(£illl~0
Print Options
Opens a menu of print choices.
The Print Options command chooses what parts of the Phonebook you
want to print. If the field is OFF, it does not print and the format adjusts
accordingly. To save the current states of the Print Options, use the Options
Save Setup command.
Phonebook: C: DORFF I . ADR
Index: SCRIBE
page
Phone: 415-345-£.789
First NaMe: P. D.
Last Nil/IIe: Cox
COMpan!:j: Pauonine Productions
Street: 987 Noble Avenue 112
State: CA
Telex: B9987£.
Zip: 94000
Fax: 123FGH45£,
EMail: BBB-987£'
SCRIBE
Cox, P. D.
Pause
Space-Conti nue
415-345-£'789
Esc-Abort
Figure 9.3: The Printed Phonebook with All Options ON
Print Options Index
When set to ON, prints the Index entry.
Print Options Summary Line
When set to ON, prints the name and phone number entries in the
Summary window as well as the form.
Print Options Form
When set to ON, prints the address form. If this is the only option turned
ON, it doesn't print a heading or footing even when you use the Print All
command. If you want to make an address label or prevent the Index and
phone number from printing, then use the LABEL form.
164
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Print Options Notes
When set to ON, prints the notes associated with the entry.
Print Options Script
When set to ON, prints the Script used for automating communications
with another computer.
Saving Phonebook Settings
The Phonebook has a simple system for storing settings. Each entry's
setting is saved in the Phonebook or Glossary file, while the .EXE file stores
the defaults.
These settings are saved with the Options Save Setup command in the
Summary Window:
(Summary window)
(Summary window)
(Summary window)
(Summary window, Glossary
window)
(Communications window)
(Communications window)
•
•
•
•
Options Display Dial
Options Phone Number
Options File Names
Options Go to
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Options Border
Options Wordwrap
Print options
(Summary window)
Default Attached Note Settings
(Communications window)
Edit Dialogue Settings
(except infilter and outfilter)
Default communications settings
Default form
Color, size, and position of all windows
These settings are stored in Phonebook or Glossary files.
Apart from the actual data, the Phonebook stores the form connected to
each entry and the communications settings for the entry.
The Glossary
The Glossary is where you keep abbreviations and their expansions, and
passwords for computer communications. You can have several glossaries,
just as you can have many Phonebook files, but only one can be active at a
time.
For added security, SideKick Plus encrypts the Glossary: You need a password before you can edit it. If you don't want a password, press I+-II the
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
165
first time SideKick Plus prompts you for a password for that Phonebook
file. Borland cannot recover the Glossary if you lose the password.
The Glossary looks like the Summary window, except that you edit the
summary line.
C: 'SKP'I'£I. ADR
- Index
NiUlle
Logon to 1'£1 (Both Services)
o 475
=t'CI
=t'CIBOTH Gets and Sends 1'£1 Mail
o 475
=t'CIBOTHA Gets and Sends 1'£1 Mail (Advanced)
o 475
o 475
=t'CIGET
Gets 1'£ I Mail
=t'CIGETA Gets 1'£1 Mail (Advanced Service)
o 475
=t'CISEtt> Sends 1'£1 Mail
o 475
o 475
=I'£ISEtt>A Sends 1'£1 Mail (Advanced Service)
C: ,SKP,PHONE. GIS
COMMent
SYMbol
MCiniUlle
Js;Mith
McipsIJ
falalala
Tab-Next field
Phone nUMber - 0981
0981
0981
0981
9981
0981
0981
Expansion
£,:38PM =
Esc-SuMMary lJindolJ
Shift-tab-Previous Field
Figure 9.4: The Glossary Window
Here's what the Glossary window labels and columns mean:
C: \ SKPLUS \ .GLS
The drive, directory, and file name of the current Glossary.
Symbol
The name of the symbol used in either the phone number or the Script.
SideKick Plus always displays the symbol in lowercase, although you can
enter it in any combination of uppercase and lowercase. Symbols must be a
single word.
Comment
A description of the symbol.
Expansion
The actual phone number or text represented by the symbol. On finding the
symbol in a phone number or a script, the Phonebook substitutes the
symbol's expansion.
When used for dialing, the expansion must follow the same rules for
translation as for a phone number in the Summary window (see page 157).
In addition, the expansion can have nested Glossary entries.
The Glossary is useful for storing area codes, because you then don't have
to remember the number or keep two Phonebook files-one for when you
dial locally and one for when you're outside the area code. It works like
this:
166
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
1. Define a symbol to be the abbreviation for the code, for example, LI for
Long Island.
2. Make the expansion equal to the full number, 516.
3. In the Summary window, precede each Long Island number with LI
instead of 516.
4. To use all your Long Island phone numbers from within Long Island,
temporarily change the LI expansion entry to a blank.
Since the Phonebook saves this in the Glossary, a separate file, you can now
transfer Phonebooks between home and office without alteration.
[Advanced: When used for reference from a Script, the expansion text must
follow the rules for a Script expression list:
• Surround text with quotes.
• Precede a hexadecimal number with a dollar sign ($).
• Precede a control character with a caret (A).
Any number in the expansion is a byte and any string of characters is a
predefined constant.
See Appendix F for more information on the Script.]
Entering Text into the Glossary
To enter text in a Glossary, use the Glossary Edit command. You are asked
for a password: This can be up to 13 characters within the IBM character
set, including the semi-graphic characters. For security, SideKick Plus
displays the actual characters as asterisks when you type the password.
Make the password memorable since Borland cannot decrypt the Glossary
if you forget your password.
You can decide not to use passwords. Simply press I +-II at the password
prompt the first time you open the Glossary file.
The editing commands in the Glossary are the same as in a form.
Commands within the Glossary
There are a few commands inside the Glossary, mostly mirroring the ones
in the Summary window.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
167
j3]J1 ~ I
Adds a blank entry line below the current cursor position. If you press (lliJ
after an Insert Line command without entering anything, the entry is given
an "empty" symbol and is placed at the beginning of the Glossary file.
Insert Line
Delete Entry
~(EJf]
Deletes the entry at the cursor position.
Print
~(EJ(!J
Prints the Glossary in a fixed format.
Change Password
Alters the password. At the prompt, type in the new password or hit I ~ I
for no password.
Set/Clear Protection
When set, tells the Phonebook to ignore the symbol at the cursor unless the
Glossary Protected Numbers command in the Summary window is set to
YES. Use this command to specify that a symbol can be expanded only
when the password has been entered correctly. The Phonebook displays the
symbol> before the symbol to remind you that protection is on.
~
New Glossary
Loads the Glossary you specify, if it exists; otherwise, creates a new one.
The Glossary Commands
The three commands on the Glossary menu in the Summary window are as
follows:
Glossary Edit
This command prompts you for a password and then allows you to edit the
Glossary. Passwords are not obligatory. When you create a new Glossary,
bypass the password by pressing I ~ I at the password prompt.
Glossary Protected Numbers
Use this command with the Glossary's Set/Clear Protection command to
prevent unauthorized people from using a Glossary symbol.
For example, you can have a Glossary symbol for your MCI telephone
system private code. Naturally, you don't want anyone else to use it, so you
enter it as a protected entry in the Glossary. Then, in the Summary window,
enter the symbol before your private code. At this point, nobody can use
your private code-not even you.
168
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
To use your private code, toggle Glossary Protected Numbers to ON. This
requires a password, which only you know, and so protects your code from
unauthorized use.
Glossary New File
Loads the Glossary you specify, if it exists; otherwise, creates a new one. A
directory name or file name with wildcards will activate the File manager.
You are asked for a password, just like the Glossary Edit command. To
change the default file name, use the Options File Names Glossary.
Copying and Pasting
This section discusses how to copy and paste in the Phonebook. Since there
are so many components to the Phonebook, we show you exactly what is
copied or pasted when you use these commands in different windows.
Copying and pasting while communicating with other computers is
explained on page 191.
The Phonebook data windows export the following bits of information
when you use the Services Copy from Application «(3]JED or Services Quick
Paste «(3]J(E) commands:
Summary window
The Index, name, and phone number
Form
The contents of the form, without the field
names
Attached Notes and Scripts
The marked block or line at the cursor
position
Glossary window
The symbol, comment, or expression at the
cursor position
Quick-Dial
The phone number at the cursor position
For example, let's paste a name and address into a letter that we've created
in the Notepad:
1. Press (£[ill(3]J to load SideKick Plus.
2. Activate the Notepad with (3]J1EI and place the cursor where you want
the address.
3. Activate the Phonebook with ~W. The Summary window opens.
4. Find the name you want and press I Space I to open the form.
5. Use the Services Quick Paste command (~lE) to send the name and
address in the form to the Notepad.
6. You should see the name and address in your Notepad file.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
169
Use these commands to paste names and addresses on the screen into the
Phonebook:
1. Deactivate SideKick Plus, if you're currently using it.
2. Press ~m3 to copy the name and address from the screen to the
Clipboard.
3. Activate SideKick Plus with ~f3lil
4. Activate the Phonebook with lm[B.
5. Create a new form with Insert Entry.
6. Press ~fEJ to paste the name and address into the Phonebook form.
170
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Advanced: Phonebook Communications
The Phonebook lets you dial both VOICE and DATA calls. A VOICE call is
when you use the Phonebook to dial a person's phone and then pick up the
receiver when the call rings through. In a DATA call, the Phonebook dials a
modem's number and transmits information through that modem to a
computer.
Use Communications Type to toggle between VOICE and DATA.
The Phonebook automatically dials a phone number, provided you connect
a modem to your computer and install SideKick Plus correctly. The phone
number can come either from whatever file is on the screen when you
activate the Phonebook or from the Summary window.
This section first explains how to get the modem working, followed by how
to dial from the Summary window, and ends with dialing from the screen.
Note: If you get a NO CARRIER error message and you've set the correct
communications port, check your telephone system. You may have one that
automatically queues outgoing calls when all outgoing lines are busy.
Setting Up for Voice Calls
Your distribution copy of SideKick Plus uses a Hayes or Hayes-compatible
modem by default. If you're not sure what you have, try one of the
following communications commands anyway-your computer won't be
damaged.
If you don't have a Hayes-type modem, you need to know the hardware
you have, its place of connection, and the type of phone system it's using.
If you have one of the following modems, you must follow the Install
program described in Chapter 15:
•
•
•
•
•
AT&T 4000
TeleBit TrailBlazer PC/SA
Cermetek Infomate 212PC
Novation Access 1-2-3
Racal Vadic Autodial VA212
If your modem isn't plugged in to the second serial port (the default), use
the Communications Line Available command to check whether that port
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
171
exists. Then use the Communications Line Set command to change the port
number:
Communications Line Available
This menu tells you whether the first and second communications ports
(COMI and COM2) exist. For the third and fourth communications ports
(COM3 and COM4), SideKick Plus will try to figure out whether they exist.
To overcome this, you can toggle the status of COM3 and COM4.
Communications Line Set
Sets the serial port number. This command gives you a menu of four communications ports: COM 1 through COM 4.
If your phone system does not use Touchtones, you must use the Communications Dial Method command:
Communications Dial Method
This is a toggle between tone and pulse dialing-pulse dialing being the
older and slower form, based on an electromechanical telephone dial.
Dialing from the Summary Window
To phone someone from the Summary window, find the entry containing
the number and press I ~ I. It's that simple. A message shows you what
number is being dialed, while your modem, if it has a speaker, echoes the
number. A message prompts you to press a key after it dials the number.
You can also use SideKick Plus to hang up the phone:
Communications Hangup
(EID
This disconnects you from the number you dialed. In the Communications
window, it is also called the Hangup command.
Quick-Dial: Dialing from the Screen
After activation, the Phonebook can search your screen for a phone
number. (Unlike SideKick, however, it does not do this by default.) To turn
it on, you must toggle the Options Display Dial Use Number from BOOK
to DISPLAY. Save this setup with the Options Sav.e Setup command.
The next time you activate SideKick Plus, it will search the screen, from the
top-left corner downward, for a valid phone number. If it finds one, it
pauses on the number. You can press I ~ 1 to dial it, ~ to exit, or I Space 1 to
go to the Summary window. If the screen has more than one valid phone
172
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
number, use the arrow keys to select the right one. If the Phonebook
doesn't recognize any phone numbers, the Summary window opens.
The Phonebook has a unique feature, Quick-Dial, that dials a number you
type in your underlying program. Just type a legal phone number and
press (9ill~ (the center key of the numeric keypad). The Phonebook
activates, searches the screen, and dials the number. You can change (9ill~
to any key with the Options Display Dial Shortcut command.
The Options Display Dial command is where you specify what a valid
phone number is. It offers you a number of ways to delineate phone
numbers in your text. You can specify obligatory characters, number
lengths, prefixes, and first or last Glossary characters. Let's look at its
options.
Options Display Dial Obligatory Characters
The characters that must be in the phone number for it to be considered
valid. You can choose not to have any mandatory characters, to give
yourself the most flexibility in numbers.
Options Display Dial Number Lengths
Sets the length of the phone number, not including obligatory character(s),
prefixes, or Glossary characters. For example, 6,7, 8 means that the number
must be 6, 7, or 8 digits long.
Options Display Dial Prefixes
You can specify any string here, which must precede a phone number for it
to be considered valid. For example, you could precede all phone numbers
in text with the string DIAL. One default prefix is CALL.
Options Display Dial First Glossary Character
Must be the first character in a Glossary symbol. The Glossary expansion's
last character must be the one set by the Options Display Dial Last
Glossary Character command, described next.
Options Display Dial Last Glossary Character
Sets the ending character of a Glossary entry when you use screen dialing.
Use this with the Options Display Dial First Glossary Character command
to set off a string of characters as a Glossary symbol. For example, if you
have 438 8400 as the display string, with sv defined as a Glossary
symbol, the Phonebook will recognize sv as a Glossary only if you
• set Options Display Dial First Glossary Character to < (less than)
• set Options Display Dial Last Glossary Character to > (greater than)
Let's say you want to screen-dial a number shown as Phone: (408) 438-8400.
There are many other numbers on the screen, which you want the
Phonebook to ignore. Set the Options Display Dial options as follows:
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
173
• The number always contains parentheses, so set Obligatory Characters to
()
• The actual numbers in the phone number totals 10 characters, so set
Number Lengths to 10.
• The number always has Phone: before it, so set Prefixes to Phone: and
delete the other prefixes on the menu.
• You want to ignore Glossary symbols in the phone number, so set First
Glossary Character and Last Glossary Character to blanks.
Phoning Another Computer
This section describes how to set up the Phonebook so it can have a
coherent exchange of information with another computer. Also, make sure
your modem works with Voice calls.
You may make mistakes when first setting up the Phonebook for a call to
another computer. Don't worry, your computer will survive any mix-ups.
Furthermore, you can correct minor mistakes even while you are
communicating with the other computer.
You'll be equipped to handle most communications problems if you fill out
this checklist before you start. They're explained under Communications
Parameters. If you don't know the answer to one of the items, use the
default.
Should it redial?
Speed
Data bits
Parity
Do you want an
echo when typing?
(usually NO)
(usually 300, 1200,2400, or 9600)
(usually 7 or 8)
(usually None or Even)
(usually OFF)
Communicating with other computers is as simple as phoning a person, if
you set the communication parameters correctly and set the Communications Parameter menu accordingly.
To phone another computer, simply find the entry you want to call in the
Summary window and press I ~ I. A message displays with the number
being dialed; your modem echoes the number if it has a speaker. If you
have a direct connection to another computer, do not specify a phone
number: The Phonebook bypasses the dialing, turns your computer into a
communications terminal, and provides a direct connection. The
Communications window opens when a connection is established.
174
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Setting Up for Data Calls
You tell the Phonebook that you are calling a computer with the Communications Type command:
Communications Type
Toggles between VOICE and DATA. A DATA call is a call to a computer,
while a VOICE call is to a person. When set to DATA, the menu changes to
reveal another two or three items related to computer communication:
Parameters, Background, and Script.
Simple Communications Parameters
The Communications Parameters menu contains all the settings needed to
start a conversation with another computer. Note that you need to set nondefault parameters for each Phonebook file you create.
We'll first describe the command, then its options.
Communications Parameters
t£EJ19l9
Changes the communications settings for the current entry. The simple
parameters are on the menu, while you reach the complex and unusual
ones via the Options command (see the next section). Each entry in the
Phonebook contains a separate set of these parameters, which is
automatically saved with the entry. Use Options Save Setup to save the
current setting as the default for new entries.
Here are the simple parameters, the same as the checklist on page 174.
Communications Parameters Redial
When set to ON, dials the phone number repeatedly until the other
computer answers or it exceeds the number of attempts you specify. You set
this number and the time between redialing with the menu. The
Phonebook allows a maximum of 255 attempts and 65,535 seconds between
attempts. When set to OFF, it dials the number once. When it is ON, you
must set both values (number of attempts and seconds) to 0 to switch it
OFF.
Communication Parameters Speed
Selects the speed of communication between the Phonebook and the other
computer. You'll usually choose either 300, 1200, 2400, or 9600 bits per
second (bps).
Communications Parameters Data Bits
Selects the number of bits of data used by the Phonebook. You'll usually
use 7 data bits with even parity or 8 data bits with no parity and 1 stop bit.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
175
Communication Parameters Parity
Selects the type of parity used by the Phonebook. Usually, you would set it
to None with 8 data bits and Even with 7 data bits.
Communications Parameters Echo
When set to ON, the Phonebook repeats the characters you type on the
screen. If you find that each letter you type becomes two letters on the
screen, then switch the Communications Parameters Echo command to
OFF.
Complex Communications Parameters
When establishing communications between the Phonebook and another
computer, you can often ignore certain communications parameters. These
unusual and complex parameters are listed on the Communications
Parameters Options menu. Let's first describe the command and then its
menu options.
Communications Parameters Options
l£Iill@llil
Changes the unusual (hence the shortcut) communications parameters. You
.usually change these when you are communicating with the other computer rather than before the call.
Here are the Options:
Communications Parameters Options Infilter
Translates the received characters into another sequence of characters
before displaying them. It prevents all the text from being written on one
line; it is also useful for testing transmissions and for international emulations.
When you select the command, a menu of characters displays: Use (!J, (]J,
f£E]IPgupl, or l£IilllpgDnl to move to the correct character and type the new
sequence of characters. The sequence follows the same rules as an
expression list in the Script (see Appendix F). You can use all the usual
editing keys.
As an example, let's stop the received text from being written to one line.
This usually happens when the other computer sends only carriage returns
(CR) at the end of each line, while the Phonebook expects a carriage return
and line feed (CR/LF). To fix this, use the Communications Parameters
Options Infilter command, move down to CR, type CR LF 1...... 1, and press
~ to exit from the menu.
176
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Communications Parameters Options Outfilter
Translates the characters for transmission into another sequence of
characters. It prevents the text from being double spaced in the receiving
computer, and it is also useful for testing transmissions and for
international emulations.
When you select the command, a menu of characters displays: Use (II, (lJ,
l£ElIPgupl, or l£ElIPgDnl to move to the correct character and type the sequence
of characters. The sequence follows the same rules as an expression list in
the script (see Appendix F) and you can use all the usual editing keys.
As an example, let's make sure the text isn't double spaced. This usually
happens when the Phonebook sends both a carriage return (CR) and line
feed (LF), while the other computer expects only a carriage return. To fix
this, use the Communications Parameters Options Outfilter command,
move down to LF, erase the LF after the arrow, and press ~ to exit from
the menu.
Communications Parameters Options Xon/Xoff
Toggles flow control, using the XON and XOFF characters. Typically, you
use it when another computer needs time to accept a file from the
Phonebook. When the receiver sends an XOFF (transmitter off) character,
the sender stops transmission. The sender does not restart transmission
until the sender sends an XON (transmitter on) character.
Warning: If you deactivate SideKick Plus without XON /XOFF and with
background communications OFF, you can lose some of the data sent by
the communicating computer.
Communications Parameters Options Delays
Creates a delay between each character and line. You use it when sending a
file to a computer without a protocol or without XON /XOFF. When you
toggle the command to ON, a menu requests the delay between each
character and each line, in hundredths of seconds.
Communications Parameters Options Carrier Ctl
Occasionally, you may want to use a cable containing only the transmit,
receive, and ground wires. To do so, you must turn Carrier Control OFF; in
addition, since the Phonebook cannot detect the carrier, you must explicitly
disconnect a DATA call using the Hangup command (see page 158).
Communications Parameters Options Stop Bits
Selects the number of stop bits used by the Phonebook. Unless you are
using a speed of 110 bps, which isn't likely, set this to 1 bit.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
177
The Communications Window
The Communications window comes up when you enter the communications program. (Don't confuse the Communications window with the
Communications menu in the Summary window, which we've explained in
previous sections.) Here's what it looks like:
x: : x' -: xxx(' xx' xx(' x' x(-xxlrx(' x' xX@Xxxx(-x'x(-xx('xxx:xx
X("'X)(@XXXX@)(XX("
xx
Disconnected
F1 Help
F2 XI11it File
No Shortcut
SUl11
F3 Get File
F4 Record
L.....
F
Col11111unications =
'Mn-~m"(J"'Record Dialogue
Transl11i t File
Get File
ParaMeters:
Hangup
Script
Options
FS ZOOl11
F7
FE> Slolitch
Fa Hangup
U-/'tlue
Shift-Ese-Exit All
F9 Edit
FiB Menu
Esc-Exit
Figure 9.5: The Communications Window
The Communications window contains the text that is transmitted between
the Phonebook and the other computer (termed the dialogue).
To send a control character such as Escape, "K, or "0, press 19i1lf!J, then the
character. For example, to send Escape, press 19i1lf!J~.
Disconnected
Indicates that the phone call has been terminated. It appears after you use
the Hangup command or after the No Carrier or Carrier Lost error message.
Record
Indicates that SideKick Plus is recording all dialogue between the
Phonebook and the other computer in a file with the default name
DIALOGUE.TXT. This indicator appears after you use the Record Dialogue
command or the Record Dialogue Resume command. It turns off after you
use the Record Dialogue Pause command or Record Dialogue Stop
command. The ~ function key does the same command.
Learn
Indicates that SideKick Plus records the communications dialogue and
translates it into a Script file. You can use this dialogue later to automate
communications with the remote computer.
Sum
178
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Indicates the protocol used to Send or Get a file. It can be one of four
choices: Sum, CRC, Line, or None, set by the Options Protocol command
(see page 180).
The message line tells you the status of the Send command, Get command,
and Script execution.
The Communications Window Function Keys
and Commands
The Communications Window function keys are as follows:
~ XmitFile
Transmits a file to the other computer using the protocol set by the Options
Protocol command. It is the same as the Transmit File menu command.
(E]J Get File
Receives a file from the other computer using the protocol set by the
Options Protocol command. It is the same as the Get File menu command.
lEJ Record
Records the dialogue between the Phonebook and the other computer to a
file. It's the same as the Record Dialogue menu command.
lEID Hangup
Disconnects the phone call.
~Edit
Opens a Notepad containing the last 34,000 characters of dialogue between
the Phonebook and the other computer. It is the same as the Edit Dialogue
menu command.
Following are the commands in the Communications window, except for
the Script command, which is an advanced feature discussed on page 183.
Editing and Recording the Dialogue
Edit Dialogue
~
Opens a Notepad containing the last 34,000 characters of dialogue between
the Phonebook and the other computer.
l2illlEJ~ or lEJ
Records the dialogue between the Phonebook and the other computer to a
file. To change the default file name, use the Options File Names Dialogue
command in the Summary window. When you select Record Dialogue, it
prompts you for a file name, turns the Record indicator on, and writes an
Record Dialogue
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
179
entry in the LOG file. Then the menu changes and displays the following
commands:
Record Dialogue Pause
Suspends the dialogue recording and does not save it to a file. When you
press I +-II, the menu changes to Resume, which restarts the recording.
Record Dialogue Stop
Stops the recording and makes an entry in the LOG file. If you press IE to
exit from the Communications window, SideKick Plus automatically
performs this command.
Receiving and Sending Files
The automatic reception and transmission of files is done when the
Phonebook executes a prepared Script (see page 183).
Transmit File
C£E!J0~ or £EZJ
Sends a file to the other computer using the protocol set by the Options
Protocol command. The message line indicates the status of the transfer
(number of blocks transferred), and there is an entry in the default .LOG
file. To change the default file name, use the Options File Names Transfer
command in the Summary window.
Get File
C£E!J0lID or [ID
Receives a file from the other computer using the protocol set by the
Options Protocol command. The message line indicates the status of the
transfer (usually, number of blocks transferred), and there is an entry in the
.LOG file. To change the default file name, use the Options File Names
Transfer command in the Summary window.
Options Protocol
l£EII(gJlIl
Sets the protocol for the transfer (hence the shortcut) of files and changes
the status indicator accordingly. This setting is saved in the Phonebook
entry when you leave the Communications window. Following are
descriptions of the Options Protocol menu entries:
Options Protocol Sum (Xmodem)
Sets the protocol to XMODEM SUM and turns the number of data bits to 8,
with no parity. (See Appendix E). When transmitting files, use either SUM
or CRC. It's best if both protocols match. XMODEM SUM is the standard
type of XMODEM; use it when no CRC option is available. Unlike other
XMODEM implementations, you can still use the Phonebook as a terminal
when transferring a file between two Phonebooks.
180
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Options Protocol eRC (XModem)
Sets the protocol to XMODEM eRe and turns the number of data bits to 8,
with no parity. This a special type of XMODEMi use it when the other
computer has an XMODEM eRC option. Unlike other XMODEM
implementations, you can use the Phonebook as a communications
terminal when transferring a file between two computers.
Options Protocol Line (CRLF)
Sets the protocol to one based on carriage returns and line feeds. The
sender issues a carriage-return character at the end of each line and does
not transmit until a linefeed character returns from the receiver. You would
use this, for example, to send a file to MCI mail.
Options Protocol None
Sets an absence of protocol, so only XON /XOFF stops the receiving
computer from receiving characters too rapidly.
Changing Parameters and Disconnecting
Parameters
[EiJ@f.9
Same as the Communication Parameters menu. The Communications
Parameters Options menu in the Summary window uses the shortcut
[EiJ@(9J.
Hangup
Disconnects the phone.
Wordwrap and Borders
Options Wordwrap
When set to OFF, the Phonebook ignores any characters past the right
window margin. When set to ON, you can see all characters within the
window because words past the right margin wrap to the next line.
Options Border
Turns the window frame OFF and ON.
You store both these options with the Save Options Setup command in the
Summary window.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
181
Automating Communications with
Other Computers
To get even simple things done in computer communication, you need to
type long strings of commands. SideKick Plus lets you sidestep all that with
,scripts.
This section introduces the Script language and takes you from simple
Scripts to complex ones. Appendix F is a reference guide to the Script
statements, listed in the following table. A statement is simply a set of
instructions that specify the operations to be performed.
Table 9.1: The Script Language Statements
ALARM
ASSIGNMENT
BEEP
CAPTURE
DELAY
DISCONNECT
END CAPTURE
IF /THEN /ENDIF
LOG
MATCH
OK
PRINT
PROTOCOL
RECEIVE
REPEAT /UNTIL
RESTART
SCREEN
SELECT /CASE/
ENDSELECT
SUSPEND
TIMEOUTFACTOR
TIMEOUTUNIT
TRANSMIT
WAIT
WRITE
182
Makes a window that pops up and beeps
Sets OK to either TRUE or FALSE
Produces an audio tone
Records the input and output in a file
Pauses for a given length of time
Ends the Script and hangs up the phone
Closes the capture file
Tests OK and alters the flow of the Script
Records text into the LOG file
Searches the serial port input
Is a status value set by a statement
Displays a message in the Communications
window
Changes the file transfer type
Gets a file from the host computer
Executes statements until a stop expression
Disconnects and executes the Script again
Controls output to the Communications window
Is a general-purpose testing statement
Pauses the Script. Script Resume restarts it.
Sets the time before the Script skips a statement
Sets the multiple used by TIMEOUTFACTOR
Sends a file to the host computer
Pauses until it receives nothing for a specified
period
Sends data out the serial port
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Learning the Script
A script is an exchange of commands and characters between two computers. A script file stores all the commands and responses you usually
type in, say, when logging in to a bulletin board like CompuServe. Thus,
when you use CompuServe the next time, the Phonebook automatically
implements the Script and logs onto the receiving computer instead of
asking you to type in the information.
The simplest way to write a script is to let SideKick Plus "learn" the
script-that is, record the dialogue between two computers and convert it
into a Script. To implement this, use the Communications Script Learn
command in the Summary window:
Communications Script Learn
When set to ON, the script file records all dialogue (up to 8,000 characters)
between the two computers. The Phonebook surrounds the information
that the other computer issues with MATCH" and ", while the Phonebook's
output is bracketed with WRITE " and", CR. If you enter more than 8,000
characters, SideKick Plus deletes information from the beginning of the file.
Entering and Executing the Script
Now that SideKick Plus has learned the Script, you can execute it. First,
check the Script with the Communications Script Edit command.
Communications Script Edit
l2ill~1II
Opens a Notepad containing the Script. The Notepad menu contains an
extra item, Check Script, which examines a marked block for any errors,
such as an incorrectly used statement. (See "Marking a Block of Text" in
Chapter 8 if you've forgotten how to do so.) If you press ~ to stop editing
the Script, SideKick Plus automatically performs a Check Script command
. and saves the Script to the Phonebook. You can also edit the Script from the
Communications window with the Script Edit command.
When you're in Script Learn, use Script Resume and Script Pause. When
you've pressed ~ or Suspend, use Script Resume.
Now,let's use the Script.
Communications Script Activate
l2ill~0
When set to ON, immediately runs the marked block in the Script after the
Communications window opens (provided the Script is error-free). When
set to OFF, ignores the Script for that entry. In the Communications
window, immediately executes the Script. Select Script Activate or use
l2ill~0.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
183
Like most other communications commands, the Script command has
options:
Communications Script Restart Options
Allow you to set the number of times the Script reruns and alter the delay
between reruns.
Controlling the Script with Statements
At certain places in a Script, the program will need help in deciding what to
do next-for instance, when a file transfer fails. A statement is a set of
instructions that specify operations to be performed if certain conditions
are met. You can use the IF, REPEAT, and SELECT statements, in tandem
with the OK flag, to set up a process of elimination.
Let's look at the simplest statement: the IF statement. This statement uses
the OK flag-set automatically by the MATCH, RECEIVE, and TRANSMIT
statements or manually by the ASSIGNMENT (:=) statement-to evaluate a
condition. A MATCH statement matches the string within the quotes with
the transfer from the communications port and, if it matches, sets the OK
flag to TRUE. The statement
IF condition THEN do something
END IF
says, if condition is true then run the statements after the THEN statement;
otherwise, run the statements after the END IF.
If the statement is false and you want some other statement to execute
before the END IF, use the ELSE statement:
IF condition THEN do something
ELSE do something different
END IF
That is, if condition is true then run the statements after the THEN but
before the ELSE; otherwise, run the statements after the ELSE.
You often wish to execute different parts of the Script depending on what
the other computer sends. For example, you may either want to
• log off and hang up if there is no new mail on your electronic mail
service.
• capture the mail if you have new messages.
You use the SELECT statement to decide between these actions. It's very
much like a series of IF and MATCH statements:
184
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
IF MATCH "this" THEN
DO this
OR IF MATCH "that"
DO that
Here's a typical construction:
SELECT
CASE "Test one"
WRITE "One"
CASE "Test two"
WRITE "Two"
END SELECT
That is, if the MATCH is IITest one", then do WRITE "One"; if the MATCH is
"Test two", then do WRITE "Two". If the MATCH does not find anything
within a given time (usually 10 seconds), execute the statement after the
END SELECT.
Lastly, the REPEAT statement: This executes a block of statements until it
meets some condition, such as condition being true. The simplest variation
is
REPEAT
WRITE "Question authority"
3 TIMES
which sends the sequence, Question authority, to the host computer three
times in succession.
The most useful variation of the REPEAT statement is when you combine a
limited number of executions with the OK flag. For example,
REPEAT
TRANSMIT "C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\MESSAGE.TXT"
3 TIMES OR UNTIL OK
which transmits the file C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\MESSAGE.TXT and tries
twice more if the first try fails.
A Simple Script
Let's look at a sample Script: the one created when the Phonebook learns a
Script. It consists of only two statements: MATCH and WRITE. When you
run the Script, MATCH waits for the characters in between the quotes (" "),
while WRITE sends these characters to the receiving computer. The
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
185
Phonebook executes each MATCH and WRITE set, starting at the top of the
file and moving from line to line, in a sequential manner.
It's advisable to put some comments (preceded by semicolons) into the
Script, so that you remember what the statements do. The Phonebook
ignores these comments when it executes the Script. For example, this
script with comments
This is a comment, notice the semicolon at the start.
i ---------------------------------------------------------
MATCH "A Test, just for you"
WRITE "Filbert Street",CR
WRITE CR
executes the same as the following script without comments
MATCH "A Test, just for you"
WRITE "Filbert Street",CR
WRITE CR
The CR at the end of the WRITE statement stands for carriage return. It is
equivalent to pressing I +-II. There are many more abbreviations like CR; all
are listed under "Predefined Constants" in Appendix F.
Glossary Substitutions in Scripts
To communicate with another computer, you often need to type in a name
and password. These names or passwords should not go into a WRITE
statement, which anyone can see. Fortunately, you can enter these
confidential items in the Glossary: The Phonebook encrypts the Glossary so
that the user must have a password to edit it.
To use a symbol (abbreviation) from the Glossary, you precede the symbol
with an @, for example, @test. You place exactly what is in the WRITE
statement into the Expansion blank for the symbol in the Glossary.
Let's say your name on CompuServe is FILBERT:STREET. Go into the
Glossary with the Glossary Edit command and enter the symbol COMPUSERVE
with the Expansion "FILBERT: STREET". Remember to type in the quotes.
To incorporate it into the Script, use a WRITE statement such as WRITE
@COMPUSERVE. The Phonebook automatically substitutes WRITE
"FILBERT: STREET" for COMPUSERVE.
186
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Time in Scripts
The Script does not wait around indefinitely to see if the statement
executes. It has a time limit that the Script calls the timeout factor. You can
add this to the end of any statement that waits for the other computer to
supply something, for example, a MATCH statement.
The Script normally gives a MATCH statement 10 seconds before it gives
up and goes on to the next statement. If you want to change the time period
to 25 seconds, add a comma followed by the number of seconds (,25) to the
end of the statement:
MATCH "FILBERT"
becomes
MATCH "FILBERT",25
You can also stop running the Script for a given length of time with the
DELAY statement. You may want to give the host system some time to
respond. For example, DELAY (25) pauses the Script for 25 seconds.
You may want to set more complex specifications. Say you want to wait
until the other computer hasn't sent data for a given length of time before
going on. In this case, use the WAIT statement: WAIT (25) stops the Script
until 25 seconds have passed without any traffic on the communications
line.
File Transfer by Scripts
In electronic mail systems, the editors provided are often difficult to use. In
addition, writing your letter on line is expensive. It is much better to use a
PC editor, such as the Notepad, to create your letter, then phone the mail
system and send the file. Use the Transmit command to automatically send
a file you've created over your modem. For example,
TRANSMIT "C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\MESSAGE.TXT"
This is equivalent to the Send command in the Communications window.
The transmission protocol is determined by the PROTOCOL statement or
the Options Protocol command, which display the same choices. For
example, PROTOCOL XMCRC uses the XMODEM CRC protocol.
Of course, you can receive files as well as transmit them. To receive a file,
use the RECEIVE statement. For example,
PROTOCOL NONE
RECEIVE "C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\NEW.MSG",O
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
187
The ,0 means that SideKick Plus will overwrite any file with the file name
C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\NEW.MSG. RECEIVE uses only the XMODEM
protocol. To receive a file without a protocol, use the CAPTURE statement.
The CAPTURE statement also records a dialogue. For instance,
CAPTURE "C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\MESSAGE.CAP",O
records all dialogue in C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\MESSAGE.CAP. To finish
recording, use the END CAPTURE statement.
An Example Script: MelMAIL
Now that you have an idea of what Scripts and statements are, let's look at
an example of a working Script.
The following Script is for MCI Mail in a Tymnet. It uses the Glossary
symbols mciname for your user name and mcipsw for your password to log
you into MCI, checks your messages, and records all your new messages in
the file MCIMAIL.OOO. More examples are on the Examples distribution
disk, in the MCI.ADR, CSERVE.ADR, and BIX.ADR Phonebook files.
; Gets mail from MCI advanced service via Tymnet
DELAY (2)
; Waits for Tymnet to respond
Tymnet terminal identifier
WRITE "a"
MATCH "in:",40
; Match for service prompt
; We want MCI MAIL
WRITE "mcimail", cr
; Match for user name
MATCH "name:",40
reply with Glossary symbol mciname
WRITE @mciname,cr
; Match for password
MATCH "word",20
reply with Glossary symbol mcipsw
WRITE @mcipsw,cr
MATCH "MCI",30
; Ensure that above worked
IF not ok disconnect ENDIF
; Check for messages
SELECT
; Nobody likes me! (No messages)
CASE "are no messages"
; Wait for prompt
MATCH "command",30
Someone likes me! (Some messages)
CASE "your Inbox has"
; Wait for prompt
MATCH "command",30
WRITE "pr in",cr
; Get all the messages
; Put messages in MClMAIL.OOO, .001 ...
CAPTURE "MClMAIL.OOO",UNIQUE
REPEAT
Start analyzing messages
; No more messages
MATCH "Command:"
UNTIL ok
END CAPTURE
ENDSELECT
WRITE "ex",cr
; Exit MCI
DISCONNECT
; Hang up phone
188
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
The Phonebook Log File
Computer communications are never absolutely reliable. There can be
static on the phone line, which interferes with the signals being transferred,
or perhaps the phone lines are busy. If you aren't looking at the screen
when a problem occurs, you'd never know there's an error. To overcome
this, the Phonebook provides the LOG file.
SideKick Plus writes to the LOG file whenever you perform the following
actions, whether from a Script or not:
•
•
•
•
•
•
start a Script
transmit a file
receive a file
start recording a dialogue
end recording a dialogue
finish a Script
The entries follow this form:
Date
Time: Message.
Date
Time: Message.
The date and time are taken from the PC's internal clock, and the message is
one of the following:
Script started.
Script finished normally.
Script aborted: Interrupted.
Script aborted: Carrier lost.
Script aborted: Hangup./Restart/Suspended.
Capturing to: C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\MAIL.BIX.
Capture file closed.
Transmitting: C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\MAIL.BIX.
Transmission successful./Transmission aborted: Timeout./Carrier lost./
File error./Transmission cancelled by remote.
Receiving: C:\SKPLUS\PHONE\MAIL.BIX.
Transmission successful.
Use the Options File Names Log command to change the file name of the
LOG file.
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
189
Background Communications
SideKick Plus can run computer communications while you are in an
application program, such as Borland's database manager, Reflex, or
Borland's spreadsheet program, Quattro. We call this background
communications, since it happens without the application program's
knowledge or involvement. The communication must therefore be
unattended and not require any keyboard control-you can send files, get
files, and execute Script programs.
Background communications, whether a Script execution or file transmission, requires some of your computer's time. This slows the computer
down when it executes the application program, but not noticeably.
While doing background communications, SideKick Plus uses your hard
disk at regular intervals-you'll see its light flash on and off. Don't worry,
this is perfectly normal.
To use background communications, you must re-install SideKick Plus (see
Chapter 15). It increases the resident size of SideKick Plus to about 95
KBytes of memory.
There is only one menu item for background communications:
Communications Background
When set to ON, allows Send File, Get Files, and Scripts to work behind
another application program. When set to OFF, you need to be in the
Communications window to link up with another computer. When you
toggle the command in the Communications window, nothing happens
until a Script Activate, Script Resume, Send, or Get command.
Background Communications without a Script
You can continue doing interactive communications and use background
communications to send or receive files. Just set these options:
• Toggle Communications Parameters Background to ON.
• Toggle Communications Script Activate to OFF.
From now on, whenever you Transmit or Get files in the Communications
window, the window closes and the Summary window appears, with the
background indicator showing in the window border. You are free to go back
to your application program and continue what you are doing. When the
Phonebook completes transmission, it will beep and, if you are in the
Phonebook, open the Communications window.
190
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Background Communications with a Script
To get the most out of the background communications feature, combine it
with a Script. That way, you can get your MCI mail while you are editing a
file, or obtain the latest Dow Jones figures while juggling figures in Quattro.
To make the Script work behind an application program
1. Be sure you have a working Script.
2. Toggle Communications Background to ON.
3. Toggle Communications Script Activate is ON.
From now on, when you dial a number, SideKick Plus initializes the Script
and places background in the window border to remind you that it is
executing the Script.
Scripts that execute behind another program are difficult to correct. We
strongly recommend that you first test the Script with Communications
Parameters Background OFF. If the Script develops problems later,
•
•
•
•
Check the LOG file.
Place BEEP at various points in the Script.
Use the LOG command at various points in the Script.
Place a CAPTURE statement at the top of the Script to record the dialogue
between the Script and the other computer.
• Beware of statements that depend on timing. If possible, use a MATCH or
SELECT/CASE statement rather than a DELAY or WAIT statements.
Copy and Paste in the Communications Window
When you use copy and paste with computer communications, you save on
expensive connection costs. You can prepare and forward messages using
the Notepad instead of directly on MCI Mail or Compuserve. When you
use the Services Copy from Application (~EJ) or Services Quick Paste
(~1EI) commands in the Communications window, here's what gets
transferred:
Communications Window
The line at the cursor position
Edit Dialogue
The marked block or line at the cursor
position
For example, you can forward electronic mail to your assistant with your
comments by following these steps:
Chapter 9, The Phonebook
191
1. Activate SideKick Plus with t£El1m.
2. Activate the Phonebook with fEill[B.
3. Dial the electronic service, such as MCl Mail or Compuserve, and get
(read or print) your electronic mail (background communications is
OFF). The ~ buffer, meanwhile, records everything in the Communications window.
4. Disconnect from the electronic service by giving the appropriate command, then press (EID to hang up.
5. Press ~ to move the cursor to the letter in question.
6. Mark the letter you wish to export by pressing (EZl (lfEllEJf]J) and (EID
(l£EDlEJlEJ) .
7. Use 1mB (Services Copy from Application) to place the letter in the
Clipboard.
8. Activate the Notepad with fEillill I+-II.
9. Press [!illS (Paste from Clipboard) to paste the letter into the Notepad.
Your assistant can now open your Notepad file and read your comments on
the letter.
You can also paste a letter from the Notepad to the electronic mail service:
1. Activate the Notepad with
i!illffiJ.
2. Type the letter in the Notepad.
3. Mark the letter as a marked and displayed block with (EZl (lfEIffiJf]J) and
(EID ([!illfEJffiJ).
4. Activate the Phonebook with fEill(E1.
5. Move the cursor to your electronic service (such as MCl Mail or
Compuserve) and press I+-II to dial it.
6. Follow the prompts to where the electronic mail service asks you for the
text of the letter.
7. Activate the Notepad with t3IDill.
8. Use ~(G (Services Quick Paste) to paste the contents of the Notepad to
the electronic mail service.
9. Follow the electronic mail service prompts to send the letter and leave
the service.
10. Press CEID to hang up.
192
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
10
Time Planner
The Time Planner is your calendar, appointment book, and schedule
organizer combined into one application. It comes complete with an almost
unlimited number of alarms, a feature that searches for free time periods,
and a graphic display of your schedule.
The Time Planner comprises three different views of your days: the
Calendar window, the Appointment Book, and the Schedule window. You
can attach notes to any day in anyone of these windows. In addition, you
can set alarms and perform searches in the Appointment Book.
This chapter provides complete information about all the features and
commands in the Time Planner. If you haven't used it before, read the
tutorial in Chapter 3 first.
After you activate SideKick Plus with
Planner in one of two ways:
(£B)~,
you can activate the Time
• Pop up the main menu with (!ill, move the cursor to Time Planner, and
press I +-il
.Press~lll
The Calendar Window
The Calendar window displays six weeks at a time, in a wall-calendar
format. You use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the desired day. You
can then open the Appointment Book, or Schedule window, or attach a note
to that day.
Chapter 70, Time Planner
193
TIME PLANNER
CALENDAR WINDOW
Year
Month
Week
Previous
Today
TIME PLANNER
SCHEDULE WINDOW
Year
Month
--------------+--------4 Page
Week
Column
Previous
Today
Figure 10.1: The Calendar and Schedule Window Menu Trees
194
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C:-.sKP>
= Calendar
['$*+--15 :1:)
'
Tuesday
Sun Mon Tue lJed Thu Fri Sat
25
Zf>
Z7
28
29
39
1
2
3
4
5
I)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
11)
17
18
19
20
21
22
Zf>
Z7
28
29
2
3
23
24
39
31
G
1
4
5
I):SZpM '"
Fl Help
F3
F5 Schedule
F7
F2
F4 Print
FI) S\Jitch
F8
PgUp,lDn-Month Ctrl-PglJpl'Dn-'lear
Center-Today +J -Open Book
F9 Note
F10 Menu
Esc-Exit
Figure 10.2: The Calendar View
Following are the function keys specific to the Calendar Window.
lEJ Print
Prints the calendar. See page 196.
1m Schedule
Opens the Schedule window.
(E2J Note
Attaches a Notepad to the day.
Using the Cursor Keys to Change the Date
The usual cursor keys move you through the Calendar window by days,
weeks, months, and years. Following are a summary of the commands to
move the cursor to a different date.
Go to Previous Day
Moves the cursor to the previous day.
Go to Next Day
Moves the cursor to the next day.
l£ill@ or B
Go to Previous Week
Moves the cursor to the same day of the previous week.
l£illlID or
[fJ
Go to Next Week
Moves the cursor to the same day of the next week.
l£illlID or
[!J
Go to Previous Month
Moves the cursor to the same date last month.
Chapter 10, Time Planner (Calendar)
195
Go to Next Month
Moves the cursor to the same date next month.
Go to Previous Year
Moves the cursor to the same date last year.
Go to Next Year
Moves the cursor to the same date next year.
Go to Today
~
Places the cursor at the date given by your PC. (The shortcut is the center
key on the numeric keypad.)
Attaching a Daily Agenda
The Daily Agenda is a Notepad attached to the day, and you simply press
(E2I to open it. You can use it to jot down any details about the day, such as a
conference agenda or a to-do list. The note is part of your Appointment
Book for that day, so you can also reach it from the Appointment Book or
the Schedule window. Like the rest of the Time Planner, when you make a
change in it, the Time Planner automatically saves it.
Use the Note (Agenda) command on the
Agenda.
lW menu
or (E2I to get a Daily
Press (B to return to the Calendar.
Printing the Calendar
Use the Print command l£EiJlEJl] or lEil to print out the Calendar. SideKick
Plus displays the standard print menu, which you use to indicate where the
printing should go: to a printer, file, or screen.
If your printer cannot produce IBM semi-graphic characters, you must set
the Services Setup Printer Graphics Support command to NO.
196
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
TIME PLANNER
APPOINTMENT BOOK
Begin Search
Appointment Duration (Min)
Agenda and Titles
Start Searching at
Vacant Time - - - - - - 1 - - - - 1 Finish Searching at
Days to Search Ahead
Are Searched
Buzzer
Open Phone book
Quick Paste
Directory
Name
Ala
~::::~===========t==~~~~~~~~~~~!==tiE;xt~e~n~Si:o:=n=i
Resolution
Begin Day
End Day
Default Times
Directory
Name
Extension
r
Top
Month
Bottom
Day
Next - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - 1 Time
. . . _--_..1
Goto------------1r~
Save
Previous
Today
Year
Month
Day
Time
Figure 10.3: The Appointment Book Menu Tree
Chapter 10 Time Planner (Appointment Book)
197
The Appointment Book
The Appointment Book is at the center of the Time Planner. It is where you
monitor your activities within the day: You can set alarms, add agenda, and
find a free time slot. Any .APP files that you create in the Appointment
Book are stored by default in the directory SideKick Plus is in.
You can open the Appointment Book in three ways:
• Select Appointment Book on the menu.
• Press 1+-II .
• Type a date, such as 03-02-87, and press 1+-11. The Appointment Book
opens at that date.
The Time Planner accepts almost any date format, whether it be numeric
or text, separated by spaces or hyphens. You can set up your preferred
format in the Services Setup Date and Time menu. Legal dates include
May 787
MAY 7, 1987
05-07-87
5/7-1987
From the Appointment Book, press
Schedule window.
~
to return to the Calendar or
When the Appointment Book comes up, you'll notice that it starts at 8:00
. am and ends at 8:00 pm by default. It's very easy to insert new time slots, as
we explain on page 203.
There are two columns in the Appointment Book. The left column displays
time periods. The right column has blanks in which you enter the
description of the appointment, which we call the title.
You can have multiple Appointment Book files. Just press fIID and, at the
New Book prompt, type in another file name. (The default file is
PERSONAL.APP.)
198
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
r
Cillendilr
MondilY
F
Oct 24,1988
C: ,SKP\PERSONAL. APP
Oct 24,1988
MondilY
IJorkdilY
Sun Mon Tue !Jed Thu Fri Silt
25
2£,
Z7
28
39
29
1
2
3
4
5
£,
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1f>
17
18
19
20
21
22
23l1li
25
2f>
Z7
28
29
1
2
3
4
5
39
31
F1 Help
F2
t.-TiMe
8:B0il
8:39il
9:B0il
9:39il
10:B0il
10:39il
11:B0il
11:39il
12:00p
12:39p
1:B0p
1:39p
2:B0p
2:39p
3:B0p
3:39p
4:B0p
F5 ZOOM
F3 New Book
F4 Print
Ff> Switch
Ctr
I-PgUp/On-r'kmth
PgUp/Dn-DilY
F7 Tag
F8
Center-TodilY
2:02PM
F9 Note
F10 Menu
Esc-Cillendilr
=
Figure 10.4: The Appointment Book
Here's an explanation of the Appointment Book display:
C:\SKPLUS\PERSONAL.APP
The directory, drive, name, and extension of the Appointment Book file.
Wednesday Apr 04, 1988
The day you are making appointments for.
Workday
The type of day: either a workday or a holiday. You can set this by going to
the first time period of the day with l£li!lIHomel, using (JJ to move to Workday,
and pressing I ~ I to toggle it. If you load the default Appointment Book on
the distribution disk, the Time Planner will reflect U.S. holidays and
weekends.
(Day Note)
This is a one-line entry blank with an attached Daily Agenda (a Notepad)
that allows you to summarize the day's activities. Now type in whatever
title you want to give your day.
Add a Daily Agenda with ~ or (W (Insert Agenda). If you have a Daily
Agenda attached here or in the Calendar or Schedule window, the symbol ==
appears. The Calendar window, Schedule window, and Appointment Book
share the Daily Agenda file. SideKick Plus automatically saves the Daily
Agenda into the Appointment Book file.
Search
Indicates that a search string has been set with the Search menu. Turn it off
using the Search Clear command, explained later in this chapter.
Chapter 10, Time Planner (Appointment Book)
199
Following are the function keys specific to the Appointment Book window:
(E]J New Book
Prompts you for the file name of the Appointment Book you want to open.
If you are unsure of the name, the File Manager can help you. Just type a
drive, directory, or file name with wildcards. If you select an existing file,
the Time Planner loads the Appointment Book file. Otherwise, type in a
new file name and a new blank Book opens.
£EiI Print
Prints today's appointments. It is equivalent to the Print Today's
command.
lWTag
Marks an appointment so that you can move or copy it.
fa Note
Attaches a Note to the current appointment or day.
The Appointment Book Symbols
Following are the symbols that can appear to the left of an appointment.
r
Indicates that an audible alarm will warn you of this appointment.
~
Indicates that, at the appointed time, the Phonebook will open and dial the
Index you've entered in the title (the description or the blank space on the
right of the time slots).
R
A Repeating appointment that SideKick Plus has duplicated across the time
period you specified.
C
An appointment that is shared with another file, probably on a network.
p
Indicates that, at the appointed time, the Time Planner will Quick Paste the
text to the application underneath.
Indicates that a note is attached to this appointment.
200
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Moving around the Appointment Book
You open a new page of the Appointment Book each time you move to a
new day in the Calendar window. Following are the cursor and Options
Go to commands to move by days, months, or years.
Options Go to Top
l£li!IlHomel
Moves the cursor to the first time period of the open Appointment Book.
Options Go to Bottom
(9ill~
Moves the cursor to the last time period of the open Appointment Book.
Options Go to Today
Moves the cursor to the same time period in today's Appointment Book.
~
Options Go to Previous Time
(9illill or [!J
Moves the cursor to the previous time period of the same day and into the
Daily Agenda area.
Options Go to Next Time
(9ill~ or lIJ
Moves the cursor to the next time period of the same day or out of the
Daily Agenda area.
Options Go to Previous Day
(9illl]) or
Moves the cursor to the same time period of the previous day.
~
Options Go to Next Day
Moves the cursor to the same time period on the next day.
IpgDnl
(9ill@ or
Options Go to Previous Month
(gill(ID or (9ill~
Moves the cursor to the same time period of the same day of the previous
month.
Options Go to Next Month
(gill~ or (9ill(g
Moves the cursor to the same time period of the same day of the next
month.
Options Go to Previous Year
(9ill~(9illl]J
Moves the cursor to the same time period of the same day of the previous
year.
Options Go to Next Year
l2ill~(9ill(g
Moves the cursor to the same time period of the same day of the next year.
Entering Appointments and Agenda
To enter an appointment, use [!J and [!J to move to the appointment time,
then type a description of the appointment. We call this description line the
Chapter 10 Time Planner (Appointment Book)
201
Appointment title. If you know when the appointment will end, you can
show its duration: Type a hyphen, the finishing time, a space, and then the
appointment. The duration appears as a vertical line to the left of the
appointment. Following are the legal time formats.
9: 35
9: 35p
9: 35pm
09:35p
09: 5p
Nine o'clock
Nine thirty-five in the morning
Nine thirty-five at night
Nine thirty-five at night
Nine thirty-five at night
Five past nine at night
9.35p
935p
17:35
Nine thirty-five at night
Nine thirty-five at night
Five thirty-five in the evening
9
(Hour only)
(Completes the am or pm)
(Can specify p for pm)
(Unambiguous time)
(Ignores leading zeroes)
(Completes significant
zeroes)
(Can use. instead of:)
(Don't need. or :)
(Can use military time)
If you enter an incomplete time, SideKick Plus figures out the most
reasonable time and completes the entry for you. For example, if you enter
9 as the ending time for an appointment at 8:30 am, SideKick Plus assumes
the finishing time is 9:00 am. You set all the parameters for the appointment
times with the Options command.
You can have several appointments at the same time period.
In the title, two words have special Significance: CALL and RUN. They set
alarms at that time to open the Phonebook (CALL) or Quick Paste whatever
follows it into the underlying program (RUN).
Let's say you've set your Alarm Warning time to 0 minutes. If you type
CALL Mcr in the 4:00 pm time period,
1. A box with that message pops up at the number at that time.
2. The Time Planner immediately opens the Phonebook.
3. Using MCI as the Index, the Phonebook then tries to connect you to the
number at the Index entry MCL
If you type RUN BACKUPI +-II in the 10:00 pm time slot, on the other hand, the
Time Planner sends the string BACKUPI +-II to the application underneath at
10:00 am. If it's DOS, DOS then sets the backup operation into motion. You
could also specify a batch file that loads a SuperKey macro to begin an
operation-say print out a spreadsheet report.
Use the following commands to enter a time, date, or description in the
Time Planner. They are under Services Setup Line Editing in the main
menu. (Press ~ to get to the main menu, then select Services.)
202
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Go to Previous Character
~(]J or
Moves the cursor one character to the left within the time, date, or title.
tEl
Go to Next Character
~(QJ or
Moves the cursor one character to the right within the time, date, or title.
B
Go to Previous Word
~0
Moves the cursor one word to the left within the time, date, or title. A word
is anything that begins or ends with one of the following characters: space
< > , ; ( ) [ ] /\ + _ / $.
I
Go to Next Word
Moves the cursor one word to the right within the time, date, or title.
Go to Start of Line
(£fill(gJ(]J or IHome!
Moves the cursor to the first character within the time, date, or title.
Go to End of Line
(£ill(gJ(QJ or (53
Moves the cursor to the last character within the time, date, or title.
Delete Previous Character
(£filliS or· IBackspoce!
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor, if one exists.
Delete Character
Deletes the character over the cursor, if one exists.
Delete Line
Deletes all the text in the time, date, or title.
Delete Rest of Line
Deletes all the text from the cursor to the end of the line.
InsertA40de
~
Changes between insert and overwrite modes when entering text. In Insert
mode, new text joins the existing text; however, in Overwrite mode, new
text replaces existing text.
Now, back to the Appointment Book menu.
Sometimes the starting time you want isn't shown in the Appointment
Book. Don't worry, you can use the Insert New Time command.
Insert New Time
[illl +-l!
Adds a new time to the Appointment Book. The default time is midway
between the appointment time above and below, rounded to the nearest
five minutes. You can use any of the editing keys to change it and then
press I +-l! to enter it into the book. The cursor moves to the title field,
where you can enter a finishing time and a title.
Use the Insert Duration command if you prefer entering a finishing time as
duration. It is exactly the same as typing a hyphen and the finishing time.
Chapter 10, Time Planner (Appointment Book)
203
Following is the command to attach a note to an appointment.
Insert Agenda (Note)
lE2I
Attaches a Notepad to the appointment at the cursor position provided
there isn't a Common Appointment title there. A symbol (=) to the left of
the starting time reminds you of it. Press (G to return to the Appointment
Book. This item only appears on the menu when the appointment has a title
or from the Daily Agenda line.
Repeating Appointments
You can make an appointment repeat every day, week, month, or year by
using the Repeat command on the (EjQ) menu. If you change the appointment in one place, a prompt asks whether every Repeating appointment in
the future should also be changed (Y) or just that one appointment (N). An
R to the left of the start time reminds you that an appointment is a
Repeating appointment.
If you had a previous appointment typed in at the same time slot as a
Repeating appointment, both appointments appear, consecutively.
Once you have used the Repeat command on an appointment, the Repeat
menu disappear from the illQI main menu. It returns when you move to a
different time slot.
Common appointments can repeat, but you can only do this by setting the
appointment from the Common Appointment Book.
Following are the commands to make Repeating appointments. They only
appear on the menu when the appointment has a title.
Repeat Daily
Duplicates the appointment with its alarms, descriptions, and agenda every
day until the date set by the menu. Repeat Daily Until stops repeating the
appointment at the date you enter, while Repeat Daily Indefinitely does
not.
Repeat Weekly
[illIlID~
Duplicates the appointment with its alarms, title, and agenda every seven
days indefinitely.
Repeat Monthly
[illIlID~
Duplicates the appointment with its alarms, title, and agenda every month
indefinitely. The Repeat Monthly Date command places the appointment
on the same date each month; for example, the 25th of the month. The
Repeat Monthly Weekday command places the appointment on the same
day each month; for example, the first Monday of the month.
204
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Repeating Yearly
Duplicates the appointment with its alarms, title, and agenda annually and
indefinitely. The Repeat Yearly Date command places the appointment on
the same date each year; for example, the 25th of February. The Repeat
Yearly Weekday command places the appointment on the same day each
year; for example, the first Monday of the year.
Deleting Appointments
The Time Planner's deletion commands let you remove any appointment
you can think of: a single appointment, all of today's appointments, previous appointments, and some future appointments.
To delete Common appointments, you must be in the Common AppointmentBook.
When you delete a Repeating appointment, the Time Planner prompts you
on whether to delete every Repeating appointment in the future (Y) or just
that one appointment (N).
You can have more than one appointment in the same time period. When
you delete an appointment that was in the same time period as a Repeating
appointment, only that specific appointment disappears. The Repeating
appointment remains.
Following are the Edit Delete commands.
Edit Delete Selected
l£EIIlID(]
Deletes the appointment or Repeating appointment at the cursor. This item
only appears on the menu when there is an appointment in the time period
at the cursor or the cursor is in the Daily Agenda line.
Edit Delete Today's
Deletes all the appointments and Repeating appointments for the day at the
cursor position. For every Repeating appointment, it asks whether to delete
every future Repeating appointment (Y) or just this appointment (N).
Edit Delete Previous
Deletes all the appointments before the day at the cursor position. All
Repeating appointments now start at or after the day at the cursor position.
Edit Delete Until
Deletes all appointments from the day at the cursor until the date you enter.
This does not delete Repeating appointments.
Chapter 10, Time Planner (Appointment Book)
205
Transferring and Copying Appointments
You can change the starting time of an appointment or duplicate the
appointment by using the Edit Tag, Edit Move, and Edit Copy commands.
First, you must tell the Time Planner what appointment you wish to move
or copy with the Edit Tag command. Then you move the cursor to where
you want the new appointment to be, and use either the Edit Move or Edit
Copy command.
You cannot tag a Repeating or Common appointment.
Edit Tag
[ED(EJill or tW
Marks an appointment so that you can move or copy it. To remind you of
the tag, a highlighted square appears to the left of the appointment. This
item only appears in the menu when you have an appointment that is not
Common or Repeating.
Edit Move
[ED(EJ(YJ
Moves a tagged appointment to the cursor position with the same duration.
Edit Copy
lflill(EJ(g
Duplicates a tagged appointment and places it at the cursor position.
Common Appointments and Local-Area Networks
When the Time Planner opens the Appointment Book, it looks for two files:
One with your Personal appointments and one with Common appointments shared by people (usually on a network, although not necessarily).
The Time Planner displays both in the Appointment Book, though you can
change only your Personal appointments. Common appointments have a C
to the left of the starting time. Use the Options File Names command to
change the default file name of the Personal and Common Appointment
Books.
Common appointments are ideal when you use SideKick Plus over a computer network. You can put the Common Appointment Book on a network
server so that everyone on the network can read it. Usually, it's best to
reserve editing privileges for a few people only. The Common
appointments can be company-wide appointments, such as the next
progress meeting, or network tasks, such as automatic backups. See
Appendix D, "Using SideKick Plus on Networks," for more on networks.)
To change Common appointments,
1. Select the New Book command.
206
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
2. Type the file name of the Common Appointment Book.
3. Press I+-II.
The resulting book behaves like any other Appointment Book but doesn't
have any common appointments.
Following are the commands associated with Appointment Book files.
New Book
(tID
Asks you for the file name of the Appointment Book you want to open. If
you are unsure of the name, the File Manager can help you. Just type a
drive, directory, or file name with wildcards. If you select an existing file,
the Time Planner loads the Appointment Book. Otherwise, it creates a new
Appointment Book.
Options File Names Personal Book
Sets the path, file name, and extension of the Personal Appointment Book
loaded by the Time Planner when it first opens the Appointment Book. This
is the default file name in the New Book command.
Options File Names Common Book
Sets the path, file name, and extension of the Common Appointment Book
loaded by the Time Planner when it first opens the Appointment Book. The
Time Planner only reads this book once, so you need to reload the Personal
Appointment Book if you make changes. Press Options Save Setup and
then press (tID to reload the Personal Book with the new Common
Appointment Book.
Alarms
You can attach an alarm to any Appointment Book title, and you can
specify a warning time period as well. If you have a meeting at 10:00 am,
for example, here's what you do to set an alarm with a 10-minute warningtime period:
Open the Appointment Book and move the cursor to 10:00 a.
Type in the title of the appointment, say, Meeting in Maria's office.
Press mg and select Alarm.
The default Warning time is 10 minutes, so you don't need to change it.
The cursor is on Action; press I+-II to select it.
5. You want a Buzzer to sound, so press I+-II to select it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Chapter 10, Time Planner (Appointment Book)
207
You can automatically telephone someone in your Phonebook or run a
program at a specified time by setting a Time Planner alarm. Alarms work
both inside and outside SideKick Plus.
In some special cases, such as if you're printing in SideKick Plus, you must
stop running the current task to activate the alarm.
When you set alarms in the Common Appointment Book, they will work in
every Time Planner using that Common Appointment Book. This is ideal
when, for instance, you wish to back up each hard disk on a network of
pes to the file server or to remind everyone of a progress meeting.
Repeating appointments can have an alarm. However, when you change
one, the Time Planner asks whether it should change every future
Repeating appointment (Y) or just this one (N~.
Note: The alarms aren't affected by any change of time or date made with
the TIME or DATE command in DOS.
To set an alarm, place the cursor at the appointment and use one of the
Alarm Action commands:
Alarm Action Buzzer
I£illlE
Sets an audible alarm for that appointment. This sounds at or before the
start of the appointment, depending on the number of minutes you specify
in the Alarm Warning command. r appears to the left of the appointment
to remind you of the alarm.
When the alarm sounds, a window opens with the appointment title. You
can press one of the following keys:
~
Closes the window and deactivates the alarm so that you can
continue with your work.
I +-II
Opens the Time Planner with the cursor in the Appointment Book's
attached note or appointment title.
I
Space
I Closes the window and suspends the alarm, then repeats it at a
time set by the Options Alarm Snooze Time command.
Alarm Action Open Phonebook
I£illI£lW
Sets an alarm that opens the Phonebook, then dials a number. When you
select this command, a box opens asking you for the Phonebook Index you
want dialed. For this to happen, the Phonebook program must be in the
current SideKick Plus and you need to specify an Index that exists in the
current phonebook.
Use the Open Phonebook alarm to automate your computer communications by using a Phonebook entry with an associated Script (Chapter 9
explains scripts). If you set the alarm with an Alarm Warning time of 0
208
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
minutes, the alarm activates immediately, calls the computer, and executes
the Script. Furthermore, the Script can execute in the background behind
your application program, collecting your electronic mail, which you can
pick up and review at your leisure.
To remind you of the alarm set to the title, CALL
~ appears to the left of the appointment title.
Index
becomes the title and
You can also set a Phonebook alarm by typing CALL as the first word in the
title and the Index as the second word. This alarm sounds at or before the
start of the appointment, depending on the setting of the Alarm Warning
command. At the alarm time, a window opens with CALL Index and
SideKick Plus beeps. When this happens, you can press one of the
following keys:
~
Closes the window and deactivates the alarm so that you can
continue with your work.
I +-ll
Opens the Phonebook, finds the Index, and dials it. If you are in the
Phonebook, it will disconnect your current call and redial using the
number referenced by the Index.
[5J Closes the window and suspends the alarm until the time set by
the Options Alarms Snooze Time command.
If there is no response by the appointment time, the Phonebook opens and
dials the number, as if you pressed I +-ll in response. This allows
unattended operation of the Phonebook, so SideKick Plus can perform
tasks for you, like automatically retrieve your electronic mail at the same
time each day.
Alarm Action Quick Paste
(£ill(9J(9J
Sets an alarm that exports a line to the application underneath. To remind
you of the alarm, RUN text becomes the title and P appears to the left of the
appointment. You can also set a Quick Paste Alarm by typing RUN as the first
word-SideKick Plus will export and paste the text after RUN.
This alarm happens at or before the start of the appointment, depending on
the setting of the Alarm Warning command. At the alarm time, a window
opens with RUN text and SideKick Plus beeps. When this happens, you can
do one of the following actions:
~
Closes the window and stops the alarm so that you can continue
with your work.
I +-ll
Quick Pastes the line to the application underneath.
I
Spoce
I Closes the window and pauses the alarm until the time set by the
Options Alarm Snooze Time command.
Chapter 10, Time Planner (Appointment Book)
209
If there is no response by the appointment time, then the line exports to the
application underneath. This allows unattended operation of DOS, so
SideKick Plus can do automatic tasks for you, like back up your hard disk
to tape at the same time each week.
Use the following command to change the warning before the alarm
activates:
Alarm Warning
Sets the time period that an alarm activates before the actual appointment.
You may want a few minutes to collect your notes before a meeting, for
example. Or, if you've set a Phonebook or Quick Paste alarm, this is when
you can stop the alarm from opening the Phonebook or Quick Pasting to
the application underneath. Each alarm you set has an individual warning
time.
Following is the command to stop an alarm from activating:
Cancel Alarm
Removes the alarm associated with the current appointment.
Following are the commands that change certain options associated with
alarms. Use Options Save Setup to save them permanently.
Options Alarm Snooze Time
Sets the time between each temporary suspension of the alarm activated
with I Space I. If you want the alarm to go off every five minutes, for
example, you'd set this to 5.
Options Alarm Warning Time
Sets the default time before the appointment that the alarm sounds. For a
Phonebook or Quick Paste alarm, this is when you can stop the alarm from
opening the Phonebook or exporting to the application underneath.
Searching the Appointments
The Search command {shortcut l2illl2lW)opens another menu, where you
can choose what must you wish to search for. You can then type in the
string of characters you wish to search for or vacant time slot specifications.
The cursor then moves to the first match, which can be at or below the
cursor, and turns the Search indicator on. You should use the Search Next
and Search Previous commands to find the next and previous match. To
stop the search and clear the indicator, use the Search Clear command. The
Search command works within 400 days forward or backward of the
current day.
210
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Search Title
Searches the title (the description of the appointment) for the specified
string of characters.
Search Agenda and Titles
Searches the Agenda and the title for the specified string of characters.
Finding a Vacant Time Slot
Search Vacant Time
Searches the Appointment Book for the next free appointment time. If you
don't enter durations, then the Time Planner jumps to the first adequate
block of time between two filled appointments. Another menu opens with
commands that allow you to tailor the search to your preferences.
Following are descriptions of each command.
Search Vacant Time Appointment Duration
Sets the smallest amount of free time that will fulfill the search
requirements. Enter the required length of the appointment in this entry.
Search Vacant Time Start Searching at
Sets the time of day when searching should start, usually the start of the
working day.
Search Vacant Time Finish Searching at
Sets the time of day when searching should end, usually the end of the
working day.
Search Vacant Time Days to Search Ahead
Sets the number of days in the future that are included in the search.
Search Vacant Time Holidays Are Searched
When set to ON, searches every day. When set to OFF, searches only the
workdays as set by the workday/holiday indicator at the top right of the
Appointment Book.
Search Vacant Time Begin Search
Starts the search. Unlike the Search Titles and Search Agenda and Title
commands, which execute automatically, you must use this command to
start the search.
Repeating and Clearing the Search Command
The following commands move the cursor to the previous or next match of
the string of characters specified in any Search command.
Chapter 10, Time Planner (AppOintment Book)
211
Search Previous Time
(fEllEJ
Searches for the string of characters or comparable vacant time slot earlier
in the same day and places the cursor on the appointment. The cursor
wraps around to the last appointment if you continue to select this
command after the Search operation has found the earliest appointment.
Search Previous Day
(fEll(IJ
Searches for the string of characters earlier than the time and date at the
cursor position.
Search Next Time
(fEllUJ or (fEll[!J
Searches for the string of characters later in the same day and places the
cursor on the appointment. The cursor wraps around to the earliest
appointment if you continue to select this command after the Search
operation has found the latest appointment.
Search Next Day
(fEllS
Searches for the string of characters later than the time and date at the
cursor position.
Search Clear
Turns searching for the string of characters off and removes the Search
status indicator.
Printing the Appointments
The Time Planner can print a single appointment, today's appointments, all
future appointments, or a selection of future appointments. All printing is
done in a fixed format, but you can adjust the margins and print style using
the Services Setup Printer command on the main menu.
Following are the printing commands in the Appointment Book.
Print
l2illWW
Opens a menu where you choose how much of the Appointment Book to
print.
Print Selected
Prints the appointment and agenda of the entry at the cursor. The standard
SideKick Plus printer menu displays, asking where you want the printing
to go: to a window, file, or printer.
Print Today's
tEJ
Prints the Daily Agenda and all appointments and agenda (attached notes)
for today. The standard SideKick Plus printer menu displays, asking you
where the printing should go.
212
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Print Future
Prints all future Daily Agenda, appointments, and agenda until the last
non-repeating one. The standard SideKick Plus printer menu displays,
asking you where the printing should go.
Print Until
Prints all Day Notes, appointments, and agenda until the date you specify.
The standard SideKick Plus printer menu displays, asking you where the
printing should go.
Changing Your View of the Appointments
You can alter most of the parameters of the Appointment Book window to
suit your tastes with the Options menu. You can adjust the beginning and
ending times, the interval at which time periods occur, and whether you
want only times with appointment titles to display.
For example, you can accommodate both morning and night people by
changing the first and last times shown in the Appointment Book with the
Options Begin day and Options End day commands.
Options Begin day
Sets the first time default slot in the Appointment Book. As distributed, it's
set to 8:00 am.
Options End day
Sets the last time default slot in the Appointment Book. As distributed, it's
set to 8:00 pm.
If your meetings occur at odd intervals, like every 21 minutes, you need to
set the Options Resolution command. If you tend to cluster appointments,
the Option Default Times command is useful.
Options Resolution
Sets the default time between each appointment in the Appointment Book.
Whatever you set it at, you can always use the Insert time command to
enter a new starting time for an atypical appointment.
Options Default Times
l£Iill@@
When set to ON, displays all time intervals in the Appointment Book
regardless of whether they contain an appointment. When set to OFF,
shows only the time intervals with an appointment. To enter a new
appointment, you must use the Insert Time command.
Options Save Setup
Saves the settings of the following items:
Chapter 10, Time Planner (AppOintment Book)
(£EJ@(ID
213
• Options menu
• the color and position of the Calendar
• the color, size, and position of the Schedule and Appointment Book
windows
• whether the Calendar or Schedule window is the first window to display
when you activate the Time Planner
• the Search Vacant Time menu
• the Agenda (Note) settings
The Schedule Window
The Schedule window is a graphic view of your appointments. You can
replace the Calendar window with it or view it for an alternative look at
your schedule. To open the Schedule window, use the Schedule command
or ~ from the Calendar window.
r-
Calendar
Frida!,!
F C: \SKP"'ERSONU.. APP
Frida!,!
[';*1:-,1:1:1
Oct 28,1988
Sun I10n Tue \Jed Thu Fri Sat
25
2E.
Z7
28
29
39
1
2
3
4
5
E.
7
8
9
IB
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2B
21
22
23
24
25
26
27g
29
39
31
1
2
3
4
1.1
1
I10n 2 4 .
I
:::;.;:
';', 1III I.
Thu Z7
mID 1 •
'I'·
1
Sat 29..
Sun 3BN
I
I
I
I
I
8a IBa 12p
I
liIiIiI
2p
4p
6p 8p
7:05PM =
5
Fl Help
F3
F5 ZOOM
F7
F4 Print
F2
F6 Switch
Fa
+-+U-Da!,! Ctrl-+-+-\Jeek PgUp/Dn-Page Center-Toda!,! +-I-Open Book
F9 Note
FIB Menu
Es:c-Exit
Figure 10.5: The Schedule Window
The asterisk (*) by the date indicates a holiday.
Each horizontal bar represents an appointment in either the Personal or
Common Appointment Book, of the duration indicated by the length of the
bar.
The top left of the window border contains the file name of the Personal
Appointment Book.
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the day you want and then open
the Appointment Book or note for that day.
Following are the function keys specific to the Schedule Window.
214
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
~
Print
Prints the schedule. See page 217.
(llI Zoom
Toggles between one and four weeks of appointments in the display. This is
a local function key, unlike all other Zoom keys in the program.
(E2J Note
Attaches a Notepad to the day, provided there is no Common Appointment
with a title.
You'll notice that the fill switch key doesn't move you between the
Calendar and Schedule windows. How you move between the Calendar
and Schedule Window depends on which window you opened first. From
the Calendar, press 1m Schedule to open the Schedule window. You then
press (G or II!QI Calendar to return to the Calendar Window. You can't open
the Schedule window from the Appointment Book, unless you opened the
Schedule window first.
Using the Cursor Keys to Change the Date
The usual cursor keys move you around the Schedule window by days,
weeks, months, and years. Following is a summary of the commands to
move the cursor to a different date.
Go to Previous Day
l£liDill or [!J
Moves the cursor to the previous day. It moves to the last day in of the
window when you move past the first day.
Go to Next Day
1£liD0 or [!J
Moves the cursor to the next day. It moves to the first day in the window
when you move past the last day.
Go to Next Column
1£liD@ or B
Moves the cursor to the next day or column, depending on the size of the
Schedule window.
Go to Previous Column
1£liD(ID or EJ
Moves the cursor to the previous day or column dependent on the size of
the Schedule window.
Go to Previous Week
Moves the cursor to the same day in the previous week.
Go to Next Week
Moves the cursor to the same day in next week.
Chapter 10, Time Planner (Schedule)
215
Go to Next Page
~
Moves the cursor to the same day on the next page of the Schedule
window. This is dependent on the size of the window and can be the next
week, fortnight, or month.
Go to Previous Page
IpgDnl
Moves the cursor to the same day on the previous page of the Schedule
window. This is dependent on the size of the window and can be the next
week, fortnight, or month.
Go to Previous Month
Moves the cursor to the same week day of the previous month.
f£illlID
Go to Next Month
Moves the cursor to the same week day of the next month.
f£illtfj
Go to Previous Year
f£ill~lID or l£EI~
Moves the cursor to the same week day of the next year.
Go to Next Year
Moves the cursor to the same week day of the next year.
l£EI~tfj
or
f£ill(2l
Go to Today
Places the cursor at the date given by your PC.
Opening .the Appointment Book
You can open the Appointment Book from the Schedule window in three
ways:
• Select Appointment Book on the menu.
• Press I+-II.
• Type a date, for example, 03-02-87, and press I+-II. The Appointment
Book opens at that date. You can use most date formats, providing the
day and month are in the same order as the default set by the Services
Setup Date and Time menu.
Legal dates formats include
May 787
MAY 7, 1987
05-07-87
5/7-1987
The same editing keys apply as for entering a time.
Press (§J to return to the Schedule window.
216
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Attaching a Daily Agenda
A Daily Agenda is a Notepad attached to the day. You can fill it with any
details about the day, such as a conference agenda or a to-do list unless it is
a Common Daily Agenda. The note is part of your Appointment Book for
that day. You can also change the note in the Appointment Book or in the
Calendar window. As in the rest of the Time Planner, SideKick Plus
automatically saves the Daily Agenda each time you change it.
Use the Note (Agenda) command or (E2J to get a Daily Agenda.
Press
lG to return to the Schedule window.
Printing the Schedule Window
Use the Print Schedule command «(9!!l([llE]) or IE) to get a print of the
Schedule window. The standard SideKick Plus printer menu displays,
asking where you want the printing to go.
lf your printer cannot produce the IBM semi-graphic characters, then you
must set Services Setup Printer Graphics Support to NO.
Changing Your View of the Schedule Window
You can alter the number of weeks in the Schedule window and its
resolution (the time segments it is broken up into) using the following
commands.
View
Use this command to change the number of weeks in, and hence the size of,
the Schedule Window. Zoom toggles between two sizes of the Schedule
Window.
Resolution
Sets the time scale in the appointment bar. You may set the scale to one of
three resolutions.
8 Hours
Starts at the time set by the Options Begin Day command and
shows the next 8 hours.
12 Hours Starts at the time set by the Options Begin Day command and
shows the next 12 hours.
24 Hours Shows the entire day.
Chapter 10, Time Planner (Schedule)
217
Copying and Pasting
The Time Planner exports the following characters when you use the
Services Copy from Application ({!illE/) or Services Quick Paste ({!illlG)
commands:
Calendar and Schedule windows:
The date at the cursor position.
Appointment Book:
The appointment title at the cursor
position.
Attached note:
The marked block or line at the cursor
position.
For example, you can use the Time Planner to find the date for a meeting
and then export the date to the agenda in the Notepad:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press (£EIfm to load SideKick Plus if necessary
Activate the Notepad with fmffiJ.
Activate the Time Planner with l3]JaJ.
Find the date you want to export with the cursor keys.
Use {!illlG) (Services Quick Paste) to send the date to the Notepad.
When you use Services Paste from Clipboard or Services Quick Paste to the
Time Planner, it's like typing the date very quickly on the keyboard. You'll
probably use the Paste function most often to place information in the Time
Planner's attached notes. For example, let's take an agenda from a to-do list
in Outlook and place it in an attached note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Activate the Time Planner with {!illaJ.
Move the cursor to 10:00 am, and insert the Appointment title.
Press ~ to open an attached note.
Activate Outlook with {!ill@ and type in the agenda.
Mark the agenda as a block.
Press fmlG) (Services Quick Paste) to send the agenda to the Time
Planner attached note.
218
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
11
The Calculators
The SideKick Plus Calculator application actually comprises four
calculators: Business, Scientific, Programmer, and Formula. This chapter
explains their features and commands. The first section deals with
operations common to all four types: the electronic tape, basic keys, and
memory. The rest of the chapter discusses each type of Calculator
individually.
If you haven't used the calculators yet, work through the Business
Calculator tutorial in Chapter 3 first.
General Features and Operations
After you call up SideKick Plus with (£EDl3]], you can activate any of the
calculators in two ways:
• Pop up the main menu with l3]], move the cursor to Calculator, and press
1+-11.
• Press l3]][I.
Except on keyboards with 12 function keys, INurn Lockl automatically toggles
on and off when you enter and when you leave the Calculator.
You can check which type of Calculator is active by looking in the bottom
left of the window border.
Chapter 77, The Calculators
219
C: ,SKP
>.
C: ,SKP,CALCTAPE. TXT Line
2 +
3 +
4 +
5 +
E. +
U""
L!=
Fl Help
F2 MeM Add
Space-Clear U
Bus;ines;s; =
F3 HeM Rec
F4 Print
PgUp/Dn-Scroll
'"IJ
7: 08ph1
='
FS ZOOM
F7 Begin Blk
FE. Switch
FB End Blk
1---i-Res;ult
+->11R
O.1111 ..
100 +
= 11.11
~M
Bus:ines:s:
=
11.111
7: 10"",
F1 Help
F3 HeM Rec
FS ZOOM
FZ MeM Add
F4 Print
FE. SlJitch
Space-Clear U PgUp/Dn-Scroll +-......%U-Operators:
F7 Begin Blk
Fa End Blk
+-I-Res:ult
F9 Tape
F1B Menu
Es:c-Exit Nur.Lock
Figure 11.2: The Calculation as It Appears in the Tape
224
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Note: In the calculators, you can press l£ill~ to bring up the
menu. For example, type l£ill~0 to Add numbers in memory.
BUSINESS CALCULATOR
lW Memory
Dlsp
Future
Interest
Payment
Periods
Present
Principal
Term
Print
Begin
End
Number
Automatic
Fixed
Scientific
Engineering
Base
Decimals
Point
Pasted
Last Page
Next Page
Scroli--------f---I
....._----
Programmer
Formula
Figure 11.3: The Business Calculator Menu Tree
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Business)
225
The Business Calculator
You can use the Business Calculator to calculate long lists of numbers using
simple functions or to solve complex financial functions, such as interest
rates. A popular Carton calculator served as its model, with the addition of
a few unique SideKick Plus features.
Within the Business Calculator, pressing
calculation and puts it into the tape.
~
performs an intermediate
Note: In all the calculations that follow, the left column shows the numbers
and operators as you would write them down. The right column shows the
actual keys you press in the Calculator to enter the numbers and perform
the operation.
Simple Calculations
Calculations using addition and subtraction are simple: Just remember that
Band G display a result as soon as you press them. You don't need to
press B, unless you want the result to display in the tape. For example,
here's a calculation (the text on the right shows what you type on the
keyboard):
23 + 43 = 66
44 + 12 - 5 = 51
-33 + 34 - 5 = -4
-)
-)
-)
The number on the left hand of the Calculator is the item count. It
increments by one whenever you enter a number and press B. It
decrements by one whenever you press G. It is reset everytime you press B
or I +-ll.
Unlike addition and substraction, you need to press B or I +-ll for
multiplication and division. Remember that your computer uses l2J for the
division sign (+) and an (!J for the multiplication sign (x). For example,
11 * 34 = 374
-4 / 2 = -2
99 / 3 * 2 = 66
-)
-)
-)
We combine all four functions in the following two examples:
80 + 20 - 25 / 5
226
* 6 = 90
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
(55 - 2.5) * 2.32*
B ~Q@ G l!l
------------------ + 2 = 86 -> @@
~Q~~
(ZJ mQBJ@
B~
I
->
->
12345 / 200 = 61.725
8721 / 200 = 43.605
456 / 200 = 2.28
-> (D~~BJ@ (ZJ ~l§Jl§J 1 (IDlZJ~m 1 BJ@~ I fJJfZJ@ B fJJ@ ~ G
-> I Space I fZJfJJ@ B fJJ@
~
B
Using Variables Instead of the Memory
Variables are a form of memory that you can name and store permanently.
To define a variable, type its name in the main display. A window opens
that prompts you for the variable's value. Type it in and press I+-ll. You can
now type the variable within text, and SideKick Plus will automatically
substitute the value you entered. Let's say you want to define the variable
Tax to be 6 (%), the local sales tax. Type
TAX I +-ll
6 l+-ll
To add the sales tax to the value 10, for instance, you would type
10
B TAX
~
B
There are several facts to remember about variables:
• You can define variables in the middle of a calculation.
• When defining a new variable in the Business Calculator, you can use a
formula, just as if you were in the Formula Calculator.
• Variables are not case sensitive: FUTURE is the same as futuRE.
So that you can perform financial functions, the Business Calculator has the
following built-in variables:
228
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
FUTURE
The future value of the amount in question
INTEREST
The interest rate in percentages
PAYMENT
The amount you pay each year to build up an investment
PERIODS
The number of periods for the INTEREST and TERM
variables
Real Interest =INTEREST / PERIODS
Real Term =TERM * PERIODS
PRESENT
The present value of the amount in question
PRINCIPAL
The amount of money you have to invest
TERM
The time period for the investment or loan
The variable DISP is the value in the main display.
When you select the Variables command (shortcut l£EI~), a window opens
that lists all the variables in alphabetical order. INum Lockl will probably be on
because you're working with the Calculator, so you need to toggle it off
before you can move the bar cursor. Here are some operations you can do
in the variable window:
•
•
•
•
Use the cursor keys to move to a variable.
Press I ~ I to use the variable.
To alter a variable, type a new value and press I ~ I, [!J, or
Press l£E[Il] to delete a variable.
llJ.
Financial Functions
The Business Calculator has a wealth of functions to solve those tricky loan,
investment, and cash-flow problems. Special variables calculate these
functions (refer to the discussion on variables in the preceding section).
The following pages alphabetically list these financial functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
compounding periods
future value
number of periods
payment
present value
rate
The Example section shows you what options appear on your screen when
you press lIi§ and select the Variables menu.
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Business)
229
Compounding Periods
Menu
Functions Compound
Shortcut
f£illWi9
Variables
INTEREST
PERIODS
FUTURE
PRESENT
Description
Calculates the number of compounding periods it will
take for an investment of PRESENT value to grow to a
FUTURE value, earning a fixed interest rate
(INTEREST /PERIODS) per compounding period. It uses
this formula:
Ln(FUTURE/PRESENT)
Ln(1 +(INTEREST /PERIODS»
where Ln is the Natural logarithm.
Limits
INTEREST>O
PRESENT> 0
PERIODS>O
Example
You deposit $1500 in an account that pays an annual
interest of 10%, compounded monthly. When will you
have $3500 in the account? (Note: Don't forget to turn
INurn Lockl off if necessary.)
(E§ Variables
FUTURE 3500
INTEREST 10
PERIODS 12
PRESENT 1500
(E§ Functions Compound
This tells you that, in about 9 years (8.8899), you will
have $3500 in the account.
230
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Future Value
Menu
Functions Future Value
Shortcut
(9illill~
Variables
PAYMENT
INTEREST
TERM
PERIODS
Description
Calculates the value of an investment after a number of
payment periods (TERM*PERIODS). The series of equal
payments, at the end of each period, is PAYMENT; the
money earns an interest rate of (INTEREST/PERIODS).
It uses this formula:
(1
+ (INTEREST /PERIODS»(TERM"PERIOOS) -1)
(INTEREST /PERIODS)
Limits
INTEREST>O
PERIODS> 0
Example
You deposit $1500 at the end of every year into an
account that pays an annual interest of 10%,
compounded yearly. What will you have in the account
at the end of 15 years?
(WI
Variables
INTEREST 10
PAYMENT 1500
PERIODS 1
TERM 15
(WI Functions Future
This tells you that you'll have $47658.72 in the account
after 15 years.
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Business)
231
Number of Periods
Menu
Functions Term
Shortcut
f2illilllIJ
Variables
PAYMENT
FUTURE
INTEREST
PERIODS
Description
Calculates the time necessary to obtain FUTURE from an
end of period PAYMENT at an interest rate of
(INTEREST /PERIODS). It uses this formula:
Ln(l + (FUTURE * (INTEREST/PERIODS) / PAYMENT»
Ln(1 + (INTEREST/PERIODS»
Example
You place $5000 each year into a bank account earning
10% annual interest. When will there be $50000 in the
account?
lW Variables
FUTURE 50000
INTEREST 10
PAYMENT 5000
PERIODS 1
lW Functions Term
This tells you that it takes 7.3 years to get $50000 in the
account.
232
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Payment
Menu
Functions Payment
Shortcut
l£illWW
Variables
PRINCIPAL
INTEREST
TERM
PERIODS
Description
Calculates the amount of the periodic payment on a loan
of the money PRINCIPAL, at the interest rate (INTEREST /PERIODS), over the period (TERM* PERIODS). It
uses this formula:
PRINCIPAL * (INTEREST/PERIODS)
1- (1 + (INTEREST/PERIODS)y(TERM*PERIODS)
Limits
INTEREST> -1
TERM<> 0
PERIODS>O
Example
You take a $35000 mortgage for 15 years at an annual
interest of 10%. What is the yearly payment?
(WI Variables
INTEREST 10
PERIODS 1
PRINCIPAL 35000
TERM 15
(WI Functions Payment
This tells you that the yearly payment is $4601.58.
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Business)
233
Present Value
Menu
Functions Value
Shortcut
(9ill[B(YJ
Variables
PAYMENT
INTEREST
TERM
PERIODS
Description
Calculates the current value of a number of end of period
PAYMENTS paid over the period (TERM*PERIODS),
invested at interest rate (INTEREST/PERIODS). It uses
this formula:
1 - (1 + (INTEREST /PERIODS)r(TERM*PERIODS)
PAYMENT *
(INTEREST/PERIODS)
Limits
INTEREST> 0
PERIODS>O
Example
You win an annual scholarship of $2000 for each of your
four years at Harvard. If you invest the money at 10%,
what is the current value of the scholarship?
illQI Variables
INTEREST 10
PAYMENT 2000
PERIODS 1
TERM 4
illQI Functions Value
This tells you that the value today of the scholarship is
$6339.73.
234
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Rate
Menu
Functions Rate
Shortcut
~illlID
Variables
FUTURE
PRESENT
TERM
PERIODS
Description
Calculates the interest rate for PRESENT to grow to
FUTURE over the period (TERM*PERIODS). It uses this
formula:
=
[
(1 / (TERM*PERIODS»
1
-1
Limits
TERM<> 0
PERIODS >0
PRESENT and FUTURE must be the same sign.
Example
You invest $5000 in a five-year bond with a maturity
value of $10000. What is the interest rate for this bond?
(ill Variables
FUTURE 10000
PERIODS 1
PRESENT 5000
TERM 5
(ill Functions Rate
This tells you the yearly interest rate is 0.1487, which is
14.87%.
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Business)
235
Changing the Main Display Format
You can change the format of the main display to suit you: the number of
decimal places and decimal-point character, as well as the sign. Following
are the Options commands that do these actions.
Options Number Format
When set to Automatic, shows only necessary decimal places to a
maximum set by the Options Number Decimals command. When Fixed, it
always displays (in the main display) the number of decimal places set by
the Option Number Decimals command, even if the digits after the point
are zeroes. When set to Scientific, numbers are in exponential (e) notation,
with the number of decimal places set by the Options Number Decimals
command. When set to Engineering, all numbers are in exponential (e)
notation with exponents of 10 that are multiples of 3.
Options Number Decimals
Sets the number of decimal places in the main display.
Options Number Point
Changes the characters for the decimal point and the separator between
thousands. For the United States and other English-speaking countries, set
the command to a period (such as 1,000,000.99). For European countries, set
this command to a comma (such as 1.000.000,99).
Options Change Sign
Changes the sign of the number in the main display.
IE§
Options Save Setup
Saves the following Business Calculator settings:
• all the Options commands
• the Variables
• the current window size, color, and position
236
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
SCIENTIFIC CALCULATOR
Disp
EO
G
H
K
Sine
Cosine
Tangent
Inverse - - - - - - - - + - - 1
MU
NA
PI
Trig
Unit
--------j-~n~~=='
Moths - - - - - - - - 1 - - - 1 Natural Log
Exponential
Log (Base 10)
Antilog
Inverse (1/x)
Square
Root
Other--------JL--f~~=========1
Recall
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Clear
r1~~;:=======i_-J
n
Total
Average
Variance
Sum of Square
Population Deviation
Minimum Value
Largest Value
Decimals
Point
Automatic
Fixed
Scientific
Tape
Automatic Memory
Pasted
Right Margin
Go to-----------1I-----I Top of Tape
Bottom of Tape
Save Setup
Previous Page
Next Page
Scroll
Scientific
Business
Programmer
Formula
Figure 11.4: The Scientific Calculator Menu Tree
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
237
The Scientific Calculator
The Scientific Calculator is built for calculations involving specialized
mathematical functions. It's modeled on Texas Instruments and Casio
calculators, with additional SideKick Plus features. Before going on, make
sure you are in the right Calculator by looking at the bottom left of the
window border-it should say Scientific.
Some Basic Keys
Aside from the general keys listed on page 222, there are a few other keys
you'll use with this Calculator:
ill
Exponent entry; lets you enter very large and very small
numbers. For example, you enter 0.0002 =2 * 104 as ~ ill G (iI.
LJ
Raises a number to a power; for example, you enter 32 as lID
LJ
QJ.
(]
Performs the factorial of the number in the main display; for
example, you enter 3! =1 * 2 * 3 as @ (].
rn and QJ
Use parentheses to isolate particular mathematical expressions
for separate evaluation.
Basic Calculations
All calculations are performed to 16 digits and work according to normal
algebraic rules. Following are the algebraic priorities:
•
•
•
•
•
menu functions, factorial, and percentages
powers (1\)
multiplication and division
addition and subtraction
equals
Use parentheses if you want to override the standard priorities. Here are
some examples of operations on the Scientific Calculator. Note that ~
changes the number in the main display to a negative.
23 + 43 - 2 = 64
35 * -5 / -1.5 = 116.67
22 * 10 4 + 12 / 2 = 22006
238
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Notice the algebraic priority in the next examples:
(]~ B ~ (!J ~ 1+-II
@(jJ (!J ~ G (jJ@ (!J ~ 1+-11
(jJ G @ B ~ (!J (jJ (] @ B @ 1+-11
12 + 2 * 3 = 12 + 6 = 18
->
54 * ~5 * 3 = 108 - 135 = -27 ->
"4"=6+ 2*4/ 5 - 6 = -6.4
->
Let's use parentheses to override the priorities:
4 +2 * 5
---------- = (4 + 2 * 5)/7 = 2
7
4
*
(66 - 23)/(16 -
13)2 =
19.1111 ->
Using the Repeat and Constant Facilities
When you want to repeat an intermediate result, you don't need to type the
number each time: Just press the operator key repeatedly. For example,
(33
*
4 + 55)
* 2 = 374
When you press 1+-II or G, you can use that result as a constant. This marks
repeating calculations easy to do. For example,
18.01
18.01
18.01
* 300 = 5403
* 20 = 360.2
* 15.01 = 270.33
12345 / 200
8721 / 200
= 61.725
= 43.605
-> 1 Space I (]lIDQ~(] (!J ~~~ 1+-II
-> ~~ 1+-11
-> (]@Q~(] 1+-II
-> (]~~(jJ@ (] ~~~ 1+-II
-> lIDl?J~(] 1+-II
You can make constants of intermediate results by using brackets:
5 - (2
10 - (2
* 6) =-7
* 6) = -2
rn ~ (!J @ (] 1+-II
-> @ B
-> (]~ 1+-11
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
239
Percentages
You can do simple percentage and discount/add-on calculations using the
1lI key. For example,
f!J
= 79.8
-)
~(ID~
--- * 100 = 2.632
-)
llJ~ (ZJ ~~~ ~ I +-ll
-)
llJ~f§J
-)
~llJf§J
15% of 532
llJ~ ~ I +-ll
12
456
120 - 120
210 + 210
* 10% = 108
* 10% = 231
G llJf§J
B llJf§J
~ I +-ll
~ I +-ll
Using Variables
As defined earlier, variables are a form of memory you can name and store
permanently. To define a variable, you type its name in the main display. A
window opens, asking you for its value, which you type in and end with
I +-ll. Let's say you want to define InchTomm as 25.4 (for conversion of
inches to millimeters):
11J1B1£Jll]1]12J~1W8 ~~D~8
You would convert 10 inches to millimeters like this:
(]1§l:Jl1JlBl£JlEJUJ(QJ~~ (EJ
Following are the predefined variables you can use with the Scientific
Calculator:
eo
Permittivity of a vacuum, usually called €: 8.854187818 * 10-12 Fm-1
G
Gravitational constant: 6.672 * 10-11 NM2kg-2
h
Planck's constant: 6.626176 * 10-34 IS
k
Boltzmann's constant: 1.380662 * 10-23 IK- 1
mu
Permeability of a vacuum, usually called J..l: 1.256637061 * 10-6 Hm-1
Na
Avogadro's constant: 6.022045 * 1023 mot1
Pi
The constant for circles, usually called 1t: 3.141592654
Use the Variables command (shortcut (9illlYj) to open a window with all the
variables in alphabetical order. The variable (DISP) is the value in the main
display. To move round in and edit these variables, use the keys listed on
page 229.
240
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Using the Mathematical Functions
This section gives an alphabetical listing of all the Functions commands in
the Scientific Calculator. Each listing has the function's menu entry,
shortcut (where there is one), description, and an example.
Absolute Value
Menu
Functions Other Absolute Value
Description
Gives the positive value of the number in the main
display.
Example
The absolute value of -3 is 3:
rID ~ ~ Functions Other Absolute Value
Antilogarithm
Menu
Functions Maths Antilog
Shortcut
l£Iill(]aJ
Description
The common antilogarithm. It raises 10 to the power of
the number x in the main display.
Limits
number<64
See also
Logarithm
Natural Logarithm
Exponential (eX)
Example
The antilog of 3 is 1000:
rID ~ Functions Maths Antilog
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
241
Common Logarithm
Menu
Functions Maths Log (Base 10)
Shortcut
~(]
Description
Gives the logarithm to base 10 of the number in the main
display.
Limits
number>= 0
See also
Antilogarithm
Natural Logarithm
Exponential
Example
The natural logarithm of 1000 is 3:
(]~~~
m§J Functions Maths Log
Cosine
Menu
Functions Trig Cosine
Shortcut
~@
Description
Gives the cosine of the number in the main display
using the unit set by the Functions Trigonometric Unit
command.
See also
Sine
Inverse Sine
Tangent
Trigonometric unit
Example
The cosine of 60 degrees is 0.5:
Functions Trig Unit Degrees
Functions Trig Cosine
~~
242
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Div
Menu
Functions Other Div
Description
Divides the previous number with the number in the
main display and puts the integer result in the main
display.
See also
Modulus
Example
10 Div4 is 2:
1II1Ql
(ill Functions Other Div
aJ G2J
Exponential eX
Menu
Functions Maths Exponential
Shortcut
£2illDJlBJ
Description
The natural antilogarithm. It raises e (2.718 .. ) to the
power of the number x in the main display.
Limits
number < 148.3
See also
Natural Logarithm
Example
The exponential of 1 is 2.718 ...
1II
(ill Functions Maths Exponential
Fractional Part
Menu
Functions Other Fractional Part
Description
Extracts the digits after the decimal point and places
them into the main display.
See also
Integer Part
Round
Example
The fractional part of 234.78 is .78:
~~aJQ0@
(ill Functions Other Fractional
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
243
Integer Part
Menu
Functions Other Integer Part
Description
Extracts the digits before the decimal point and place
them into the main display.
See also
Fractional Part
Round
Example
The integer part of 234.78 is 234:
~IllElDlZl(ID
Functions Other Integer Part
Inverse Cosine
Menu
Functions Trig Inverse Cosine
Shortcut
(9.ill[O@
Description
Gives the arc cosine of the number in the main display
using the unit set by the Functions Trig Unit command.
Limits
-1 =< number =< 1
See also
Cosine
Sine
Tangent
Inverse Sine
Inverse Tangent
Example
The inverse cosine of 0.5 is 60 degrees:
~ Functions Trig Unit
D~ ~ Functions Trig
244
Degrees
Inverse Cosine
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Inverse Sine
Menu
Functions Trig Inverse Sine
Shortcut
19iDOJlID
Description
Gives the arc sine of the number in the main display
using the unit set by the Functions Trig Unit command.
Limits
-1 < number =< 1
See also
Cosine
Sine
Tangent
Inverse Cosine
Inverse Tangent
Example
The inverse sine of 0.5 is 30 degrees:
~ Functions Trig Unit
[J~ ~ Functions Trig
Degrees
Inverse Sine
Inverse Tangent
Menu
Functions Trig Inverse Tangent
Shortcut
19iDOJl:D
Description
Gives the arc tangent of the number in the main display
using the unit set by the Functions Trig Unit command.
See also
Cosine
Sine
Tangent
Inverse Cosine
Inverse Sine
Example
The inverse tangent of 1 is 45 degrees:
~ Functions Trig Unit Degrees
~ Functions Trig Inverse Tangent
[0
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
245
Modulus
Menu
Functions Other Modulus
Description
Divides the previous number with the number in the
main display and puts the remainder in the main
display.
See also
Div
Example
10 Modulus 3 is 1:
llllQl fW
Functions Other Modulus
lID LEI
Natural Logarithm
Menu
Functions Maths N aturallogarithm
Shortcut
l£fillm
Description
Gives the logarithm to base e (2.718 .. ) of the number in
the main display.
Limits
number>O
See also
Antilogarithm
Common Logarithm
Exponential
Example
The natural logarithm of 2.718 is approximately 1:
~Q[lllllID ~ Functions Maths Natural Log
Round Value
Menu
Functions Other Round Value
Description
Makes the number in the main display into the nearest
integer.
See also
Fractional Part
Integer Part
Example
The rounded portion of 23.6 is 24:
~@Qllil
246
fW
Functions Other Round
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Sine
Menu
Functions Trig Sine
Shortcut
(9ill(ID
Description
Gives the Sine of the number in the main display using
the unit set by the Functions Trigonometric Unit
command.
See also
Cosine
Inverse Sine
Tangent
Trigonometric unit
Example
The sine of 30 degrees is 0.5:
Functions Trig Unit Degrees
~12l Functions Trig Sine
Square
Menu
Functions Maths Square
Shortcut
(9ill~
Description
Multiplies the number in the main display by itself and
puts the answer in the main display. It is equivalent to
X2.
Limits
number < 1032
See also
Square root
Example
The square of 12 is 144:
(]~ ~ Functions Maths Square
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
247
Square Root
Menu
Functions Maths Root
Description
Calculates the positive square root of the positive
number in the main display. It is equivalent to Xl112).
Limits
x must be positive.
See also
Square
Example
The square root of 144 is 12:
lIlalal 1m
Functions Maths Root
Tangent
Menu
Functions Trig Tangent
Shortcut
(gilll]
Description
Gives the tangent of the number in the main display
using the unit set by the Functions Trigonometric Unit
command.
Limits
Where n is any integer:
number <> 1t / 2 + 1t * n for Radians
number <> 90 + 180 * n for Degrees
number <> 100 + 200 * n for Grads
See also
Cosine
Inverse Sine
Sine
Trigonometric unit
Example
The tangent of 45 degress is 1:
1m Functions Trig Unit Degrees
a1~ 1m Functions Trig Tangent
248
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Trigonometric Unit
Menu
Functions Trig Unit
Description
Sets the unit that the Sine, Cosine, Tangent, Inverse
Cosine, Inverse Sine, and Inverse Tangent functions use.
A circle has 360 degrees, 21t radians, or 400 grads
See also
Cosine
Inverse Cosine
Inverse Sine
Inverse Tangent
Sine
Tangent
Example
To change the unit to Degrees:
~
Functions Trig Unit Deg
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
249
Using the Statistical Functions
The Scientific Calculator has some simple statistical functions that work on
the marked block in the tape. You must follow each number by a I+-II and
mark the block of numbers. All functions are on the Block Statistics menu
(shortcut [IilllKJl]J).
Following is an alphabetic listing of the statistics functions, in the same
format as the mathematical functions.
Average
Menu
Block Statistics Average
Description
Calculates the mean of the marked block of numbers
and puts it into the display.
Example
The average of 23,33,4 is 20
fill Edit Tape
IHomel
fill Block Mark Start
~~
fill
lB
~
tEl
~(~](EJ ~ [EJ
Block Mark End
Block Statistics Average
Largest Value
Menu
Block Statistics Largest Value
Description
Finds the maximum value in the marked block and puts
it into the main display.
Example
The largest of 23,33,4 is 33
fill Edit Tape
IHomel
~ Block Mark Start
~~ tEl ~~ [EJ EJ [EJ
~ Block Mark End
lB
~
250
Block Statistics Largest
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Minimum Value
Menu
Block Statistics Minimum Value
Description
Finds the smallest value in the marked block and puts it
into the main display.
Example
The smallest of 23,33,4 is 4
~ Edit 'rape
IHome!
~ Block Mark Start
~1l1 G2J 1l11l1 G2J ~
~ Block Mark End
G2J
~
~
Block Statistics Minimum
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
251
Population Standard Deviation
Menu
Block Statistics Population Deviation
Description
Finds the population standard deviation of the marked
block and puts it into the main display. The population
standard deviation is
L (xi - AVERAGE)2
(J
n
=~
n
where:
Xi is the ith number, AVERAGE is the average (see page
II), and n is the number of entries.
Standard deviation measures the degree to which each
number in the block varies from the average. The lower
the standard deviation, the less each number varies from
the average, thereby increasing the reliability of the
average.
See also
Variance
Example
The popUlation standard deviation of 23,33,4 is 12.028
~
Edit Tape
IHomel
~
Block Mark Start
~~ (EJ ~~ (EJ ~ (EJ
~
Block Mark End
~
~
252
Block Statistics Population Deviation
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Sum of All the Entries
Menu
Block Statistics Total
Description
Finds the sum of all the numbers in the marked block
and shows it in the main display.
Example
The sum of 23, 33, 4 is 60
IE2I
Edit Tape
IHomel
IE2I
Block Mark Start
~@B@@BI3JB
IE2I
Block Mark End
~
IE2I
Block Statistics Total
Sum of the Squares of the Entries
Menu
Block Statistics Sum of Squares
Description
Finds the total of all the (numbers)2 in the marked block
and shows it in the main display.
Example
The sum of the squares of 23, 33, 4 is 1,634
IE2I
Edit Tape
IHomel
IE2I
Block Mark Start
~@B@@BI3JB
IE2I
Block Mark End
~
IE2I
Block Statistics Sum of squares
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
253
Variance
Menu
Block Statistics Variance
Description
Finds the population variance of the marked block and
puts it into the main display. Variance is the square of
the population standard deviation.
Variance measures the degree to which each number in
the block varies from the average. The lower the
variance, the less individual values vary from the
average, thereby increasing the reliability of the average.
See also
Population standard deviation
Example
The variance of 23, 33, 4 is 144.67
1m Edit
Tape
IHomel
1m Block Mark Start
~@J (3 @J@J (3 ~ (3
1m Block Mark End
~
1m Block Statistics Variance
254
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Changing the Form of the Main Display
You can choose the format of the number in the main display with the
Options command. This also determines the accuracy of the Calculator,
since accuracy is set by the number of decimal places.
Following are the Options commands that change the main display format.
Options Number Format
When set to Automatic, it shows only the necessary decimal places to a
maximum set by the Options Number Decimals command. If the number is
smaller than the number of decimal places, the Calculator puts the number
into e notation.
When set to Fixed, it always displays the number of decimal places set by
the Options Number Decimals command even if the digits after the
decimal point are zeroes.
When set to Scientific, numbers are in exponential (e) notation, with the
number of decimal places set by the Options Number Decimals command.
When set to Engineering, all numbers are in exponential (e) notation with
exponents of 10 that are multiples of 3. You set the number of decimal
places in the number with the Options Number Decimals command. Use
the Engineering option to display a number to the nearest metric unit.
Options Number Decimals
Sets the number of decimal places in the main display and thus the
accuracy of the calculation.
Options Number Point
Changes the character that is the decimal point and the character that
serves as the separator between thousands. For the United States and other
English-speaking countries, use a period as the decimal point (1,000,000.99).
For European countries, set this command to a comma (1.000.000,99).
Options Save Setup
This saves the following Scientific Calculator settings:
• all the Options commands
• the variables
• the current window size, color, and position
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Scientific)
255
PROGRAMMER CALCULATOR
Top of Tape
Bottom of Tape
Previous Page
Next Page
Scroll.:::======::t-1~~:!......_.....J
Figure 11.5: The Programmer Calculator Menu Tree
256
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
The Programmer Calculator
The Programmer Calculator contains all the functions a programmer
needs-such as binary, decimal, and hexadecimal numbers and boolean
functions. It is like the SideKick Calculator with additional features.
Some Basic Keys
In addition to the keys noted on page 222, the Programmer Calculator has a
number of available key commands:
~(IDI9(gJW(EJ
Use these letters or their lowercase eqUivalents to enter hexadecimal
numbers.
~
Performs the two's complement of the number in the main display. This is
the same as the Functions Change Sign command.
EJ
Raises a number to a power; for example, you enter 32 as ~EJ~.
OJ
Performs the factorial of the number in the main display; for example, you
enter 3! = 1 * 2 * 3 as ~UJ.
ill and
(]
Use parentheses to isolate particular mathematical expressions for separate
evalua tion.
Basic Calculations
All calculations are in integers and work according to the normal algebraic
rules. Following is the list of algebraic priorities:
•
•
•
•
•
menu functions and Not
powers (1\)
multiplication, division, And
addition, subtraction, Xor, Or
equals
Use parentheses to override the standard priorities.
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Programmer)
257
The examples that follow assume base 10 (decimal) numbers. Use the
Options Base Decimal command to change the base if DEC is not in the left
corner of the Calculator window.
23 + 43 - 2
= 64
Notice the algebraic priority in the next examples:
12 .2 + 2
*3=
~
~
-
*4/
-> ~BJ
= 108 - 135
=
4- 6+2
B ~ CJ f]J I +-J I
CJ ~ B BJ~ CJ ~ I+-JI
12.2 + 6 = 18.2 - > [l~D~
-27
->
5 - 6 = -6.4
BJ B llil B tal CJ BJ [/]
~
B llill +-J I
Let's use parentheses to override the priorities:
4 +2 * 5
--------- =
(4
+2 *
5) /7
= 2 -> illBJ
B tal CJ
~
QJ ill
~ I +-J I
7
4
*
(66 - 23) / (16 - 13) 2
= 19.1111
Using the Repeat and Constant Facilities
To repeat an intermediate result, you don't need to type the number each
time. You can just press the operator key repeatedly. For example,
(33
* 4 + 55) * 2 = 374
When you press I +-J I or 8, you can use that result as a constant, so it's easy
to repeat calculations. For example,
180
180
* 300
* 20
=
=
54000
3600
12345 / 200 = 61.725
8721 / 200 = 43.605
->
->
~
~@
[lfID@ CJ i1l@@
I +-J I
I+-Jl
-> [ltali1lBJ~ ill tal@@ I +-J I
-> fID~tal[l I +-J I
You can make intermediate results constants by using brackets:
5 - (2 * 6) =-7
10 - (2 * 6) = -2
258
->
->
~
[l
B illtal CJ llilQJ
I +-J I
@ I+-JI
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Changing the Base for the Calculation
Use the Options Base command to convert between different bases:
l£ED(QJ
Options Number Base Decimal
Converts the number in the main display to base 10 so that subsequent
numbers and results are in decimal. In this base, you can use non-integer
numbers, such as 3.14159.
l£EDlBJ
Options Number Base Hexadecimal
Converts the number in the main display to base 16, so that subsequent
numbers and results are in hexadecimal. In the manual, hexadecimal
numbers appear with an H suffix, for example, B800H.
I£EIIWJ
Options Number Base Binary
Converts the number in the main display to base 2 so that subsequent
numbers and results are in binary. In the manual, binary numbers appear
with a B suffix, for example, 1101B.
Here are some examples:
= 78H = 1111000B
10 + 20H + 110B = 30H
120
-> l£ED(QJ UJ~(§] 19:illlBJ 19:illWJ
-> I Space I
[8J(QJ OJ(§] G
19:illlEJ ~(§] G
19:illWJ UJUJ(§]
19:illlBJ I +-ll
The Programmer Functions
The Calculator has some special functions, displayed on the Functions
menu, to complement its base conversions. They are listed here
alphabetically.
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Programmer)
259
And
Menu
Functions And
Shortcut
l£liD0
Description
Compares each bit of the previous number with the
number in the main display by looking at each bit in
sequence, then replaces the displayed number with the
result. If the two bits are the same, then the result equals
1.
Previous
0
0
1
1
Current
RESULT
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
See also
Not
Or
Xor
Example
1001B And OlllB is 0001:
Options Number Base Binary
III(QJ(QJIII ill§) Functions And (QJIIIIIIIII
8
Change Sign
Menu
Functions Change Sign
Shortcut
~
Description
Performs the two's complement of the number in the
main display.
See also
Not
Example
III
260
ill§) Functions Change Sign
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Div
Menu
Functions Div
Description
Divides the previous number with the number in the
main display and replaces it with the integer result.
See also
Modulus
Example
10 Div4 is 2:
Option Number Base Decimal
Functions Div aJ [EI
OJ19 ill2I
Modulus
Menu
Functions Modulus
Description
Divides the previous number with the number in the
main display and replaces it with the remainder.
See also
Div
Example
10 Modulus 3 is 1:
Option Number Base Decimal
OJ19 IW Functions Modulus @ [EI
Not
Menu
Functions Not
Description
Performs the one's complement of the number in the
main display and replaces it with the result.
See also
And
Change Sign
Or
Xor
Example
1001 Not is 0110:
Options Number Base Binary
OJ1919OJ ill2I Functions Not
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Programmer)
261
Or
Menu
Functions Or
Shortcut
l2ill~
Description
Compares each bit of the previous number with the
number in the main display, then replaces it with the
result. If either contains a 1, then the result sets that bit
to 1.
Previous
0
0
1
1
Current
RESULT
0
1
0
1
See also
AND
NOT
Xor
Example
1001B Or 0110B is 1111:
0
1
1
1
Options Number Base Binary
1II~~IIIlEi§ Functions Or ~1II1I1~
262
a
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Xor
Menu
Functions Xor
Shortcut
l£ill0
Description
Compares the previous number with the number in the
main display, then replaces it with the result. If either
but not both contain a 1, then the result sets that bit to 1.
Previous
0
0
1
1
See also
Current
0
1
0
1
RESULT
0
1
1
0
And
Not
Or
Example
1100B Xor lOOlB is lOlB:
Options Number Base Binary
ill§J Functions Xor OJI9I9OJ (3
OJOJI9I9
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Programmer)
263
Using Variables
To define a variable, you just type its name, unless it begins with A, B, C, D,
E, or F. In that case, you precede the variable with @ (an at-sign), which
signifies "start variable". A window opens, prompting you for its value in
the current base, whether it be binary, decimal, or hexadecimal. Press , ...... ,
to enter the value.
From now on, you can type the variable's name and SideKick Plus
automatically substitutes its value-unless it begins with A, B, C, D, E, or F,
when you precede it with @. Let's say you want to define CGAbase to be
B800H (for the base address of the IBM Color Graphics Adaptor). Type
~
Options Number Base Hexadecimal
1!(g~0lE0lID@''''''''
@lElE@@ ,...... ,
Note: You must prefix a zero (0) before the first hexadecimal letter, A
throughF.
You would add 23H to the base address of the CGA like this:
~(ID
EJ
~(g~0f]J~lID@
,...... ,
The Variables command (shortcut l£illlY]) opens a window with the
variables in decimal and sorts in alphabetical order. An extra variable
(DISP) is the value in the main display.
Display and Setup-Saving Options
Following are the Options commands that alter the main display and save
the setup.
Options Number Format
When set to Automatic, it shows only the necessary decimal places to the
maximum set by the Options Number Decimals command. When set to
Fixed, it always displays the number of decimal places set by the Option
Number Decimals command, even if the digits after the point are zeroes.
Options Number Decimals
Sets the number of decimal places in the main display, when in decimal
format.
264
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Options Number Point
Changes the characters for the decimal point and the separator between
thousands. For the United States and other English-speaking countries, set
the command to a period for the decimal point (1,000,000.99). For European
countries, set this command to a comma (1.000.000,99).
Options Save Setup
This saves the following Programmer Calculator settings:
• all the Options commands
• the Variables
• the current window size, color, and position
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Programmer)
265
FORMULA CALCULATOR
Eo
G
H
Sine
Cosine
Tangent
Inverse - - - - - - - - - - - - l l - - - I
K
MU
NA
PI
Trig
Maths
Exponential
Log (Base 10)
Antilog
Inverse (1/x)
Square
Root
Financial
-----------ll---I
Programmer
Payment
Value
Future Value
Term
Compound
Rate
Div
Modulus
Not
Xor
And
Or
Other----------1-fil~nkteKg~e~rpp~a~rt-------------,
Fractional Part
Round Value
Absolute Value
Combinations
Permutations
Cha
Total
Average
Variance
Sum of Squares
Population Deviation
Minimum Value
Value
Tape
Automatic Memory
Right Margin
Pasted
pe
Bottom of Tape
Previous Page
Next Page
Scroli-------------I----1
.....
----~
Figure 11.6: The Formula Calculator Menu Tree
266
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
The Formula Calculator
Anyone familiar with Reflex, Quattro, or other database and spreadsheet
products will be comfortable with this Calculator. To perform a calculation,
you simply type the formula into the main display and press I +-II. The
Formula Calculator is the most powerful of all the calculators, since it
contains all the functions of the other three plus its own variations.
Some Basic Keys
Since you type formulas into the Calculator window, the normal editing
keys apply, which you can change with the Sevices Setup Line editing
command. Following is a description of all the editing commands:
Go to Previous Character
Moves the cursor one character to the left within the entry.
Go to Next Character
Moves the cursor one character to the right within the entry.
Go to Start of Line
Moves the cursor to the first character within the entry.
Go to End of Line
Moves the cursor to the last character within the entry.
Delete Previous Character
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor, if one exists.
Delete Current Character
Deletes the character above the cursor, if one exists.
Delete Rest of Line
[EI(9[E1(]
Deletes all text from the cursor to the end of the entry. Note: You must keep
~ down while pressing (9 and (] when shortcuts are shown in this format.
Otherwise, with [EI(9(], you only need to keep [EI pressed when you press
(9.
Delete Line
Deletes all the text in the entry.
Insert~ode
~
Changes between insert and overwrite modes when entering text. In Insert
mode, new text is added to existing text; in Overwrite mode, new text
replaces existing text.
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
267
Following are the commands on single-letter keys not available on the
menus:
ill
Exponent entry; lets you enter very large and very small numbers. For
example, you enter 0.0002 = 2 * 104 as ~ ill G a1.
E)
Raises a number to a power; for example, you enter 32 as @E)~.
aJ
Performs the factorial of a number; for example, you enter 3!
@aJ@ 1+-11.
= 1 * 2 * 3 as
(] and ill
Use parentheses to isolate specific mathematical expressions for separate
evaluation.
~
Finds the percentage.
Simple Calculations
All calculations are set to 16 digits and are ordered according to the normal
algebraic rules. Following is the list of algebraic priorities:
•
•
•
•
•
menu functions and percentages
powers (")
multiplication, division, And
addition, subtraction, Xor, Or
equals
Use parentheses if you are in doubt or wish to override the standard
priorities.
Some simple calculations include
= 64
35 * -5 / -1.5 = 116.67
22*10 4 + 12 / 2 = 220006
23 + 43 - 2
268
E1 a1@ G ~ 1+-11
-) ~(YJ ~@J (!J G@J I1J GllJO@J 1+-II
-> ~(YJ) ~~illal E1 llJ~ I1J ~ 1+-II
-) ~(YJ ~@
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Notice the algebraic priority in the next examples:
12 + 2
54
*
2
* 3 = 12 + 6 = 18
- 45 * 3 = 108 - 135
-) [Ell] m~
EJ
~ ~ ~ I +-i I
-) [Ell] ~@J ~ ~
G @J~
~ ~ I +-i I
= -27
4 - 6 +2
*
4 / 5 - 6 = - 6.4
-) [Ell] @J
G ~ EJ
~ ~
@J
l2J
~
G~
I +-i I
Let's use parentheses to override the priorities:
4 +2
*
5
--------- = (4 + 2 * 5) /7 = 2 -) [Ell] (]@J EJ
~ ~ ~(]
l2J
tZJ I +-i I
7
4
*
(66 - 23) / (16 - 13) 2
= 19. 111
-)
l£EiJl]
l2J (]
@ ~ (]~~
m~ G m~
G ~~(]
(] EJ~ I +-i I
Using Hexadecimal and Binary Numbers
You can calculate in decimal, hexadecimal (base 16), or binary (base 2) in
the Formula Calculator. Unlike the Programmer Calculator, however, you
can't convert between different bases, nor can you do mixed-base
calculations.
Use the Options Number Base command to change between decimal,
hexadecimal, and binary numbers. The same command shortcuts apply as
in the Programmer Calculator:
• [Ell]) for Options Number Base Decimal
• [EI~ for Options Number Base Binary
.l£EiJ1EI for Options Number Base Hexadecimal
When you switch to hexadecimal or binary numbers, the indicator to the
left of the numeric display changes to hex or bin respectively.
Here are some sample calculations:
10H + 30H + 4AH
= 8AH
10010B + 10000 B-1 011 OB
= 11 0OB -) l£EiJl] l£EiJ@ mlQJlQJmlQJ EJ mlQJlQJlQJlQJ
G mjgmmjg
I +-i I
You can also use any of the Programmer Calculator's Functions commands:
100010B And 010010B
= lOB
-)
[Ell][EI~
illQl
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
WlB 0
mjgjgjgmjg
~ lQJ(]lQJlQJm~ I +-i I
269
53H Xor 34H
= 16H
The Formula Functions
The Formula Calculator's power stems from its wealth of functions. There
are three ways to call a function up:
• Type it in @illlE] [D(ID(9(lJ).
• Use the menus «(Ejg Functions Trig Sine (ID(9).
• Use a shortcut ([8(ID (ID(9).
For a function that only takes one parameter, such as Sin, Log, or Sqr, you
don't need to type in the parentheses but you must place the number before
the function. You could type in 23 Sin + 43 Log, for example.
Following is an alphabetical list of all the Formula Calculator functions.
Absolute Value
Name
ABS(x)
Menu
Functions Other Absolute Value
Description
Gives the positive value of x.
Example
The absolute value of -3 is 3:
ABS(-3)
(3
And
Name
xAndy
Menu
Functions Programmer And
Description
Bitwise ANDs x with y.
See also
Not
Or
Xor
Example
9 And 7 is 1:
9 And 7 (3
270
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Antilogarithm
Name
ALOG(x)
Menu
Functions Maths Antilog
Shortcut
[lillill(g
Description
The common antilogarithm. It raises 10 to the power of
the number x.
Limits
number <64
See also
Logarithm
Natural Logarithm
Exponential (eX)
Example
The antilog of 3 is 1000:
ALOG (3) (EI
Combinations
Name
C(n;r)
Menu
Functions Other Combinations
Description
Calculates the number of possible combinations
(unordered selection) of r items taken from a set of n
items. The formula is:
n!
(n-r)! * r!
Limits
r>O
Example
How many possible 13-card Bridge hands are there?
C(52;13)
(EI
This tells us there are 6.35 * 1011 possible Bridge hands.
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
271
Common Logarithm
Name
LOG (x)
Menu
Functions Maths Log
Shortcut
19.illl]
Description
Gives the logarithm to base 10 of x.
Limits
number>:::: 0
See also
Antilogarithm
Natural Logarithm
Exponential
Example
The natural logarithm of 1000 is 3:
LOG(lOOO)
8
Compounding Periods
Name
CTERM(INT; FUTURE; PRESENT)
Menu
Functions Financial Compound
Shortcut
[E]JW(9
Description
Calculates the number of compounding periods it will
take an investment of PRESENT value to grow to a
FUTURE value, earning a fixed-interest rate INT per
compounding period. It uses this formula:
Ln(FUTURE/PRESENT)
Ln(1+INT)
where Ln is the Natural logarithm (see page 277).
Limits
INT > 0, PRESENT> 0
Example
You deposit $1500 in an account that pays an annual
interest of 10%, compounded monthly. When will you
have $3500 in the account?
CTERM(lO%;3500;1500)
8
This tells you that in about nine years you will have
$3500 in the account.
272
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Cosine
Name
COS (x)
Menu
Functions Trig Cosine
Shortcut
I9EJJmJ
Description
Gives the Cosine of x using the unit set by the Functions
Trigonometric Unit command.
See also
Sine
Inverse Sine
Tangent
Trigonometric unit
Example
The Cosine of 60 degrees is 0.5:
~
Functions Trig Unit Degrees
COS(60) (EI
Div
Name
xDivy
Menu
Functions Programmer Div
Description
Divides x with y and returns the integer as the result.
See also
MOD
Example
10DN 4is2:
10 DIV 4 (EI
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
273
Exponential eX
Name
EXP(x)
Menu
Functions Maths Exponential
Shortcut
f2ill[IJWJ
Description
The natural antilogarithm: It raises e (2.718 .. ) to the
powerofx.
Limits
number < 148.3
See also
Natural Logarithm
Example
The exponential of 1 is 2.718 ...
EXP(l)
[EJ
Fractional Part
Name
FRC(x)
Menu
Functions Other Fractional Part
Description
Extracts the digits after the decimal point of x.
See also
Integer part
Round
Example
The fractional part of 234.78 is .78:
FRC(234.78) [EJ
274
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Future Value
Name
FV(PAYMENT;!NT;TERM)
Menu
Functions Financial Future Value
Shortcut
(gillm~
Description
Calculates the value of an investment after a number of
payment periods TERM. The series of equal payments at
the end of each period is PAYMENT, while the money
earns an interest rate of INT. This function uses the
formula
PAYMENT *
!NT
Limits
INTEREST> 0
Example
You deposit $1500 at the end of every year into an
account that pays an annual interest of 10%, compounded yearly. What will you have in the account after
15 years?
FV(1500;10%;15) ~
This tells you that you have $47658.72 in the account
after 15 years.
Integer Part
Name
INT(x)
Menu
Functions Other Integer Part
Description
Extracts the digits before the decimal point of x.
See also
Fractional Part
Round
Example
The integer part of 234.78 is 234:
INT (234.78) ~
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
275
Inverse Cosine
Name
ACOS(x)
Menu
Functions Trig Inverse Cosine
Shortcut
~(]~
Description
Gives the arc cosine of x using the unit set by the
Functions Trig Unit command.
Limits
-1 =< number =< 1
See also
Cosine
Sine
Tangent
Inverse Sine
Inverse Tangent
Example
The inverse cosine of 0.5 is 60 degrees:
~
Functions Trig Unit Degrees
ACOS (.5) (EJ
Inverse Sine
Name
ASIN(x)
Menu
Functions Trig Inverse Sine
Shortcut
~(](]J
Description
Gives the sine of x using the unit set by the Functions
Trig Unit command.
Limits
-1 < number =< 1
See also
Cosine
Sine
Tangent
Inverse Cosine
Inverse Tangent
Example
The inverse sine of 0.5 is 30 degrees:
~ Functions
ASIN (.5) (EJ
276
Trig Unit Degrees
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Inverse Tangent
Name
ATAN(x)
Menu
Functions Trig Inverse Tangent
Shortcut
l£1ill(D(]
Description
Gives the tangent of x using the unit set by the Functions
Trig Unit command.
See also
Cosine
Sine
Tangent
Inverse Cosine
Inverse Sine
Example
The inverse tangent of 1 is 45 degrees:
~
Functions Trig Unit Degrees
ATAN(l) (EI
Modulus
Name
x Modulus y
Menu
Functions Programmer Modulus
Description
Divides x by y to give the remainder as the result.
See also
DIV
Example
10MOD3isl:
10 MOD 3 (EI
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
277
Natural Logarithm
Name
LN(x)
Menu
Functions Maths Natural log
Shortcut
l£EDlEJ
Description
Gives the logarithm to base e (2.718.. ) of x.
Limits
number>O
See also
Antilogarithm
Common Logarithm
Exponential
Example
The natural logarithm of 2.718 is approximately 1:
LN(2.718)(EJ
NEG
Name
NEG (x)
Menu
Functions Other Change Sign
Shortcut
~
Description
Changes the sign of x.
Example
To change the sign of 3 into -3:
NEG(3)
(EI
Not
Name
Not(x)
Menu
Functions Programmer Not
Description
Performs the one's complement of x.
See also
AND
OR
Xor
Example
The Not of 9 is 6:
Not (9)
278
(EI
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Number of Periods
Name
TERM(PAYMENT;!NT; FUTURE)
Menu
Functions Financial Term
Shortcut
(9illWaJ
Description
Calculates the time necessary to obtain FUTURE from an
end of period PAYMENT at an interest rate of INT. It
uses this formula:
Ln(1 + (FUTURE * INT /PAYMENT)
Ln{1 +INT)
Example
You place $5000 each year into a bank account earning
10% annual interest. When will there be $50000 in the
account?
TERM(5000il0%i50000) ~
This tells you that it takes about 7.3 years to get $50000
in the account.
Or
Name
xOry
Menu
Functions Programmer Or
Description
Bitwise Ors x with y.
See also
And
Not
Xor
Example
9 Or7 is 15:
9 Or 7
8
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
279
Payment
Name
PMT(PRINCIPAL; INT; TERM)
Menu
Functions Financial Payment
Shortcut
~ill0
Description
Calculates the amount of periodic payment on a loan of
money PRINCIPAL, at interest rate INT, over the period
TERM. It uses this formula:
PRINCIPAL * INT
1 - (1 + INTyTERM
Limits
INTEREST> -I, TERM <> 0
Example
You have a $35000 mortgage over 15 years at an annual
interest of 10%. What is the yearly payment?
PMT(35000;lO%;15)
This tells you that the yearly payment is $4601.58.
Permutations
Name
P(n; r)
Menu
Functions Other Permutations
Description
Calculates the number of arrangements of r items taken
from a set of n items. The formula is
n!
(n - r)!
See also
Combinations
Example
The number of ways six people can line up for a
photograph is 720:
P(6;6)
280
lEI
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Rate
Name
RATE(FUTURE; PRESENT; TERM)
Menu
Functions Financial Rate
Shortcut
lfBilllID
Description
Calculates the interest rate for PRESENT to grow to
FUTURE over the period TERM. It uses this formula:
FUTURE
[ PRESENT
1
(1/ (TERM»
-1
Limits
TERM<>O
PRESENT and FUTURE must be the same sign.
Example
You invest $5000 in a five-year bond with a maturity
value of $10000. What is the interest rate for this bond?
RATE(lOOOOi5000i5) ~
This tells you the annual interest rate is .1487, which is
14.87%.
Round Value
Name
ROUND(x)
Menu
Functions Other Round Value
Description
Makes x into the nearest integer.
See also
Fractional part
Integer part
Example
The rounded portion of 23.6 is 24:
ROUND (24) ~
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
281
Sine
Name
SIN (x)
Menu
Functions Trig Sine
Shortcut
lSEDlID
Description
Gives the Sine of x using the unit set by the Functions
Trigonometric Unit command.
See also
Cosine
Inverse Sine
Tangent
Trigonometric unit
Example
The sine of 30 degrees is 0.5:
~
Functions Trig Unit Degrees
SIN(30) S
Square
Name
SQR(x)
Menu
Functions Maths Square
Shortcut
lSED~
Description
Multiplies the x by itself. It is equivalent to X2•
Limits
number < 1032
See also
Square root
Example
The square of 12 is 144:
(across the top of the keyboard)
SQR(12)
282
S
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Square Root
Name
SQRT(x)
Menu
Functions Maths Root
Description
Calculates the positive square root of the x. It is
equivalent to X(1~).
Limits
x must be positive.
See also
Square
Example
The square root of 144 is 12:
SQRT(144) (EJ
Tangent
Name
TAN(x)
Menu
Functions Trig Tangent
Shortcut
(£E]UJ
Description
Gives the tangent of x using the unit set by the Functions
Trigonometric Unit command.
Limits
number <> 1t / 2 + 1t * n for Radians
number <> 90 + 180 * n for Degrees
number <> 100 + 200 * n for Grads
where n is any integer.
See also
Cosine
Inverse Sine
Sine
Trigonometric unit
Example
The tangent of 45 degrees is 1:
~
Functions Trig Unit Degrees
TAN (45)
lEI
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
283
Trigonometric unit
Name
Unit
Menu
Functions Trig Unit
Description
Sets the unit that the Sine, Cosine, Tangent, Inverse
Cosine, Inverse Sine, and Inverse Tangent functions use.
A circle has 360 degrees, 2n radians, or 400 grads.
See also
Cosine
Inverse Cosine
Inverse Sine
Inverse Tangent
Sine
Tangent
Example
To change the unit to Degrees:
~
Functions Trig Unit Degrees
Value
Name
PV(PAYMENTi INTi TERM)
Menu
Functions Financial Value
Shortcut
~0~
Description
Calculates the current value of a number of end of period
PAYMENTS paid over the period TERM, invested at
interest rate INT. It uses this formula:
1 - (1 + INTtTERM
PAYMENT *
INT
Limits
INTEREST >0
Example
You win an annual scholarship of $2000 for each of your
four years at Harvard. If you invest the money at 10%,
what is the current value of the scholarship?
PV(2000;10%;4) ~
This tells you that the value today of the scholarship is
$6339.73.
284
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Xor
Name
xXory
Menu
Functions Programmer Xor
Description
Bitwise exclusive Or's x with y.
See also
And
Not
Or
Example
10 Xor 6 is 12:
10 Xor 6 [3
Using the Statistical Functions
The Formula Calculator has some simple statistical functions that work on
the marked block in the tape. You must follow each number by a , ~ I and
mark the block of numbers. All functions are on the Block Statistics menu,
which has a shortcut of [E)JlEJ(ID.
Following is an alphabetical listing of the statistics functions, in the same
format as the mathematical functions.
Average
Menu
Block Statistics Average
Description
Calculates the mean of the marked block of numbers
and puts it into the display.
Example
The average of 23, 33, 4 is 20
(ill Edit Tape
IHomel
(ill Block Mark Start
0~ G2J ~~ (EJ ~ G2J
(ill Block Mark End
(G
(ill Block Statistics Average
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
285
Largest Value
Menu
Description
Block Statistics Largest Value
Finds the maximum value in the marked block and puts
it into the display.
Example
The largest of 23,33,4 is 33.
lW Edit
Tape
IHomel
~
Block Mark Start
l3 @J@J l3 BJ
~ Block Mark End
~@J
l3
lG
~
Block Statistics Largest
Minimum Value
Menu
Block Statistics Minimum Value
Description
Finds the smallest value in the marked block and puts it
into the display.
Example
The smallest of 23,33,4 is 4
~
Edit Tape
IHomel
~
~@J
lW
Block Mark Start
l3 @J@J l3 BJ
Block Mark End
l3
lG
~
286
Block Statistics Minimum
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Population Standard Deviation
Menu
Block Statistics Population Deviation
Description
Finds the population standard deviation of the marked
block and puts it into the display. Population standard
deviation is
L (~ - AVERAGE)2
crn = ~
n
where:
Xi is the ith number, AVERAGE is the average (see page
285), and n is the number of entries.
Standard deviation measures the degree to which each
number in the block varies from the average. The lower
the standard deviation, the less each number varies from
the average, thereby increasing the reliability of the
average.
See also
Variance
Example
The population standard deviation of 23, 33, 4 is
12.0277457018.
~
Edit Tape
IHomel
~
Block Mark Start
BJ~ (EJ ~~ (EJ ~ (EJ
~
Block Mark End
(EJ
~
Block Statistics Population Deviation
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
287
Sum of All the Entries
Menu
Block Statistics Total
Description
Finds the sum of all the numbers in the marked block
and puts it into the display.
Example
The sum of 23, 33, 4 is 60.
lf1QI Edit Tape
IHomel
lf1QI Block Mark Start
~@
[EJ @@ [EJ
BJ [EJ
lf1QI Block Mark End
~
~
Block Statistics Total
Sum of the Squares of the Entries
Menu
Block Statistics Sum of Squares
Description
Finds the total of all the (numbers)2 in the marked block
and shows it in the display.
Example
The sum of the squares of 23,33,4 is 1,634.
lf1QI Edit Tape
IHomel
lf1QI Block Mark Start
~@
~
[EJ @@ [EJ BJ [EJ
Block Mark End
~
lf1QI Block Statistics Sum of Squares
288
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Variance
Menu
Block Statistics Variance
Description
Finds the population variance of the marked block and
puts it into the display. Variance is the square of the
population standard deviation.
Variance measures the degree to which each number in
the block varies from the average. The lower the variance, the less individual values vary from the average,
thereby increasing the reliability of the average.
See also
Population standard deviation
Example
The variance of 23, 33, 4 is 144.6666666667
lEl2I
Edit Tape
/Homel
lEl2I
~(]
Block Mark Start
l3 (](] l3 @J
Block Mark End
lEl2I
IE
lEl2I Block
l3
Statistics Variance
Using Variables
The Formula Calculator's predefined variables are the same as the variables
in the Scientific Calculator. See page 240 to check on these predefined
variables.
Storing Formulas
You can store and recall two formulas permanently, as well as retrieve the
most recently used formulas, with the Memory command. Use the Options
Save Setup command to permanently store the formulas. Following is a
description of the Memory commands.
Memory Previous
19i1l~(B
Retrieves the last formula and shows it in the display.
Memory Save
~
Saves the formula in the window to the memory number given by the
menu.
Chapter 11, The Calculators (Formula)
289
Memory Load
(llI
This recalls the formula from the memory number you specify into the
window, overwriting the formula in the display.
Changing the Form of the Display
You can choose the format of the main display's number with the Options
command. This also determines the accuracy of the Calculator, since the
number of decimal places in the display sets the accuracy of the Calculator.
Following are the Options commands that change the display format.
Options Number Format
When set to Automatic, it shows only the necessary decimal places to the
maximum set by the Options Number Decimals command. If the number is
smaller than the number of decimal places, the number is put into e
notation.
When set to Fixed, it always displays the number of decimal places set by
the Options Number Decimals command, even if the digits after the point
are zeroes.
When set to Scientific, numbers are in exponential (E) notation with the
number of decimal places set by the Options Number Decimals command.
When set to Engineering, all numbers are in exponential (E) notation, with
exponents of 10 that are multiples of 3. You set the number of decimal
places in the number with the Options Number Decimals command. Use
Engineering when you wish to display a number to the nearest metric unit.
Options Number Decimals
Sets the number of decimal places in the display and therefore the accuracy
of the calculation.
Options Number Point
Changes the characters for the decimal point and the separator between
thousands. For the United States and other English-speaking countries, set
the command to a period (1,000,000.99). For European countries, set this
command to a comma (1.000.000,99).
Options Save Setup
This saves the following Formula Calculator settings:
•
•
•
•
all the Options commands
the expression memories
the variables
the current window size, color, and position
290
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Copying and Pasting
The Calculator exports the number or formula in the display when you use
1mB (Services Copy from Application) or 1m(§J (Services Quick Paste).
The Options Number Separators Pasted command determines whether the
Calculator pastes the commas or periods between each set of
• three decimal zeroes
• four hexadecimal digits
• eight binary digits
You select YES when you want these separators pasted.
Here's how to Quick Paste the number 23,999 to your underlying spreadsheet. (Normally, of course, you'd have calculated a whole series of numbers to arrive at the total 23,999):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Activate SideKick Plus with (9ill1m.
Activate the Calculator with Im[l.
Press IE2I and toggle Options Number Separators Pasted to NO.
Type 23999 in the display of the Calculator.
Use ImlE (Services Qui~l< Paste) to send the number to the spreadsheet.
If you had a word-processing program underneath SideKick Plus, you'd
have toggled Separators Pasted to YES. This is because you'd want the
comma between 23 and 999 to be pasted.
When you use (9ill(EI (Services Paste from Clipboard) or ~(§J (Services
Quick Paste) to paste to the Calculator, it's as if you were typing the text
very quickly on the keyboard. Although it's usually easier to read a block
of calculations into the tape rather than paste them to the Calculator, here's
an example of pasting 99 into the Calculator.
1. Activate the Clipboard with 1m'
2.
3.
4.
5.
Space
I.
'+-i
Type 99
I.
Mark 99 as a block with Block Mark Line.
Activate the Calculator with Im[l.
Press (9ill(EI to paste 99 from the Clipboard into the Calculator display.
Chapter 77, The Calculators
291
292
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
C
H
p
A
T
E
R
12
The ASCII Table
The ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) Table
associates a number with a letter, number, punctuation mark, or control
character. The SideKick Plus application allows you to build a string of
these characters and insert them into any underlying application. Although
designed mainly for programmers, you can use the ASCII Table to display
foreign-language, semi-graphic, and scientific characters.
ASCII TABLE
Next - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - 1
Figure 12.1: The ASCII Table Menu Tree
Activating the ASCII Table and
Finding a Character
After you activate SideKick Plus with
Table in one of two ways:
Chapter 72, The ASCII Table
i£E!JIill,
you can activate the ASCII
293
• Pop up the main menu with ~, move the cursor to ASCII Table, and
press I+-J I•
• Press~0.
To find a character in the table, you can scroll the table or type the
character, decimal number, or hexadecimal number. Following are
descriptions of each method.
Scrolling the ASCII Table
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor and scroll the table. To change the
cursor keys, use the Go to menu.
Go to Previous Column
Toggles the cursor and moves to the previous column in the table.
6
Go to Next Column
Toggles the cursor and moves to the next column in the table.
El
Go to Previous Line
Scrolls the table by one line toward the first ASCII character.
[fJ
Go to Next Line
Scrolls the table by one line toward the last ASCII character.
Go to Previous Page
~
Scrolls the table by one whole window, with an overlap of one line, nearer
to the start of the table.
Go to Next Page
IPgDnl
Scrolls the table one whole window, with an overlap of one line, nearer to
the end of the table.
Go to Start of Table
IHomel
Places the first (Oth) ASCII character in the top left of the window, moving
the cursor to the 16th character.
Go to End of Table
(8
Places the last (255th) ASCII character in the bottom right of the window,
moving the cursor to the 240th character.
Finding a Character by Letter
If you press any character key with the ASCII Table open, the cursor jumps
to that letter. For example, if you press D, the cursor moves to character
number 68.
294
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
You can also use this method to find control characters; for example, if you
press [E!J0, the cursor moves to character number 1. By default, the ASCII
Table does not show these control characters but a simple command
displays it: lW Control Characters.
When set to YES, the control characters command displays the first 32
characters as control characters; for example, 1\ A means that character 1 is
the same as SOH. When set to NO, these characters display as semi-graphic
characters.
Finding a Character by Number
Press
INurn Lockl
to find a character by its number:
Decimal Numbers
1. Press INurn Lockl.
2. Type a three-digit number.
Hexadecimal Numbers
1. Press INurn Lockl.
2. Type a two-digit hexadecimal number.
3. Press IS to signify that it is hexadecimal.
You need to type H only if the last character is a letter, not a number.
The Paste Buffer
The Paste buffer is where you build strings of characters before exporting
them to an underlying application. You don't have to keep moving back
and forth between SideKick Plus and your program when looking up
ASCII numbers, for example.
With the cursor on the character you want, simply press I+-II to insert that
character into the Paste buffer.
The command Edit Paste Buffer allows you to edit the paste buffer, just like
any SideKick Plus line editing. You cannot edit characters placed into the
buffer with the Options commands.
When you have finished editing, press
Chapter 72, The ASCII Table
~.
295
The Paste Options
Use the Paste Options command to change the characters sent to the Paste
buffer. You can save the Paste Options settings with the Save Setup
command described in the next section.
Paste Options Type Character
Places the character into the buffer.
Paste Options Type Decimal
Places a number sign (#), the decimal number of the character, and a
comma into the buffer each time you press I+-11. It does this by setting the
Paste Options Before Each command to a number sign (#) and Paste
Options Separating Each to a comma.
Paste Options Type Hexadecimal
Places the hexadecimal number of the character, an H, and a comma into
the buffer each time you press I+-11. It does this by setting the Paste Options
After Each command to H and Paste Options Separating Each to a comma.
Paste Options Before Each
Places the character you enter before each ASCII character in the Paste
buffer.
Paste Options After Each
Places the character you entered after each ASCII character in the Paste
buffer.
Paste Options Separating Each
Places the character you entered between each ASCII character in the Paste
buffer.
Paste Options Enclosing buffer
Places the character you entered at the start and end of the Paste buffer.
Following are examples of using the Paste Options command with
computer languages.
Assembler
For a string, choose Paste Options Type Character and set Paste Options
Enclose Buffer to an apostrophe ('). This produces a buffer like 'TEST'.
For hexadecimal numbers, choose Paste Options Hexadecimal. This
produces a buffer like 23H,55H,56H.
Turbo Basic
For a PRINT string, choose Paste Options Character and set Paste Options
Enclosing Buffer to a quote ("). This produces a buffer like "TEST".
296
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Turbo C
For a print! function, choose Paste Options Character and set Paste Options
Enclosing Buffer to a quote ("). This produces a buffer like "TEST".
For an array, choose Paste Options Decimal and set Paste Options Before
Each to a comma. Then use Edit Paste Buffer to place curly braces ({ }) at
either end of the buffer. This produces a buffer like {23,45,55,67j.
Turbo Pascal
For a WriteLn, choose Paste Options Character and set Paste Options
Enclose Buffer to an apostrophe (').
For an array of hexadecimal numbers, choose Paste Options Hexadecimal
and set Paste Options Before Each to a dollar sign. This produces a buffer
like $45,$56,$66.
Saving the Settings
The command Save Setup saves the following ASCII Table settings in the
.EXE file:
• the Options settings
• the state of the Show Control Character toggle
• the current window size, color, and position
Copying and Pasting
The ASCII Table exports the paste buffer when you use either the Services
Copy from Application to Clipboard or Services Quick Paste command.
You can use this to send a line of ASCII characters to the application
underneath.
• Press ~ to find # in the ASCII Table.
• Press I+-II until you have built up the string to #UUU
• Press ~(§J to Quick Paste UUU# to the application underneath.
When you use Services Paste from Clipboard or Services Quick Paste to the
Ascii table, it's like typing very quickly on the keyboard. However, it is
unlikely you'll ever want to use these functions in the ASCII table.
Chapter 72, The ASCII Table
297
298
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
p
A
R
T
3
Customizing SideKick Plus
(Advanced)
299
300
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
R
E
13
Changing the Default Setup from
the Services Menu
This chapter explains how to change the following global features and
commands:
•
•
•
•
date and time formats
printer margins and fonts
exit conditions (the screen display after you deactivate SideKick Plus)
line-editing keys
You can change any of these with the Services Setup menu.
Note: You can also change some attributes of the Clipboard, as you saw in
Chapter 5. You make these Clipboard changes using the Services Setup
Clipboard menu.
Changing the Date and Time Format
Here are the format changes you can make with the Services Setup Date
and Time command:
Services Setup Date and Time Order
Sets the format of the day, month and year.
Services Setup Date and Time Month
Sets whether the month is text (October) or a number (10).
Services Setup Date and Time Year
Sets whether the year displays as two digits (89) or four digits (1989).
Chapter 73, Changing the Default Setup from the Services Menu
301
Services Setup Date and Time First Character
Changes the character between the first and second part of the dates. For
example, setting the first character to / (slash) produces the date 04/02-87.
Services Setup Date and Time Second Character
Changes the character between the second and third part of the dates. For
example, setting the second character to / (slash) produces the date 04-02/
87.
Services Setup Date and Time Clock System
Changes the clock between a 12-hour system (am/pm) and a 24-hour
system (usually used by the military; for example, 2400).
Services Setup Date and Time Time Character
Changes the character between the hour and the minute. For example, a
Time character of a period (.) produces a time like 12.30.
Changing the Printer Settings
This section describes how to change the printer settings using the Services
Setup Printer menu.
lB£I(IDW
Services Setup Printer
Whenever you use a Print command in an application, the margin and font
are set by this command.
You have two margin settings: normal and alternative. Each initializes the
printer, so you can set one file to print in normal font while the other can
print in a condensed font. See the installation program in Chapter 15.
Use the following command to choose which set of margins to use.
Services Setup Printer Use Settings
lB£I(ID(gJ
When set to NORMAL, a SideKick Plus application uses the margins set by
the Services Setup Printer Normal Settings command when it prints. When
set to ALTERNATIVE, an application uses the margins set by the Services
Setup Printer Alternative command when it prints.
Both the normal and alternative settings have the same menu entries. On
an Epson or IBM printer, the normal setting is 80 columns; the alternative
setting is 132 columns (condensed mode). Set the initialization string with
the INSTALL program.
302
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Following is a description of these settings.
[1D~1~~1
File Manager
IIkltepad
Outlook
Phonebook
TiMe Planner
Calculator
ASCII Table
Clipboard
Date and TiMe
Line Editing
Exit Conditio
Saue Setup
E191!IIB-
~
..t""~
Transfer
'W'g
Seruices: Edit Clipboard
Copy froM
Paste froM Clipboard
.is'...
MeMory Sizes;
Unload SideKick Plus;
Fi Help
F2
-fl.-Moue
F3
F4
Printer
lJs:e Settings;
NO~L
1~_Jl.-mIIII~·
Alternatiue Settings;
Graphics: r===== NorMal Settings; =
I
l:m ..... ' .... _111
I
Start Text at
Left Margin
Right Margin
End Text at
Footer Pos;i tion
Page Length
F5 ZOOM
FE, Switch
F7
F8
3
8
80
55
57
6E)
F9
FiB
Es;c-Exit
Figure 13.1: The Paper Margin Settings
Services Setup Printer Normal Settings Header Position
Services Setup Printer Alternative Settings Header Position
Sets the position of the heading from the top of the page. It must be less
than the Start position.
Services Setup Printer Normal Settings Start Text at
Services Setup Printer Alternative Settings Start Text at
Sets the number of lines from the top of the page to the start of the text or
main copy.
Services Setup Printer Normal Settings Left Margin
Services Setup Printer Alternative Settings Left Margin
Sets the position of the first character on the line.
Services Setup Printer Normal Settings Right Margin
Services Setup Printer Alternative Settings Right Margin
Sets the pOSition of the last character on the line.
Services Setup Printer Normal Settings End Text at
Services Setup Printer Alternative Settings End Text at
Sets the last line of main text measured from the top of the page.
Services Setup Printer Normal Settings Footer Position
Services Setup Printer Alternative Settings Footer Position
Sets the position of the footing from the top of the page. It must be greater
than the End position.
Services Setup Printer Normal Settings Page Length
Services Setup Printer Alternative Settings Page Length
Sets the number of lines on the page, starting from 1.
Chapter 73, Changing the Default Setup from the Services Menu
303
Services Setup Printer Graphics Support
When set to YES, all semi-graphic characters are sent to the printer. When
set to NO, SideKick Plus translates semi-graphic characters into its ASCII
character.
Exit Conditions
When you close SideKick Plus with [8ll3.!Il, SideKick Plus doesn't know
what the application underneath is. It therefore makes some assumptions
about how the underlying application will change the screen. You can
change these assumptions with the Services Setup Exit Conditions menu.
This menu varies, depending on the type of video adapter you specify
when you install SideKick Plus (see Chapter 15).
All adapters
Services Setup Exit Conditions Allow Blink Attribute
When set to NO, all background colors of the CGA are accessible when you
leave SideKick Plus. When set to YES, only eight background colors are
accessible but you can have blinking characters.
Hercules Graphics Plus
Services Setup Exit Conditions Ramfont mode
When set to OFF, the Hercules Plus card behaves like a regular Hercules
card, just as if you used the IBM and IBM-compatible adapter driver. When
set to 8K, the Hercules Plus card resets to the 8K RAMfont mode on leaving
SideKick Plus. When set to 48K, the Hercules Plus card resets to the 48K
RAMfont mode on leaving SideKick Plus.
Services Setup Exit Conditions Number of Characters
Determines the number of characters on the screen when you leave
SideKick Plus. Set this to 90 if you use a program that uses a 90-by-43
screen with the Hercules Plus card.
Genoa Super EGA
Services Setup Exit Conditions 132 columns
When set to OFF, the Genoa Super EGA works with 80 columns in text
mode. When set to 132x25, the Super EGA displays 132 columns and 25
lines when you leave SideKick Plus. When set to 132x44, the Super EGA
displays 132 columns and 44 lines when you leave SideKick Plus.
304
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Services Setup Exit Conditions Graphics
When set to STANDARD, the Super EGA behaves like a normal EGA.
When set to 640x480, the Super EGA uses its special 640 horizontal pixels
by 480 vertical pixels graphic mode when you leave SideKick Plus. When
640x528, the Super EGA uses its special 640 horizontal pixels by 528 vertical
pixels graphic mode when you leave SideKick Plus.
Everex: The Edge
Services Setup Exit Conditions Screen Mode
When set to DEFAULT, the Edge behaves like an IBM-compatible adapter.
Following are its other settings and screen display columns upon leaving
SideKick Plus:
135x25
132x28
132x44
1056x259
1024x200
132 columns by 25 lines
132 columns by 28 lines
132 columns by 44 lines
1056 horizontal pixels by 259 vertical pixels
1024 horizontal pixels by 200 vertical pixels
Changing the Line-Editor Shortcuts
Whenever you edit a file name, date, time, or form, you use line-editing
commands. You can change the shortcut keys for these commands with
Services Setup Line Editing.
To change shortcut keys, just move the cursor to the command whose
shortcut keys you want to change and press 1+-11. A window will open,
prompting you for the new keys you want to assign to that line-editing
command. Type them in. If you want the change to be permanent, save it
with Services Setup Save Setup.
Following are descriptions of each Services Setup Line Editing command
and its shortcut keys.
Go to Previous Character
Moves the cursor one character to the left within the entry.
(9illi]) or
EI
Go to Next Character
Moves the cursor one character to the right within the entry.
(9illmJ or
B
Go to Previous Word
[fr]0
Moves the cursor one word to the left within the entry. A word is anything
that begins or ends with one of the following characters: space < > , ; ( )
[ ] 1\
+ _ / $.
I
Chapter 13, Changing the Default Setup from the Services Menu
305
l£ill[l
Go to Next Word
Moves the cursor one word to the right within the entry.
Go to Start of Line
Moves the cursor to the first character within the entry.
Go to End of Line
Moves the cursor to the last character within the entry.
Delete Previous Character
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor, if one exists.
Delete Character
Deletes the character above the cursor, if one exists.
l£illf9@ or
IHomel
l£illf9(£1 or
l£illlBJ or
(EJ
IBackspacel
lfE!J@J or
m:ll
Delete Rest of Line
Deletes all text from the cursor to the end of the entry.
Delete Line
Deletes all the text in the entry.
Insert~ode
~
Changes between insert and overwrite modes when entering text. When set
to YES, new text joins existing text; however, when set to NO, new text
replaces existing text.
Services Setup Line Editing Auto Delete
When set to YES, typing a letter or number deletes the previous string.
When set to NO, no deletion occurs.
Saving and Transferring
SideKick Plus Setups
You can transfer any customized settings to a file with the Services Setup
Transfer commands. This allows you to transfer your settings from that file
to a newly loaded SideKick Plus. This is useful, for example, when you
update to a different version of SideKick Plus.
Alternatively, you can save your customized settings into the .EXE file, so
that they get saved with the Services Setup Save command.
Following are fuller descriptions of the Transfer commands.
Services Setup Save
Saves the applications and Services Setup settings to the .EXE file, thus
making them the defaults.
306
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Services Setup Transfer Save
~lIDlID
Saves the applications, menus, and Services Setup settings to a file, which
you can later load into a new SideKick Plus.
Services Setup Transfer Load
~lID(]
Prompts you for the file name of the new SideKick Plus settings. You must
use this command before you open any SideKick Plus application.
Chapter 73, Changing the Default Setup from the Services Menu
307
308
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
14
Changing the Menus, Shortcuts, and
Function Keys
You can activate any command in SideKick Plus using three methods: [§
menus, shortcuts, and function keys. This chapter tells you how to change
these menus, shortcuts, and function keys to suit your preferences.
SideKick Plus provides the Menu Control menu, through which you can
make these changes:
•
•
•
•
set up new shortcuts
assign function keys
change the menu text
move menus
• create new menus
With the cursor on a menu command, press f£E!J1 +--i I to call up the Menu
Control menu.
Chapter 74, Changing the Menus, Shortcuts, and Function Keys
309
C:\sKP
>.
C: ,SKP,NOTES. TXT - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line 1 Col 1
1
:l
ri
'd'~
~ile
I
Saue
.Control Menu
IIlFijilii~imMeiin~u
'·€tiiJlr*Dl!iftlm
Shortcut
CtrlK-ttrlA
Text
Header
I'tlue
',1'aUf'
»A-«All Saue
File
til • Insert Indent Margin £ . 5 , " ' = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ' 1
F9
Fl Help
F3
F5 ZOOM
F7
Ff, Switch
F8
F1B
F4
U-Noue
ShHt-Es;c-Exit All
Esc-Exit
No Shortcut
F2
Figure 14.1: The Menu Control Menu
The Basics of the Menu System
Before we actually explain how to use the Menu Control menu to
customize your SideKick Plus menus and keys, let's make sure you
understand the general set up. Basically, you're dealing with three ways to
implement commands: the (W menu, the shortcut keys, and the function
keys. Let's look at each of them separately to see how your changes would
affect them.
The IF10I Menus
Each SideKick Plus application has its own menu system. You press (W to
pull down the application's main menu.
These menus are local to each application, so changing one doesn't affect
any other application. If you change the File menu in the Notepad, for
example, the File menu in Outlook isn't affected.
Remember, however, that SideKick Plus gives you shortcut menus. Read
the next section to see how your changes to (W menu text may affect them.
310
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
The Shortcuts
When you press the first key of a shortcut key combination, SideKick Plus
gathers all the commands that begin with that combination. It then displays
the commands in a menu.
If you press [EI~, for example, you get a menu listing all the key
combinations you can press with [EI~ and the resulting commands.
C:\SKP
>.
CtrlQ Menu
'1'.·,'1'&
A-Search and Replace String
o-Search Options;
T-Tble Ii Date at Cursor
U-TiMe Ii Date at End of File
L-Undo Line
V-Delete Rest of Line
N--Go to Line
R-Go to Start of File
B-Go to Start of Block
E-Go to Top of Uindou
S-Go to Start of Line
C-Go to End of File
K-Go to End of Block
X-Go to BottoM of Uindou
D-Go to End of Line
P-Go to Preuious Position
l-Go to Marker 1
Z-Go to Marker Z
3-Go to Marker 3
C: ,SKP,NOTES. TXT -
IU' Insert Indent
Fl Help
F3
F4
+-+U-l1oue
FZ
F5 ZOOM
F7
F& Suitch
F8
1
-
Line 1 Col 1
F9
F1B
Esc-Exit
Figure 14.2: A Shortcut Menu
If SideKick Plus doesn't find any commands within the application, it
checks outside the application and gathers all commands that use that first
key for display in a menu. If there are no commands with that first letter
both inside and outside the application, then it gives up and doesn't do
anything.
These shortcuts are usually the same across all applications. Pressing
[EI(EJ(QJ, for example, saves the file in all relevant applications. If you use
the Menu Control menu to change this command's menu text in the
Notepad, the menu text in all other applications won't change.
This isn't a problem if you like monkeying around with your menu text to
keep life interesting, but we'd advise you not to change the shortcuts
themselves-unless you do it across all applications. If not, you may have
to remember a different set of shortcuts for each application.
The Function Keys
The function keys are similar to shortcut key combinations in that they
provide you with an easy way to implement a command. Instead of a
Chapter 74, Changing the Menus, Shortcuts, and Function Keys
311
menu, however, a function key's menu text displays on one of the bottom
two lines of the screen.
Unlike shortcuts, you can assign the same menu command to more than
one function key. The Menu Control menu prompt Assign Function Key lets
you make these assignments.
Local versus Global Keys
There are two sets of function keys and shortcuts: global and local (application-dependent). The global function keys and shortcuts are defined at
the main or Services menus, such as Zoom and tmIlE1. The local function
keys and shortcuts are defined within the application.
The one thing to remember is that local (application-dependent) keys override
global keys. Let's use a global function key to call up an application, then
overwrite it so that it opens a different application.
Press (£ill~ to activate SideKick Plus.
Press tmI to pop up the main menu if necessary.
Move the cursor to Calculator.
Press (£ill' ~ I. The Menu Control menu appears, with Assign Function
key selected.
5. Press' ~ 1 to assign a function key. A box opens, prompting you to Enter
1.
2.
3.
4.
Function Key:.
6. We want to assign
~,so
type
~
and press I~ I.
When you press ~ now, you should get the Calculator on the screen. Let's
try it from the Time Planner and then change ~ to call up the Schedule
window. (The following steps work only if you haven't previously opened
the Time Planner.)
1. Use the main menu or tmI1I1 to activate the Time Planner.
2. The ~ entry at the bottom of the screen should say Calculator.
3. Press~, just to make sure it opens the Calculator, then press lG to get
back to the Time Planner's Calendar window.
4. Now, let's redefine ~ to open the Schedule window. Pop up the Time
Planner menu with iW. The cursor should be at the top entry, Schedule.
5. Press (£ill' ~ 1 to open the Menu Control menu.
6. Press I ~ 1 to assign a function key to the Schedule window command.
7. Press ~,then I ~ I.
312
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
lUJ
should now say Schedule and not Calculator. When you press
Schedule window should appear.
lUJ,
the
Press l§ to return to the Time Planner Calendar menu. We'll delete the
assignment we just made by erasing the function-key text.
1. Pop up the Time Planner menu with~. The cursor should be at the top
2.
3.
4.
5.
entry, Schedule.
Press (£liD! ~ I.
Press ! ~ Ito assign a function key.
Press lUJ to select the function key.
Press ~ to delete all the text, and press ! ~ I.
Look at lUJ on the bottom of the screen. It's back to Calculator, the default
global function key.
Now that you've had some practice, we can move on to the specific
changes you can make with the Menu Control menu: changing the function
keys, the shortcuts, and the header and menu text in menus; moving menu
items; and creating new menu levels.
Changing the Function Keys
Before we define a function key, a note of caution: Don't redefine ~ until
you're more familiar with what you're doing. Otherwise, you could lose all
your local menus. If you do change [@J, use ~[@J to open the main menus
and change the ~ key back to its original setting.
1. Move to the command you want to assign to a function key and press
(£liD! ~ I. The Menu Control menu appears, with Assign Function Key
selected.
2. Press 0 or ! ~ Ito assign a function key
3. Press the function key to assign the command to it.
4. The menu command automatically appears as the default text. If you
want to change it, just type in what you want and press ! +-i I.
To restore the function key to its global definition, just press (£liD! ~ I, press
! ~ I, press the function key, and delete the new function-key text.
You can redefine any function key, even the Help and menu keys. To assign
the Help and menu functions to another function key, just type Help or Menu
as the function-key text.
Chapter 74, Changing the Menus, Shortcuts, and Function Keys
313
To check the function keys, look at the two lines at the bottom of your
screen.
Changing the Shortcut Keys
You can define a one- or two-key shortcut easily:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Move to the command you want to assign to a shortcut.
Press l£li!J1 ~ I. The Menu Control menu appears.
Press ([I to select Shortcut.
Type in your shortcut key(s).
Press I~ 1 to enter a one-key shortcut. If you use a two-key shortcut,
SideKick Plus automatically moves to the next Menu Control menu item
after you press the second key.
6. Press (§J to leave the Menu Control menu.
Note: You cannot use alphabetical (A to Z) or function keys as the first key
of a shortcut combination.
Press I ~ 1 on the shortcut menu entry to clear the shortcut.
Changing the Menu Headers and Text
There are two parts to a SideKick Plus menu: header and text.
A header comprises the words at the top of an (ill] menu, bracketed by the
box. SideKick Plus lets you use any word or words you prefer as the menu
title. SideKick Plus automatically creates its own headers for shortcut
menus.
Both the (ill] and shortcut menus use the same text; however, if you
surround any text with» and «, it will show up only on the shortcut menu.
You enter» with l£li!J~~) and « with l£li!J00).
Here's how to change the text in menus:
1. Move to the command whose menu text you wish to change, and press
l£li!J1 ~ I.
2. Press (] to select Text.
3. Type your preferred text and press I~ to enter it.
1
Here's how to change the headers:
314
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
1.
2.
3.
4.
Move to any command in the menu whose header you want to change.
Press !£illl +-II to open the Menu Control menu.
Press lEI to select Header
Type the text and press I +-II to finish.
Moving Menu Items
To move a menu item, with its submenus, use the Menu Control menu to
cut it from the menu and paste it at its new position. Let's cut the item out
first:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Move to the command you wish to cut.
Press !£illl +-II. The Menu Control menu appears.
Press ~ to select Move.
Press 19 to select Cut.
The Menu Control menu closes.
Now, how you paste the cut menu item depends on the setting of the Menu
Control Move Insert command. When set to BEFORE, SideKick Plus pastes
the menu item above the cursor position. When set to AFTER, SideKick
Plus pastes the menu item below the cursor position.
1. Move the cursor to where the item should go and press [Ell +-II.
2. Press ~ to select Move.
3. Press to select Paste.
rn
The menu item is now at the new location.
Creating a New Menu Level
To create a new menu level, you must cut a menu item first. SideKick Plus
then creates a new menu entry with the name you specify and places that
item at one level below the new entry.
1. Cut the menu item for the new level: Move to the menu item, press
!£illl +-II, press ~,and press (g to select Cut.
2. Move to the place in the menu you want the new level to be inserted.
3. Press (£Ell +-II.
4. Press ~ to select Move.
Chapter 74, Changing the Menus, Shortcuts, and Function Keys
315
5. Press ~ to select Make New Level.
6. Type the menu name for the new level and press I ~ I.
Saving the Menu System Permanently
The Save command on the Menu Control menu saves the changes you've
made to the menu system to the .EXE file. It doesn't save your changes to
function keys: These changes are saved when you select Options Save
Setup in the application's main menu.
You cannot select the Save command by its first letter. This was purposely
done to prevent accidental activation.
The next two chapters go into deeper levels of change-memory usage,
keyboard and screen configurations, printer settings, and customization
features.
316
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
R
E
15
Designing Your Own SideKick Plus
SideKick Plus is chameleon-like in its ability to reflect your personal
preferences and needs. When you use the INSTALL program to build the
SideKick Plus executable file the first time, it structures itself according to
default settings. If you run INSTALL again, you can customize each
application's use of memory according to your system's features.
This chapter tells you how to
•
•
•
•
•
•
design and build a personal version of SideKick Plus
change the printer settings
change the colors of the function key menu and message line
change the activation keys
find the version number of your SideKick Plus
transfer and update your version of SideKick Plus
We'll also describe the Module Manager, for those of you who choose to
use it. It allows you to add new modules into your SideKick Plus.
Using INSTALL
If you haven't loaded SideKick Plus into your system yet, insert the first
SideKick Plus distribution disk into your floppy drive and type A: I +-II.
When the A: drive prompt comes up, type INSTALL I +-II .. Follow the
prompts. (See Chapter 1 for more information on first-time installation.)
SideKick Plus now combines its library files into a single binary file,
SKMAIN.BIN, and an executable file, SKPLUS.EXE.
Chapter 15, Designing Your Own SideKick Plus
317
At this point, don't load SKPLUS, if you're installing it for the first time. If
you've already installed it, select Services Unload SideKick Plus to make
sure SideKick Plus is not in memory. Type
INSTALL I~I
The following menu appears.
r== Install
Ii Design
=
W;:IrM;_i3jli~
Transfer SKPLUS
Screen T!:jpe
Ke!:j Colors:
Printer Settings;
Actiuate Ke!:js:
F1
F2
INSTALL,
F3
FS
F7
FE,
F4
F8
SideKick Plus Install Ii Build PrograJII U-Moue
F9
F1e
Esc-Ed t Ii Saue
Figure 15.1: INSTALL's Initial Menu
Let's work through each section of customized installation one by one.
(Leave the program as it is for now.)
The Design
When you design your own SideKick Plus, you need to have the following
information:
• The amount of memory in your machine. This is usually 512 Kbytes or 640
Kbytes.
• Whether you have an EMS memory board (sometimes called expanded
memory), such as an Above Board. If you do, you need to know its size
or amount of unallocated memory (excluding any RAM disk) .
• Whether you have a RAM disk; if you do, you need to know its drive
letter (for example, D or E) and its size.
• The type of modem you have installed.
• The type of video adaptor your machine has.
Choose Design Your Own SideKick Plus. Another menu pops up, asking
whether you have any EMS (such as Above Board) memory or a RAM
318
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Disk. Move the cursor to either or both EMS and RAM disk and use 1~ I to
enter the correct values (YES or NO) for your machine.
When you've done that, move the cursor to the third item, Continue SKPLUS
Design and press 1~ I.
If you have a RAM disk, SideKick Plus asks for the drive letter. Type the
letter without a colon (:) and press 1~ I. If you type in a drive, INSTALL
checks whether the RAM disk is in the EMS board: SideKick Plus cannot
use both the EMS board and a RAM disk in the EMS board. It then asks you
to set the maximum size for both.
N ext, the program asks you for the file name of the executable SideKick
Plus file. This is what you type to load SideKick Plus; the default is
SKPLUS. Press 1~ I for the default, or enter your executable file name then
press 1~ I. If the file name you type exists, SideKick Plus asks you whether
you really want to overwrite the existing file.
The screen should now look like the following figure.
RAM Required
'i!mmmmmlm!!ml!a!!mmmml!a!!limm!liam!!I!mmm!I!!!i!mli!WWlimm!l!!l!!l!!mml:!!
Resident Size
'i:WmWli!li:Wi
Dab. Buffer
mmWmmmi
424 K
71 K
&4
K
TiMe Planner
Calculator
ASCII Table
F1
F3 MeMory size FS
F2 Build
F4 Data buffer Fa
...... -toggle selection of application
F7
Fa
....t l-+-l'bue
F9
F1B
Esc-Exit
Figure 15.2: INSTALL's Design Screen
Within INSTALL, use the following keys to move the cursor or enter
information:
• (II, (!I, [ElIPgUpl, and l£EIlpgDnl to choose applications
• B, E1, IHomel, and (GJ to choose where each application resides
.1 ~ I to place the application into your new SideKick Plus
If you load the Notepad, Outlook, or Phonebook applications, the program
will prompt you for additional information.
For the Notepad and Outlook, you need to specify the number of windows
you want the application to have. You can have a minimum of one and a
Chapter 75, Designing Your Own SideKick Plus
319
maximum of nine. (Remember that nine Notepads don't take much more
RAM memory than one does, so feel free to set the maximum.) Type the
number and press I ~ I.
For the Phonebook, you need to answer two questions. First, do you want
background communications? This has a size penalty, making your SideKick Plus bigger by about 25K. If you don't want it, answer N (for No).
It next asks you to choose a modem driver from a list. Use (!J and (lJ to
move to your modem and press I~I to select the correct one. Choose Hayes
Smartmodem if you're in doubt, since most modems are compatible with this
type of modem.
Fine Tuning Memory For Peak Performance
There are several ways to fine tune your SideKick Plus for peak performance, but there's always a tradeoff between speed and size. You have two
speed-critical functions in SideKick Plus: how quickly SideKick Plus comes
up when you press @I~ and how quickly an application works. For these
functions, the larger the allowable memory, the quicker they are. Any
difference in SideKick Plus's speed depends on the settings of the EMS
memory board, RAM disk, and hard disk toggles.
Following are some hints to speed up the response time when you press
19i1l1!fB:
• Allow SideKick Plus as much memory as it needs without having to
swap the underlying program.
• Swap the underlying application to a RAM disk or EMS board rather
than the hard disk. The first two memory-storage items process information faster.
• Place all the SideKick Plus applications on the hard disk if you have less
than 400 Kbytes free in your RAM disk or EMS board. This means that
the underlying program will swap to RAM disk or EMS board.
• Make SideKick Plus smaller by loading only the applications you need.
Simply don't select the applications you don't need in the first part of the
INSTALL program (when you're assigning to memory).
Two function keys allow you to tailor the speed and size of SideKick Plus:
lEID Memory Size
Allows you change the amount of memory taken by SideKick Plus.
After you press (f]J, the cursor moves to the Size bar. Use EI, El, IHomel, and
to move the bar and vary the amount of memory taken. Press ~ when
you finish setting the memory size.
~
320
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
IEJ Data Buffer
Changes the size of the pool of memory used for data such as an outline or
a note (only if you don't have an EMS board). When this pool becomes full,
the data swaps into the EMS board, RAM disk, or hard disk file (depending
on the configuration) with the .SWP extension.
After you press IEJ, the cursor moves to the Data bar. Use E1, 6, IHomel, and
j£3 to move the bar and vary the amount of memory taken. Think of this as
a buffer area, which you can allocate so that SideKick Plus doesn't have to
go in and out of memory.
Following are some hints to speed up each application's speed:
• Place all the applications in a RAM disk or EMS board.
• Make the Data Size as large as possible (use the IEJ key).
• Set up your most frequently used application in RAM.
We suggest that you increase the data buffer if you want to use a screen
with more than 25 lines.
Press (§J when you finish designing the RAM section.
Building Your New SideKick Plus
Press
~
when you have finished the design.
If you loaded more than one application that uses the keys [i][1 through
(by default, Notepad and Outlook do), you are asked to select which
one has priority on those keys. If you leave it at the default, the Notepad
will have priority. This means that when you press [i][I, the first Notepad
comes up, not the first outliner.
~12l
Next, a Select menu appears, where you select the type of video adapter
you have in your computer. Use the arrow keys to select one of the adapters
listed and press I+-II. If you're in doubt, select IBM-compatible adapters.
Once you've done that, INSTALL takes a couple of minutes to build a new
SideKick Plus.
Changing the Screen Type
Normally, SideKick Plus detects your system hardware and adjusts itself
accordingly. However, if you
• think SideKick Plus is not detecting the hardware correctly
Chapter 75, Designing Your Own SideKick Plus
321
• have a color/ graphics adapter that causes a snowy display
• want to override the video adapter detection scheme
• want to use SideKick Plus on a screen larger than 25 lines deep
then you should select Screen Type from the Install menu.
Since this option changes the SKPLUS.EXE file, you need to specify the
name of the file if you haven't used another part of the Install menu
previously.
Following is a description of each item on the menu.
Default
When set to ON, SideKick Plus detects the underlying mode and adjusts
accordingly.
Black and White
SideKick Plus uses black-and-white mode with 80 x 25 characters, no
matter what the underlying video mode is. Select this if your display
emulates a color display but does not show colors, such as the Compaq
Portable III.
Monochrome
SideKick Plus uses monochrome mode, no matter what the underlying
video mode is. Warning: SideKick Plus will not load if you use this mode
on a computer with a color display.
Color
SideKick Plus uses color mode with 80 x 25 characters, no matter what the
underlying video mode is.
EGA
This allows you to set 43 lines on the screen.
VGA
This allows you to set 50 lines on the screen.
When you select the first three options, the program conducts a video test
on your screen. The bottom line tells you what to do. When you press any
key, the query WAS THERE "SNOW" ON YOUR SCREEN? displays. You can choose
Yes (the screen was "snowy") or No (always turn off checking because the
screen display was fine).
On the last two items, EGA and VGA: If you use either, we recommend that
you set a large data buffer size, such as lOOK. (See page 321.)
~
322
returns you to the main menu.
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Changing the Activation Keys
SideKick Plus normally activates when you press either
You may want to change these activation keys if
12ill~
or
HHeftllRlghtitl.
• either or both of the activation keys are used by your underlying
program, for example, XTREE
• you want to use both SideKick Plus and SideKick
If so, select Activate Keys from the Install menu. This option changes the
SKPLUS.EXE file, so you need to specify the name of the file if you have
used another part of the Install menu.
The menu then allows you to change both sets of activation keys to various
combinations of [liD, litLeftl, IR,ghtitl, and (!ill. Use the cursor keys to scroll
through the menu and press I +-II to select a key. If you want to use a single
activation key, set the secondary command as .
The Transfer Menu
There's a menu in the INSTALL program that lets you save your
SKPLUS.EXE file to floppy aisk and move it into another computer. You
only need to do this if you've customized SideKick Plus heavily, prefer not
to use Services Setup Transfer, and don't want to run the INSTALL
program again.
If you only want to move your settings, do this:
1. On the original machine, select Service Setup Transfer Save from the
main SideKick Plus menu and save your settings to a file on a floppy
disk.
2. Take the floppy disk. After you INSTALL SideKick Plus onto the
destination machine, load it by entering SKPLUS.
3. Select Service Setup Transfer Load from the SideKick Plus main menu.
4. Finally, select Services Setup Save to save your customized settings and
delete the default ones.
Now, here's how to use INSTALL's Transfer menu. Be sure you have two
blank, formatted floppy disks.
First, on the computer with yOUl:' original SideKick Plus setup:
1. Type INSTALL I +-II.
2. Select Transfer SKPLUS
Chapter 75, Designing Your Own SideKick Plus
323
3. Select Move to copy SKPLUS.EXE to floppy disks.
4. When you are prompted for the name of the executable file, press I ~ 1
to enter the default (SKPLUS.EXE).
5. You are prompted for the destination disk drive. Insert a blank floppy
disk into Drive A: and type A.
6. Follow the prompts.
7. When you're done, press ffi£I to leave INSTA LL.
8. Copy INSTALL.EXE to the second blank floppy disk.
9. If you want to, copy your PHONE.FRM and any data files to the floppy
disk as well.
Now, on the destination computer:
1. Insert the floppy disk with INSTALL.EXE into Drive A: and copy
INSTALL.EXE to the hard disk.
2. Type INSTALL I ~ I.
3. Select Transfer SKPLUS from the menu.
4. At the prompt, select Restore SideKick Plus from the floppy disk(s).
5. Press ~ until you leave SKPLUS.
Version Numbers
SideKick Plus has two sets of version numbers. The first is the one
displayed when you load SideKick Plus. The second and more informative
set holds the version numbers of the modules that make up SideKick Plus.
To display these numbers, be sure you are at the DOS prompt and type
INSTALL/VER
I~I
SideKick Plus creates a list of numbers in the file SKPLUS.VER. Load it into
a Notepad if you like and examine it at your leisure.
Updating Your Customized SideKick Plus
Now that you've customized your SideKick Plus, what happens when you
get an update or new version? Don't worry, your work will not be lost.
New versions of SideKick Plus will contain a file with a unique extension.
This file will contain any new modules and an INSTALL command file for
the Module Manager. To update SideKick Plus using the command file in
VERSION.101, for example, you'd type
324
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
INSTALL VERSION.10l
Various messages informing you of its progress will display, and it will
rebuild your SideKick Plus exactly as you had customized it.
The Status Line Colors
When you select the Function Key Colors option, you can change the colors
of the last three lines of the screen. You use the usual coloring keys:
.1 PgUp! and 1PgDn! to select other areas of the same window for recoloring
• Band EI to change the background color
• (!J and (!J to change the foreground color
.1 ~! or (§ to return to the main menu
The Printer Settings Menu
The Printer Settings menu allows you to set two types of print options from
SideKick Plus and to adjust printer settings. Your printer manual should be
close at hand before you attempt this operation. Following is a description
of the menu entries.
Start of Printing
First string of characters sent to the printer.
End of Printing
Last string of characters sent to the printer. Sent
after all the text and footers.
Normal Start
String of characters sent before Normal Printing.
Alternative Start
String of characters sent before Alternative
Printing.
Attributes
Opens another menu where you change the
characters sent to the printer when you print files
containing control characters in the Notepad and
File Manager (see page 116).
The following table shows the Attributes menu entries:
Set Normal
String of characters sent after Start of Printing and
Normal Start but before any text. The characters
are sent after each odd-numbered 19i1l0.
Clear Normal
String of characters sent after the last footer but
before End of Printing. The characters are sent after
each even-numbered 19i1l0.
Chapter 75, Designing Your Own SideKick Plus
325
Set Bold
String of characters sent to switch boldface
printing on. The characters are sent after each
odd-numbered (£EImJ.
Clear Bold
String of characters sent to switch boldface
printing off. The characters are sent after each
even-numbered (£EImJ.
Set Italics
String of characters sent to switch italic printing
on. The characters are sent after each oddnumbered (£EI19.
Clear Italics
String of characters sent to switch italic printing
off. The characters are sent after each evennumbered (£EI19.
Set Underscore
String of characters sent to switch underlining on.
The characters are sent after each odd-numbered
(£EI@.
Clear Underscore
String of characters sent to switch underlining off.
The characters are sent after each even-numbered
(£EI@.
Set Frame
String of characters sent to the printer after each
odd-numbered (£EIW.
Clear Frame
String of characters sent to the printer after each
even-numbered (£EIW.
Printer Setup Strings
The following tables show the printer setup strings for Epson and IBM
printers.
II~iWii~".At.tr.ib.utl~~iiiiiiii~
M';"itG!!
•
Clear Nomal
Set Bold
Clear Bold
Set Italic
Clear Italic
Set Underscore
Clear Underscore
Set Fra/lle
Clear Fra/lle
326
ESC. G
ESC. H
ESC. E
ESC. F
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Table 15.1: Epson Printer Setup Strings
Code
Instruction
Print Mode:
~xl
~xO
(£EJ(QJ
(£EJ(ID
(£EJ~
(£EJUJ
(§jWl
~WO
~M
(§jP
(§jE
~F
~G
~H
~SO
~Sl
(§jT
~-l
~-O
(§j4
~5
(§jR
~p
(§j I
Space
I(n)
~a(n)
Select near-letter-quality mode
Select draft mode
Select compressed mode
Cancel compressed mode
Select expanded mode (one line)
Cancel expanded mode (one line)
Select expanded mode
Cancel expanded mode
Select elite pitch
Select pica pitch
Select emphasized mode
Cancel emphasized mode
Select double-strike mode
Cancel double-strike mode
Select superscript
Select subscript
Cancel superscript/ subscript
Select underlining
Cancel underlining
Select italic mode
Cancel italic mode
Select international character set
Select/ cancel proportional mode
Select character space
Near-letter-quality justification
Page Formatting:
~Q(n)
(§j I(n)
~N(n)
~O
~2
~J24
~C(n)
~CO(n)
Set right margin
Set left margin
Select skip-over perforation
Cancel skip-over perforation
Single-space text
Double-space text
Set page length in number of lines
Set page length in number of lines
Chapter 75, Designing Your Own SideKick Plus
327
Table 15.2: IBM Printer Setup Strings
Code
Instruction
Print Mode:
l£iill@J
l£iilllID
~1El
l£iillUJ
(GW1
~WO
~E
(GF
~G
(GH
~SO
(GS1
(GT
(G-1
~6
(G7
Select compressed mode
Cancel compressed mode
Select expanded mode (one line)
Cancel expanded mode (one line)
Select expanded mode
Cancel expanded mode
Select emphasized mode
Cancel emphasized mode
Select double-strike mode
Cancel double-strike mode
Select superscript
Select subscript
Cancel superscript/ subscript
Select underlining
Select international character set
Select standard character set
Page Formatting:
~ X(n+ 1)(n2)
~N(n)
(GO
~2
~A24
~C(n)
~ CO(n)
Set margins (l=left; 2=right)
Select skip-over perforation
Cancel skip-over perforation
Single-space text
Double-space text
Set page length in lines
Set page length in inches
For more detailed information about any of these printer commands, see
the owner's manual for your printer.
The Module Manager (Advanced)
The Module Manager is another handy SideKick Plus feature. It allows you
to add new applications from Borland or other manufacturers. Most
suppliers will use a command file to update your SideKick Plus. If one
328
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
doesn't provide this command batch file, however, you can use the Module
Manager's menu system instead.
To display the Module Manager menu, you start INSTALL with the /MM
switch:
INSTALL /MM
I~I
The Module Manager has the following commands:
Merge to Memory
Prompts for the file name of the module or Help file and adds it to the
library of modules. Press ~ when you've finished adding all the new
modules.
View/Delete
Shows everything in the library of modules, with their identification tags,
version numbers, and whether they are new and have Help files. Use the
cursor keys to scroll through the list.
The list consist of four type of modules: Kernel, Tasks, Services, and Kernel
Services. The Kernel (SK.BIN) is the heart of SideKick Plus. It uses
subprograms called Kernel services (KS*.BIN). Each application consists of
tasks (SK*.BIN) and shared set of subprograms called Services
(SERV*.BIN).
You can delete a module by
are used.
pressing~.
Press fEJ to check which Services
Build Library
Makes a library of modules from the current list and send it to the file name
SKMAIN.BIN. It asks whether you wish to check for consistency in the
modules, and you reply YES or NO. Reply YES if you are in doubt.
Design SKPLUS
Allows you to redesign and therefore rebuild your SideKick Plus with the
new modules.
Exit
Returns you to DOS after confirmation.
Chapter 75, Designing Your Own SideKick Plus
329
330
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
c
H
A
p
T
E
R
16
Changing SideKick Plus from DOS
This chapter explains how you can tailor SideKick Plus's use of memory,
the keyboard, and the screen to suit your requirements. It shows you
several command-line switches or parameters you can specify from the
DOS prompt or with the SKBAT program. These parameters affect how
much memory the SideKick Plus program uses, loading and unloading
SideKick Plus from the DOS prompt, silencing SideKick Plus, the scre en
mode, and the function-key display.
First, let's define some of the terms we'll be using:
Application SideKick Plus or one of its applications, such as the Notepad
or Calculator.
Disk In this context, refers to your machine's hard disk, which is a storage
device. Think of it as a floppy disk with a tremendous amount of storage,
built into the machine.
EMS Board A piece of hardware that you add to your machine to expand
its RAM; Above Board is a popular brand. Sometimes called EMS memory.
Load To type in a command that places a program into memory and
automatically carries out that program's startup instructions.
Memory In this context, refers to your machine's random-access memory
(RAM), which is where the machine stores the programs you are actively
using. Anything in RAM disappears when you turn the machine off; you
must store your files and programs to disk (floppy or hard).
Program or underlying program The program you're using SideKick Plus
on top of, for example, Borland's spreadsheet program, Quattro.
Chapter 76, Changing SideKick Plus from DOS
331
RAM disk A portion of your machine's random-access memory (RAM)
that the operating system (MS-DOS or PC-DOS) treats like an additional
disk drive.
Swapping Transferring part of a program or application to another portion
of memory or disk.
SideKick Plus, Swapping, and Memory
How much memory you give SideKick Plus depends on how much
available RAM memory you have. You want to give it as much access to
RAM memory as possible, since programs move in and out of RAM
memory very quickly.
SideKick Plus uses as much memory as you allow it, independent of its
actual size. It accomplishes this by swapping part of the underlying
program to memory-disk, an EMS Board (like an Above Board), or a RAM
disk-and using that freed memory for its own applications.
There's a small trade-off: the more you swap out, the more seconds
SideKick Plus takes to respond to the f.9.ill~ activation command. However, swapping doesn't affect speed once you're in SideKick Plus. That
speed depends on the way you configure memory when you build SideKick Plus (see Chapter 15).
Let's look at what happens when you tell SideKick Plus, whose actual size
is 275 Kbytes, to occupy only 70 Kbytes of memory.
When you load SideKick Plus by typing SKPLUS /S70, it loads 70 Kbytes of
itself into memory (RAM) and makes itself resident.
Say you're working on some figures in a Quattro file. When you press
SideKick Plus puts the Quattro program on hold and saves 205
Kbytes (275 minus 70) of the Quattro program and data to disk, extendedmemory-board, or RAM-disk memory. SideKick Plus then reads the rest of
its applications into the 205 Kbytes of memory and displays the main
menu.
l2ill~,
When you press l2ill~ again to exit, SideKick Plus puts its applications on
hold. It returns control to the underlying program (Quattro) by reading the
205 Kbytes of Quattro from the disk, EMS Board, or RAM disk to memory,
exactly as found.
332
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Checking Memory Sizes
There's a convenient way to check how much memory SideKick Plus is
occupying. If you select Services Memory Sizes from the main SideKick
Plus menu, you get this table:
Current Size
The number of bytes SideKick Plus is using in
normal memory.
Hard Disk Space Used
The number of bytes on your hard disk SideKick
Plus is using.
EMS Memory Used
The number of bytes on your EMS board
SideKick Plus is using.
RAM Disk Space Used
The number of bytes on your RAM disk SideKick
Plus is using.
Changing Memory Allocations
This section teaches you how to vary the amount of memory SideKick Plus
occupies, which you base on how much spare memory you have. You'll use
the SKBAT.COM program in tandem with SKPLUS.EXE.
When you type SKPLUS , ..... , to load SideKick Plus, this loads SideKick Plus
in its default configuration. You may have changed this default if you set
up a customized version of SideKick Plus with INSTALL (see Chapter 15).
To load SideKick Plus into a set amount of memory, type SKPLUS /S128 , ..... ,.
This loads 128K of SideKick Plus into memory, with some swapping of the
underlying program.
Similarly, you can vary the amount of memory SideKick Plus occupies with
the SKBAT.COM program. You can run this program even when SideKick
Plus is active, so you don't have to unload SideKick Plus first. (SKBAT uses
the same command-line parameters as SKPLUS.EXE but is smaller.) For
example,
SKBAT /S99 , ..... ,
forces the SideKick Plus program in memory to occupy only 99 Kbytes of
memory.
In addition, Chapter 5 explains how the Services Setup Clipboard Size
option lets you change the amount of memory allocated to the Clipboard.
Chapter 76, Changing SideKick Plus from DOS
333
Using SKBAT with Batch Files
You normally use SKBAT inside a batch file. You set SideKick Plus's default
size to be just small enough to fit behind your usual program (see Chapter
15). Now, say you want to load a particularly large program, such as
Paradox. You'd load it as part of a batch file.
To do this in SideKick Plus, append a plus (+) or minus (-) sign after the /S
switch. Use plus to make it small and minus to make it big. If you enter
SKBAT / S+ I +-' I
SideKick Plus will occupy the amount of memory you set with your last /S
command. If you enter
SKBAT / S- I +-' I
SideKick Plus will come up without swapping the application underneath
to disk or EMS memory.
For example, here's a batch file using SideKick Plus behind Borland's
database manager, Reflex. (REM stands for remark and signifies a
comment).
REM
SKBAT/S128
REM
REFLEX
REM
SKBAT/S-
Make SideKick Plus occupy 128K of memory
Load Reflex
Make SideKick Plus not swap
Note: Don't enter a I+-' I at the end of the batch file. If you do, SideKick Plus
will beep and not load SKBAT /S-.
Loading a Non-Resident Version
You can use SideKick Plus as regular application program, like Reflex or
Turbo Basic. This means that it won't be resident in memory, so you'll have
to type SKPLUS everytime you want to run SideKick Plus.
To use SideKick Plus in non-resident mode, type
SKPLUS / G I +-' I
You can't have both a resident and non-resident SideKick Plus in memory.
You cannot use SKBAT to operate this switch.
334
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Unloading SideKick Plus from DOS
There may be times you'll want to run a sequence of commands that
requires SideKick Plus to be absent from memory-perhaps you need the
memory space. If so, you can unload SideKick Plus from within a batch file.
Include the command
SKBAT
IU
or
SKPLus/u
as the last line of your batch file without pressing I +-II.
This command is the equivalent of pressing [fill f6IE, Services Unload
SideKick Plus, (], and I +-II.
Shhh! Quiet SideKick Plus Activation
When you press [fillf6IE for SideKick Plus to come up or to deactivate, you
hear some chirping noises as it swaps characters in and out of memory. You
can toggle this option with the I Q (for quiet) switch. Type
SKPLUS
IQ I +-II
You can only use this parameter when you start up SideKick Plus. You can
mix it with other command-line switches.
Loading SideKick Plus over Programs that
Grab the Keyboard
If you use the 3270 control program, SmartCom II program, or XyWrite
word processor, you won't be able to activate SideKick Plus unless you
load it with the IT command-line parameter. Type
SKPLUS IT I +-II
or
SKBAT IT I +-II
These programs don't detect [fillf6IE. So, by loading SideKick Plus with the
IT switch, you tell SideKick Plus to regularly ch eck the keyboard for
[BJ~.
Chapter 76, Changing SideKick Plus from DOS
335
You can combine the IT with any other switch, such as
SKPLUS
IT IG
I~I
Switching Off the Function-Key Display
SideKick Plus displays the function keys and commands on the bottom two
lines of the screen. You can toggle this function-key display off and on with
the IF command-line switch:
SKPLUS IF I ~ I
or
SKBAT IF
I~I
The function keys will remain available; they simply won't show up on the
bottom of your screen.
Changing the Screen Mode
You can temporarily change the screen mode with the IV command-line
switch. There are four IV switches:
IV Mono
For monochrome screens only
IVB&W
For black-and-white monitors and portables
IV Color
Forces recognition of color screens
IV Default
Makes SideKick Plus automatically detect the screen type
You can only use this parameter when you first start up SideKick Plus.
You can combine the IV switch with other command-line switches, as in
SKPLUS
Iv
B&W
IQ
I~I
If you want to change the screen mode permanently, you must use the
INSTALL program. See Chapter 15.
336
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
p
p
A
E
x
D
N
A
Conversion Tables
This appendix contains several tables listing common measurements and
formulas. The tables show
•
•
•
•
linear measures
volume measures
metric to Imperial conversions
physical constants
Linear Measures
Meter
Kilometer
Inch
Foot
Yard
Mile
1
1609.34
0.001
1.60934
39.3701
63360
3.28084
5280
1.0936111*
1760
0.00062137
1
Area
Square
Meter
Are
Hectare
Square
Square
Kilometer Yard
Acre
1
4046.87
0.01
40.4687
0.00010
0.404687
0.000001 0 1.1959853*
0.00404687 4840
0.000247105
1
Appendix A, Conversion Tables
337
Volume Measures
Cubic
Meter
Cubic
Inch
Cubic
Foot
US
Liter
Gallon
Imperial
Gallon
1
0.00379
0.00455
1000
3.78532
4.54596
61025.5
231.001
1.20095
35.3147
0.13368
277.42
264.171
1
0.16054
219.978
0.83270
1
Weight
Gram
Kilogram
Ton
Carat
Ounce
Pound
1
453.592
0.00100
0.4535924277*
0.000001
0.00045359
5.0
2267.95
0.03527
16
0.002204622341*
1
Note: * by a number indicates an exact conversion.
Other Metric to Imperial Conversions
Food
1 calorie =4.1840 Joule
Temperature
Celsius = (Farenheit - 32) * 0.5555
Kelvin = Celsius + 273
Farenheit =Celsius * 1.8 + 32
338
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Physical Constants
Speed of light in a vacuum
c
2.99793 E+8
SI Unit
m.sec-l
Permeability of a vacuum
J..lo
4 * 1t E-7
H .m-1
Permittivity of free space
Eo
8.85419 E-12
F.m-1
Elementary charge
e
1.60219 E-19
C
Electron rest mass
me
9.10956 E-31
kg
Proton rest mass
mp
1.67261 E-27
kg
Neutron rest mass
mn
1.67492 E-27
kg
Plank's constant (h/21t)
h
6.62620 E-34
J.sec
Boltzmann's Constant
k
1.38062 E-23
J.K- I
Avogadro's Constant
NA
6.02217 E+23
morl
Faraday's Constant
F
9.64867E+4
C.mol-l
Universal Gas Constant
R
8.31434
J.morl.K-1
Volume of 1 kg mole
ofunderSTP
Vm
2.24136 E-2
m 3 .mofl
Gravitational Constant
G
6.6732 E-11
Acceleration of gravity
g
9.80665
N.m2 .kg-2
m.sec-l
Speed of sound in dry air
Cs
331.45
m.sec-l
Stefan-Boltzmann's Constant
(J'
5.670 E-8
Rydberg's constant
Roo
1.097 E+7
W.m2 K-4
m-l
Description
Appendix A, Conversion Tables
Symbol
Value
339
centi
milli
micro
nano
pico
deka
hecto
kilo
mega
giga
tera
340
c
m
Jl
n
p
da
h
k
m
G
T
Not approved SI unit
Not approved SI unit
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
A
p
p
E
N
D
x
B
The Cursor-Key Diamond
If you are new to the Borland editor-which is used, for example, in
SideKick and Turbo Pascal-or to Words tar, this appendix will help you
understand the shortcuts provided for cursor movement.
As this manual has shown, you can propel the cursor with the arrow
keys--rn, (II, 6, and B. There's another set of keys that perform the same
actions: l£EJ with 0, LID, (Q], W, (]J, ([I, 0, and (g.
Figure B.l : The Cursor-Movement Keys on a Keyboard
These Control keys enable you to move the cursor without lifting your
hands from the main typing area. It is easy to rest your left little finger on
the l£EJ key, while using your middle and index fingers to touch the other
keys. Furthermore, the keys are logically arranged, if you think of the
letters as arrows pointing in the direction of movement:
Appendix 8, The Cursor-Key Diamond
341
E
S
x
0
(£illt]) moves the cursor up, [!ill(KI moves it down, [!ill(ID moves it left, and
(£ill(21 moves it right. Try them. Remember that the computer has repeating
keys, so if you hold both [!ill and the key down, the cursor will move
rapidly in the chosen direction.
Now,let's look at some extensions of these movements:
E
A
S
R
0
X
F
C
(£illiID's location next to [EDt]) suggests that [!illiID moves the cursor up; and
so it does, but by a whole window at a time. Similarly, [!ill(g moves the
cursor down one whole window. [!ill(ID moves it leftward by a word, and
(£ill[l moves it one word to the right.
The two last basic movement commands scroll the entire window upward
or downward in the file.
W
A
E
S
Z
X
o
R
F
C
(£ill~
scrolls upward, toward the beginning of the file (the lines in the
window move down). ~J] scrolls downward, toward the end of the file
(the lines in the window move up).
Once you master these commands, you will want to move the cursor
around even more rapidly. Two characters let you do this: [!ill~ (Q for
Quick) and one of the following control characters: (ID, (21, [I, (KI, lID, or (g.
These are the same keys you used before, but, when prefixed by [!ill~, they
operate over a larger range. For example, [!ill~(2I moves the cursor to the
start of the line and [!ill~(2I to the end of the line.
Happy typing!
342
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
p
A
p
E
N
D
x
c
A DOS Primer
If you are new to computers or to DOS, you may have trouble
understanding certain terms used in this manual. This appendix provides
you with a brief overview of the following DOS concepts and functions:
•
•
•
•
what DOS is and does
the proper way to load a program
directories, subdirectories, and the path command
using AUTOEXEC.BAT files
This information is by no means a complete explanation of the DOS
operating system. If you need more details, please refer to the MS-DOS or
PC-DOS user's manual that came with your computer system.
SideKick Plus runs under the MS-DOS or PC-DOS operating system,
version 2.0 or later and OS/2.
What Is DOS?
DOS is shorthand for Disk Operating System. MS-DOS is Microsoft's
version of DOS, while PC-DOS is IBM's rendition. DOS is the traffic
coordinator, manager, and operator for the transactions that occur between
the parts of the computer system and the computer system and you. DOS
operates in the background, taking care of many of the menial computer
tasks you wouldn't want to have to think about-for instance, the flow of
characters between your keyboard and the computer, between the
computer and your printer, and between your disk(s) and internal memory
(RAM).
Appendix C, A DOS Primer
343
Other transactions are ones that you initiate by entering commands on the
DOS command line; in other words, immediately after the DOS prompt.
Your DOS prompt looks like one of the following:
A>
B>
C>
The capital letter refers to the active disk drive (the one DOS and you are
using right now). For instance, if the prompt is A>, it means you are
working with the files on drive A, and that commands you give DOS will
refer to this drive. When you want to switch to another disk, making it the
active disk, all you do is type the letter of the disk, followed by a colon and
I +-II. For instance, to switch to drive B, just type B: I +-II.
You can customize this prompt, and we explain how on page 346.
There are a few commands that you often use with DOS, such as
DEL or ERASE
To erase a file
DIR
To see a list of files on the logged disk
COpy
To copy files from one disk to another
SKPLUS
To load SideKick Plus
DOS doesn't care whether you type in uppercase or lowercase letters, or a
combination of both, so you can enter your commands however you like.
We'll assume you know how to use the first three commands listed; if you
don't, refer to your DOS manual. Next, we will explain the proper way to
load a program like SideKick Plus, and that involves the last command-SKPLUS.
How to Load a Program
When you install SideKick Plus, the program combines several files into
one executable file, called SKPLUS.EXE. This program file is necessary for
all functions, so you always need it when you first start the program. A file
name with the "last name" or extension .COM or .EXE means a program
file that you can load and run (use) by typing only its "first name" on the
DOS command line. So, to invoke SideKick Plus, you simply type SKPLUS
and press IReturnl, and SideKick Plus will be loaded into your computer's
memory.
There's one thing you need to remember about loading SideKick Plus and
other similar programs, if you're using DOS version 2.1 or earlier: You must
344
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
be logged onto the disk and directory where the program is located in order to load
it; otherwise, unless you have set up a DOS path (described shortly), DOS
won't know where to find the program.
For instance, if your distribution disk with the SKPLUS.EXE program is in
Drive C but the prompt you see on your screen is B>, DOS won't know
what you're talking about if you type SKPLUS and press IReturnl. It will give
you the message BAD COMMAND OR FILE NAME.
It's as if you were shuffling through the "School Records" file in your file
cabinet looking for information about your home finances. You're in the
wrong place. So if you happen to get that DOS message, simply switch to
Drive C by typing c: and then press IReturnl. Then type SKPLUS and press
IReturnl to load SideKick Plus.
You can set up a "path" to the SideKick Plus files so that DOS can find
them, using the DOS path command. See the section on the AUTOEXEC.BAT file for more information.
Directories
A directory is a convenient way to organize your floppy or hard disk files.
Directories allow you to subdivide your disk into sections, much the way
you might put groups of manila file folders into separate file boxes. For
instance, you might want to put all your file folders having to do with
finance-for instance, a bank statement file, an income tax file, or the
like-into a box labeled "Finances."
On your computer, it would be convenient to make a directory to hold all
your SideKick Plus files, another for your SideKick files, another for your
Quattro figures, and so on. That way, when you type DIR on the DOS
command line, you won't have to wade through hundreds of file names
looking for the file you want. You'll get a listing of only the files on the
directory you're currently logged onto.
Although you can make directories on either floppy or hard disks,
directories are used most often on hard disks. This is because they can hold
a greater volume of data, so there is a greater need for organization and
compartmentalization.
When you're at the DOS level, you can tell DOS to create directories, move
files around between directories, and display which files are in a particular
directory. You can also use the File Manager in SideKick Plus to perform
these tasks-without having to leave the underlying program.
Appendix C, A DOS Primer
345
In the examples that follow, we assume you are using a hard disk system,
and that you are logged on to the hard disk so that the prompt you see on
your screen is C>. If you want to create directories on your floppy disks,
just substitute A or B for C in the example.
To make a directory for your SideKick Plus files, do the following:
1. At the C> prompt, type MKDIR SKPLUS l+-ll. The MKDIR command tells
DOS to make a directory called SKPLUS.
2. Type CHDIR SKPLUS I +-ll. The CHDIR command tells DOS to move you
into the SKPLUS directory.
3. Now, put the SideKick Plus disk you want to copy from into one of your
floppy drives-let's say A for this example-and type COpy A: *. * I +-ll.
(The asterisks are wildcards that stand for "all files.") The COPY
command tells DOS to copy all files on the A drive to the SKPLUS
directory on the C drive. As each file on the disk is copied, you will see
it listed on the screen.
That's all there is to it. Treat a directory the same way you would a disk
drive: To load SideKick Plus under DOS version 2.1 or earlier, you must be
in the SKPLUS directory before typing SKPLUS I +-ll, or DOS won't be able to
find the program.
Subdirectories
If you are someone who really likes organization, you can further
subdivide your directories into subdirectories. You can create as many
directories and subdirectories as you like-just don't forget where you put
your files.
A subdirectory is created the same way as a directory. To create a
subdirectory from the SKPLUS directory (for instance, for storing your
Outlook chart files), you can use the File Manager or do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Be sure you are in the SKPLUS directory.
Type MKDIR CHARTS I +-ll.
Type CHDIR CHARTS I +-ll. You are now in the CHARTS subdirectory.
Copy your Outlook files to the new subdirectory.
346
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Where Am I? The $P $G Prompt
You've probably noticed that even when you change directories, you see
only the C> prompt; there is no evidence of what directory or subdirectory
you are in. This can be confusing, especially if you leave your computer for
a while. It's easy to forget where you were when you left.
DOS gives you an easy way to find out: the prompt command. Just type
PROMPT=$P $G
and from now on (until you turn your computer off or reboot), the prompt
will show you exactly where you are. Try it. If you are still in the CHARTS
subdirectory, your DOS prompt should look like
C:\SKPLUS\CHARTS >
The AUTOEXEC.BAT File
To avoid typing the prompt command every time you turn on your
computer, you can set up an AUTOEXEC.BAT file to do it for you.
The AUTOEXEC.BAT file is a useful tool for instructing your computer to
do things automatically. It automatically executes (sets into motion) a batch
file to carry out a set of instructions-just as if you had typed them in one
by one. There are many more things it can do, but rather than go into great
detail here, refer to your DOS manual for more information.
We show you how to create an AUTOEXEC.BAT file that automatically
changes your prompt so you know where you are in your directory
structure, sets a path to the SideKick Plus directory, and then loads SideKick
Plus.
The DOS path command tells your computer where to look for commands it
doesn't recognize. DOS only recognizes programs in the current (logged)
directory, unless there is a path to the directory containing pertinent
programs or files. Let's set a path to the SKPLUS directory.
If you have an AUTOEXEC.BAT file in your root directory, your computer
will do everything in that file when you first turn your computer on. (The
root directory is where you see the C: \ > prompt, with no directory names
following it.)
Here's how to create an AUTOEXEC.BAT file. First, check whether you
have an existing one:
Appendix C, A DOS Primer
347
1. Type CHDIR\ to move to the root directory.
2. Type DIR RET AUTOEXEC RET
If you get the message NO FILES FOUND, you don't have an
AUTOEXEC.BAT file yet. (If one exists, you can use the Notepad to edit it.)
If you don't have one already, you can create one in the Notepad or use this
DOS set of commands:
1. Type CHDIR \ to get to the root directory.
2. Type COpy CON AUTOEXEC. BAT 1+-1/. This tells DOS to copy whatever you
type next into a file called AUTOEXEC.BAT.
3. Type
PROMPT=$P $G 1+-1/
PATH=C:\SKPLUS
CHDIR SKPLUS
SKPLUS 1+-1/
1m
Pressing
1m saves your commands in the AUTOEXEC.BAr
file.
To test your new AUTOEXEC.BAT file, reboot your computer by holding
down ~ and ~ and then pressing (23. When your computer has finished
rebooting, you should see C: \SKPLUS>.
If you have an AUTOEXEC.BAT file, here's how to manually add SideKick
Plus to its instructions (you can have the Install program do this automatically):
1. Press [ED~ to activate SideKick Plus, and select the Notepad application.
2. Press ~ to open a Notepad file and enter the drive, directory, and
AUTOEXEC.BAT.
3. Use the [[l to move the cursor past any RAM-resident programs you
ha ve loaded and insert these lines:
CHDIR SKPLUS
SKPLUS
CHDIR \ 1+-1/
4. Press
5. Press
348
~
to save these changes to the file.
~ to exit.
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Changing Directories
How do you get from one directory to another? It depends on where you
want to go. Use CHDIR like this:
To move from one directory to another:
For example, to change from the SKPLUS directory to one called
SUPERKEY, type the following from the SKPLUS directory:
C:\SKPLUS> CHDIR \SUPERKEY
I~I
Notice the backslash (\) before the directory name. Whenever you are
moving from one directory to an unrelated directory, type a backslash
before the name of the directory.
To move from a directory to its subdirectory:
For example, to move from the SKPLUS directory to the CHARTS
subdirectory, type the following from the SKPLUS directory:
C:\SKPLUS> CHDIR CHARTS
I~I
In this case, you don't need the backslash, because the CHARTS directory is
a direct offshoot of the SKPLUS directory. In fact, DOS would have
misunderstood what you meant if you had used the backslash-it would
have acted as though CHARTS was a directory off the main (root)
directory.
To move from a subdirectory to its parent directory:
For example, to move from the CHARTS subdirectory to the SKPLUS
directory, type the following from the CHARTS subdirectory:
C:\SKPLUS\CHARTS> CHDIR ..
1~1
DOS will move you back to the SKPLUS directory. Any time you want to
move back to the parent directory, use a space followed by two periods
after the CHDIR command.
To move to the root directory:
The root directory is the original directory. It is the parent (or grandparent)
of all directories (and subdirectories). When you are in the root directory,
you see this prompt: C: \ >.
To move to the root directory from any other directory, simply type
CHDIR \ 1~1
The backslash without a directory name tells DOS that you want to return
to the root directory.
This appendix has presented only a quick look at DOS and some of its
functions. Once you're familiar with the information given here, you may
Appendix C, A DOS Primer
349
want to look into the File Manager application and your DOS manual to
discover the many things you can do with your computer's operating
system.
350
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
A
p
p
E
N
D
x
D
Using SideKick Plus on Networks
If you want to use SideKick Plus on a network, then this appendix is for
you. It explains how to use the SideKick Plus File Manager, Notepad,
Outlook, Phonebook, and Time Planner on a network.
Some Basic Considerations
To use SideKick Plus on a network, each workstation must have an original
version of the program on its hard disk. Putting one copy of SideKick Plus
on a network server and allowing everybody to execute it at once won't
work. (It's also a breach of the license agreement.)
You must also remember to load the network software before you load
SideKick Plus. Otherwise, unpredictable results can occur.
Once you have SideKick Plus on each computer, you can use the server for
shared information, such as internal phone directories, a Common
Appointment Book, and company regulations. You can instruct DOS to let
everybody read these files but allow no one to change them. DOS calls this
a read-only file. Later in this appendix, we show you how to make a file
read-only.
People also use networks for printing. A fast, expensive printer that
everybody uses is often attached to the workstation's server. It holds each
person's printout and puts it into a queue, so that the server does not have
to wait for the printer to accept more information.
As a resident program, however, SideKick Plus cannot tell the server that it
has finished printing because the underlying program might be printing as
well. That is, SideKick Plus can't close the spool queue itself. If the program
Appendix D, Using SideKick Plus on Networks
351
underneath is also spooling, SideKick Plus can't know that. Therefore, you
must tell the server manually that you have finished printing. On a Novell
network, for example, you type
SPOOL I~I
to tell the server to start printing. This depends on your specific network, so
check your network manual.
The File Manager
The File Manager is a boon on networks since it can designate a file as
read-only (users can't write to it), among other useful operations. Let's
make some marked files read-only:
1. Check your network manual to see how to be sure no one has opened
the files you want to designate as read-only.
2. Activate the File Manager from the main menu or with ~ill.
3. Mark the files you want to designate as read-only.
4. Use the File Attributes Set Read Only command.
Everyone on the network can now read the marked files, but no one can
write to them. To write to the file, you must clear the read-only flag with
the File Attributes Clear Read Only command-just as you did to set the
flag. Be careful: Once you set this flag, nobody else on the network can read
the file while you have it open.
SideKick Plus doesn't override existing supervisory designations or
capabilities on a network.
Sharing Notepad and Outlook Files
You can easily share Notepad and Outlook files over a network by setting
the read-only flag on the file. Say you want to receive comments on a report
on coffee production in Brazil:
1. Copy the Notepad file from your computer into a directory in the
network server that everyone can access.
2. Make the file read-only as described earlier.
3. Inform the other people on the network of the file and invite comments.
352
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
The Phonebook
To use Phonebook communications with a network, you must deal with
two issues: competition for the interrupt switch and modems.
Most network interface cards are distributed with the interrupt switch (a
tiny jumper box or connector) set to IRQ2. Now, SideKick Plus uses this
same IRQ switch to connect the modem to the communications port.
SideKick Plus won't be able to dial the Phonebook number unless you
install the network card to use IRQ5. This jumper on the board must be
manually moved.
Secondly, the Phonebook must use a modem on your computer. It cannot
work with a pool of modems off the server.
Once you have accounted for these issues, you can have Phonebooks on the
server containing internal extensions, business contacts, and electronic mail
connections.
SideKick Plus allows everyone to look at the same Phonebook if you make
the Phonebook read-only. If you don't set the Phonebook as read-only, then
only one person can have the Phonebook on-screen at anyone time. That is, no
matter how many people are on a network, only the one who first activated
SideKick Plus and opened the Phonebook can view it.
The Time Planner
The SideKick Plus Time Planner works wonderfully over a network. It uses
two Appointment Books: a Personal and a Common Book. You should keep
the Personal Book on your computer and place the Common Book on the
server. You can copy your Personal Book into a Common file with the New
Book command. This new Common Book takes the name defined in
Options File Name Common, and the Time Planner reloads Common Book
again.
Use the New Book command to open another Common Appointment Book
at any time. Nobody can start SideKick Plus or load a new book, however,
while you are changing the Common Book. You may want to make any
schedule changes on your personal computer and copy it to the network
server. Network users won't see the changes in the Common Book until
they load a new Personal Book or reload SideKick Plus.
For further information, see Chapter 10.
Appendix D, Using SideKick Plus on Networks
353
354
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
A
p
p
E
N
D
x
E
A Communications Primer
If you are new to computer communications, you may want to read this
appendix before working with the Phonebook application. It briefly
introduces the following communications concepts and functions:
•
•
•
•
uses for computer communications
modems
the PC serial, RS232C, or communications port
sending and receiving files by modem
There are a number of good books on computer communications, if you'd
like more information. Two good ones to start with are Mastering Serial
Communications, by Peter W. Gofton (Berkeley, Calif.: Sybex) and RS232
Made Easy: Connecting Computers, Printers, Terminals, and Modems, by Martin
D. Seyer (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1984).
Uses for Computer Communications
Telecommunications is now widely used by a broad spectrum of people:
• A travel agent needs to book the cheapest and quickest flight to Minnesota. He dials the Official Airline Guide computer, which automatically
finds the flight and books it instantly.
• A doctor logs into a medical database in London, England, to read the
latest on Programmer's Elbow.
• A busy executive in New York suddenly remembers an urgent message
she needs to pass on to her colleague in California, where it is only 6 am.
Appendix E, A Communications Primer
355
She puts it in electronic mail; the message arrives instantly, ready to be
read the minute her colleague arrives at the office.
In every case, the computer of origin (the terminal) is a device through
which the user reaches another computer (the host).
Modems
Your computer can be connected to the host computer by a cable (a direct
connection) or by a modem. A modem is a device that translates digital
signals from your computer into sounds that can be sent through a
telephone wire.
There are three kinds of modems:
• Acoustic couplers connect directly to the telephone receiver and live
outside the computer. They look like the reverse of a telephone handset: a
block with two concave rubber cups to hold the handset. This type of
modem is prone to interference, which handicaps automatic dialing, and
is becoming obsolete.
• External or standalone modems are separate boxes that you connect
directly to your computer and plug into the telephone jack. They are
more intelligent than the acoustic coupler and can automatically dial
numbers.
• Internal modems are usually boards that slide into your computer and
plug directly into the telephone jack-that is, an external modem without
the case.
The Port
Except for the internal modem, all other modems (and some host
computers) connect via a cable to your computer. This cable connects to a
D-shaped socket called the serial, RS232C, or communications port.
356
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Figure E.l : Serial and Parallel Ports
Like all other computer connections, you must use the correct cable
between the modem and your computer. However, the serial port can use
several different cables depending on the application. It's advisable,
therefore, to buy the cable with the modem or ask a reputable dealer to
make one for you. To help you, SideKick Plus comes with a toggle called
Carrier Control that allows the simplest of cables to work. When using this,
you must disconnect the phone call yourself-SideKick Plus won't do it
automatically.
It's advisable to explicitly disconnect your communications connection, in
any case. Normally, you need to tell the host computer or service (say,
CompuServe or MCI) to disconnect you; then you tell SideKick Plus to
hang up by pressing [ID.
Bits and Baud
The computer processes bits that flow along parallel wires, usually in rows
of 8, 16, or 32. (A bit is a binary digit, which is either 0 or 1, the same as ON
or OFF.) The modem, however, sends these bits along a serial (single) wire,
so the bits need to be rearranged. Persuading the bits to line up along one
wire requires some manipulation.
Imagine a great mass of people surging around the entrance to a coliseum,
where a rock group will perform. Two ticket takers, one at the entrance and
the other at the inner doors, marshal the crowd into single lines and let
them enter in groups of ten. In a computer, the ticket takers are the silicon
chips (known as UARTs) in the sending and receiving serial ports; the
people are bits; and the groups of ten each are packets. (Actually, packets
can contain seven to eleven bits.)
Appendix E, A Communications Primer
357
A computer isn't as clever as a human being, so it needs further help in
marshaling this crowd of bits. This means adding extra information to the
data-adding a guide or usher to help the group to get to the right seats.
However, the computer minimizes this by using bits, which are the smallest
units it can utilize. The bits are grouped into packets, and each packet
contains these ticket-taker bits:
Start bit. This wakes up the serial port to tell it that bits are on the way. The
name originates from the days when computers filled a room, and this bit
actually started a motor that ran a mechanical decoding mechanism.
Data bit. Before the information gets transmitted, both serial ports must
know how many bits are actual data: 7 or 8, generally. The number depends
on the requirements of the host computer.
Parity bit. This checks the accuracy of the data. It is simply an extra bit,
transmitted after each packet, that always makes the total number of bits
that are ON either even or odd. This method of detection is rather poor, so it
isn't often used.
Stop bit. This tells the serial port that transmission of the packet is finished.
On some systems, you need to provide two stop bits just in case the
computer misses the first one.
Both serial ports also need to know the speed of transmission. We measure
this in bits per second (bps), which is popularly and mistakenly termed baud.
There are several popular speeds, such as 300, 1200, and 2400; the higher
the number, the faster the speed.
Some Communications Conventions
So, for successful communications, both computers need to have
compatible modems, parity and data bits, and transmission speeds. With so
many variables, it comes as a relief to find that most systems use the
following subset of variables:
Table E.l: Typical Communication Variables
358
Speed
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity
300
300
1200
1200
2400
8
7
8
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
None
Even
None
Even
None
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Sending Files via Your Modem
The Phonebook lets you send to or receive a file from a host computer, such
as the updated price list from your main office in Boise. You need only
make certain the host computer uses the same protocol as you do. A
communications protocol is simply a set of rules-an etiquette-that
specifies how information should be exchanged.
The Phonebook comes with the most universal microcomputer protocol,
XMODEM. It contains mechanisms that check for errors caused by, for
instance, static on a phone line. It is therefore much more accurate than if
the file were simply transmitted as plain text.
Although many descendants have come from the original protocol,
invented by Ward Christensen in 1977, only a few have found widespread
favor. One, known as XMODEM CRC (or CRC), provides improved error
checking at the expense of some speed. The Phonebook also provides both
protocols. It calls the original XMODEM Sum (or Sum). You can choose
between either but, if you are in doubt, keep to the original (SUM).
You're now equipped to investigate how the Phonebook can help you
communicate with ease and speed. Refer to Chapter 9 for more information.
Appendix E, A Communications Primer
359
360
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
A
p
p
E
N
D
x
F
The Script Language Commands
This section contains a summary of the Script language commands. First,
let's review some basics about scripts.
.
A Script consists of statements and comments. Statements are the
indivisible building blocks that make up Scripts. They are not case sensitive
and are separated by a space or a new line. For example,
PRINT "This is an example" PRINT "Another Statement."
Print "Can be any case."
Comments are sequences of characters that the Script interpreter ignores.
They start with a semicolon and finish at the end of the line. For example,
iPut your sentence here!
The Format
Each entry contains a description of the command, its syntax, general
remarks, and some examples of its use. Where appropriate, related entries
are cross-referenced, any LOG file entry summarized, and any alteration to
the OK flag noted.
Following are the syntax/ description conventions used in the reference:
Integers
An integer is a positive number less than 32768.
Expression
An expression consists of either a string or numeric constant.
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
361
Either quotes (" ") or apostrophes (' ') must surround string constants. To
produce a quote (") within the string, you must type in two quotes (""). For
example, "This will print the 'III symbol."
A numeric constant consists of a byte, a two-digit hex number, a control
character, or a predefined constant. Some examples include
52
&H34
$34
AK
CR
"test"
; Byte
; Hex number
Hex number
Control character
Predefined constant
String
Expression list
An expression list consists of expressions separated by commas, for
example,
34
"Toyota",CR, $34, AK, "Help"
; The simplest expression list
; A complex expression
Variable List
A variable is a symbol (defined in the Glossary) expanded into an
expression list. When used in a Script, precede the variable with an @, for
example,
@bixname
Variables also can be combined with expression lists to give a variable list,
for example,
@Compname,CRLF
@name,CRLF,@password,CRLF,"Mail"
; A simple variable list
; A complex one
Filespec
A string constant surrounded by quotes or apostrophes that describes an
MS-DOS file name, including a drive and/ or path specification. A DOS file
name consists of up to eight characters, a period, and an optional threecharacter extension; case is insignificant. When you omit the extension, the
Options File names menu adds the default extension to the file name. For
example,
"C:\FIRST\BIX.TXT"
, c: \JEFF . INC'
362
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Typography
UPPERCASE
Uppercase text denotes part of a command that must be entered exactly as
shown. Note that the Script language itself is not case sensitive. For
example,
DELAY
[]
Brackets mean that the enclosed information is optional. For example,
P[ROTOCOL]
means that you can use the whole word or just the initial letter, so both of
the following examples are legal:
P
PROTOCOL
{}
Braces indicate a choice between options that are kept separate by vertical
bars( I), from which you only choose one. For example,
SCREEN {OFFION}
means that either SCREEN OFF or SCREEN ON is correct, but SCREEN by
itself is not.
Italics
We use italics when referring to a part of a statement in the text that can be
changed. For example, for the command
CAPTURE filespec
we use italics whenever we mention filespec in the text.
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
363
ALARM
Function
Makes a window that pops up and beeps.
Syntax
ALARM expression[,time]
Remarks
When executed, ALARM brings up SideKick Plus and
opens a window with the expression inside. This is ideal
for background communications, to remind you to pick
up your electronic mail.
The alarm rings for time minutes before SideKick Plus
clears it, otherwise you can press t§ to close the
window.
The Script only permits a string expression.
See also
BEEP
Example
ALARM "This message will pop up and stay for 2 minutes", 2
ASSIGNMENT (:=)
Function
Sets OK to either TRUE or FALSE.
Syntax
OK := {FalseITrue}
OK := NOT OK
Remarks
Sets OK to change the flow of the Script.
See also
OK Boolean
IF
REPEAT
SELECT
Example
OK := False
364
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
BEEP
Function
Produces an audio tone.
Syntax
BEEP (Startfreq, Endfreq,Duration, NurnTirnes)
Remarks
Sounds a tone starting at frequency Startfreq (Hz),
ending at frequency EndFreq (Hz), for Duration milliseconds, and repeated NumTimes number of times. The
duration must be greater than 49 milliseconds. If no
parameters, then SideKick Plus sounds the standard
error beep.
Example
BEEP(lOO,lOOO,2000,5)
iStar Trek
CASE
See the SELECT statement.
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
365
CAPTURE
Function
Records the input and output in a file.
Syntax
C filespec, {O[verwrite] IA[ppend] IU[nique]}
CAP filespec, {O[verwrite] IA[ppend] IU[nique]}
CAPTURE filespec, {O[verwrite] IA[ppend] IU[nique]}
Remarks
The Script tries to open a file with the name filespec. If it
finds an existing file with that name, then one of three
actions occurs:
Overwrite deletes the existing file and replaces it with the
new one of the same name.
Append opens the existing file and adds the new received
information to the end of it.
Unique uses the filespec but renames it with a unique
numeric extension. For example, if the Phonebook finds
FRED.TXT, it creates FRED.OOO, unless that also exists,
when it creates FRED.OOL
The file receives the incoming and outgoing characters,
except the ones exchanged by the TRANSMIT and
RECEIVE statements. Use an END CAPTURE statement
to stop recording the characters.
You can capture only one file at a time. It toggles on the
Record indicator, which is valid only outside a Script, in
the Communications window when the Script has
finished.
LOG file
Capturing to filespec
See also
END CAPTURE
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT
Examples
CAPTURE "FRED.TXT",OVERWRITE
C "MCI",U
CAP "JEFF.TXT",APPEND
366
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
DELAY
Function
Pauses for a given length of time.
Syntax
D [(timeout factor)]
DELAY [(timeout factor)]
Remarks
Stops Script execution for (timeout factor * timeout unit)
seconds. If you omit the timeout factor, the Phonebook
uses the default (10 seconds) set by TIMEOUTFACTOR.
See also
MATCH
TIMEOUTFACTOR
TIMEOUTUNIT
WAIT
Example
DELAY (23)
D (2)
DISCONNECT
Function
Ends the Script and hangs up the phone.
Syntax
DISCONNECT
Remarks
Toggles on the Disconnect indicator in the border of the
Communications window.
LOG File
Script aborted: Hangup
See also
RESTART
Example
DISCONNECT
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
367
END CAPTURE
Function
Closes the capture file.
Syntax
ENDCAP
END CAP
ENDCAPTURE
END CAPTURE
Remarks
Closes the file opened by the CAPTURE command, if
any. You don't need an END CAPTURE after a
CAPTURE statement because the RESTART statement,
DISCONNECT statement, or Script termination closes
the file. Neverthless, it is good practice to use an END
CAPTURE statement after every CAPTURE.
Toggles off the Record indicator, which is valid only
outside a Script, in the border of the Communications
window when the Script has finished.
LOG file
Capture file closed
See also
CAPTURE
DISCONNECT
Example
END CAPTURE
ENDCAP
368
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
IF
Function
Tests OK and alters the flow of the Script.
Syntax
IF {OKINOT OK} [THEN] statements
[ELSE statements]
END[] IF
Remarks
If the test on OK is TRUE, the statements following the
THEN execute; otherwise, the statements following the
optional ELSE execute. If there is no ELSE clause and the
test on OK fails, then execution continues with the line
after the END IF.
See also
SELECT
Example
TRANSMIT "JEFF.TXT"
IF OK THEN DISCONNECT
ELSE
BEEP
PRINT "Unlucky-maybe next time!"
END IF
LOG
Function
Writes text to the LOG file.
Syntax
LOG expression
Remarks
Use LOG for debugging scripts, particularly when in
background.
Example
LOG "This is now in the LOG file"
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
369
MATCH
Function
Searches the serial port input.
Syntax
M {expressionIALL} [,timeout factor]
MATCH {expressionIALL} [,timeout factor]
Remarks
MATCH expression waits until the expression matches
the input or until the time (timeout factor * timeout unit) in
seconds expires.
MATCH ALL waits until it received an input character.
Omission of the timeout factor uses the default (10
seconds) set by TIMEOUTFACTOR.
Only one MATCH statement can be pending at anyone
time.
MATCH is not case sensitive.
OK
TRUE on finding an expression or character.
See also
TIMEOUTFACTOR
TIMEOUTUNIT
SELECT
Examples
MATCH IPassword",23
MALL
OK Boolean
Function
A status value set by a statement.
Remarks
MATCH, TRANSMIT, and RECEIVE statements automatically set OK. The ASSIGNMENT (:=) statement
manually changes OK.
OK only has the value TRUE or FALSE.
See also
370
ASSIGNMENT (:=)
MATCH
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Predefined Constants
Following are the predefined constants:
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
S1
ASCII 0
ASCII 1
ASCII 2
ASCII 3
ASCII 4
ASCII 5
ASCII 6
ASCII 7
ASCII 8
ASCII 9
ASCII 10
ASCII 11
ASCII 12
ASCII 13
ASCII 14
ASCII 15
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
CRLF
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
ASCII 16
ASCII 17
ASCII 18
ASCII 19
ASCII 20
ASCII 21
ASCII 22
ASCII 23
ASCII 24
ASCII 25
ASCII 26
ASCII 27
ASCII 28
ASCII 29
ASCII 30
ASCII 31
ASCII 13 and 10
371
PRINT
Function
Displays a message in the Communications window.
Syntax
{PRINTI?} expression list
Remarks
The expression list shown in the Communications
window is independent of the SCREEN command.
See also
SCREEN
Examples
PRINT "MCr SCRIPT FINISHED"
? HT, "TEST OF TAB CHARACTER"
PROTOCOL
Function
Changes the file transfer type.
Syntax
P {XMSumIXMCRCICRLFINone}
PROTOCOL {XMSumIXMCRCICRLFINone}
Remarks
Sets the protocol type used by the TRANSMIT and
RECEIVE commands. XMSum is an XMODEM protocol
that uses sum checking, while XMCRC uses CRC
checking. CRLF sends a CR character at the end of the
line and waits for an LF character before sending more
data. None means that the XON /XOFF menu entry
decides when to stop or start sending the file. Both None
and CRLF use the Communications Parameters Options
Delays menu settings.
See also
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
Examples
PROTOCOL XMSum
P CRLF
372
; Protocol XMSum
Protocol now CRLF
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
RECEIVE
Function
Gets an XMODEM file from the host computer.
Syntax
R filespec, {O[verwrite] IA[ppend] IU[nique]}
REC filespec, {O[verwrite] IA[ppend] IU[nique]}
RECEIVE filespec, {O[verwrite] IA[ppend] IU[nique]}
Remarks
The Script tries to open a file with the name filespec. If it
finds an existing file with the same name, then one of
three actions occurs:
Overwrite deletes the existing file and replaces it with the
new one of the same name.
Append opens the existing file and adds the received new
file to the end of it.
Unique uses the filespec but with a unique numeric
extension. For example, if the Phonebook finds
FRED.TXT, it creates FRED.OOO, unless that also exists,
when it creates FRED.OOL
The PROTOCOL statement decides how it will receive
the file, though only Xmodem.Sum or Xmodem.CRC are
valid.
OK
TRUE for successful reception of the file.
LOG file
Receiving filespec
[Successfully received] or [Error upon receiving filespec]
See also
PROTOCOL
TRANSMIT
Examples
RECEIVE "FRED.TXT",OVERWRITE
R "C:\SKPLUS\FRED.TXT",U
REC "JEFF.TXT",APPEND
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
373
REPEAT
Function
Executes statements until a stop expression.
Syntax
REPEAT
statements
{integer TIMES I
UNTIL {OKINOT OK}I
integer TIMES OR UNTIL {OKINOT OK}}
Remark
The statements execute for an integer number of times,
until OK is TRUE or FALSE, or a combination of the
two.
See also
IF
Examples
REPEAT
MATCH "bix"
WRITE "bix"
3 TIMES
Simple REPEAT
; Tries to transmit 3 times before giving up
REPEAT
TRANSMIT "MAIL.ATT"
3 TIMES OR UNTIL OK
RESTART
Function
Disconnects and executes the Script again. It is typically
used to recover from an unsuccessful login sequence.
Syntax
RESTART
Remarks
After disconnecting the call, the Script redials the number and reexecutes the Script. The Communications
Script Restart options menu controls the maximum
number of executions and the delay between retries.
RESTART functions as SUSPEND in background mode.
See also
DISCONNECT
374
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
SCREEN
Function
Controls output to the Communications window.
Syntax
SCR {ONIOFF}
SCREEN {ONIOFF}
Remarks
OFF stops displaying the input and output in the
Communications window.
ON resumes the display.
The CAPTURE file, PRINT statement, and the Edit
session are not affected by this statement.
See also
PRINT
Examples
SCREEN OFF
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
375
SELECT
Function
A general-purpose testing statement.
Syntax
SELECT[(timeout factor)]
SELECTMATCH[(timeout factor)]
[CASE expression statements]
ENDSEL
END SEL
ENDSELECT
END SELECT
Remarks
Performs a MATCH statement and then compares it to
the expression after the CASE clause. If expression
matches then the execution of the statements follow;
otherwise, (timeout factor * timeout unit) seconds elapse
before execution continues after the END SELECT.
If you omit the timeout factor, the Phonebook uses the
default (10 seconds) set by TIMEOUTFACTOR.
SELECT is not case sensitive.
OK
Not changed by the SELECT statement although
statements change it.
See also
IF
Example
SELECT
CASE "No messages"
DISCONNECT
CASE "1 messages"
CAPTURE "TEST.IN", 0
WRITE "READ INBOX"
END CAPTURE
CASE "2 messages"
CAPTURE "TEST.IN", 0
WRITE "PRINT INBOX"
END CAPTURE
END SELECT
376
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
SUSPEND
Function
Stops the Script so you can enter a password.
Syntax
SUSPEND
Remarks
Most useful in background communications, where it
stops the Script and, if you are in the Phonebook, opens
the Communications window. You can then resume the
Scri pt execution in the background with the Script
Resume command.
TIMEOUTFACTOR
Function
Sets the time before the Script skips a statement.
Syntax
[TIMEOUT]FACTOR integer
Remarks
The default is 10 seconds.
See also
DELAY
MATCH
TIMEOUTUNIT
WAIT
Example
TIMEOUTFACTOR 21
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
377
TIMEOUTUNIT
Function
Sets the multiple used by TIMEOUTFACTOR.
Syntax
[TIMEOUT]UNIT integer
Remarks
Use TIMEOUTUNIT when you specify delays that are
different than the one set by TIMEOUTFACTOR. Say
you have a Script containing MATCH "AT&T", 15 to avoid 15
seconds of garbage on a 1200-baud modem; you want to
use this script on a 300-baud modem. Without the
TIMEOUTUNIT statement, you'd have to change all 15's
to 60. Instead, add the statement TIMEOUTUNIT 4 and every
delay becomes 15 * 4 =60 seconds.
The default is 1 second.
See also
TIMEOUTFACTOR
Example
TIMEOUTUNIT 34
TRANSMIT
Function
Sends a file to the host computer.
Syntax
T filespec
TRANS filespec
TRANSMIT filespec
Remarks
The PROTOCOL statement determines the transmission
format.
Transmi t remains in control un til you press ~ or
successfully transmit the file.
OK
TRUE if file transmission was successful.
LOG file
Transmitting filespec
[Transmission Successful] or [Transmission Aborted]
See also
PROTOCOL
Examples
TRANSMIT "FRED. TXT"
T "FRED. TXT"
378
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
UNTIL
See the REPEAT statement.
WAIT
Function
Pauses until it receives nothing for a specified period.
Syntax
WAIT [(timeout factor)]
Remarks
Stops Script execution until the serial port has been quiet
for (timeout factor * timeout unit) seconds. If you omit the
timeout factor, the Phonebook uses the default (10
seconds) set by TIMEOUTFACTOR.
See also
MATCH
TIMEOUTFACTOR
TIMEOUTUNIT
WAIT
Example
WAIT (33)
WRITE
Function
Sends data out the serial port.
Syntax
W[RITE] variable list
Remarks
Variable list is a series of expressions that can include
variables defined in the Glossary. Remember to include
quotes around the expression in the Glossary.
See also
MATCH
TRANSMIT
Examples
WRITE "Jeffrey Goldbergll
isimple expression
ivariable with initials name in the Glossary
WRITE @name
ivariables name and password in the Glossary
WRITE @name,CRLF,@password,IIMail"
Appendix F, The Script Language Commands
379
380
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
A
p
p
E
N
x
D
G
SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
This appendix explains all SideKick Plus error messages, warnings, and
prompts. Following are this section's main headings:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Loading SideKick Plus and Activating Applications
Disk Errors
Printer Errors and Messages
The File Manager
The Notepad
Outlook: The Outline Processor
The Phonebook and Script
The Time Planner
The Calculator
The ASCII Table
The Menu System
Loading SideKick Plus and Activating
Applications
Error reading from a .SWP file or the Above Board. SideKick Plus cannot
continue.
Cause: MS-DOS can't read SideKick Plus's .SWP file or read from the Above
Board while you're working with applications.
Solution: Never erase a .SWP file because that stops SideKick Plus dead in
its tracks. If you have, you'll have to reboot. Otherwise, you have a problem with your computer hardware.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
381
Incorrect PC-DOS version (must be 2.0 or higher).
Cause: You have an old version of the MS-DOS or PC-DOS operating
system. An extremely unlikely error, since versions older than 2.0 did not
support hard disks.
Solution: Obtain the latest version of MS-DOS or PC-DOS for your machine.
You can check the version by typing VER I +--J I at the DOS prompt.
No space on the emergency floppy disk. SideKick Plus cannot continue.
Cause: Your emergency floppy disk, hard disk, Above Board, and RAM disk
are full.
Solution: Be sure to give SideKick Plus enough disk space before loading it.
Not enough memory to run SideKick Plus.
Cause: At present, your machine does not have enough spare space to load
SideKick Plus.
Solution: Remove any other RAM-resident programs or add more memory
to your system. Remember that you must have enough memory to load the
whole of SideKick Plus.
Emergency. No disk space left. Insert formatted floppy into A: and press
I Space I.
Cause: You have no space on your hard disk drive.
Solution: SideKick Plus has run out of memory on your hard disk drive and
will try to save its .SWP file to a floppy disk. Insert a formatted floppy disk
into your A: drive and wait until SideKick Plus tells you that you can
remove it. At that point, you can remove the disk, although it's not
necessary. Then, delete some files on yout hard disk and save all your
Notepad files and outlines. Next, be sure you are at the DOS prompt and
select Services Unload SideKick Plus.
Reload SideKick Plus to use this command.
Cause: You used the Services Setup Transfer Load command after activating
an application.
Solution: The Services Setup Transfer Load command must be the first
command you use after loading SideKick Plus. This ensures smooth sailing
even if you've changed the menus to suit your preferences.
382
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Severe problem with a .SWP file or the Above Board. SideKick Plus
cannot continue.
Cause: SideKick Plus cannot read or write to the .SWP file or from the
AboveBoard.
Solution: Check that you haven't erased any .SWP file. Otherwise, you have
a hardware problem with your computer.
Sorry, unknown PC-DOS version.
Cause: When you loaded SideKick Plus, it found an error when checking for
the PC-DOS version.
Solution: You must use PC-DOS or MS-DOS version 2.0 or above on a PC or
compatible. You need a different version of SideKick if you are using
another operating system or a Macintosh. You can check your version of the
operating system by typing VER I +-i I at the DOS prompt.
Too many applications active.
Cause: You have too many open pop-up menus or applications or too much
data in SideKick Plus.
Solution: Close some of the menus, save your data, annd deactivate some
applications. In a few special cases, you will have to unload SideKick Plus
to restore normal service. If you don't have much data or many open
applications, report the problem to Borland's Technical Support team.
Cannot remove SideKick Plus.
Cause: You tried to use the Services Unload command with an application
active.
Solution: Remember the rules for unloading SideKick Plus: You must be at
the DOS prompt with SideKick Plus as the last resident program. If you
have a batch file with SKBAT IV in it, check that there is no I +-i I after the
last line.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
383
You must start SideKick Plus from its own directory. SideKick Plus
cannot load.
Cause: Under MS-DOS version 2, you cannot start SideKick Plus using a
path name such as \SKPLUS\SKPLUS.
Solution: Check that you were in the SideKick Plus directory (the directory
into which you copied all the SideKick Plus files) when you started
SideKick Plus. This message will also come up if two people on a network
try to start up the same SideKick Plus at the same time.
Disk Errors
Attempt to write on write-protected disk.
Cause: You tried to save a file to a disk with a write-protect tab, preventing
SideKick Plus from being able to write to the disk.
Solution: Remove the write-protect tab and type Retry.
Data error.
Cause: SideKick Plus found an error while reading or writing a disk file.
Solution: If this error occurs on a hard disk, then there is something wrong
with the disk drive. On a floppy drive, however, it means that the floppy
disk is faulty: Type Retry. If that fails, then the floppy disk is unusable, and
you need a new one.
Disk not ready.
Cause: You probably left the floppy disk drive door (the small toggle or
button in front of the drive) open.
Solution: Close the drive door and type Retry. If that fails, take the floppy
disk out of the drive, center the hub of the disk, place the disk into the
drive, close the door, and type Retry again.
General failure on disk.
Cause: SideKick Plus could not understand your disk. You probably put an
unformatted disk into the floppy disk drive or a 1.2 Mb AT-type disk into a
PC floppy disk drive.
Solution: Find a properly formatted floppy disk.
384
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Read fault.
Cause: SideKick Plus was unable to read data from the disk.
Solution: Check that the floppy disk is properly inserted.
Sector not found.
Cause: A vital part of the information on the disk is missing.
Solution: Check that the floppy disk is properly inserted and type Retry.
Otherwise, reformat the floppy disk.
Seek error.
Cause: SideKick Plus was unable to locate the proper track on the disk.
Solution: Check that the floppy disk is properly inserted into the drive and
type Retry.
Unknown media type.
Cause: SideKick Plus could not understand your disk.
Solution: Check that the floppy disk is of the correct type: DOS has detected
a disk, but doesn't recognize it. (The allowable types are 360K, 720K, 1.2
Mb, and 1.44 Mb.)
Write fault.
Cause: SideKick Plus was unable to write data to the disk.
Solution: Check that the floppy disk is properly inserted.
Printer Errors and Messages
Alarm pending. Do you want to cancel the print command (YIN)?
Cause: SideKick Plus cannot activate an alarm while it is printing.
Solution: Press ill if you wish to stop printing and activate the alarm. Press
lEJ if you wish to continue printing and activate the alarm after printing
ends.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
385
Do you wish to cancel the print command (YIN)?
Cause: You pressed 8 while SideKick Plus was printing.
Solution: Press (B to continue printing or UJ to stop printing.
Printer Error.
Cause: You probably have not switched the printer on.
Solution: Make sure the printer is properly connected, switched on, and online.
Printer not ready. Abort or Retry?
Cause: You probably have not switched the printer on.
Solution: Make sure the printer is properly connected, switched on, and online.
Printer out of paper. Abort or Retry?
Cause: There is no paper in the printer.
Solution: Put paper in the printer.
The File Manager
<•. > cannot be deleted.
Cause: You cannot delete .. because it is the directory above the current one.
Access denied.
Cause: SideKick Plus tried to perform an operation on a file or directory but
was prevented by MS-DOS.
Solution: This is usually a network problem: Check your network
documentation. You may have to rename the file or directory.
Directory already exists.
Cause: You have an existing directory with the same name.
Solution: Change the name of the existing directory or the new one you
want to create.
386
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Directory is not empty.
Cause: You asked SideKick Plus to delete the directory, but it has files and/
or further subdirectories below it.
Solution: Press lYl to delete everything; otherwise, reply ~.
Directory path not found.
Cause: You asked the File Manager to find a directory that does not exist.
Solution: Check that you typed the directory correctly.
Disk unusable.
Cause: SideKick Plus found an error when it formatted the floppy disk, or
you tried to format a 5-1/ 4-inch disk in the 3-1/2-inch format.
Solution: Check the Prepare Disk Type setting. If it's set correctly, dispose of
the floppy disk and insert a new one.
Drive not found.
Cause: You specified a disk drive letter that does not exist.
Solution: Check that you typed the drive letter correctly.
Drive not ready (close drive door).
Cause: You probably left the floppy disk drive door (the small toggle or
button in front of the drive) open.
Solution: Close the drive door and type Retry. If that fails, take the floppy
disk out of the drive, center the hub of the disk, place the disk into the
drive, close the door, and type Retry again.
Duplicate directory name or directory not found.
Cause: You tried to rename a directory but either a directory with the old
name doesn't exist or a directory with the new name already exists.
Solution: Check the names of the directories.
Duplicate file name or file not found.
Cause: You tried to rename a file but either a file with the old name doesn't
exist or a file with the new name already exists.
Solution: Check the names of the files.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
387
File attribute denies access.
Cause: The file you want to manipulate has hidden, read-only, and/or
system attributes set.
Solution: Remove the attributes with the File Attribute Clear command and
then perform the command.
File cannot be copied or moved onto itself.
Cause: You probably typed the same file name as one of the marked files or
directories. Contact Borland Tech Support if necessary.
Solution: Check the file or directory names involved.
File not found.
Cause: You specified a Directory or Search command that found no files.
Solution: Check the file name or search string.
Illegal media (formatting 80 tracks in 40-track drive).
Cause: You cannot format an AT-type disk on a PC-type drive.
Solution: You must use an AT to format SO-track disks.
Insufficient disk space.
Cause: SideKick Plus has run out of disk space while copying or moving
some files.
Solution: Delete some files and then retry the copy or move command.
Invalid drive.
Cause: You typed a disk drive letter that SideKick Plus did not understand.
Usually, you typed a period or semicolon instead of a colon.
Solution: Check the file name you entered.
Invalid file name.
Cause: You typed a file name that SideKick Plus did not understand.
Solution: Check the file name.
388
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Invalid setup file.
Cause: You need to load a setup file made by the Options Setup Transfer
Save command.
Solution: Check that the file is indeed a setup file.
Invalid version of setup file.
Cause: You loaded a file, which was created with a later version of SideKick
Plus, with the Options Setup Transfer Load command.
Solution: Use the correct (or higher) version of SideKick Plus with that
particular file.
Lock violation.
Cause: You tried to open a file on a network that someone else is writing to.
Solution: Use another file or wait until the other person finishes using the
file.
No source file found.
Cause: You tried to use a File command with nothing in the File Manager
window.
Solution: Be sure to have a file in the window before using the File
commands.
No valid source name.
Cause: You tried to use a File command with nothing in the File Manager
window.
Solution: Be sure to have a file in the window before using the File
commands.
Not enough internal memory.
Cause: The File Manager has run out of memory and cannot perform the
command.
Solution: Make the command act on fewer files or directories.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
389
Not enough memory to load File Manager.
Cause: There is not enough space for the File Manager and the other
application you have open.
Solution: Use the File Manager on its own by pressing ~m instead.
Out of memory. Number of files truncated.
Cause: You are limited to 8,000 files at anyone time in the File Manager. If
there are more, the File Manager only displays the first 8,000. Usually, this
error only occurs when you are looking at the root directory of a file server
of a network.
Solution: Look at a directory below the root directory.
Path is too long.
Cause: You cannot have a file name longer than 60 characters.
Solution: Check the file name and shorten it if necessary.
Search string not found.
Cause: No files contain the string of characters you were searching for.
Solution: Check the string of characters.
Searching for files •.. Please wait!
Deleting files ... Please wait!
Moving files ... Please wait!
Cause: The File Manager is searching the disk for, deleting, or moving the
specified· files.
Solution: Wait a few more seconds, and the File Manager will list your
specified options when it is done.
Share violation.
Cause: MS-DOS will not allow SideKick Plus to open the specified file
because someone else is using it.
Solution: Use the File Manager to make the file read-only before sharing it
across a network.
390
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
This function works ONLY with files.
Cause: You cannot File View a directory.
Solution: Move into the directory and then view the files.
Trying to erase current directory.
Cause: You cannot erase the logged directory.
Solution: Move out of the directory before erasing it.
Write error.
Cause: You tried to copy a file onto itself.
Solution: None. You can't do this.
The Notepad
900 byte(s) left.
Cause: You are rapidly running out of space.
Solution: Split the current file into two smaller ones by moving some of it
into a new Notepad.
File not found.
Cause: The file name you specified does not exist on the disk.
Solution: Check the file name.
File is read only.
Cause: The file attribute does not allow SideKick Plus to write to the file.
Solution: Change the file attribute with the File Manager File Attribute Clear
Read Only command.
File too big.
Cause: The file you are trying to load contains over 54,000 characters.
Solution: Split the file and load it into multiple N otepads.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
391
Line too long-CR inserted.
Cause: The line is too long for the Notepad to cope with, so it has inserted a
carriage return and split the line into two.
Solution: Be sure that lines don't exceed 240 characters and that they have a
, ...... , at the end of each line.
Out of space.
Cause: The Notepad has exhausted its allotted memory for one file.
Solution: Split the note into two smaller files.
Overwrite old file.
Cause: A file already exists with that name.
Solution: Press [I to save your new file to that existing file, thus overwriting
its previous contents. Press lEl if you want to keep the original.
Replace YIN.
Cause: You specified a Search Replace command and Notepad has found a
matching string of characters.
Solution: Press [I to replace, lEl to ignore, and lE$ to stop.
Search string not found.
Cause: No matching string of characters were found by a Search command.
Solution: Check the string of characters.
Sorting line 12.
Cause: Notepad is sorting the text.
Solution: Be patient.
Unable to create file.
Cause: Notepad could not create the new file because of some disk error
such as a write-protected disk.
Solution: Check the floppy disk and whether you can write that particular
file name.
392
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Outlook: The Outline Processor
*** INTERRUPTED.
Cause: You stopped a search operation by pressing
Solution: Press (§.
I£illlID.
Cannot demote here.
Cause: Outlook won't allow you to demote the headline because doing so
would result in a missing level of headlines.
Cannot move headline here.
Cause: Outlook can't move the headline to where you specified.
Solution: Don't move the headline: Delete it and create a new one, if
necessary.
Cannot promote here.
Cause: Outlook won't allow you to promote the headline because doing so
would result in a missing level of headlines.
Delete attached note?
Cause: You are deleting a headline that has an attached note.
Solution: Press (] to delete the headline and attached note; otherwise, reply
lliJ.
Delete existing file?
Cause: There is a file with that file name in existence.
Solution: Press (] to overwrite the file; otherwise, reply lliJ.
Delete hidden headlines.
Cause: You are deleting a headline that has other headlines hidden beneath
it.
Solution: Press (] to delete all the headlines; otherwise, reply lliJ.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
393
Destination is in block.
Cause: You are copying or transferring a block of headlines on top of itself.
Solution: Move the cursor away from the marked block.
Disk full while saving file.
Cause: Outlook ran out of disk space while saving the outline.
Solution: Delete some files to make enough room for the outline.
File does not exist.
Cause: You asked Outlook to read a file that was not on the disk.
Solution: Check the file name and the disk.
File is not outline.
Cause: You tried to read a file that is either a text file or something else that
is not an outline.
Solution: Check that the file is indeed an outline. The default extension for
outlines is .OTL.
Invalid file or directory name.
Cause: The file or directory name does not exist or is invalid.
Solution: Check the file or directory name.
Loading outline.
Cause: Outlook is loading the outline from disk.
Solution: Be patient.
New outline.
Cause: You specified a file name that does not exist for an outline, so
Outlook creates a new outline.
Solution: None necessary.
394
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
No block defined. Enter outline to copy from:
Cause: You have several outlines open with marked blocks in them but none
in the current outline. Outlook asks whether you wish to copy a marked
block from another outline.
Solution: Type the number of the outline you wish to copy from and press
I ~ I, or mark a block in the current outline.
No Memory. Close other applications.
Cause: When you tried to open Outlook, it could not find enough internal
memory to load itself.
Solution: Close some other applications. If that does not help, report the
problem to Borland's SideKick Plus Technical Support team.
Outline too big.
Cause: Your outline is over the size allotted to it.
Solution: Split the outline into smaller parts.
OUTLOOKINTERNALERROR#_
Cause: Unknown-and extremely rare.
Solution: Report the sequence of steps that led to this message to Borland
International, SideKick Plus Team, Technical Support Department.
Reading text.
Cause: Outlook is getting text off the disk and placing it into the outline.
Solution: Be patient.
Replace (YIN)?
Cause: You specified a Search Replace command and Notepad has found
the matching string of characters.
Solution: Press (] to replace, lEI to ignore, and ~ to stop.
Saving outline.
Cause: Outlook is saving your work.
Solution: Be patient.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
395
Search string not found.
Cause: No matching string of characters to the ones you specified were
found by the Search command.
Solution: Check the string of characters.
Unable to create file.
Cause: Outlook could not create the new file because of some disk error
such as a write-protected disk.
Solution: Check the floppy disk and whether you can write to that particular
file name.
Writing Text.
Cause: Outlook is converting the outline to text and writing it to the disk.
Solution: Be patient.
The Phonebook and Script
The Phonebook
Busy line.
Cause: The modem dialed the number but could not connect because of an
engaged tone.
Solution: Redial.
Dialing: 563653365
Cause: The Phonebook is dialing the number and waiting for a reply.
Solution: Be Patient. If you do not hear the modem dialing the number, then
something is wrong. If you are on a network, check the setting of the IRQ
jumper. If you are not on a network, check that the actual telephone has a
dial tone.
Disconnecting.
Cause: The Phonebook is hanging up the phone.
Solution: Be patient.
396
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Entry contains illegal variable.
Cause: You typed an illegal expansion in the Glossary.
Solution: Check that the expansion has quotes surrounding all strings.
File exist, append (YeslNo).
Cause: A file already exists with that name.
Solution: Press (] to add the new data to the end of the file; press ~ to make
a new file.
File not found.
Cause: The file name you specified does not exist on the disk.
Solution: Check the file name.
Form file not correct type.
Cause: You specified a Phonebook address form file (with the extension
.FRM) that is some other type of file.
Solution: Check the name of the address form file.
Form not found in form file.
Cause: You specified an address form file (with the extension .FRM) that is
some other type of file.
Solution: Check the name of the address form file.
Forms file not found.
Cause: The forms file you specified does not exist.
Solution: Check the file name of the type of forms you want.
Illegal communications parameter(s).
Cause: You specified an illegal set of Communications Parameters menu
settings, such as 1200 bps, 5 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.
Solution: Check the Communications Parameters menu settings.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
397
Incorrect password.
Cause: You typed the wrong password for the Glossary.
Solution: Type the correct password.
Item not found.
Cause: Your search string of characters is not below the cursor.
Solution: Move the cursor or change the search string of characters.
Modem doesn't respond.
Cause: Something is connected to the communications port, but it is either
not a modem or the modem is not switched on.
Solution: Check that the modem is on and that it is connected to that communications port.
Modem not installed.
Cause: Nothing is connected to the communications port.
Solution: Check that the Phonebook is set for the correct communications
port.
Nesting too deep or too many digits.
Cause: You have too many digits in the phone number that uses Glossary
entries, too many Glossary entries calling each other, or a recursive
Glossary entry. You can have up to about 1,000 digits in a phone number,
depending on such factors as the modem limitation and your machine's
buffer.
Solution: Simplify the phone number.
398
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
No carrier.
Cause before dialing: The modem does not sense the dialing tone from the
phone system.
Solution: Check whether someone else is using the phone. Some modems,
such as the Prometheus or Qubie, cause this error regularly. They will
eventually dial, however, after a number of attempts.
Cause after finishing dialing: The modem does not sense a reply from the
other modem because the line is busy or the other modem is using a
different speed.
Solution: Try dialing later and check the Communications Parameters.
Cause as soon as the Communications window opens: You are using a cable with
only three wires without Carrier Ctrl being OFF.
Solution: Check the setting of Communications Parameters Options Carrier
Ctrl.
No dial tone.
Cause: The modem did not detect the dial tone so it can't dial the phone
number.
Solution: Make sure you have a dial tone and redial.
No forms file in use; cannot change form.
Cause: You had the error Forms file not found and did not load a forms file.
Solution: You cannot change forms without a forms file.
No XMODEM protocol selected.
Cause: You tried to get a file in the Communications window with the CRLF
or None protocol setting.
Solution: Use XMODEM for file transfer if possible.
Phonebook bad. Restore YIN.
Cause: Something has damaged your Phonebook file.
Solution: Press ill to recover some or all of the Phonebook.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
399
Phonebook task is out of space and will be closed.
Cause: When you tried to use the Phonebook, it could not find enough
internal memory to load itself.
Solution: There is a problem with SideKick Plus. Report the problem to
Borland's SideKick Plus Technical Support team.
Press any key when dialing is done.
Cause: You dialed a voice number.
Solution: Wait until the modem finishes dialing and then press any key.
Protected glossary symbol.
Cause: You have attempted to activate a script that contains a protected
Glossary symbol.
Solution: Change Glossary Protected Numbers to ON.
Symbol XXXXX is not in the Glossary.
Cause: You have not defined the symbol in the Glossary.
Solution: Check the Write symbol in the script and/ or define the symbol in
the Glossary.
Illegal Phonebook file.
Cause: You have tried to read a file in another format into the Phonebook,
for example, a SideKick Dialer file.
Solution: Check the file name of the new Phonebook.
Illegal Glossary file.
Cause: You have tried to read in a file in another format into the Glossary,
for example, a SideKick Dialer file.
Solution: Check the file name of the new Glossary.
Waiting for redial- ESC to cancel.
Cause: The Phonebook is waiting to redial the number since it was busy
when it last tried.
Solution: Be patient.
400
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Wrong number format.
Cause: You entered a phone number into the form that does not comply
with the rules of the Options Phone Number command. The Phonebook
replaces the illegal characters with an asterisk (*).
Solution: Use a number that complies with the Options Phone Number
command or change the characters acceptable to that command.
The Script
Note: There are no explicit solution paragraphs in this section because the
answers should be self-evident.
) expected.
The script expected a right parenthesis but did not find one. For example,
Delay (56.
, expected.
The script expected a comma but did not find one. You usually see this
error when you don't add an option to a CAPTURE or RECEIVE command.
: expected.
You forgot the equals sign and/or colon in an assignment statement, for
example, OK =False.
=expected.
You forgot the equals sign in a TimeoutUnit or TimeoutFactor statement,
for example, TimeoutUnit 3.
A, 0, or U option expected.
The letter or word after the comma in a RECEIVE or CAPTURE statement
is not A, Append, 0, Overwrite, U, or Unique.
Capture file closed.
Information on the message line telling you that the END CAPTURE statement completed successfully.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
401
Capturing to :
Information on the message line telling you that a CAPTURE statement
caused the script to record the communications dialogue to a file.
Carrier lost.
The connection between the two computers was broken in the middle of a
script. Redial and start again. See also the No carrier message on page 399.
Character expected.
You have left a character after a caret (A) in a MATCH statement.
Disk error recording Capture file.
You probably ran out of disk space recording the file started with the
Capture Script command or the Record Dialogue command.
Disk error recording LOG file.
You probably ran out of disk space while the script was recording the LOG
file.
ENDIF expected.
You forgot the ENDIF after an IF statement.
ENDIF or ENDSEL expected.
The script was expecting an ENDIF, ENDSEL, or ENDSEL but didn't find
one. Check your IF and SELECT statements.
ENDSEL expected.
You forgot the ENDSEL after a SELECT statement.
End of block (not an error).
Information about the XMODEM transfer.
Error count exceeded.
In XMODEM transfer, there were too many transmission errors and so the
transfer was aborted.
402
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
FALSE or TRUE expected.
You forgot the TRUE or FALSE after := in an ASSIGNMENT statement.
File could not be closed.
The script could not close the file because of a disk error, such as a full disk.
File could not be opened.
The script could not open the file because of a disk error, such as writing to
a read-only file.
File creation error.
The script could not create the file because of a disk error, such as a writeprotected disk.
File error.
The script found a disk error while reading from or writing to a file. This is
not normal and suggests something is wrong with your disk.
File name not found.
The script could not find the name given in a TRANSMIT statement.
File transmission error.
The script found an error while sending or receiving a file. The file is
probably unusable.
File was empty.
The file you specified in a TRANSMIT statement contained no information.
File name expected.
The script expects a file name surrounded by quotes after a CAPTURE,
RECEIVE, or TRANSMIT statement. If you forgot either the quotes or file
name, then you get this error.
Illegal statement.
You typed something the script could not understand.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
403
Interrupted.
You pressed (G.
Invalid file name.
The file name in a RECEIVE, TRANSMIT, or CAPTURE statement was
illegal, for example, the directory name does not exist.
Match string is too long.
The largest Match string allowed is 100 characters.
No errors found.
When checking the script, no errors were found.
No matching IF statement.
You forgot the IF statement before a THEN or ENDIF.
No matching REPEAT statement.
You forgot the REPEAT statement before an UNTIL statement, or you
forgot the OR statement between TIMES and UNTIL.
No matching SELECT statement.
You forgot the SELECT statement before the first CASE statement.
Number expected.
The script expected a number after the statement. For example, you forgot
the number inside parentheses, the number after TimeoutUnit or TimeoutFactor, or added an extra comma somewhere.
Number is too big.
The largest number allowed is 9999. Print statements only allow numbers
up to 255.
OK expected.
The script expected OK; for example, you forgot the OK in an IF or REPEAT
statement.
404
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
ON or OFF expected
You forgot ON or OFF after a SCREEN statement.
Protected Variable.
The symbol in the MATCH statement is a protected entry in the Glossary.
Use the Glossary Protected Numbers to toggle this protection.
Protocol must be XMSUM or XMCRC.
You tried to RECEIVE a file using the CRLF or None protocol.
Receiving.
Information on the message line telling you that the script is receiving a
file. The number is the number of lines or blocks received.
Restart.
Information on the message line telling you that a RESTART statement is in
progress.
Script finished.
Information on the message line telling you that the script has finished
executing.
String or constant expected.
You have made a mistake in a string or constant, or forgot a string or
constant. For example, you matched an undefined constant, spelled ALL
incorrectly, or forgot to place anything after CASE.
Syntax error.
The Script interpreter could not understand that statement or line of the
syntax you defined.
THEN expected.
You missed a THEN statement from an IF THEN ELSE ENDIF block of
statements.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
405
Timeout.
A message telling you that a character was expected at a certain time but
nothing was received. The file transmission was therefore aborted.
TIMES expected.
The script expected TIMES after a REPEAT statement and never received it.
Too many CASE statements.
When the script was running, it found too many CASE statements.
Transmission aborted.
The file transmission was stopped because of some cause.
Transmission cancelled by remote.
The other computer had a problem receiving the file and aborted the file
transfer.
Transmission successful.
The file was sent or received successfully.
Transmitting:
The script is sending a file to another computer.
Protocol name expected.
The script is expecting XMSUM, XMCRC, CRLF, or None after a
PROTOCOL statement.
Undefined error.
An error that the script could not decipher. Examples include not marking
the whole of a statement or DELAY without the parentheses.
Unexpected keyword.
The Script did not expect a statement at that point. Examples include IF
THEN THEN and MATCH CR LF.
406
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Unterminated String.
You forgot the trailing quote in a MATCH or PRINT statement.
UNTIL expected.
You forgot the UNTIL after a REPEAT statement.
Variable was not found.
The symbol does not exist in the Glossary.
Waiting for anything.
The Script is in a MATCH ALL statement.
Waiting for match.
The Script is in a SELECT statement.
Waiting for match with.
The Script is in a MATCH statement.
The Time Planner
Bad Appointment Book. Restore (YIN)?
Cause: Something has damaged your Appointment Book.
Solution: Press (] to recover some or all of the Appointment Book.
Item not found. Press Esc.
Cause: Your search string has not been found.
Solution: Move the cursor using the arrow keys or change the search string.
No more space for appointments on this day.
Cause: You have too many appointments on this day.
Solution: Delete some appointments.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
407
No tagged appointments. Press Esc.
Cause: You tried to move or copy an appointment that was not tagged.
Solution: You must tag an appointment before you move or copy it. Press lEZJ
to tag the item at the cursor.
Not an appointment book.
Cause: You tried to read in an appointment book that is not in the correct
format.
Solution: Check the file name.
Processing Appointments ... Please wait.
Cause: The Time Planner is analyzing the appointments before drawing the
Schedule window.
Solution: Be patient.
Repeat change. YIN?
Cause: You have changed a Repeating appointment by some command.
Solution: Press (] if you wish to change all the Repeating appointments.
Press ~ if you only wish to change the current appointment.
The Calculators
o or 1 expected.
Cause: You entered a number other than 0 or 1 in the Binary mode of the
Programmer calculator.
Solution: Change to another type of calculator.
Division by zero.
Cause: You attempted to make a calculation that divides a number by 0,
thereby resulting in infinity.
Solution: Check your calculation.
ERROR.
Cause: An undefined error with an indefinite number of causes.
Solution: Check your calculation.
408
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Escaped.
Cause: You pressed
~
while the Calculating a Block.
Expression is nested too deep.
Cause: You have more than 24 levels of left parentheses in your calculation.
Solution: Simplify your calculation.
Memory overflow.
Cause: You tried to perform a memory calculation that was bigger than
1*1064•
Solution: Check your calculation.
Missing left parenthesis.
Cause: You have a right parenthesis without left parenthesis.
Solution: Find the extra right parenthesis or add a left parenthesis in the
appropriate place.
Missing right parenthesis.
Cause: You have a left parenthesis without right parenthesis.
Solution: Find the extra left parenthesis or add a right parenthesis in the
appropriate place.
Missing parameter.
Cause: You tried to calculate a function without the correct number of
parameters.
Solution: Check the function parameters and your calculation.
Number is out of range.
Cause: You have entered a number bigger than 1*10 64 or smaller than
1*10-64•
Solution: Check your calculation.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
409
Operand expected.
Cause: The Calculator was expecting a number after an operator such as (,
+, -, or *.
Solution: Check your calculation.
Operator expected.
Cause: The Calculator was expecting an operator such as +, -, or *.
Solution: Check your calculation.
OVERFLOW.
Cause: The result is greater than 1*10 64•
Solution: Check your calculation.
Parameter is out of range.
Cause: You have given an illegal parameter to a function.
Solution: Check your calculation.
Syntax error.
Cause: You have typed something that the Calculator finds illegal.
Solution: Check the calculation.
Too many parameters.
Cause: You have put an extra semicolon somewhere in the calculation.
Solution: Check your calculation for semicolons.
Too many variables.
Cause: You cannot define more than 70 variables.
Solution: Delete some variables.
Unknown symbol.
Cause: You typed an unknown character, such as &, in the Formula
calculator.
Solution: Check the character.
410
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Unknown variable.
Cause: When defining a variable, you typed a nonexistent variable.
Solution: Define the variables in the correct order or use a calculation to
define the variable.
The ASCII Table
Export Buffer is full.
Cause: You have over 42 characters in the Paste buffer.
Solution: Delete some of the characters or Quick Paste more than once.
Menu System Errors
Impossible to insert more items in this menu.
Cause: You can have a maximum of 23 items in a menu.
Solution: Move some menu items to another place.
It is not possible to create more shortcuts starting with this key.
Cause: You have over 23 shortcuts with the same first keystroke.
Solution: Move some items to another keystroke.
It is impossible to insert menu line on top of itself.
Cause: You tried to paste the menu item in the Menu Control menu's
Clipboard onto the same position in the menu you're changing.
Solution: Move the cursor to another place.
Menu Line Clipboard is empty.
Cause: You tried to Paste when there was nothing in the Menu Clipboard.
Solution: Cut a menu item before you Paste.
The marked menu line is not accessible from this menu.
Cause: You cut a menu item that has been made invisible by another
command. When you tried to paste it back into the menu system, the other
command had made it invisible. So you can't paste it back.
Appendix G, SideKick Plus Errors and Messages
411
Solution: Be sure that the menu line is visible before pasting it back into the
menu system.
This shortcut is not unique.
Cause: Some other command uses that shortcut.
Solution: Choose another shortcut.
This shortcut will cover a global command OK.
Cause: A global command uses your proposed shortcut.
Solution: Press (] to overwrite the global command and use your proposed
shortcut; otherwise, press fEB.
You cannot change this menu.
Cause: You cannot use
Solution: None.
412
~I +-lIon
the Menu Control menu.
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
A
p
p
E
N
D
x
H
Help!
This appendix contains answers to some common questions about SideKick
Plus. Here's how we've divided the topics:
• Activating SideKick Plus
• Screens
• File Manager
• Notepad
• Outlook: The Outline Processor
.Phonebook
• Calculators
• Time Planner
• ASCII Table
• Copy and Paste
Activating SideKick Plus
When I load SideKick Plus using SKPLUS /S+, why do I get the message
Not enough memory to load SideKick Plus when I have 200 Kbytes of memory
free?
When you use /S+, SideKick Plus swaps out your underlying program to
make space for itself. If you have too many resident programs, there won't
be enough free memory space for SideKick Plus to swap into and it won't
be able to load. To solve this, remove your resident programs from memory
until you have enough space for SideKick Plus.
Appendix H, Help!
413
What is the exact loading order if I want to load SuperKey, SideKick Plus,
and other resident programs, such as RAM" disks and print spoolers?
SideKick Plus is always the last program you load into memory, preceded by
Turbo Lightning and SuperKey, in that order. All other memory-resident
products should be loaded before the Borland products. A typical loading
sequence is
Clock
RAM disk
Print spooler
SuperKey
Turbo Lightning
SideKick
SideKick Plus
Sometimes, if you load a SuperKey macro file and try to press l2ill~ to
activate SideKick Plus, nothing happens. In this case, just press I +-II and
SideKick Plus will appear.
Why does SideKick Plus have to be loaded last?
Doing so ensures that SideKick Plus will be able to come up over virtually
all application programs, for example, over XyWrite. It also allows us to
protect against improper loading and to easily contract and expand
SideKick Plus memory size. In technical terms, SideKick Plus retraps
interrupt 9H (default is OFF).
Why does the SideKick Plus main menu flash on and off when I try to call
up SideKick Plus?
If you have SuperKey loaded and have set SuperKey's One finger mode to
ON (SuperKey Options menu, ~ (ZJ (9 (9, this can happen. You must press
two keys to activate SideKick Plus.
If you have a 3270 PC with the 2.1 or greater control program, the main
menu will flash because of the way the 3270 handles the keyboard. To solve
this, start SideKick Plus by typing SKPLUS /T I +-II. (See the command-line
parameters described in Chapter 16.)
The manual says ~IEJ will bring up the Notepad, and ~(] will bring up
the Time Planner, and so on. When I try this, however, nothing happens.
You must be in SideKick Plus to use the ~ key shortcuts. For example, if
you are in the Notepad, pressing [[)(] brings up the Time Planner without
414
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
going through the main menu. Following are the keys that can be used
from anywhere after loading SideKick Plus:
(gill~
Activates SideKick Plus
(2Eill~
Activates SideKick Plus
(gilllE!U
Copies the screen to the SideKick Plus Clipboard
(gilliE
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard to the underlying
program
(gill@
Dials from the screen if you toggle the Phonebook Options
Display Dial Use Number command to DISPLAY
The main menu does not show all the features.
You installed SideKick Plus to load only a few of its features. See Chapter
15 to rebuild it with all the features.
When I try to activate SideKick Plus, I just get a chirping noise.
DOS may be doing something that SideKick Plus cannot interrupt. Pressing
will usually clear this situation and bring up SideKick Plus.
IReturn!
Why does the hard disk light blink at random intervals while I use SideKick Plus?
SideKick Plus is· just swapping unused information to your hard disk to
keep its RAM memory requirements to a minimum.
Why does SideKick Plus create the files with the extension .SWP?
SideKick Plus swaps part of itself, your information, and your underlying
program into these files. It does this to be miserly in its memory
requirements: You can create a 400 Kbyte outline and nine 54000-character
Notepads and have a RAM-resident size of only 64 Kbytes. That is,
SideKick Plus puts all but 64 Kbytes into the hard disk or other storage
devices. Do not delete this file while SideKick Plus is loaded.
Appendix H, Help!
415
Screens
I wrote a program with Turbo Pascal that stops blinking if I bring up Side-
Kick Plus. Why?
You must toggle Services Setup Exit Conditions to allow the blinking
attribute.
On a 3270 PC, the main menu is not readable.
The 3270 screen has 8 colors instead of 4 colors in 2 intensities. You must
change the colors to ones that are more readable. See Chapter 2 on window
control.
When I load SideKick Plus, the cursor and text are in high intensity. Why?
There's a conflict with the underlying program. Toggle Services Setup Exit
Conditions Show to allow blinking.
The File Manager
What are the letters in the far right column of each file name?
These are special indicators that DOS places on each file. They are useful if
you wish to prevent people from reading the file or make selective backups
of a directory. The File Manager lets you specify these group attributes:
Read Only, Hidden, Archive, and System.
How do I find a file if I don't know what directory's it's in?
First pop up the File Manager and select illQI Search. Type in the name of
the file you want to find with a backward slash before it, such as \yEATS. TXT.
The File Manager then presents a list of files matching your requested file
name. Press I+-11 to load the file if you raised the File Manager from a filename prompt.
416
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
The Notepad
Why can't I move my cursor below the last line in the Notepad?
The cursor keys only move as far as the last line of text or the last IReturnl
entered. To add blank lines, move the cursor to the end of the last line and
press IReturnl, then press IReturnl for as many blank lines as you need.
I just inserted some text into a section of my document, and SideKick Plus
reformatted everything from that point on.
To prevent automatic reformatting, insert a blank line between paragraphs.
Alternatively, you can turn off the wordwrap feature with the Options
Margin Release command.
I just read a file into the Notepad from my word processor, and there are
low intensity Is in it. What are they?
The low intensity Is are horizontal tab characters. To remove them, toggle
Options Hard tabs ON and reload the file.
Whenever I type a British pound sign, it comes out as a backs lash (\).
Why?
The British pound sign is part of the foreign characters in your computer. If
you want these displayed, you need to toggle Options Graphics ON.
The Notepad disappears when I press (G to send a printer control code.
Enter (9illi:B first, before pressing (G.
How can I print graphics from the Notepad?
To print graphics, your printer must be able to print semi-graphic
characters, and you must have Services Setup Printer Graphics support set
to ON.
I saved a Notepad yesterday and today it's gone. What happened?
The Notepad file was saved into whatever directory you were working in
yesterday. You may be trying to reload the file from a different directory
than the one you saved it in. You must specify either a full path name or
use the File Manager to find the file.
Appendix H, Help!
417
Outlook: The Outline Processor
How do the Notepad and Outlook handle the same file in two different
windows?
If you have the same file in two different windows in Outlook, then you are
looking at two views of the same file. If you alter one view in Outlook, the
other will change (although you might not see it right away). In the
Notepad, you are looking at two separate files. If you change one file, the
other won't change. Eventually, the Notepad will save only one version of
the file, and the other will be overwritten.
The Phonebook
Why doesn't my modem disconnect from the Phonebook after I press the
spacebar?
You pressed the spacebar too soon. Depending upon the computer, if you
press the space bar as soon as the message appears, the Phonebook will
either disconnect and not finish dialing the number, or finish dialing the
number and never disconnect the modem from the computer. (To get
disconnected, you'll have to press (EID and reset the computer or dial
another number.) Next time, wait until you hear the connection with the
other end before you press the spacebar.
I get a No Carrier message as soon as the Communications window opens,
even when dialing was successful.
Toggle the Communications Parameters Options Carrier Control command
to OFF. This is usually the result of a three-wire cable to your modem or
other computer.
Why won't SideKick Plus screen dial the number (408) 123-4567?
First check that you have Options Display Dial Use number command set
to DISPLAY. Then precede the number with call: or dial:, for example,
call: (408) 123-4567
When I dial another computer and the Communications window opens, all
I get are nonsensical characters. Why?
You probably did not set the correct baud rate (usually 300, 1200, or 2400),
the correct parity (usually Even or None), or the correct number of data bits
418
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
(usually 7 or 8). To change these settings, use the Communications
Parameters menu in the Summary window or the Parameter menu while in
the Communications window.
I successfully connected to another computer but everything I type appears
twice on the screen. Why?
You are getting an echo, which can be a desirable feature. In the Summary
window, set the Communications Parameters Echo command to OFF. In
the Communications window, set the Parameters Echo command to OFF.
The Calculators
Why doesn't the Business Calculator seem to work properly?
You may be using it as if it were a Scientific or Programmer calculator. To
speed up addition and subtraction, the Business Calculator operates using
a subtly different method. Please read the tutorial in Chapter 3 before using
it, if you are unfamiliar with the financial method of calculation.
The Time Planner
When I brought up the Time Planner, the appointments I previously entered
were gone.
You probably saved them into another directory. You must specify the
correct directory for each Appointment Book.
Can I merge several Time Planner files?
No. You can, however, look at two files using the Common Appointment
Book. See Chapter 9 for more details.
How do I save the Time Planner files?
Every time you make a change to the Time Planner, it saves the changes
automatically.
Appendix H, Help!
419
If I am keeping track of more than one person's schedule, or if one person
needs multiple Time Planner files, is it possible to create more than one
Time Planner file?
Yes. You can have many Time Planner files: Just press (E]J and type the new
name.
The ASCII Table
I never use this feature. Can I remove it?
Yes, you can remold SideKick Plus to your preference. See Chapter 15.
Copy and Paste
Why doesn't Paste work in programs like WordStar, dBASE, and WordPerfect?
SideKick Plus pastes too fast for some application programs to receive. Set
a lengthier paste delay in the Services Setup Clipboard menu.
Why doesn't [BJfE (Paste from Clipboard) or [BJ~ (Copy from Screen to
Clipboard) work in some programs, like Multimate?
The application, such as Multimate, uses these keys for its own purposes. It
is simple to change these keys, as they are just like any other on SideKick
Plus. See Chapter 14. The only key that you can use for pasting with
Multimate is (fEll Homel.
420
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
Glossary
activate To open a program by typing its name or pressing its activation
keys, so that it is ready to accept commands and information from you.
activation keys The keys you press to open a program. In SideKick Plus,
the default activation keys are l£Iilll31B and liHeftIIRlght~l.
application A program that uses the computer to address a specific need,
rather than a program that helps the computer system run better. In this
manual, we refer to the SideKick Plus components-the Notepad, File
Manager, and so on-as its applications.
ASCII Table The American Standard Code for Information Interchange's
standard set of numbers that represent the characters and control signals
used by computers.
attached note A Notepad that is connected to a specific Time Planner date,
Outlook headline, Phonebook form entry, or the ASCII paste buffer.
attribute (file) In SideKick Plus, a specific characteristic of a file: Read
Only, Hidden, System, or Archive. See "Changing the File Attributes" in
Chapter 6 for an explanation of these attributes.
background communications The Phonebook's ability to communicate
with another computer while you are working on another program.
batch file A file containing a series of commands and/or information that
the computer processes in one continuous stream, without interruption.
baud The speed at which data is transmitted from a modem in signals
(voltage level changes) per second. Each signal conveys from 1 to 16 bits
per second.
bit A binary digit, either 0 or 1. Several bits (usually eight) make up a byte,
which represents one character.
communications Transferring information to and/or from another
computer.
Glossary
421
configuration The way you've set your computer switches regarding
additional memory boards, video boards, modems, and other hardware
factors.
Clipboard A temporary storage area for anything you copy or move from
a SideKick Plus' application or the screen. You can edit the information in
the Clipboard before you paste it to another application or screen.
default The way the program is set up as distributed. A program follows
the default options unless you specifically tell it otherwise.
Glossary An area of the Phonebook in which you keep your coded
telephone abbreviations and expansions-telephone numbers, longdistance access codes, and the like. You can assign a password to the
Glossary, so that only you can open it.
headline A line of text in Outlook. An outline comprises all the headlines
in a file.
load To instruct the computer to take a program from the hard-disk
storage memory and put it into RAM memory, where it can be quickly
accessed when you type its activation keys.
local-area network A system of computers and other electronic machines
linked up so that they can exchange information online.
marker A character that you press to tag another character. You then
usually select a command to be performed at that location.
modem A device that codes information so that it can be transmitted or
received over a communications medium-telephone cables, microwave
signals, and the like.
network. See local-area network.
path Part of a file name, given on the DOS command line, that specifies
subdirectories that lead to the file in a DOS tree-structured file directory.
Quick Dial A command that dials any valid number you type on the
screen. The shortcut for this command is [illl~ (the center key on the
numeric keypad).
Quick Paste A command that copies a marked block from a SideKick
application into the Clipboard and then pastes it from the Clipboard to
wherever the cursor was in your underlying program. The shortcut keys
for this command are l6illlG.
resident program An application program, such as SideKick Plus or
SukerKey, that is installed into your computer's main memory. It remains
there, available for your use, until the computer is turned off.
422
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
script An exchange of commands and characters transmitted between two
computers. A script file stores all the commands and responses you usually
type in and issues them automatically, when you enter the file name.
shortcut A key or key combination that represents a SideKick Plus
command or string of commands. For example, pressing ~1EI is like
selecting Services Copy from Application to Clipboard, closing the
application and moving to where you want to paste the marked block, and
then pressing Services Paste from Clipboard.
swap Moving part or all of a program to another part of memory.
wordwrap A setting that tell the program to automatically move the cursor
to the next line's left margin when you get to the right margin of a line.
Glossary
423
424
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
FILE MANAGER
Files
String
Directories Below
Case Sensitive
All
Unmark All
Begin Block
End Block
Ie
Copy
.J
Delete--------I----L~~~~_ _ _ _ _ _
Move
Rename
Print - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - 1
Read Only
Hidden
System
Archive
Attribute
Read Only
Hidden
System
Archive
View
Drive Name
Label Name
~pe---------+----~
Kilobytes Disk
720 Kilobytes Disk
1.2 Megabytes Disk
1.44
Disk
MS-DOS
Name
Extension
Order by - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - 1 Date
Size
Warnings
Automatic Change of
Directory
Start
Goto---------~----___t
Previous - - - - - - - - - - I f - - - - - - - - - l
Save Setup
Next
Start of Window
End of Window
NOTEPAD
New
Save
All Save
Write to
List
Block
Paragraph
Marker
Find
Replace
Again
Ignore Case
Global Search
Backwards Search
Ask before Replace
Whole Words Only
Sound-alike Words
Marked Block Only
Number of Times
Mark
Copy
Transfer
Delete
Write to File
Print
Sort
File
Time & Date at ...
Line
Control Character
Hard Space
Undo Line
Line
Rest of Line
Word
Previous Character
Start of
File
Block
Window
Line
End of
Block
Window
Line
Previous
Note
Position
Screen
Line
Word
Character
Next
Scroll
Line
Set
Go to
Insert Mode
Auto Indent
Graphics
Hard Tabs
Margin Release
Right Margin
File
Defaults
Auto Save
BAK File
OUTLOOK
New
Save
All Save
Write to
List
One Level
All Levels
Open
Cose------------------~--------~
Promote
Demote
One Level
All Levels
Up
Move~~~------------r_----------~D:o:w::n::::::::::::::::~
Browse Mode
Indentation
Find
Replace
Again
Copy
Transfer
Delete
Write to File
Print
Output Chart
Ignore Case
Global Search
Ask before Replace
Whole Words Only
Sound-alike Words
Open headlines
Marked headlines
Number of times
Start
End
Line
Hide/Display
Start Sort
First Column
Last Column
File
Time/Date
Drawing -
ca:t~.~.~.--=====[=====~~~~~::::::::::::~
Attached Note
Level
Headline ---------------+------------t.~;..;.:~_Le;;,;;..;.v.;.e;...1_ _ _ _ _---J
Tab
Control Character
Undo Headline
Headline
Rest of Headline
Word
Character
Previous Character
Start of
Previous
Next------------------~----------~
File
Block
Window
Line
File
Block
Window
Line
Attached Note
Position
Screen
Headline
Word
Character
Attached Note
Screen
Headline
Word
Character
Scroll ------------------J-...-------------J
Identical Level
Read-----------------r----------::::~::::::::::::::::~
Line Spacing ------------t-----------I
Write
------------------I---------~
Indent
Hidden Text
Attached Notes
Structured
Number
Global rvoe------------+------------1
Minimum Width
...........::;......----.....
Start Level
End Level
Level
Local
Type
Print
Chart----------------~--------_;~~::::~~~~::::~
File
Insert Mode
Save
Off
Number
Upper
Lower
Roman
Punctuation
PHONEBOOK
SUMMARY WINDOW
Index
Form
Attached Note
Everywhere
Previous
Next
Clear
Dial Method
Parameters
Speed
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
Data Bits
8
7
6
5
Parity
Echo
Script
Background
Hangup
Learn
Activate
Restart Options
Insert Line
Delete Entry
Change Password
Print
Set/Clear Protection
New Glossary
Go to
Previous Entry
Next Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
Sart of Glossary
End of Glossary
Index
Summary Line
Form
Note
Script
Display Dial
Use Number from
Obligatory Characters
Number Lengths
Prefixes
First Glossary Character
Last Glossary Character
Shortcut
Phone Num
Dial Characters
Non-Dial Characters
Tone Character
Pulse Character
Short Delay Character
Delay Character
File Names
Phonebook
Path
Name
Extension
Glossary
Path
Name
Extension
Path
Name
Extension
Go to
Dialogue
Path
Name
Extension
Log
Path
Name
Extension
Transfer
Path
Name
Extension
Previous Entry
Next Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
Start of Phonebook
End of Phonebook
Save Setup
PHONEBOOK
COMMUNICAnONS WINDOW
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
8
7
6
5
Char Delay (1/100 Sec.)
Line Delay (1/100 Sec.)
Sum (Xmodem)
CRC (Xmodem)
Line (CRLF)
None
~
G
V
a
Software
For the dealer nearest you
or to order by phone
Call (800) 543-7543
4585 Scotts Valley Drive
Scotts Valley, CA 95066
BOR 0234A
.11,rlll"l: TIE'.,AIIIE.
IEB".'
IJI~ IIII"~
®
Whether you're running WordStar,® Lotus,® dBASE,®
or any other program, SideKick puts all these desktop
accessories at your fingertips-Instantly!
A full-screen WordStar-like Editor to jot
down notes and edit files up to 25 pages
long.
A Phone Directory for names, addresses,
and telephone numbers. Finding a name or a
number is a snap.
An Autodialer for all your phone calls. It will
look up and dial telephone numbers for you.
(A modem is required to use this function.)
All the SideKick windows stacked up over Lotus 1-2-3.e
From bottom to top: SideKick's "Menu Window," ASCII
Table, Notepad, Calculator, Appointment Calendar, Monthly
Calendar, and Phone Dialer.
A Monthly Calendar from 1901 through
2099.
Appointment Calendar to remind you
of important meetings and appointments.
A full-featured Calculator ideal for
business use. It also performs decimal
to hexadecimal to binary conversions.
An ASCII Table for easy reference.
Here's SideKick running over Lotus 1-2-3. In the
SideKick Notepad you'll notice data that's been imported
directly from the Lotus screen. In the upper right you can
see the Calculator.
The Critics' Choice
"In a simple, beautiful implementation of WordStar's
block copy commands, SideKick can transport all
or any part of the display screen (even an area
overlaid by the notepad display) to the notepad."
-Charles Petzold, PC MAGAZINE
"SideKick deserves a place in every PC."
-Gary Ray, PC WEEK
"SideKick is by far the best we've seen. It is also
the least expensive."
-Ron Mansfield, ENTREPRENEUR
"If you use a PC, get SideKick. You'll soon become
dependent on it."
-Jerry Pournelle, BYTE
Suggested Retail Price: $84.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, XT, AT, PCjr and true compatibles. PC-DOS (MS-DOS) 2.0 or greater. 128K RAM. One disk
drive. A Hayes-compatible modem, IBM PCjr internal modem, or AT&T Modem 4000 is required for the autodialer function.
SideKick is a registered trademark of Borland International, Inc. dBASE is a registered trademark of
Ashton-Tate. IBM, XT, AT, and PCjr are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corp.
AT&T is a registered trademark of American Telephone & Telegraph Company. Lotus and 1-2-3 are
registered trademarks of Lotus Development Corp. WordStar is a registered trademark of MicroPro
International Corp. Hayes is a trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR0060C
RAM-resident
Increased productivity lor IBM@pCs or compatibles
SuperKey's simple macros are electronic shortcuts to success.
By letting you reduce a lengthy paragraph into a single keystroke
01 your choice, SuperKey eliminates repetition.
SuperKey turns 1,000 keystrokes into 11
SuperKey can record lengthy keystroke sequences and play them back at the touch of a single key.
Instantly. Like magic.
In fact, with SuperKey's simple macros, you can turn "Dear Customer: Thank you for your inquiry.
We are pleased to let you know that shipment will be made within 24 hours. Sincerely," into the
one keystroke of your choice!
SuperKey keeps your confidential files-confidential!
Without encryption, your files are open secrets. Anyone can walk up to your PC and read your
confidential files (tax returns, business plans, customer lists, personal letters, etc.).
With SuperKey you can encrypt any file, even while running another program. As long as you keep
the password secret, only you can decode your file correctly. Super Key also implements the U.S.
government Data Encryption Standard (DES).
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
RAM resident-accepts new macro files
even while running other programs
Pull-down menus
Superfast file encryption
Choice of two encryption schemes
On-line context-sensitive help
One-finger mode reduces key
commands to single keystroke
Screen OFF/ON blanks out and restores
screen to protect against "burn in"
Partial or complete reorganization of
keyboard
~
Keyboard buffer increases 16 character
keyboard "type-ahead" buffer to 128
characters
~ Real-time delay causes macro playback
to pause for specified interval
~ Transparent display macros allow
creation of menus on top of application
programs
~ Data entry and format control using
"fixed" or "variable" fields
~ Command stack recalls last 256
characters entered
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, XT, AT, PCjr, and true compatibles. PC-DOS (MS-DOS)
2.0 or greater. 128K RAM. One disk drive.
Super Key is a registered trademark of Borland International, Inc. IBM, Xl, AT. and PCjr are
registered Irademarks of International Business Machines Corp. MS-DOS is a registered
trademark of Microsoft Corp.
BOR 0062C
If you use an IBM® PC, you need
T
U
R
B
0
Lightning®
Turbo Lightning teams up
with the Random House
Concise Word List to
check your spelling as
you type!
Turbo Lightning, using the
BO,OOO-word Random House
Dictionary, checks your spelling
as you type. If you misspell a
word, it alerts you with a
"beep." At the touch of a key,
Turbo Lightning opens a
window on top of your
application program and
suggests the correct spelling.
Just press one key and the
misspelled word is instantly
replaced with the correct word.
Turbo Lightning works
hand-in-hand with the
Random House Thesaurus
to give you instant access
to synonyms
Turbo Lightning lets you
choose just the right word from
a list of alternates, so you
don't say the same thing the
same way every time. Once
Turbo Lightning opens the
Thesaurus window, you see a
list of alternate words; select
the word you want, press
ENTER and your new word will
instantly replace the original
word. Pure magic!
If you ever write a
word, think a word, or
say a word, you need
Turbo Lightning
You can teach Turbo
Lightning new words
You can teach your new Turbo
Lightning your name, business
associates' names, street
names, addresses, correct
capitalizations, and any
specialized words you use
frequently. Teach Turbo
Lightning once, and it
knows forever.
Turbo Lightning is the
engine that powers
Borland's Turbo Lightning
Library®
The Turbo Lightning Proofreader
Turbo Lightning brings
electronic power to the
Random House Concise Word
List and Random House
Thesaurus. They're at your
fingertips-even while you're
running other programs. Turbo
Lightning will also "drive"
soon-to-be-released
encyclopedias, extended
thesauruses, specialized
dictionaries, and many other
popular reference works. You
get a head start with this
first volume in the Turbo
Lightning Library.
The Turbo Lightning Thesaurus
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, Xl, Al, PCjr, and true compatibles with 2 floppy disk drives. PC-DOS (MS-DOS) 2.0 or greater.
256K RAM. Hard disk recommended.
BORLAND
INTERNATIONAL
Turbo Lightning and Turbo Lightning Library are registered trademarks of Borland International, Inc.
IBM, XT, AT, and PCjr are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corp. Random
House is a registered trademark of Random House, Inc
Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR 0070B
Your Development Toolbox and Technical Reference Manual for Thrbo Lightning®
L
I
G
H
T
N
I
N
G
Lightning Word Wizard includes complete, commented Turbo
Pascal® source code and all the technical information you'll
need to understand and work with Turbo Lightning's "engine."
More than 20 fully documented Turbo Pascal procedures
reveal powerful Turbo Lightning engine calls. Harness the full power
of the complete and authoritative Random House® Concise
Word List and Random House Thesaurus.
Turbo Lightning's "Reference
Manual"
The ultimate collection of word
games and crossword solvers!
Developers can use the versatile on-line
examples to harness Turbo Lightning's
power to do rapid word searches. Lightning
Word Wizard is the forerunner of the database access systems that will incorporate
and engineer the Turbo Lightning Library®
of electronic reference works.
The excitement, challenge, competition,
and education of four games and three
solver utilities-puzzles, scrambles, spellsearches, synonym-seekings, hidden words,
crossword solutions, and more. You and
your friends (up to four people total) can
set the difficulty level and contest the highspeed smarts of Lightning Word Wizard!
Turbo Lightning-Critics' Choice
"Lightning's good enough to make programmers and users cheer, executives of other
software companies weep."
Jim Seymour, PC Week
"The real future of Lightning clearly lies not with the spelling checker and thesaurus currently
included, but with other uses of its powerful look-up engine."
Ted Silveira, Profiles
"This newest product from Borland has it all."
Don Roy, Computing Now!
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, XT, AT, PCjr, Portable, and true compatibles. 256K RAM minimum. PC·DOS (MS-DOS) 2.0
or greater. Turbo Lightning software required. Optional-Turbo Pascal 3.0 or greater to edit and compile Turbo Pascal source code.
==
3-
2J
0
BORLAND
INTERNATIONAL
Suggested Retail Price: $69.95
(not copy protected)
Turbo Pascal. Turbo Lightning and Turbo Lightning Library are registered trademarks and Lightning Word Wizard is a trademark of Borland International. Inc. Random
House is a registered trademark of Random House. Inc. IBM. XT. AT. and PCjr are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corp. MS-DOS is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR0087B
'rrl
rll®TIE IATAIA'E
I £r&£II: .AIASE'
The high-performance database manager
that's so advanced it's easy to use!
Lets you organize, analyze and report information faster than ever before! If you manage mailing lists,
customer files, or even your company's budgets.-Reflex is the database manager for you!
Reflex is the acclaimed, high-performance database manager you've been waiting for. Reflex extends
database management with business graphics. Because a picture is often worth a 1000 words, Reflex
lets you extract critical information buried in mountains of data. With Reflex, when you look, you see.
The REPORT VIEW allows you to generate everything from mailing labels to sophisticated reports.
You can use database files created with Reflex or transferred from Lotus 1-2-3,® dBASE,® PFS: File,®
and other applications.
Reflex: The Critics' Choice
"... if you use a PC, you should know about Reflex ... may be the best bargain in software today."
Jerry Pournelle, BYTE
"Everyone agrees that Reflex is the best-looking database they've ever seen."
Adam B. Green, Info World
"The next generation of software has officially arrived."
Peter Norton, PC Week
Reflex: don't use your PC without it!
Join hundreds of thousands of enthusiastic Reflex users and experience the power and ease of use of
Borland's award-winning Reflex.
Suggested Retail Price: $149.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, XT, AT, and true compatibles. 384K RAM minimum. IBM Color Graphics Adapter, Hercules
Monochrome Graphics CArd, or equivalent. PC·DOS (MS· DOS) 2.0 or greater. Hard disk and mouse optional. Lotus 1·2·3, dBASE,
or PFS: File optional.
Reflex is a trademark of Borland/ Analytica Inc. Lotus 1-2-3 is a registered trademark of Lotus
Development Corporation. dBASE is a registered trademark of Ashton-Tate. PFS: File is a
registered trademark of Software Publishing Corporation IBM, XT, AT, and IBM Color Graphics
Adapter are registered trademarks of Internalional Business Machines Corporation. Hercules
Graphics Card is a trademark of Hercules Computer Technology. MS-DOS is a registered
trademark of Microsoft Corp
Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR 0066C
REllEX: '" W'.,I"'"
Includes 22 "instant templates" covering a broad range of
business applications (listed below). Also shows you how to
customize databases, graphs, cross tabs, and reports. /t's an invaluable
analytical tool and an important addition to another one of
our best sellers, Reflex: The Database Manager.
Fast-start tutorial examples:
Learn Reflex@ as you work with practical business applications. The Reflex Workshop Disk supplies
databases and reports large enough to illustrate the power and variety of Reflex features. Instructions in each
Reflex Workshop chapter take you through a step-by-step analysis of sample data. You then follow simple
steps to adapt the files to your own needs.
22 practical business applications:
Workshop's 22 "instant templates" give you a wide range of analytical tools:
Administration
• Tracking Manufacturing Quality Assurance
•
•
•
•
•
Scheduling Appointments
Planning Conference Facilities
Managing a Project
Creating a Mailing System
Managing Employment Applications
Sales and Marketing
•
•
•
•
Researching Store Check Inventory
Tracking Sales Leads
Summarizing Sales Trends
Analyzing Trends
Production and Operations
• Summarizing Repair Turnaround
• Analyzing Product Costs
Accounting and Financial Planning
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tracking Petty Cash
Entering Purchase Orders
Organizing Outgoing Purchase Orders
Analyzing Accounts Receivable
Maintaining Letters of Credit
Reporting Business Expenses
Managing Debits and Credits
Examining Leased Inventory Trends
Tracking Fixed Assets
Planning Commercial Real Estate Investment
Whether you're a newcomer learning Reflex basics or an experienced "power user" looking for tips, Reflex:
The Workshop will help you quickly become an expert database analyst.
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, AT, and XT, and true compatibles. PC-DOS (MS-DOS) 2.0 or greater. 384K RAM minimum. Requires Reflex:
The Database Manager, and IBM Color Graphics Adapter, Hercules Monochrome Graphics Card or equivalent.
Suggested Retail Price: $69.95
(not copy protected)
Reflex is a registered trademark and Reflex: The Workshop is a trademark of Borland/Analytica, Inc. IBM, AT, and XT are registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp. Hercules is a trademark of Hercules Computer Technology. MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR 0088B
TURBB PASCAL
®
VERB'" 4.1
Turbo Pascal 4.0 has all the features
Free MicroCalc spreadsheet
I'urbo Pascal 4.0 now provides an amazing compilation
3peed of 27,000 lines per minute, * support for programs larger than 64K, a library of powerful standard
units, separate compilation, and much more.
The single-pass, native code compiler offers
improved code generation, smart linking to remove
unused code from your programs, built-in project
management, separate compilation using units, output
screen saved in a window, MAP files for use with
standard debuggers, a command-line version of the
compiler and MAKE utility, and built-in support for
8087/80287/80387 math coprocessors.
All these advanced features, plus the integrated
programming environment, online help, and
Borland's famous pull-down menus, make Turbo Pascal 4.0 the high-speed, high-performance development
tool every programmer hopes for.
A conversion program and compatibility units help
you convert all your version 3.0 programs to 4.0.
A new and improved version of the full-fledged
spreadsheet inel uded on your Turbo Pascal disk, absolutely free! You get the complete, revised source code,
ready to compile and run.
Built-in editor
An improved, full-screen editor for editing, compiling,
and finding and correcting errors from inside the integrated development environment. Supports 25, 43, and
50 lines per screen, tabs, colors, and new command
installation.
Interactive error detection
The compiler instantly locates errors, automatically
activates the editor, and shows you the location of the
error in the source code.
Other '/echnical Features:
Several powerful standard units (System Dos, Crt,
and Graph)
o Device-independent graphics support for CGA,
MCGA, EGA, VGA, Hercules, AT&T 6300, and IBM
3270 PC
o Extended data types, incl uding Longlnt
o Optional range- and stack-checking; short-circuit
Boolean expression eval uation
o Support for in line statements, in line macros, and
powerful assembly language interface
o Faster software-only floating pOint; toggle switch for
80x87 support including Single, Double,
Extended, and Comp IEEE reals (with numeric
coprocessor)
o Automatic execution of initialization and exit code for
each unit
o Nested include files up to 8 levels deep, including
main module and units
o Operating system calls and interrupts
o Interrupt procedure support for ISRs
o Variable and val ue typecasting
o Shell to DOS transfer
o
Suggested retail price $99.95
(not copy protected)
Minimum system requirements: For the IBM PS/2 and the IBM" and Compaq" families of persmal computers and all 100% compatibles. Integrated
environment: 384K; command line: 256K; one flq:>py drive.
N
Pick list
Lets you pick a file from a list of the last eight files
loaded into the editor and opens it at the exact spot
where you last edited the file. It even remembers your
last search string and search options.
*Run on an 8MHz IBM AT
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Borland International, Inc
Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders. Copyright "1987 Borland International, Inc.
BOR 0506A
TURBO PASCAI® TUTOR
VERBIIN 4.0
Borland's Turbo Pascal Tutor is everything you need to start programming in
Turbo Pascal. It takes you from the
bare basics to advanced techniques in
a simple, easy-to-understand fashion.
Now you can learn Pascal from the industry's
top authority: Borland International. maker of
Turbo Pascal. Borland's Turbo Pascal Tutor is the
comprehensive Pascal learning package you've
been waiting for. It consists of a manual that takes
you from the basics up to the most advanced tricks.
and a disk containing sample programs as well as
learning exercises.
Turbo Pascal Tutor comes with thousands of
lines of commented source code on disk. ready for
you to compile and run. Files include all the sample programs from the manual as well as several
advanced examples dealing with window management. binary trees. and real-time animation.
The Turbo Pascal Tutor manual perfectly complements the disk exercises: It is designed as both
a quick reference and a study guide to new topics.
The manual consists of three parts:
Part II: A Programmer's Guide to
Turbo Pascal
This section covers the specifics of Turbo Pascal:
program structure. data types. control structures.
procedures. functions. arrays. strings. records.
sets. pointers. dynamic allocation. files. and-last
but not least-units (an important addition to
Turbo Pascal 4.0). Bringing all these concepts
together. th~.section culminates in an explanation
of a working program: the Turbo TYPIST program
(which is also provided on disk).
Part III: Advanced Programming.
This high-powered section of the Tutor takes you
through such sophisticated topics as stacks. queues.
lists. binary trees. graphs. and linked structures.
Sorting and searching techniques follow. as do sections on typed constants. numbering systems. and
Boolean integer operations.
Technical Features
o
o
o
o
Includes disk and 400-page manual
Covers all aspects of Turbo Pascal programming
Describes the advanced features of
Turbo Pascal 4.0
Useful for both novice and experienced
programmers
Thousands of lines of fully commented example
programs
Part I: Turbo Pascal for the
Absolute Novice.
o
This quick-start tutorial gives you a concise history
of computer programming languages. an explanation of computer functions. and a summary of how
to write. compile. and run Turbo Pascal programs.
Suggested retail price: $69.95
(not copy protected)
Minimum system requirements: For the IBM PS/2 and the IBM 8 and
Compaq8 families of personal computers and all 100% compatibles. pem
DOS (MS-DOS") 2.0 or later. 256K memory. Turbo Pascal 4.0 or later.
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Borland International. Inc. A
8
Borland Turbo Tutor product. Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders. Copyright ~1987 Borland International. Inc.
BOR 0525A
'URBO PABCAI®
DATABASE TBBIBBX
VERSION 4.6
With the Turbo Pascal Database
Toolbox you can build your own
powerful, professional-quality database programs. And like all other
Borland Toolboxes, it's advanced
enough for professional programmers
yet easy enough for beginners.
Ready-to-use modules
The Toolbox enhances your programming with
two problem-solving modules: Turbo Access and
Turbo Sort.
Turbo Sort uses the Quicksort method to sort
data on single items or on multiple keys. Features
virtual memory management for sorting large
data files. (Commented source code is included
on the disk.)
Free sample data base
Included is a free sample database with source
code. Just compile it, and it's ready to go to work
for you-you can use it as is or customize it. You
can search the database by keywords or numbers,
and update, add or delete records, as needed.
Saves you time and money
If you're a professional programmer writing
software for databases or other applications where
search-and-sort capabilities are important, we can
save you time and money. Instead of writing the
same tedious but essential routines over and over
again, you can simply include any of the Toolbox's
modules in your own compiled programs.
Technical Features
o
o
o
Turbo Pascal Access quickly locates, inserts, or
deletes records in a database using B+ trees-the
fastest method for finding and retrieving database
information. (Source code is included.)
Trainer is a demonstration program that graphically displays how B+ trees work. You can key in
sample records and see a visual index of B+ trees
being built.
The Toolbox also includes routines for importing
and exporting Reflex® database files to use with
your database programs.
o
o
o
Maximum data/index files open: 15 files
Maximum file size: unlimited
Maximum record size: 64K
Maximum number of records: +2 billion
Maximum key size: 256 bytes
Maximum number of keys: +2 billion
Suggested retail price $99.95
(not copy protected)
Minimum system requirements: For the IBM PS/2~ and the IBM® and
Compaq'" families of personal computers and all 100% compatibles running Turbo Pascal 4.0. PC-DOS (MS-OOS®) 2.0 or later. Memory: 256K.
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Borland International. Inc
Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders. A Borland Turbo Toolbox" product. Copyright © 1987 Borland International
BOR 0576
',RBII 'UCAI®
SRAPH'X TOOLBOX
VERBIDN 4.D
Even if you're new to Turbo Pascal programming, the Turbo Pascal Graphix
Tholbox will get you started
immediately.
It's a collection of tools that will get you right
into the fascinating world of high-resolution business graphics, including graphics window management. You get immediate, satisfying results. And
you never have to pay royalties-even if you distribute your own compiled programs that include
all or part of the Turbo Pascal Graphix 'Ibolbox
procedures.
The Tholbox Includes
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Commented source code on disk.
Tools for drawing simple graphics.
Tools for drawing complex graphics, including
curves with optional smoothing.
Routines that let you store and restore graphic
images to and from disk.
Tools allowing you to send screen images to
Epson®-compatible printers.
Full graphics window management
Two different font styles for graphic labeling
Choice of line-drawing styles
Suggested retail price $99.95
(not copy protected)
o
o
Routines that will let you quickly plot functions
and model experimental data.
Routines that are structured into Pascal units so
you don't have to recompile the toolbox code
everytime you use it.
If you ever plan to create Turbo Pascal programs
that make use of business graphics or scientific
graphics, you need the Turbo Pascal Graphix
'Ibolbox.
" While most people only talk about lowcost personal computer software, Borland has
been dOing something about it. And Borland
provides good technical support as part of the
price.
John Markov & Paul Freiberger,
syndicated columnists. "
Minimum system requirements: For the IBM PS/2N. and the IBW and
CompaQe families of personal computers and all 100% compatibles. Thrbo
Pascal 4.0 or later. 256K RAM minimum. Two disk drives and an IBM
Color Graphics Adapter (CGA), IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter (EGA),
IBM 3270 PC, ATI 6300, or Hercules Graphics Card or compatible.
~1~~~I~~~diu;~~~~/~~~r~~~:~k~~~~~~:~~~e~n~agr:;~~~sn~~~~r~r~dt:~~~~~;~~~~ Inc.
egistered trademarks of their respective holders. Copyright C1987 Borland International,
Inc.
BOR 0492
TURBO PABCAI®
EBITOR TOOLBOX
VERBION 4.1
Build your own text editor or word
processor with the Turbo Pascal
Editor Tholbox routines
Turbo Pascal Editor Toolbox gives you three different text editors. You get the code, the manual, and
the know-how. We provide all the editing routines.
You plug in the features you want. You can build a
WordStar®-like editor, with pull-down menus like
Microsoft Word®, and make it as fast as
WordPerfect®.
D
D
D
This is what you'll get
MicroStar: A full-blown text editor with a
complete pull-down menu user interface.
FirstEd: A complete editor equipped with block
commands, windows, and memory-mapped
screen routines
Binary Editor: Written in assembly language, a
"black box" that you can easily incorporate into
your programs.
To demonstrate the tremendous power of Turbo
Pascal Editor Toolbox, we give you the source code
for MicroStar and FirstEd, optimized for Turbo
Pascal 4.0.
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
MicroStar gives you
An easy-to-use pull-down menu user interface.
A RAM-based editor that handles very large files
at lightning speed.
Multiple text windows, up to 6 on screen at once.
Colors you can install and customize, then save
your setup.
Shell to DOS-execute system commands without
leaving the editor.
Online context-sensitive help system.
Spell-checking with Turbo Lightning macrosuse the standard set or create your own.
MicroStar gives you all the convenience and
standard features of any advanced word processor,
plus more.
D
D
D
D
D
Easy installation and operation
Adjustable/"smart" tab toggle
Search, replace, and search/apply macro options
Background printing
Print formatting commands
" A 'write your own word processor'
program for intermediate-level programmers,
with lots of help in the form of prewritten
procedures covering everything from word
wrap to pull-down windows.
Peter Feldmann, PC Magazine "
Best of all, you get the source code!
Include Turbo Pascal Editor Toolbox
routines in your programs.
And pay no royalties.
Suggested retail price $99.95
(not copy protected)
Minimum system requirements: The Turbo Pascal Editor Toolbox requires
an IBM PC. XT. AT. Portable. 3270. PCjr. or Compaq or any true compatibles with a minimum of 256K. running PC-DOS (MS-DOS~) 2.0 or greater.
You must be using Turbo Pascal 4.0 for IBM. Compaq and compatibles.
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Borland International, Inc
A Borland Turbo Toolbox~ product. Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Copyright@1985, 1987 Borland International,
Inc
BOR 0587
TIIRBO PABCAI®
BAMErORI8®
VERB'" 4.0
Three computer games ready to play,
learn, or modify.
Explore the world of state-of-the-art computer
games with Turbo Pascal GameWorks. Using easyto-understand examples, Turbo Pascal GameWorks
teaches you techniques to quickly create your own
computer games. Or, for instant excitement, play
the games we've included on disk-compiled and
ready-to-run.
Turbo Chess
Test your chess-playing skills against your computer challenger. With Turbo Pascal GameWorks,
you're on your way to becoming a master chess
player. Explore the complete Turbo Pascal source
code and discover the secrets of Turbo Chess.
" What impressed me the most was the fact
that with this program you can become a computer chess analyst. You can add new variations to the program at any time and make the
program play stronger and stronger chess.
There's no limit to the fun and enjoyment of
playing Turbo GameWorks' Chess, and most
important of all, with this chess program,
there's no limit to how it can help you
improve your game.
George Koltanowski, former President
of the United Chess Federation "
Turbo Bridge
Now play the world's most popular card gamebridge. Play one-on-one with your computer or
play against up to three other opponents. With
Turbo Pascal source code, you can even program
your own bidding or scoring conventions.
" There has never been a bridge program
written which plays at the expert level, and
the ambitious user will enjoy tackling that
challenge, with the format already structured
in the program. And for the inexperienced
player, the br-idge program provides an easyto-follow format that allows the user to start
right out playing. The user can 'play bridge'
against real competition without having to
gather three other people."
Kit Woolsey, twice champion of the
Blue Ribbon Pairs "
Turbo Go-Moku
Prepare for battle when you challenge your computer to a game of Go-Moku-the exciting strategy
game also known as "Pente"'·. In this battle of
wits, you and the computer take turns placing X's
and O's on a grid of 19 X 19 squares until five
pieces are lined up in a row. Vary the game if you
like, using the source code available on your disk.
Suggested retail price $99.95
(not copy protected)
Minimum system requirements: IBM PS/2, PC, XT, AT, Portable, 3270,
PCjr, and Compaq and true compatibles with 192K system memory, running PC-DOS (MS-DOS"') 2.0 or later. To edit and compile the Turbo Pascal source code, you must be using Turbo Pascal 4.0.
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Borland International, Inc
Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders. Copyright@1987 Borland International, Inc.
BaR 0574
TURBI PABCAI®
NUMERICAL IETHOBS TlBIBBI
VERBIIN 4.1
New from Borland's Scientific &
Engineering Division, Turbo Pascal
Numerical Methods Toolbox implements the latest high-level mathematical methods to solve common
scientific and engineering problems.
Fast.
Whenever you need to calculate an integral,
work with Fourier Transforms or incorporate any
of the classic numerical analysis tools into your
programs, you won't have to reinvent the wheel.
The Numerical Methods Toolbox is a complete collection of Turbo Pascal routines and programs that
gives you applied state-of-the-art math tools.
It also includes two graphics demo programs,
Least Squares Fit and Fast Fourier Transforms, to
give you the picture along with the numbers.
The Numerical Methods Toolbox is a must for
you if you're involved with any type of scientific or
engineering computing. Because it comes with
complete source code, you have total control of
your application.
What Numerical Methods Toolbox
can do for you:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Find solutions to equations
Interpolations
Calculus: numerical derivatives and integrals
Matrix operations: inversions, determinants,
and eigenval ues
Differential equations
Least squares approximations
Fourier transforms
Five free ways to look at "Least
Squares Fit"!
As well as a free demo "Fast Fourier Transforms," you also get "Least Squares Fit" in 5 different forms-which gives you 5 different methods
of fitting curves to a collection of data points.
The different forms are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Power
Exponential
Logarithm
5-term Fourier
5-term Polynomial
They're all ready to compile and run "as is." To
modify or add graphics to your own programs, you
simply add Turbo Pascal Graphix Toolbox (version
4.0 or later) to your software library. Our Numerical Methods Toolbox is designed to work hand-inhand with our Graphix Toolbox to make professional graphics in your own programs an instant
part of the picture!
Suggested retail price $99.95
(not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: For the IBM PS/2". and the IBM~ and
personal computers and all 100% compatibles. PCor later. 256K. Turbo Pascal 4.0 or later. The graphics modules require a graphics monitor with an IBM eGA, IBM EGA,
IBM 3270 PC, ATT 6300. or Hercules compatible adapter card, and
require the Turbo Pascal Graphix Toolbox version 4.0 or later. An 8087
or 80287 numeric coprocessor is not required, but recommended for
optimal performance. Apple Macintosh version of this program is also
available.
Compaq~ families of
DOS (MS-OOS~) 2.0
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Borland International. Inc. A
Borland Turbo Toolbox" product. Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Copyright ~1987 Borland International
BOR 0490A
TURBO
the natural language of ArtifICial Intelligence
Turbo Prolog brings fifth-generation supercomputer
power to your IBM®PC!
Turbo Prolog takes
programming into a new,
natural, and logical
environment
With Turbo Prolog,
because of its natural,
logical approach, both
people new to programming
and professional programmers
can build powerful applications such as expert systems,
customized knowledge
bases, natural language
interfaces, and smart
information management systems.
Turbo Prolog is a declarative language which
uses deductive reasoning to solve
programming problems.
Turbo Prolog's development system
includes:
D A complete Prolog compiler that is a variation
of the Clocksin and Mellish Edinburgh
standard Prolog.
D A full-screen interactive editor.
D Support for both graphic and text windows.
D All the tools that let you build your own
expert systems and AI applications with
unprecedented ease.
--..::..
---=-
BORLAND
INTERNATIONAL
Turbo Prolog provides
a fully integrated programming environment
like Borland's Turbo
Pascal,® the de facto
worldwide standard.
You get the
complete Turbo
Prolog programming
system
You get the 200-page
manual you're holding,
software that includes
the lightning-fast Turbo
Prolog six-pass
compiler and interactive editor, and the
free GeoBase natural query language
database, which includes commented
source code on disk, ready to compile.
(GeoBase is a complete database de-signed
and developed around U.S. geography.
You can modify it or use it "as is.")
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, Xl, AT, Portable, 3270, PCjr
and true compatibles. PC-DOS (MS-DOS) 2.0 or later. 384K RAM
minimum.
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95
(not copy protected)
Turbo Prolog is a trademark and Turbo Pascal is a registered trademark of Borland International. Inc.
IBM, AT, XT, and PCjr are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corp. MS-DOS is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR 0016D
Enhances Turbo Prolog with more than 80 tools
and over 8,000 lines 01 source code
Turbo Prolog, the natural language of Artificial Intelligence, is the
most popular AI package in the world with more than 100,000 users.
Our new Turbo Prolog Toolbox extends its possibilities.
The Turbo Prolog Toolbox enhances Turbo Prolog-our 5th-generation computer programming
language that brings supercomputer power to your IBM PC and compatibles-with its more than 80
tools and over 8,000 lines of source code that can be incorporated into your programs, quite easily.
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
Turbo Prolog Toolbox features include:
Business graphics generation: boxes, circles, ellipses, bar charts, pie charts, scaled graphics
Complete communications package: supports XModem protocol
File transfers from Reflex,® dBASE III,® Lotus 1-2-3,® Symphony®
A unique parser generator: construct your own compiler or query language
Sophisticated user -interface design tools
40 example programs
Easy-to-use screen editor: design your screen layout and I/O
Calculated fields definition
Over 8,000 lines of source code you can incorporate into your own programs
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, XT, AT or true compatibles. PC-DOS (MS-DOS) 2.0 or later. Requires Turbo Prolog 1.10
or higher. Dual-floppy disk drive or hard disk. 512K.
Turbo Prolog Toolbox and Turbo Prolog are trademarks of Borland Internalional, Inc. Reflex
is a registered trademark of Borland/Analylica, Inc. dBASE III is a registered trademark of
Ashton-Tate. Lotus 1-2-3 and Symphony are registered trademarks of Lotus Development
Corp. IBM, XT, and AT are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corp.
MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
BOR 0240
Includes tree
MicroCalc spreadsheet
with source code
A complete interactive development environment
With Turbo C, you can expect what only Borland delivers:
Quality, Speed, Power and Price. And with its compilation
speed of more than 7000 lines a minute, Turbo C makes
everything else look like an exercise in slow motion.
Turbo C: The C compiler for both amateurs and professionals
If you're just beginning and you've "kinda wanted to learn C," now's your chance to do it the easy way.
Turbo C's got everything to get you going. If you're already programming in C, switching to Turbo C will
considerably increase your productivity and help make your programs both smaller and faster.
Turbo C: a complete interactive development environment
Like Turbo Pascal@ and Turbo Prolog,T. Turbo C comes with an interactive editor that will show
you syntax errors right in your source code. Developing, debugging, and running a Turbo C
program is a snap!
Technical Specifications
[Y' Compiler: One-pass compiler generating native inline code, linkable object modules and assembler.
The object module format is compatible with the
PC-DOS linker. Supports small, medium, compact,
large, and huge memory model libraries. Can mix
models with near and far pointers. Includes
floating point emulator (utilizes 8087/80287 if
installed).
[iY' Interactive Editor: The system includes a powerful,
interactive full-screen text editor. If the compiler
detects an error, the editor automatically positions
the cursor appropriately in the source code.
[iY' Development Environment: A powerful "Make" is
included so that managing Turbo C program
development is easy. Borland's fast "Turbo
Linker" is also included. Also includes pull-down
menus and windows. Can run from the environment or generate an executable file.
[Y' Links with relocatable object modules created
using Borland's Turbo Prolog into a
single program.
[Y' ANSI C compatible.
~ Start-up routine ~ource ~ode included ..
~ Both. co~mand line and Integrated environment
versions Included.
"Sieve" benchmark (25 iterations)
Turbo C
Microsoft@ C
Lattice C
3.89
16.37
13.90
Compile and link time
9.94
29.06
27.79
Execution time
9.51
13.79
Object code size
5.77
274
297
301
Price
$99.95
$450.00
$500.00
Compile time
Benchmark run on a 6 Mhz IBM AT using Turbo eversion 1.0 and the Turbo Linker version 1.0; Microsoft eversion 4.0 and the
MS overlay linker version 3.51; Lattice eversion 3.1 and the MS object linker version 3.05.
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, XT, AT and true compatibles. PC-DOS (MS-DOS) 2.0 or later. One floppy drive. 320K.
Turbo C and Turbo Pascal are registered trademarks and Turbo Prolog is a trademark of Borland
Internationat. Inc. Microsoft C and MS-DOS ae registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. Lattice C
is a registered trademark of Lattice. Inc. IBM. XT, and AT are registered trademarks of International
Business Machines Corp
BOR 0243
1UIIII IABIC®
The high-speed BASIC you've been waiting for!
You probably know us for our Turbo Pascal® and Turbo Prolog.® Well, we've done
it again! We've created Turbo Basic, because BASIC doesn't have to be slow.
If BASIC
taught you how to walk, Turbo Basic will teach you how to run!
With Turbo Basic, your only speed is "Full Speed Ahead"! Turbo Basic is a complete development envir0nment with an amazingly fast compiler, an interactive editor and a trace debugging system. And because
Turbo Basic is also compatible with BASICA, chances are that you already know how to use Turbo Basic.
Turbo Basic ends the basic confusion
There's now one standard: Turbo Basic. And because Turbo Basic is a Borland product, the price is right,
the quality is there, and the power is at your fingertips. Turbo Basic is part of the fast-growing Borland
family of programming languages we call the "Turbo Family." And hundreds of thousands of users are
already using Borland's languages. So, welcome to a whole new generation of smart PC users!
Free spreadsheet included with source code!
Yes, we've included MicroCalc,'· our sample spreadsheet, complete with source code. So you can get
started right away with a "real program." You can compile and run it "as is," or modify it.
A technical look at Turbo Basic
executable program, with separate windows
for editing, messages, tracing, and execution
S' Compile and run-time errors place you in
source code where error occurred
cessor integration. Software emulation if no
S'
Access to local, static and global variables
8087 present
S' Program size limited only by available
S' New long integer (32-bit) data type
memory (no 64K limitation)
S' Full 80-bit precision
S' EGA, CGA, MCGA and VGA support
S' Pull-down menus
S' Full integration of the compiler, editor, and
S' Full window management
S' Full recursion supported
S' Standard IEEE floating-point format
S' Floating-point support, with full 8087 copro-
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, AT. XT. PS/2 or true compatibles 320K. One floppy drive. PC-DOS (MS-DOS) 2.0 or later.
Turbo Basic, Turbo Prolog and Turbo Pascal are registered trademarks and MicroCalc is a trademark of Borland International, Inc. Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR 02658
TIIBIB IABIC®
DATABASE TlIlIlBIIK'"
With the Turbo Basic Database Toolbox you can build your own
powerful, professional-quality database programs. And like al/ other
Borland Toolboxes, it's advanced enough for professional
programmers yet easy enough for beginners.
Three ready-to-use modules
The Toolbox enhances your programming with three problem-solving
modules:
Turbo Access quickly locates, inserts,
or deletes records in a database using
B+ trees-the fastest method for finding
and retrieving database information.
(Source code is included.)
Turbo Sort uses the Quicksort
method to sort data on single items
or on multiple keys. Features virtual
memory management for sorting large
data files. (Commented source code
is on disk.)
TRAINER is a demonstration program
that graphically displays how B+ trees
work. You can key in sample records and
see a visual index of B+ trees being
built.
Free sample database
Included is a free sample database
with source code. Just compile it, and it's
ready to go to work for you-you can
use it as is or customize it. You can
search the database by keywords or
numbers, update records, or add and
delete them, as needed.
Saves you time and money
If you're a professional programmer
writing software for databases or other
applications where search-and-sort capabilities are important, we can save you
time and money. Instead of writing the
same tedious but essential routines over
and over again, you can simply include
any of the Toolbox's modules
in your own compiled programs.
Technical Features
@ Maximum number of files open: 15 files,
or 7 data sets
@ Maximum file size: 32 Mb
@ Maximum record size: 32K
@ Maximum number of records: +2 billion
@ Maximum field size: 32K
@ Maximum key size: 128 bytes
@ Maximum number of keys: +2 billion
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system requirements: For the IBM PS/2 and the IBM'" and Compaq@ families of personal computers and all 100% compatibles, running
Turbo Basic 1.0. PC-DOS (MS-DOS"') 2.0 or later. Memory: 640K.
All Borland products are regislered Irademarks or Irademarks of Borland
Internalional, Inc. or Borland/ Analytica, Inc. A Borland Turbo Toolbox producl. Other brand and product names are Irademarks or regislered Irademarks 01 their respeclive holders. Copyrighl 1987 Borland Inlernational
BOR 0384A
1URIII IABIC®
EI11111 11111lllll"
With Turbo Basic we gave you the fastest BASIC around. Now the
Turbo Basic Editor Toolbox will help you build your own superfast
editor to incorporate into your Turbo Basic programs. We provide all
the editing routines. You plug in the features you want!
Two sample editors with source code
To demonstrate the tremendous power of the Toolbox, we've included two sample editors
with complete source code:
Firs tEd. A complete editor with windows, block commands, and memory-mapped screen
routines, all ready to include in your programs.
MicroSta"": A full-blown text editor with a pull-down menu user interface and all the standard
features you'd expect in any word processor. Plus features other word processors can't begin
to match:
@' RAM-based editor for superfast editing
@' View and edit up to eight windows at a
time
@' Support for line, stream, and column
block mode
@' Instant paging, scrolling, and text
display
@' Up to eight hidden buffers at a time to
edit, swap, and call text from
g
g
g
g
Multitasking to let you print in the
"background"
Keyboard installation for customizing
command keys
Custom designing of colors for text,
windows, menus, and status line
Support for DOS functions like Copy
file, Delete file, Change directory, and
Change logged drive
Build the word processor of your choice!
We give you easy-to-install modules. Use them to build yourself a full-screen editor with
pull-down menus, and make it work as fast as most word processors-without having to
spend hundreds of dollars!
Source code for everything in the Toolbox is provided. Use any of its features in your own
Turbo Basic programs or in programs you develop for others. You don't even have to pay
royalties!
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system requirements: For the IBM PS/2" and the IBM" and Compaq'· families of personal computers and all 100%
compatibles running Turbo Basic 10. PC-DOS (MS-DOS@) 2.0 or greater. Memory: 640K.
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Borland
International, Inc. or Borland/ Analytica, Inc. Other brand and product names
are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. A Borland Turbo Too/box product. Copyright 1987 Borland International BOR 0383
EIIEIA: "E "lVEI'·
The solution to your most complex
equations-in seconds!
If you're a scientist, engineer, financial analyst, student, teacher, or any other professional working with
equations, Eureka: The Solver can do your Algebra, Trigonometry and Calculus problems in a snap.
Eureka also handles maximization and minimization problems, plots functions, generates reports, and
saves an incredible amount of time. Even if you're not a computer specialist, Eureka can help you
solve your real-world mathematical problems fast, without having to learn numerical approximation
techniques. Using Borland's famous pull-down menu design and context-sensitive help screens, Eureka
is easy to learn and easy to use-as simple as a hand-held calculator.
X + exp(X)
= 10 solved instantly instead of eventually!
Imagine you have to "solve for X," where X + exp(X) = 10, and you don't have Eureka: The Solver.
What you do have is a problem, because it's gOing to take a lot of time guessing at "X." With Eureka,
there's no guessing, no dancing in the dark-you get the right answer, right now. (PS: X = 2.0705799,
and Eureka solved that one in .4 of a second!)
How to use Eureka: The Solver
It's easy.
You can then tell Eureka to
1. Enter your equation into the
• Evaluate your solution
full-screen editor
• Plot a graph
2. Select the "Solve" command
• Generate a report, then send the output
3. Look at the answer
to your printer, disk file or screen
4. You're done
• Or all of the above
Some of Eureka's key features
You can key in:
~ A formula or formulas
~ A series of equations-and solve for
all variables
~ Constraints (like X has to be
< or = 2)
~ A function to plot
~ Unit conversions
~ Maximization and minimization problems
~ Interest Rate/Present Value calculations
~ Variables we call "What happens?," like
"What happens if I change this variable to
21 and that variable to 277"
Minimum system configuration: IBM PC, AT, XT, PS/2, Portable,
3270 and true compatibles. PC-DOS (MS-DOS) 2.0 and
later. 384K.
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
Eureka: The Solver includes
A full-screen editor
Pull-down menus
Context-sensitive Help
On-screen calculator
Automatic 8087 math co-processor
chip support
Powerful financial functions
Built-in and user -defined math and
financial functions
Ability to generate reports complete with
plots and lists
Polynomial finder
Inequality solutions
Suggested Retail Price: $167.00
(not copy protected)
Eureka: The Solver is a trademark of Borland International, Inc. IBM, AT, and XT are registered
trademarks of International Business Machines Corp. MS-DOS is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corp. Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR 0221 B
OUATTRO~
THE PROFESSIONAL SPREADSHEET
Borland's super graphic new generation spreadsheet: Twice the power at
half the price! 'len types of presentation-quality graphs. Compatible with
1-2-3®, dBASE®, Paradox® and other
spreadsheets and databases.
Quattro, Borland's new generation professional
spreadsheet, proves there are better and faster
ways to get your work done-whether it's graphics, recalculations, macros, or search and sort.
Presentation-quality graphics
Quattro has excellent built-in graphics capabilities that help you create a wide variety of graphs.
Bar graphs, line graphs, pie charts, XY graphs,
area charts-you can create up to 10 types of
graphs, and print them directly from the spreadsheet or store them for future use.
Smarter recalculation
When a formula needs to be recalculated,
Quattro uses "intelligent recalc" to recalculate
only those formulas whose elements have changed.
This makes Quattro smarter and faster than other
spreadsheets.
Greater macro capability
Direct compatibility
Quattro can directly load and use data files
created with other spreadsheet and database programs like 1-2-3, dBASE, and Paradox. Quattro can
read and even write WKS, WK1, and WKE files. You
can also import ASCII and other text files into the
spreadsheet.
Easy installation
Quattro can detect most computers and screen
types, so it's always ready to load and run!
Plus, like all other Borland products, Quattro is
not copy protected!
'lechnical Features
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Understands your 1-2-3 macros
100 built-in financial and statistical functions
Menu Builder add-in for customizing menus
Supports 8087/80287 math coprocessors
Supports EGA, CGA, and VGA graphics adapters
Pop-up menus
Shortcuts to menu commands
Context-sensitive online help
Three types of choice lists: @functions and syntax, macro commands, and existing block names
Pointing lets you specify a block of cells using
arrow keys
Search (or Query) lets you find specific records
or cells
Lets you arrange/rearrange data in alphabetical,
numerical, or chronological order
Supports Expanded Memory Specification to
create spreadsheets larger than 640K
Supports PostScript'" printers and typesetters
You can create macros instantly by recording
your actions and storing them in the spreadsheet.
The number of macros is limited only by memory.
A built-in macro debugging environment makes it
easy to find and correct problem areas. Quattro
also includes a set of over 40 macro commands
which make up a programming language.
o
Suggested retail price $199.95
(not copy protected)
Quattro and Paradox are trademarks of Borland International. Inc. Lotus and 1·2-3 are registered trademarks of Lotus Development Corp. Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Copyright ~1987 Borland Interna c
tional. Inc
BOR 0414A
o
o
Minimum system requirements: For the IBM PS/2~ and the IBM" and
Compaq" families of personal computers and all 100% compatibles. PCDOS (MS-DOS") 2.0 or later. Two floppies or a hard disk. 384K.
"'lrn~II'PII® TilE IIEID""
IJJ IIln...n: "RWIIER Release 2.0
Macintosh'·
The most complete and comprehensive collection of
desk accessories available for your Macintosh!
Thousands of users already know that SideKick is the best collection of desk accessories available
for the Macintosh. With our new Release 2.0, the best just got better.
We've just added two powerful high-performance tools to SideKick-Outlook": The Outliner
and MacPlan": The Spreadsheet. They work in perfect harmony with each other and while you
run other programs!
Out/ook: The Outliner
• It's the desk accessory with more power than a stand-alone outliner
• A great desktop publishing tool, Outlook lets you incorporate both text and graphics
into your outlines
• Works hand-in-hand with MacPlan
• Allows you to work on several outlines at the same time
•
•
•
•
•
MacPlan: The Spreadsheet
Integrates spreadsheets and graphs
Does both formulas and straight numbers
Graph types include bar charts, stacked bar charts, pie charts and line graphs
Includes 12 example templates free!
Pastes graphics and data right into Outlook creating professional memos and reports, complete
with headers and footers.
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
SideKick: The Desktop Organizer,
Release 2.0 now includes
Outlook: The Outliner
MacPlan: The Spreadsheet
Mini word processor
Calendar
Phone Log
Analog clock
Alarm system
Calculator
Report generator
Telecommunications (new version now
supports XModem file transfer protocol)
II
13.67~ SaI!S /I,
015.9415 SahB
a
o
•
"?;l.6115 Tola1 Rwo!nut'$
""
IN Expff1ses
o
0.31911 Labor
[]
4661<1 Haleruk
~
o
IJ
III
6.219a Qv!rhtad
11.IS$ Total Exp«lses
""
18.43%rletProfil
MacPlan does both spreadsheets and business
graphs. Paste them into your Outlook files and
generate professional reports.
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system configurations: Macintosh 512K or Macintosh Plus with one disk drive. One BOOK or two 400K drives are recommended.
With one 400K drive, a limited number of desk accessories will be installable per disk.
SideKick is a registered trademark and Outlook and MacPlan are trademarks of Borland
International, Inc. Macintosh is a trademark of Mcintosh Laboratory, Inc. licensed to Apple
Computer, Inc. Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR 00690
BEllEX® PlUS:
.'£::IA'ASE
I.ri.t.,t
™
All the Power & Flexibility 01 a Relational Database Made Easy!
Reflex Plus: The Database Manager is the first relational database that's
easy to learn, powerful, and aimed at your needs. Reflex Plus is
not a mere file organizer, nor is it a monstrously complicated behemoth
aimed solely at consultants. Reflex Plus is the only relational database
aimed at your needs and time constraints.
Reflex Plus accomplishes this by taking full advantage of the
Macintosh's superior graphic ability while still giving users what
they want unlimited flexibility in creating databases, accessing
data, and producing reports.
What puts the plus into Reflex Plus?
Borland listens to its customers and has added the mostasked-for features and improvements to Reflex Plus.
High-powered features of Reflex Plus:
@ Multiple entry forms for the same database.
@ Entry for more than one database in a single entry form.
@ Your choice of having an entry form that shows one record
at a time, or one that shows all the records at once.
@ Calculated fields in entry forms.
@ Display-only fields.
@ Default (but editable) fields.
@ New functions like GROUPBY, which lets you easily show
records grouped by values in common.
@ A selection of useful templates.
@ Larger record size. (You can now choose record sizes of
1000, 2000, or 4000 characters.)
Check out these Reflex Plus features:
@ Visual database deSign.
@ A "what you see is what you get" design capability both
for entry forms and reports.
@ Compatible with all Macintoshes with at least 512K,
including the SE'·, and Macintosh 11.'·
The heart of Reflex Plus is in its special functions with
which you create formulas. With over 50 function words to
choose from, you are given all the power of programming without struggling with complex syntax. Reflex Plus functions are
straightforward and can handle all types of data.
Armed with these functions, you create formulas that
sort, search, calculate, quantify, qualify-you name it And if
you don't feel up to writing the formula yourself, Reflex Plus
will do it for you. Using the FormulaBuild dialog box, you can
master even the most complicated formula.
Display grouped data. Reflex Plus gives you unlimited
flexibility when you want to display your data grouped in meaningful ways.
Flexible entry forms. Most databases have a data entry
form, and that's that Reflex Plus lets you design your own (but
if you don't want to bother, Reflex Plus will make one for you).
Here are just some of the options available in your entry forms:
@ View all records at once.
@ View one record at a time.
@ Enter data into many databases at once.
@ Use calculated fields.
g Default values in fields, display-only values, and lots more.
Convenience and Ease
g Preset entry forms. Let Reflex Plus create an entry
form for you.
g Preset reports. Let Reflex Plus create a table-style
report for you.
g Paste Formula command. Let Reflex Plus guide you
through the steps of creating formulas for power searching
and data manipulation,
g On-line help facility. Reflex Plus has an extensive onscreen, context -sensitive help feature.
@ Paste ChOice command. This command lets you paste
in fields that duplicate all the attributes of another field. A
great time saver. The command also lets you build formulas by pointing and clicking.
g Auto-save. You'll never lose data again with Reflex
Plus's auto-save feature.
Database specifications: Maximum single field length 4072 bytes. Maximum fields per record 254. Maximum record length: 4080 bytes
Maximum records per file limited only by disk capacity. Maximum number of linked database files: 200. Maximum number of open windows:
15. Maximum number of files that can be used by a report no limit.
Suggested Retail Price: $279.00 (not copy protected)
Minimum system requirements: Runs on any Macintosh with at least 512K memory Minimum setup is one BOOK (double-sided) disk drive or two 400K (single-sided)
drives. Works With the Hierarchical File System, Switcher, and most hard disks. Supports printing on the ImageWriter and the LaserWriter
Reflex is a registered trademark of Borland/ Analytica. Inc. Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders. Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR 0149A
EUREKA: 'HE SBlVE"·
If you're a scientist, engineer, financial analyst, student, teacher, or any
other professional working with equations, Eureka: The Solver can do
your Algebra, Trigonometry and Calculus problems in a snap.
Eureka also handles maximization and minimization problems, plots functions, generates reports,
and saves an incredible amount of time. Even if
you're not a computer specialist, Eureka can help
you solve your real-world mathematical problems
fast, without having to learn numerical approximation
techniques. Eureka is easy to learn and easy to
use-as simple as a hand-held calculator.
x+ exp(X) =
10 solved instantly instead
of eventually!
Imagine you have to solve for X, where X +
exp(X) = 10, and you don't have Eureka: The Solver.
What you do have is a problem, because it's going
to take a lot of time guessing at X. With Eureka,
there's no guessing, no dancing in the darkyou get the right answer, right now. (PS: X =
2.0705799, and Eureka solved that one in less than
5 seconds!)
Some of Eureka's key features
You can key in:
g A formula or formulas
g A series of equations-and solve for
all variables
g Constraints (like X must be < or = 2)
g Functions to plot
g Unit conversions
g Maximization and minimization problems
g Interest Rate/Present Value calculations
g Variables we call "What happens?," like
"What happens if I change this variable to
21 and that variable to 277"
How to use Eureka: The Solver
It's easy.
1. Enter your equation into a problem
text window
2. Select the "Solve" command
3. Look at the answer
4. You're done
You can then tell Eureka to:
• Verify the solutions
• Draw a graph
• Zoom in on interesting areas of the graph
• Generate a report and send the output to
your printer or disk file
• Or all of the above
Eureka: The Solver includes:
@' Calculator+ desk accessory
g Powerful financial functions
g Built-in and user-defined functions
g Reports: generate and save them as
MacWrite'· files-complete with graphs
and lists-or as Text Only files
g Polynomial root finder
g Inequality constraints
g Logging: keep an up-to-the-minute record
of your work
g Macintosh'· text editor
g On-screen Help system
Suggested Retail Price: $195.00 (not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: Macintosh 512K, Macintosh Plus, SE, or " with one aOOK disk drive or two 400K disk drives.
Eureka: The Solver is a trademark of Borland International, Inc. Macintosh is
a trademark of Mcintosh Laboratory, Inc. licensed to Apple Computer. Inc.
Copyright 1987 Borland International
BOR 0415
TURBO PASCAI®
MACINTDSHTM
Borland's Macintosh version of Turbo
Pascal is so incredibly fast that it can
compile 1,420 lines of source code in
the 7.1 seconds it took you to read this!
And reading the rest of this takes about 5 minutes,
which is plenty of time for Turbo Pascal to compile at
least 60,000 more lines of source code!
The 27-second Guide to Turbo Pascal
o
o
o
o
o
1urbo Pascal does both Windows and
Units
The separate compilation of routines offered by
Turbo Pascal creates modules called Units, which can
be linked to any 1lJrbo Pascal program, This modular
pathway gives you pieces that can be integrated into
larger programs. You can use memory more efficiently
and reduce the time it takes to develop large
programs.
Turbo Pascal is so compatible with
MPW that they should be living
together
You can compile and run routines from Macintosh
Programmer's Workshop Pascal and Inside Macintosh
with only the subtlest changes. 1lJrbo Pascal is also
compatible with the Hierarchical File System of the
Macintosh.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Compilation speed of more than 12,000 lines
per minute
Unit structure lets you create programs in
mod ular form
Multiple editing windows-up to 8 at a time
Compilation options include compiling to disk or
memory, or compile and run
No need to switch between programs to compile
or run a program
Streamlined development and debugging
Compatibility with Macintosh Programmer's Workshop Pascal (with minimal changes)
Compatibility with Hierarchical File System of
your Macintosh
Ability to define default volume and folder names
used in compiler directives
Search and change features in the editor speed up
and simplify alteration of routines
Ability to use all available Macintosh memory without limit
Units included to call all the routines provided by
Macintosh Toolbox
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95
(not copy protected)
Minimum system configuration: Macintosh 512K or Macintosh Plus with one disk
drive,
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Borland International, Inc
Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of therr respective
holders Copyright <&1987 Borland International, Inc
BaR 0167B
".,11 PASCAl '1II1IIIl,TM
IIIMERICAl METIIIIS
Turbo Pascal Numerical Methods Toolbox for the Macintosh
implements the latest high-level mathematical methods to salve
cammon scientific and engineering problems. Fast.
So every time you need to calculate an integral, work with Fourier transforms, or incorporate any of
the classical numerical analysis tools into your programs, you don't have to reinvent the wheel, because
the Numerical Methods Toolbox is a complete collection of Turbo Pascal routines and programs that
gives you applied state-of-the-art math tools. It also includes two graphics demo programs that use
least-square and Fast Fourier Transform routines to give you the picture along with the numbers.
The Turbo Pascal Numerical Methods Toolbox is a must if you're involved with any type of scientific or
engineering computing on the Macintosh. Because it comes with complete source code, you have total
control of your application at all times.
What Numerical Methods Toolbox will do lor you:
•
•
•
•
Find solutions to equations
Interpolations
Calculus: numerical derivatives and integrals
Matrix operations: inversions, determinants, and eigenvalues
•
•
•
•
Differential equations
Leastcsquares approximations
Fourier transforms
Graphics
Five free ways to look at Least-Squares Fit!
As well as a free demo of Fast Fourier Transforms, you also get the Least-Squares Fit in
five different forms-which gives you five different methods of fitting curves to a collection
of data pOints. You instantly get the picture! The five different forms are
1. Power
4. 5-term Fourier
2. Exponential
5. 5-term
3. Logarithm
Poynomial
They're all ready to compile and run as is.
Suggested Retail Price: $99.95 (not copy protected)
Minimum system requirements: Macintosh S12K. Macintosh Plus. SE. or II. with one 800K disk drive (or two 400K).
All Borland products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Borland International,
Inc or Borland/Analytica, Inc. Macintosh is a trademark licensed to Apple Computer,
Inc. Copyright 1987 Borland International. A BOlland Turbo Toolbox product
BOR 0419
"BBB PABCAl®
"",
From the folks who created Turbo Pascal. Borland's new
Turbo Pascal Tutor is everything you need to start programming in Turbo Pascal on the MacintoshI'M It takes
you from the bare basics to advanced programming in a
simple, easy-to-understand fashion.
No gimmicks. It's all here.
The manual, the Tutor application, and 30 sample
programs provide a step-by-step tutorial in three
phases: programming in Pascal, programming on
the Macintosh, and programming in Turbo Pascal
on the Macintosh. Here's how the manual is set
up:
Turbo Pascal for the Absolute Novice
delivers the basics-a concise history of Pascal,
key terminology, your first program.
A Programmer's Guide to Turbo Pascal
covers Pascal specifics-program structure,
procedures and functions, arrays, strings, and so
on. We've also included Turbo Typist, a textbook
sample program.
Advanced Programming
takes you a step higher into stacks, queues,
binary trees, linked structures, writing large programs, and more.
Using the Power of the Macintosh
discusses the revolutionary hardware and software features of this machine. It introduces the
600-plus utility routines in the Apple Toolbox.
Programming the Macintosh in Turbo Pascal
shows you how to create true Macintosh programs that use graphics, pull-down menus, dialog boxes, and so on. Finally, MacTypist, a complete stand-alone application featuring animated
graphics, builds on Turbo Typist and demonstrates what you can do with all the knowledge
you've just acquired.
The disk contains the source code for all the
sample programs, including Turbo Typist, MacTypist, and Turbo Tutor. The Tutor's split screen lets
you run a procedure and view its source code
simultaneously. After running it, you can take a
test on the procedure. If you're stuck for an
answer, a Hint option steers you in the right
direction.
Macintosh topics included are
g
g
g
g
g
g
memory management
resources and resource files
QuickDraw
events
windows
controls
g
g
g
g
g
menus
desk accessory support
dialogs
File Manager
debugging
Suggested Retail Price: $69.95
atoBORLAND
5
I N T ERN ,A T ION A L
Minimum system requirements: Any Macintosh with at least 512K of RAM. Requires Turbo Pascal.
Turbo Pascal and Turbo Tutor are registered trademarks of Borland Infernational. Inc. Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Copyright @ 1987 Borland International
BOA 0381
Borland
So are
For the dealer nearest you
or to order by phone
Call (800) 543-7543
INTERNATIONAL
4585 Scotts Valley Drive
Scotts Valley, CA 95066
Index
* key 21
+ key 21
-key 21
.BIN 329
IF switch 336
IG switch 334
IMM switch 329
I Q switch 335
IS switch 334
IT switch 335
IU switch 335
IV switch 336
5 key 21
A
Above Board 331
activating an application 22
activating SideKick Plus 17,46,91
activation keys
changing 323
activation speed 320
address form 158
alarms 207
applications
activating 22
exiting 24
opening multiple 22
Appointment Book See also Time
Planner
alarms 207
Open Phonebook 208
Quick Paste 209
appointments
Common 206
copying 206
deleting 205
entering 202
printing 212
repeating 204
searching 210
transferring 206
CALL prefix 202
changing the window 213
commands 207
function keys 200
menu tree 197
moving in 201
opening 198
RUN prefix 202
search
repeating 211
search clearing 211
symbols 200
Vacant Time slot 211
ASCII Table 293
copying 297
finding a character 75, 293
finding control characters 295
Go to menu 294
menu tree 293
Paste buffer 295
pasting 297
saving the settings 297
using with languages 296
asterisk key 21
attached notes 51, 55
Attributes menu settings 325
B
background
communications See
communications, background
ba tch file processing 334
BIN files 329
BIX.ADR 12
block commands See commands,
block
boolean functions
shortcuts 76
Browse mode 130
BUILD.SKI11
Business Calculator 226
Compound function 230
constant facility 227
Future Value function 231
Payment function 232, 233
percentages 228
Rate function 235
Repeat facility 227
Value function 234
variables 228
C
calculations
mixed base 76
Calculator Programmer
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
And function 260
Calculators
changing the display 236, 255, 264
copying 291
general features 219
pasting 291
Calculators. See also Business
Calculator; Formula Calculator;
Programmer Calculator; Scientific
Calendar window 193, See also Time
Planner
changing the date 195
Daily Agenda 196
function keys 195
menu tree 194
printing 196
CALL prefix 202
changing activation keys 323
changing colors
status line 325
chart
producing a 149
Clipboard 83
Setup menu 86
colors
status line 325
colors (window) 28
command-line switches 331
commands
block
Begin Block 112, 120
Copy Block 120
Delete Block 120
End Block 112, 120
Hide/Display Block 120
Mark Line 120
Mark Single Word 120
Print Block 121
Read Block from Disk 117
Sort Block 121
Transfer Block 120
Write Block to Disk 120
editing
Delete Character 117
Delete Line 117
Delete Previous character 117
Delete Rest of Line 117
Delete Undo Line 117
Index
Delete Word 117
Go to End of Block 114
Go to End of File 114
Go to End of Line 114
Go to End of Window 114
Go to Next Character 113
Go to Next Line 113
Go to Next Screen 113
Go to Next Word 113
Go to Previous Character 113
Go to Previous Line 113
Go to Previous Position 114
Go to Previous Screen 113
Go to Previous Word 113
Go to Scroll Down 113
Go to Scroll Up 113
Go to Start of Block 114
Go to Start of File 114
Go to Start of Line 114
Go to Start of Window 114
Insert Time & Date at End of File
117
Options Insert Mode 123
Reformat Paragraph 122
Set Right Margin 123
file See file commands
COMMS.GLS 12
communications See also Scripts
automating 182
background 320
checklist 174
commands 179
computer 174
data calls 175
dialogue 178
function keys 179
parameters 175, 181
protocol 179
receiving files 180
Scripts
learning 183
sending files 180
window 178
wordwrap and borders 181
COMPANY.ADR 12
compatibility (RAM-resident
programs) 16
control character print settings 325
control codes
printer settings 116
Copy function 83
screen to Clipboard 84
CSERVE.ADR 12
cursor-movement commands See
commands, editing
cursor-movement keys
Summary window 162
customization
INSTALL program 317
into a form 52
entering text 47
example files 12
EXAMPLE.GLS 12
exit key 24
exiting an application 24
expanding outlines 48
extended memory board See EMS
board
extended movement commands See
commands, editing
D
F
data size 321
delete commands See commands,
editing
deleting characters 43, 48
deleting files 101
dialogue See communications,
dialogue
disk
definition of 331
display
snowy 322
switching off 336
distribution disks
files on 11
DOS
BACKUP command 102
COPY command 101
DELETE command 101
flags 103
MKDIR command 102
DOS switches 331
dynamic menus 19
File attributes
changing 102
file commands
All Save 109
File List 112
New File 111
New Notepad 109
Options File Names 108, 110
Print 112
Save File 111
Save Notepad 109
Write to 112
file commands. See also File Manager
File Manager 91
activating 36
attributes 94
changing 77, 102
setting 77
copying files 38, 101, 104
deleting files 101
directory command 37
disk navigation 96
dumping files 77
File View Hexadecimal 77
finding a file 95
formatting a floppy disk 103
full view 93
function keys 94
marking files and directories 77, 99
moving files 101
Options Go to menu 95
pasting files 104
renaming files 101
saving settings 104
searching for files 97
E
edit modes
Insert 123
Overwrite 123
editing commands See commands,
editing
ELSE statement 184
EMS board
definition of 331
EMS boards 319
EMS memory 331
EMSTEST.COM 12
entering data
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
sort order 97
tutorial 33
viewing files 37, 99
wide view 93
window 34
File menu
commands 112
file-name extensions
.ADR 12
.BIN 11
.FRMll
.SWP14
files
distribution disk 11
financial functions. See Business
Calculator
finding a character 294
finding a number 295
finding data 54
floppy disk
formatting 103
form
entering data into 52
Formula Calculator 267
Absolute Value function 270
algebraic priorities 268
And function 270
Antilog function 271
Average function 285
base conversions 269
Change Sign function 278
changing the display 290
Combinations function 271
Compound function 272
Copy function 291
Cosine function 273
Div function 273
Exponential function 274
formulas (storing) 289
Fractional Part function 274
. Future Value function 275
Integer Part function 275
Inverse Cosine function 276
Inverse Sine function 276
Inverse Tangent function 277
Largest Value function 286
Logarithm function 272
Minimum Value function 286
Index
Modulus function 277
Neg function 278
Not function 278
Or function 279
Paste function 291
Payment function 280
Permutations function 280
Population Standard Deviation
function 287
Present Value function 284
Rate function 281
Round Value function 281
Sine function 282
Square function 282
Square Root function 283
Sum of Squares function 288
Tangent function 283
Term function 279
Total function 287
Trigonometric Unit function 284
variables 289
Variance function 289
Xor function 285
frames (window) 24
function keys
defaults 21
G
Glossary See Phonebook, Glossary
H
headlines. See Outlook
Help system 18
HOTELS.ADR 12
I
IF statement 184
Index. See Phonebook
initial screen 15
Insert mode 43, 123
onloff switch 123
inserting
lines 117
INSTALL II, 317
Select menu 321
INSTALL program 317
IMM switch 329
module version numbers 324
transferring your setup 323
installing SideKick Plus 14
K
~key
pressing 267
~key24
lW function key 20
Kernel 329
keys
activation (changing) 323
changing function keys 312
changing shortcuts 311
~ with others 267
(§j24
local vs. global 312
L
library files 329
loading
I G switch 334
IT switch 335
definition of 331
non-resident 334
note files 44
outlines 48
local-area networks 206
LOG file See Phonebook, LOG file
M
markers
for cursor movement 115
mathematical functions. See Business
Calculator
MCI.ADR 12
memory
customizing 320
definition of 331
memory size 320
setting 320
Memory Sizes menu 26
Menu Control menu 29
menu system 19
menus
changing
headers and text 314
(Elgmenus310
creating new levels 315
menu trees 26
moving items 315
saving changes 316
modem driver 320
Module Manager 329
modules
types 329
moving the cursor 42, 47
N
noise
deactivating 335
Notepad
activating 40, 107
entering text 42
file names
identical 109
function keys 111
opening a 107
Selection window 108
Selection window commands 109
Switch command 112
taking messages 67
tutorial 40
window 110
Notepad file commands See file
commands
numbered headlines 151
o
OK flag 184
Outlook
activating 127
Block Write to File 80
Browse mode 130
changing default settings 153
changing footings 147
changing headings 147
contracting outlines 48
converting text into outlines 144
copying 154
create a chart 72
cursor movement 133
deletion commands 138
exporting outlines 145
function keys 131
headline commands 45, 140
Close 128
copying a block 142
deleting a block 143
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
marking a block 141
Open 128
sorting a block 143
transferring a block 142
headline symbols 131
importing text 144
insertion commands 135
loading outlines 132
names
identical 109
numbering 151
global 151
local 152
Options file 128
Options Write 81, 145
pasting 154
printing
footings 147
headings 147
outlines 146
table of contents 148
producing a chart 149
prod ucing numbered headlines
151
programming 78
pseudocode 78
saving outlines 132
searching and replacing 138
Selection window 128
storing the options 154
tutorial 45
window border 130
writing a report 72
Overwrite mode 43, 123
P
parameters
command-line 331
PART2.SKL 12
Paste function 83
from the Clipboard 86
Quick Paste 86
PERSONAL.APP 12
PHONE.FRM 11
Phonebook 78
activating 156
address form 158
copying 169
Index
electronic mail 69
forms
editor commands 160
entering data 159
function keys 158
Glossary 165
Go to commands 162
Index 53, 162
LOG file 189
pasting 169
phoning someone 55
printing 163
Quick-Dial 173
Search command 163
statement definition 184
Summary window 156
cursor-movement keys 162
entry commands 161
tutorial 52
printer control characters 116
Printer Settings menu 325
printer setup strings 326
printing 44,51,55, 100
bold
italic
and underscores 116
Programmer Calculator 75, 257
algebraic priorities 257
base conversions 259
binary options base 76
Change Sign function 260
constant facility 258
decimal options base 76
Div function 261
hexadecimal options base 76
Modulus function 261
Not function 261
options number base 76
Or function 262
repeat facility 258
type programmer 76
variables 264
Xor function 262
programming with SideKick Plus 75
pseudocode 78
Q
Quick Paste 86
Quick-Dial 173
Quiet switch 335
R
RAM disk 319
definition of 332
reactivating an application 25
README file 11
reformatting text 43, 122
removing SideKick Plus 29
REPEAT statement 185
response time 320
round symbol 128
RUN prefix 202
S
saving files 44, 48
Schedule window 214, See also Time
Planner
changing the date 215
changing the view 217
copying 218
Daily Agenda 217
function keys 214
menu tree 194
opening the appointment book 216
pasting 218
printing 217
Scientific Calculator 238
Absolute function 241
algebraic priorities 238
Antilog function 241
Average function 250
constant facility 239
Cosine function 242
discounts/ add-ons 240
Div function 243
Exponential function 243
Fractional Part function 243
Integer Part function 244
Inverse Cosine function 244
Inverse Sine function 245
Inverse Tangent function 245
Largest Value function 250
Log function (base 10) 242
Minimim Value function 251
Modulus function 246
natural logarithm function 246
percentages 240
Population Standard Deviation
function 251
repeat facility 239
Round Value function 246
Sine function 247
Square function 247
Square Root function 248
statistical functions 250
Sum of Squares function 253
Tangent function 248
Total function 252
Trigonometric Unit function 249
variables 240
Variance function 254
screen mode switch 336
Scripts
entering 183
examples 185, 188
executing 183
file transfer 187
Glossary symbols 186
macro substitutions 186
statements
ASSIGNMENT 184
CAPTURE 188
DELAY 187
ELSE 184
END CAPTURE 188
MATCH 187
PROTOCOL 187
RECEIVE 187
REPEAT 185
THEN 184
WAIT 187
time limit 187
selecting an application 22, See also
communications; statements
SENDCONF.BIX 12
SENDCONF.CS 12
SENDMAIL.BIX 12
SENDMAIL.CS 12
services 329
Services menu 25, 28
Setup
changing
date and time format 301
exit conditions 304
line-editor shortcuts 305
SideKick Plus Owner's Handbook
printer settings 302
global defaults 301
saving 306
transferring 306
Setup menu 26
shortcuts
changing 29
definition of 18
SideKick Plus
future versions 324
SKBAT 333, 334
SKBAT.COM 12
SKCONV.COM 12
SKMAIN.BIN 11,329
SKPLUS.EXE 319
SKPLUS.HLP 12
SKPLUS.VER 324
sorting the files 97
sound
deactivating 335
speed
application 321
statements
ASSIGNMENT 184
definition 184
ELSE 184
IF 184
MATCH 184
RECEIVE 184
REPEAT 185, 379
SUSPEND 377
THEN 184
TRANSMIT 184
statistical functions. See Scientific
Calculator
status line colors
changing 325
SuperKey printer settings 116
swapping 332
definition of 332
switches
Index
/F336
/G334
/MM329
/Q335
/S334
/T335
/U335
/V336
T
tasks 329
terms
definition of 331
TESTPAS.OTL 12
Time Planner 68, 193, See also
Appointment Book; Calendar
window; Schedule window
moving between windows 215
Search Vacant Time 68
Transfer menu 323
tree-structured directories 16
Turbo editor 80
U
unloading
/U switch 335
unloading SideKick Plus 26
updating customized versions 324
V
version numbers 324
video adapter 321
W
windows
active 24
colors 28
controlling 28
frames 24
suspended 24
~ wildcard 118
• symbol 109
SIDEKICK®Plus
•
BORLAND
INTERNATIONAL
4585 Scotts Valley Drive, Scotts Valley, California 95066
BDR 0540
ISBN 0-87524-179-4
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2011:02:03 20:08:55-08:00 Modify Date : 2011:02:03 20:45:16-08:00 Metadata Date : 2011:02:03 20:45:16-08:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.4 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:1530cd20-1c06-48e6-b0ad-6e60b1bf66c3 Instance ID : uuid:b106aa4b-0494-4d14-854e-77aee58f709b Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 484EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools